THE AYURVEDIC PHARMACOPOEIA

OF INDIA
 THE AYURVEDIC PHARMACOPOEIA
OF INDIA

PART - II (FORMULATIONS)
VOLUME - III

First Edition

GOVERNMENT OF INDIA
MINISTRY OF HEALTH AND FAMILY WELFARE
DEPARTMENT OF AYURVEDA, YOGA & NATUROPATHY, UNANI, SIDDHA AND
HOMOEOPATHY,
NEW DELHI
2010
 [Link]-II [Link]
5000-2010 (DSK-II)

©2010, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare

Government of India
Department of Ayurveda, Yoga - Naturopathy, Unani, Siddha & Homeopathy (AYUSH)

Effective from 1st January, 2011

Price : Inland Rs. 500/-

Foreign US $ 100/-

ISBN : 978- 81 906489- 3-6

Published by : THE CONTROLLER OF PUBLICATIONS

CIVIL LINES, DELHI - 110054

On Behalf of : GOVERNMENT OF INDIA

DEPARTMENT OF AYURVEDA, YOGA-NATUROPATHY
UNANI, SIDDHA AND HOMOEOPATHY(AYUSH)
INDIAN RED CROSS SOCIETY BUILDING,
SANSAD MARG, NEW DELHI

WEBSITE : [Link]

Printed at : Cirrus Graphics Pvt. Ltd. , New Delhi

 CONTENTS
PAGE
LEGAL NOTICES XIII
GENERAL NOTICES XIV
PREFACE XXV
INTRODUCTION XXVIII
MONOGRAPHS
Arka
General Description 1
1. Br¡hmyarka 2
2. Gul¡b¡rka 4
3. Ja¶¡m¡Æsyarka 6
4. K¡kam¡cyarka 8
5. Mu¸·¢tik¡rka 10
6. N¢lo·upuÀp¡rka 12
7. Parpa¶¡rka 14
8. Pud¢n¡rka 16
9. Punarnav¡rka 18
10. áat¡hv¡rka 20
11. Vany¡jamod¡rka 22
12. Yav¡nyarka 24
Avaleha
General Description 26
13. A¿vagandh¡di Lehya 27
14. Haridr¡ Kha¸·a 29
15. N¡rikela Kha¸·a 32
C£r¸a
General Description 34
16. Citrak¡di C£r¸a 35
Gh¤ta
General Description 38
17. Sukum¡ra Gh¤ta 40
Guggulu
General Description 43
18. Sapt¡´ga Guggulu 44
 19. Var¡di Guggulu 47
20. Vi·a´g¡di Guggulu 50
Taila
General Description 53
21. A¸u Taila 55
22. Ap¡m¡rga KÀ¡ra Taila 58
23. Arimed¡di Taila 60
24. Asanabilv¡di Taila 63
25. Bal¡ Taila 65
26. Bal¡ha¶h¡di Taila 69
27. Bh¤´gar¡ja Taila 71
28. B¤hat saindhav¡dya Taila 73
29. Citrak¡di Taila 76
30. Hi´gv¡di Taila 78
31. JyotiÀmat¢ Taila 80
32. Kanaka Taila 82
33. Mah¡n¡r¡ya¸a Taila 84
34. N¡lp¡mar¡di Taila 88
35. N¢l¢bh¤´g¡di Taila 90
36. Paµcagu¸a Taila 92
37. Prabhaµjana Vimardana Taila 94
38. Pras¡ri¸¢ Taila 97
39. Tuvaraka Taila 100
40. YaÀ¶¢madhuka Taila 102
Va¶¢
General Description 104
41. Arka Va¶¢ 105
42. Citrak¡di Gu¶ik¡ 107
43. El¡di Gu¶ik¡ 110
44. La¿un¡di Va¶¢ 113
45. Lava´g¡di Va¶¢ 116
46. Pl¢h¡ri Va¶ik¡ 118
47. Prabh¡kara Va¶¢ 121
48. RajaÅpravartin¢ Va¶¢ 123
49. Saµj¢van¢ Va¶¢ 126
 50. áa´kha Va¶¢ 129
51. Punarnav¡di Ma¸·£ra 132

Appendix-1 Apparatus for Tests and Assays 137

1.1. Nessler Cylinders 137
1.2. Sieves 137
1.3. Thermometers 138
1.4. Ultraviolet Lamp (For general purposes and for chromatography work) 139
1.5. Volumetric Glassware 139
1.6. Weights and Balances 139
1.7. Muslin Cloth 139

Appendix-2 Tests and Determinations 140

2.1. Microscopic identification 140
2.2. Determination of Quantitative Data 144
2.2.1. Net Content 144
2.2.2. Foreign Matter 144
2.2.3. Determination of Total Ash 144
2.2.4. Determination of Acid-Insoluble Ash 144
2.2.5. Determination of Alcohol Soluble Extractive 144
2.2.6. Determination of Water Soluble Extractive 145
2.2.7. Determination of Ether Soluble Extractive (Fixed Oil Content) 145
2.2.8. Determination of Moisture Content (Loss on Drying) 145
2.2.9. Determination of Volatile Oil in Drugs 145
2.2.10. Thin-Layer Chromatography (TLC) 147
2.2.11. Fatty oil estimation 149
2.3. Limit Tests 149
2.3.1. Limit Test for Arsenic 149
2.3.2. Limit Test for Chlorides 154
2.3.3. Limit Test for Heavy metals 154
2.3.4. Limit Test for Iron 157
2.3.5. Limit Test for Lead 157
2.3.6. Limit Test for Sulphates 159
2.3.7. Heavy Metals by Atomic absorption spectrophotometry 159
2.4. Microbial Limit Tests 165
2.4.1. Total Aerobic Microbial Count 174
2.4.2. Tests for Specified Micro-organisms 176
2.5. Pesticide Residue 180
 2.5.1. Test for Pesticides 184
2.5.2. Quantitative Analysis 185
2.6. Test for Aflatoxins 188
2.7. Gas Chromatography 190

Appendix-3 Physical Tests and Determinations 193

3.1. Refractive Index 193
3.2. Weight per Millilitre and Specific Gravity 193
3.3. Determination of pH Values 194
3.4. Determination of Melting Range and Congealing Range 194
3.4.1. Determination of Melting Range 194
3.4.2. Determination of Congealing Range 197
3.5. Determination of Boiling Range: 198
3.6. Solubility in Water 199
3.7. Detrmination of Saponification Value 200
3.8. Determination of Iodine Value 200
3.9. Determination of Acid Value 201
3.10. Determination of Peroxide Value 202
3.11. Determination of Unsaponifiable Matter 202
3.12. Detection of Mineral Oil (Holde’s Test) 203
3.13. Rancidity Test (Kreis Test) 203
3.14. Disintegration test for tablets 203
3.15. Uniformity of Weight of Single Dose Preparations 205
Appendix-4 Regents and Solutions 206

Appendix-5 Assays and Chemical Tests 235

5.1. Estimation of Sugars 235
5.2. Determination of Aluminum 237
5.3. Determination of Borax 237
5.4. Determination of Calcium 237
5.5. Determination of Copper 238
5.6. Determination of Iron 238
5.7. Determination of Magnesium 239
5.8. Determination of Mercury 240
5.9. Determination of Silica (SiO2) 240
5.10. Estimation of Sodium and Potassium by Flame Photometer 240
5.11. Determination of Sodium Chloride 241
5.12. Determination of Sulphur 241
5.13. Qualitative Reactions 242
 5.13.1 Sodium 242
5.13.2. Potassium 242
5.13.3. Magnesium 242
5.13.4. Carbonates and Bicarbonates 242
5.13.5. Sulphates 243
5.13.6. Chlorides 243
5.13.7. Calcium 243
5.13.8. Sulphides 243
5.13.9. Test for Mercury 243
5.13.10. Test for Boron 244
5.13.11. Test for Sulphur 244
5.13.12. Test for Anthraquinones 244
5.13.13. Test for Hi´gu 244
Appendix-6 Ayurvedic Definitions and Methods 245
6.1. Kalpan¡ Paribh¡À¡ 245
6.1.1. Kalka 245
6.1.2. Kv¡tha / KaÀ¡ya 245
6.1.3. C£r¸a 245
6.1.4. Pu¶ap¡ka Svarasa 245
6.1.5. Svarasa 245
6.1.6. Hima KaÀ¡ya 245
6.1.7. Ph¡¸¶a 246
6.2. S¡m¡nya paribh¡À¡ 246
6.2.1. Kajjal¢ 246
6.2.2. K¡µjika 246
6.2.3. KÀ¡ra Preparation 246
6.2.4. C£r¸odaka 246
6.2.5. Mastu Preparation 246
6.2.6. PrakÀepa 247
6.2.7. Bh¡van¡ 247
6.2.8. áodhana 247
[Link]. Godant¢ áodhana 247
[Link]. Gairika áodhana 247
[Link]. Gandhaka áodhana 248
[Link]. Guggulu áodhana 248
[Link]. Ùa´ka¸a áodhana 248
[Link]. Tuttha áodhana 248
[Link]. Bhall¡taka áodhana 249
[Link]. ManaÅ¿il¡ áodhana 249
[Link]. Vatsan¡bha áodhana 249
[Link]. Karav¢ra áodhana 249
 LEGAL NOTICES
In India there are laws dealing with drugs that are the subject of official monographs. The
monographs should be read subject to the restrictions imposed by these laws wherever they
are applicable.
It is expedient that enquiry be made in each case in order to ensure that the provisions of the
law are being complied with.
In general, the Drugs & Cosmetics Act, 1940 (subsequently amended in 1964 and 1982), the
Dangerous Drugs Act, 1930 and the Poisons Act, 1919 and the rules framed thereunder
should be consulted.
Under the Drugs & Cosmetics Act, the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India (A.P.I.), Part-II,
Vol. III, is the book of standards for Compound Formulations included therein and the
standards prescribed in the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India, Part-II, (Formulations) Vol.
III, would be official. If considered necessary these standards can be amended and the
Chairman of the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee is authorized to issue such
amendments. Whenever such amendments are issued, the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India,
Part-II (Formulations), Vol. III, would be deemed to have been amended accordingly.

XIII
 GENERAL NOTICES
Title : The title of the book is “Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India, Part-II (Formulations)
Volume-III. Wherever the abbreviation “API, Pt.-II, Vol.-III” is used, it stands for the same
and for the Supplements or Amendments thereto.
Name of the Formulation: The name given on top of each monograph is in SaÆsk¤ta as
mentioned in the Ayurvedic Formulary of India (AFI) and will be considered Official. These
names have been arranged in alphabetical order in English under each category of dosage
forms.
Ingredients and Processes: Formulations are prepared from individual ingredients that
comply with the requirements for those individual ingredients for which monographs are
provided in the volumes of API, Part-I (Appendix - 9.3). Where Water is used as an
ingredient it should meet the requirements for Jala (Potable Water) covered by its monograph
in the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India-Part-I, Vol.-VI.
Monograph for each Formulation includes its full composition together with directions for its
preparation. Such composition and directions are intended for preparation of small quantities
for short-term supply and use. When so prepared, no deviation from the stated composition
and directions is permitted. However, if such a preparation is manufactured on a large scale
with the intention of sale or distribution, deviations from the directions given are permitted,
provided that the same ratio is maintained as stated in the monographs, with the ingredients
complying with its compendial requirements, and also ensuring that the final product
complies with all of the requirements stated in the Formulation Composition for the specific
compound formulation,
In the composition of certain Formulations it has been allowed that a specified part of the
plant may be substituted by another part of the same plant. In such cases the manufacturer
should mention on the label the actual part of the plant used in the formulation.
Wherever an ‘Official Substitute’, is provided for in the composition of a Formulation, it
implies a deviation from the original Formulation, using the nomenclature of the ‘Official
Substitute’.
Wherever a Formulation Composition specifies a drug that is officially banned from
commerce, this may be omitted, and the fact mentioned on the label.
If a preparation is intended to be stored over a period of time, deterioration due to microbial
contamination may be inhibited by the addition to the formulation of a permitted preservative.
In such circumstances the label should state the name and the concentration of the
preservative and the appropriate storage conditions.

XIV
The direction ‘freshly prepared’ or ‘fresh’ given in a formulation implies that the
ingredient(s) processed with a juice, decoction, extract etc. should be prepared and added in
the required manner to the formulation within 24 hours after their preparation.
Monograph: Each monograph begins with a Definition in an introductory paragraph
followed by the Formulation Composition giving the scientific names of the drugs used along
with a brief account of the Method of Preparation. For drugs of plant origin, the part used has
also been specified.
The requirements given in the monographs are not framed to provide against all impurities,
contaminants or adulterants; they provide appropriate limits only for possible impurities that
may be permitted to a certain extent. Material found to contain an impurity, contaminant or
adulterant which is not detected by means of the prescribed tests in the Appendix-2 are also to
be considered as impurity, should rational consideration require its absence.
Standards: For statutory purposes, the following shall be considered Official Standards:
Definition, Formulation composition, Identification, Physico-chemical parameters, Assay and
Other requirements. Under Formulation Composition, each ingredient for which a monograph
has been given in the A.P.I., the pharmacopoeial claim is indicated by the letters API; where
the ingredient has currently no monograph or it is under process, the letter API is given within
brackets.
Added Substances: A Formulation contains no added substances/excipients, except when
specifically permitted in the individual monograph. Unless otherwise specified in the
individual monograph, or elsewhere in the General Notices, such added substances/excipients
shall be from the approved list of Drugs and Cosmetics Rules, under Rule 169 to a
formulation to enhance its stability, usefulness, elegance, or to facilitate its preparation. Such
added substances shall comply with the quality indicated for it, shall be harmless in the
amounts used, shall not exceed the minimum quantity required to provide their intended
effect, shall not impair the therapeutic efficacy or the bioavailability and safety of the
preparation and shall not interfere with the tests and assays prescribed for determining
compliance with the official standards. Particular care should be taken to ensure that such
substances are free from harmful organisms. Though the manufacturer of a Formulation is
given the freedom to use an added substance, the manufacturer must guarantee the
innocuousness of the added substance. The manufacturer shall also be responsible to explain
to the appropriate authority, if needed, regarding the purpose of the added substance(s).
Description: Statement given under this title is not to be interpreted in a strict sense although
it may help in the evaluation of an article. However substantial departure from the
requirement will not be acceptable.
Capital Letters in the Text: The names of the Pharmacopoeial substances, preparations and
other materials in the text are printed in capital initial letters, and these infer that materials of
Pharmacopoeial quality have been used.

XV
Italics: Italic types are used for Scientific names of the plant drugs and microorganisms, and
for some sub-headings and certain notations of the chemical names. Italic types have also
been used for words which refer to solvent system in TLC procedure, reagents and
substances, processes covered under Appendices. Chemicals and Reagents and Substances of
Processes in Appendices have also been printed in Italics.
Odour and Taste: Wherever a specific odour has been observed, it has been mentioned as
characteristic for that Formulation, but the description as ‘odourless’ or ‘no odour’ has
generally been avoided in the Description where a substance has no odour. Where an ‘odour’
is said to be present, it is examined by smelling the drug directly after opening the container.
If an odour is discernible, the contents are rapidly transferred to an open vessel and re-
examined after 15 minutes. If odour persists to be discernible, the sample complies with the
description for ‘odour’, as a characteristic for that Formulation.
The taste of a drug is examined by taking a small quantity of drug by the tip of a moist glass
rod and allowing it to remain on the tongue. This does not apply in the case of poisonous
ingredients.
Powders: Many ingredients in the Formulations are subjected to comminuting by hand or
machine during the process of manufacture and mixed together. It is desirable that such
powders maintain certain average particle size for ease of handling and effective processing.
There are also compound formulations where the dosage form itself is a powder and particle
size is a standard for the finished product. It is essential in such cases that both the
distribution and average particle size are monitored to be consistent and measurable during
processing, so that the finished product complies with the specified standard.
To provide for such situations, the fineness of a powder, whether it is used in the processing
or is itself a final product, is given in terms of sieve sizes, using the BIS sieves as standard.
The sieve sizes follow the latest revision of the BIS. For the convenience of users, the
equivalents or nearest equivalent numbers according to the earlier BIS have also been given.
The fineness of powder, where it is itself a dosage form, is expressed in terms of percentage
of fractions passing through specified sieves. For other procedures a mesh size appropriate for
the purpose is suggested.
Weights and Measures: The metric system of weights and measures is employed. Weights
are given in multiples or fractions of a gram (g) or of a milligram (mg). Fluid measures are
given in multiples of fraction of milliliter (ml). The amount stated is approximate but the
quantity actually used must be accurately weighed and must not deviate by more than 10 per
cent from the one stated.
When the term “drop” is used measurement is to be made by means of a tube which delivers
20 drops per gram of distilled water at 150.

XVI
Identity, Purity and Strength: Under the heading “Identification”, tests are provided as an
aid to identification and are described in the respective monographs. Microscopical characters
are prescribed for the identification of individual ingredients where these do not exceed ten in
number and are added ‘in situ’ to the formulation. Appendix 2.1 gives detailed procedure.
Vegetable drugs used in Formulations, should be duly identified and authenticated and be free
from insects, pests, fungi, micro organisms, pesticides, and other animal matter including
animal excreta, be within the permitted and specified limits for lead, arsenic and heavy
metals, and show no abnormal odour, colour, sliminess, mould or any sign of deterioration.
Where any ingredient is to be subjected to a áodhana, this shall be carried out as specified in
the monograph or in the text referred to therein.
Quantitative tests like total ash, acid-insoluble ash, water-soluble ash, alcohol-soluble
extractive, water-soluble extractive, moisture content, volatile oil content and assays are the
parameters upon which the standards of Pharmacopoeia depend. Except for Assays, which are
covered under each monograph, the methods of determination for the others are given in
Appendices, with a suitable reference in the monograph to the specific Appendix.
An analyst is not precluded from employing an alternate method in any instance if one is
satisfied that the method, which one uses, will give the same result as the Pharmacopoeial
method described under assay. However, in the event of doubt or dispute the methods of
analysis of the Pharmacopoeia are alone authoritative. Unless otherwise prescribed, the assays
and tests are carried out at a temperature between 200 and 300.
In the performance of an assay or any test procedure, not less than the specified number of
dosage units or quantities should be taken for analysis. Proportionately larger or smaller
quantities than the specified weights and volumes may be taken for substances under assay or
test substances, Reference Standards or Standard Preparations, provided the measurement is
made with at least equivalent accuracy and provided that any subsequent steps, such as
dilutions, are adjusted accordingly to yield concentrations equivalent to those specified and
are made in such a manner as to provide at least equivalent accuracy.
One of the solid dosage forms in which Ayurvedic drugs are traditionally presented is the
Va¶¢ or Gu¶ik¡. Monographs for Va¶¢/Gu¶ik¡ are included, along with their method of
preparation using a hand operated machine. Standards appearing in these monographs also
relate to this dosage form.
However, manufactures are not precluded from using the same Formulation Composition
given in the monograph to produce tablets in place of Va¶¢s employing suitable machinery. In
case a manufacturer prefers to manufacture compressed tablets instead of Va¶¢/Gu¶ik¡, the
necessary alterations in term of adjuvants, size, weight etc., shall be made by him/her, and
records for the same maintained for mandatory use. The labeling of such products shall also
indicate the excipients/adjuvants used.

XVII
The onus is also on the manufactures in such cases to provide dosage form tests like average
weight, uniformity of weight, disintegration time etc.
Limits for Heavy metals, Microbial load, Pesticide residues and Aflatoxins :
Formulations included in this volume are required to comply with the limits for heavy metals,
microbial load, pesticide residues and aflatoxins prescribed in the individual monographs and
wherever limit is not given in the monograph, they must comply with the limits given in the
respective Appendices. The methods for determination of these parameters are given in the
Appendices.
Thin Layer Chromatography (TLC): Under this title, wherever given, the Rf values given
in the monographs are not absolute but only indicative. The analyst may use any other solvent
system and detecting reagent to establish the identity of any particular chemical constituent
reported to be present in the formulation. However in case of dispute the pharmacopoeial
method would prevail. Unless specified in the individual monograph all TLC have been
carried out on pre-coated Silica gel G F254 aluminium plates.
Reference Standards: Reference substance and standard preparation are authentic
substances that have been verified for there suitability for use as standards for comparison in
some assays, tests and TLC of the API.
Constant Weight: The term “constant weight” when it refers to drying or ignition means
that two consecutive weighing do not differ by more than 1.0 mg per gram of the substance
taken for the determination, the second weighing following an additional hour of drying or
further ignition.
Percentage of Solutions – In defining standards, the expression per cent (%), is used,
according to circumstances, with one of the four meanings given below.
Per cent w/w (percentage weight in weight) expresses the number of grams of active
substance in 100 grams of product.
Per cent w/v (percentage weight in volume) expresses the number of grams of active
substance in 100 milliliters of product.
Per cent v/v (percentage volume in volume) expresses the number of milliliters of active
substance in 100 milliliters of product.
Per cent v/w (percentage volume in weight) expresses the number of milliliters of active
substance in 100 grams of product.
Percentage of Alcohol: All statements of percentage of alcohol (C2H5OH) refer to
percentage by volumes at 15.560C.
Temperature: Unless otherwise specified all temperatures refer to centigrade (Celsius),
thermometric scale and all measurements are made at 250.

XVIII
Solutions: Unless otherwise specified in the individual monograph, all solutions are prepared
with Purified Water.
Reagents and Solutions: Reagents required for the assay and tests of the Pharmacopoeia are
defined in the Appendix showing the nature, degree of the purity and strength of solutions to
be made from them.
Filtration: Where it is directed to filter, without further qualification, it is intended that the
liquid be filtered through suitable filter paper or equivalent device until the filtrate is clear.
Therapeutic uses: Therapeutic uses of the Formulations mentioned in this Pharmacopoeia
are as given in the Ayurvedic Formulary of India.
Doses: The doses mentioned in each monograph are in the metric system, which are
approximate conversions from classical weights mentioned in Ayurvedic texts. A conversion
table is appended giving classical weights with their metric equivalents (Appendix 7). Doses
mentioned in the A.P.I. are intended merely for general guidance and represent, unless
otherwise stated, the average range of quantities per dose which is generally regarded suitable
by clinicians for adults only when administered orally. They are not to be regarded as binding
upon the prescribers.
The medical practitioner will exercise his own judgment and act on his own responsibility in
respect of the amount of the formulation he may prescribe or administer or on the frequency
of its administration. If it is usual to administer a medicine by a method other than by mouth,
the single dose suitable for that method of administration is mentioned.
Storage: Statement under the heading ‘Storage’ constitutes non-mandatory advice. The
substances and preparations of the Pharmacopoeia are to be stored under conditions that
prevent contamination and, as far as possible, deterioration. Precautions that should be taken
in relation to the effects of the atmosphere, moisture, heat and light are indicated, where
appropriate, in the individual monographs.
Specific directions are given in some monographs with respect to the temperatures at which
Pharmacopoeial articles should be stored, where it is considered that storage at a lower or
higher temperature may produce undesirable results. The conditions are defined by the
following terms.
Cold- Any temperature not exceeding 80 and usually between 20 and 80. A refrigerator
provides a cold place in which the temperature is maintained thermostatically between 20 and
80 .
Cool- Any temperature between 80 and 250. An article for which storage in a cool place is
directed may, alternately, be stored in a refrigerator, unless otherwise specified in the
individual monograph.
Room temperature - The temperature prevailing in a working area
Warm - Any temperature between 300 and 400
XIX
Excessive heat- Any temperature above 400
Protection from freezing- Where, in addition to the risk of breaking of the container, freezing
results in loss of strength or potency or in destructive alteration of the characteristics of an
article, the label on the container bears an appropriate instruction to protect from freezing.
Storage under non-specific conditions- Where no specific storage directions or limitations are
given in the individual monograph, it is to be understood that the storage conditions include
protection from moisture, freezing and excessive heat.
Containers: The container is the device that holds the article. The immediate container is that
which is in direct contact with the article at all times. The closure is a part of the container.
The container is designed so that the contents may be taken out for the intended purpose in a
convenient manner.
It provides the required degree of protection to the contents from environmental hazards.
The container should not interact physically or chemically with the article placed in it so as to
alter the strength, quality or purity of the article beyond the official requirements.
Prior to its being filled, the container should be clean. Special precautions and cleaning
procedures may be necessary to ensure that each container is clean and that extraneous matter
is not introduced into or onto the container.
Light-resistant Container- A light resistant container protects the contents from the effects of
actinic light by virtue of the specific properties of the material of which it is made.
Alternatively, a clear and colourless or a translucent container may be made light-resistant by
means of an opaque (light-resistant) covering and/or stored in a dark place: in such cases, the
label on the container should bear a statement that an opaque covering or storage in dark
place is needed until the contents have been used up.
Well-closed Container- A well-closed container protects the contents from extraneous
contamination and from loss of contents under normal conditions of handling, shipment,
storage and distribution.
Tightly-closed Container- A tightly-closed container protects the contents form contamination
by extraneous liquids solids or vapours, and from loss or deterioration of contents from
effervescence, deliquescence or evaporation under normal conditions of handling, shipment,
storage and distribution.
Single Unit Container- A single unit container is one that is designed to hold a quantity of the
drug product intended for administration as a single finished device intended for use promptly
after the container is opened. The immediate container and/or outer container or protective
packaging is so designed as to reveal evidence of tampering, if any.

XX
Multiple Unit Container- A multiple unit container is a container that permits withdrawals of
successive portions of the contents without changing the strength, quality or purity of the
remaining portion.
Tamper-evident Container- A tamper-evident container is fitted with a device or mechanism
that reveals irreversibly whether the container has been opened.
Labeling: In general, the labeling of drugs and pharmaceuticals is governed by the Drugs and
Cosmetics Act, 1940 and Rules there under.
ABBREVIATIONS FOR TECHNICAL TERMS
gram(s) – – g
milligram(s) – – mg
kilogram(s) – – kg
milliliter(s) – – ml
litre(s) – – l
hour(s) – – h
Minute(s) – – min
Second(s) – – sec
0 0
C – –
Micron – – µ
Ortho – – o
Meta – – m
Para – – p
parts per million – – ppm
parts per billion – – ppb
Refractive index – – R.I or η
volume – – vol
weight – – wt
weight in weight – – w/w
weight in volume – – w/v
volume in volume – – v/v
quantity sufficient – – QS
Diameter – – dia.
Dilute – – dil.

XXI
 Concentrated – – con.
Dry – – Dr.
Specific Gravity – – Sp. gr.
ABBREVIATIONS FOR PARTS OF PLANTS

Aerial part(s) – – A. Pt.

Aerial root(s) – – A. Rt.
Androecium – – Adr.
Aril – – Ar.
Bud – – Bd.
Bulb – – Bl.
Endosperm (B¢ja majj¡) – – Enm.
Extract – – Ext.
Exudate – – Exd.
Flower – – Fl.
Fruit – – Fr.
Fruit rind – – Fr. R.
Heart wood – – Ht. Wd.
Inflorescence – – Ifl.
Kernel – – Kr.
Latex – – Lt.
Leaf – – Lf.
Leaf rachis – – Lf. R.
Oleo-resin – – O.R.
Pericarp – – P.
Plant (whole) – – Pl.
Resinous encrustation – – Res. Enc.
Rhizome(s) – – Rz.
Ripe fruit Pulp – – Rp. Fr. Pp.
Root bark – – Rt. Bk.
Root stock – – Rt. Stck.
Root tuber – – Rt. Tr.
Root(s) – – Rt.
Seed(s) – – Sd.
Siliceous Concretion – – S.C.
Stamen(s) – – Stmn.
XXII
Stem – – St.
Stem bark – – St. Bk.
Stem tuber – – St. Tr.
Style – – Stl.
Stigma – – Stg.
Sublimed Extract – – Subl. Ext.
Subterranean root – – Sub. Rt.
Wood Extract – – Wd. Ext.

XXIII
INDO-ROMANIC EQUIVALENTS FOR DEVANËGARÌ ALPHABETS

+ A a b÷ ÚA ·a
+É Ë ¡ fø ÚHA ·ha
< I i hÉ ÛA ¸a
<Ç Ì ¢ iÉ TA ta
= U u lÉ THA tha
>ð Í £ nù DA da
@ñ Î ¤ vÉ DHA dha
B E e xÉ NA na
Bä AI ai {É PA pa
+Éä O o ¡ò PHA pha
+Éè AU au ¤É BA ba
Æ ê Æ ¦É BHA bha
: é Å ¨É MA ma
Eò KA ka ªÉ YA ya
JÉ KHA kha ®ú RA ra
MÉ GA ga ±É LA la
PÉ GHA gha ´É VA va
Ró ×A ´a ¶É áA ¿a
SÉ CA ca ¹É âA Àa
Uô CHA cha ºÉ SA sa
VÉ JA ja ½þ HA ha
ZÉ JHA jha ³ý ßA ½a
\É ØA µa IÉ KâA kÀa
]õ ÙA ¶a jÉ TRA tra
`ö ÙHA ¶ha YÉ JØA jµa

XXIV
 PREFACE
In the Ayurvedic Formulary of India Part I and Part II there are 636 Formulations. Out of
these nearly 65 per cent are solid dosage forms (C£r¸a, Va¶¢, Gu¶ik¡ etc.), about 20 per cent
are liquid preparations (Ësava, AriÀ¶a, Taila etc.) and about 15 per cent are semisolids
(Avaleha, Gh¤ta, Lepa etc.). Each of the Formulations contains a number of ingredients, a few
even going upto 75. It is observed that nearly 70 per cent each of the liquid and semisolid
preparations contain over ten ingredients. Since the spectrum of tests which can be applied to
liquids and semisolids for pharmacopoeial monographs are more limited than that available
for solids, these preparations are particularly difficult to deal with. Considering the total of
636 Formulations about 50 per cent contain over 10 ingredients. This means that in 318
monographs of solids, semisolids and liquids, standards and tests would involve an average of
25 ingredients in each. This is really a complex and formidable task to achieve. In addition to
sheer volume, the unique processing methods used for manufacture, turn a simple mixture of
single drugs into a very complex material from which separation and identification, let alone
estimation, of components is no longer an easy and routine affair. It calls for complete
knowledge of manufacturing complexities for a pharmaceutical/analytical chemist, for proper
appreciation and interpretation of test results. At present, only a few generalized quality
parameters are adopted. Not all Ayurvedic drug manufacturers may be having in-house
standard methods of preparation (SOPs) and their own quality parameters for finished
Compound Formulations. Therefore there is no consistency in the SOPs and quality
parameters among them. This results in a lot of variability in the quality of the same classical
Ayurvedic formulation produced by the same recommended classical procedures, but by
different manufacturers even among their different batches. An effort has been made now to
optimize and develop uniform SOPs in order to ensure that such differences in quality of the
same product produced by different manufacturers are not beyond permissible limits.
Under Part I of Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India (on single drugs) so far six volumes have
been published viz. Vol I (80 monographs), Vol II (78 monographs), Vol III (100
Monographs), Vol IV (68 monographs), Vol V (92 monographs) and Vol VI (101
monographs) for single drugs of plant origin, and Vol VII (21 monographs) for Minerals and
Metals, which go into one or more compound formulations included in the Ayurvedic
Formulary of India, Part-I and Part-II. The two volumes of the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of
India, Part-II published in 2007 and 2008 respectively contain official standards for 101
compound formulations, selected from Ayurvedic Formulary of India, Part-I and Part-II.
In continuation of the work on the quality standards of classical Ayurvedic compound
formulations, the present Vol-III of the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India, Part-II contains
official standards for compound formulations included in the Ayurvedic Formulary of India,
Part-I, Part-II and Part-III (under preparation).

XXV
The title of the monograph for each Compound Formulation is given in SaÆsk¤ta as
mentioned in the Ayurvedic Formulary of India. This is followed by the Definition,
Formulation Composition, Method of Preparation, a brief Description of the Formulation,
Standards for Identity and Purity in so far as these are reflected by microscopy,
chromatography (thin layer chromatography or gas liquid chromatography) and physico-
chemical parameters. Other requirements include limits for heavy metals and microbial load.
Information on therapeutic uses, dose, mode of administration and storage is included. Each
ingredient of the Compound Formulations complies with the standards prescribed for it in the
Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India. In a few cases, where pharmacopoeial standards for
individual ingredient were not available, collaborating institutes developed standards for such
an ingredient before using it in the Formulation. Monographs of the Compound Formulations
provide Assay methods for and range of limits of, any one chemical constituent or group of
chemical constituents, wherever possible.
The General Notices provide guidance for the Ayurvedic drug manufacturers and analysts.
Appendices given in the Pharmacopoeia include details of the apparatus/equipment, reagents,
solutions used methods of tests employed and preparations of sample for microscopic
examination.
The Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee hopes that the publication of Ayurvedic
Pharmacopoeia of India, Part-II (Formulations) Vol-III, containing quality standards and
method of preparation of the Compound Formulations would serve to assist in the
implementation of the Drugs and Cosmetic Act and Rules thereunder. It is also expected that
such implementation would generate a feedback, which is necessary for updating the
prescribed standards.
The Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee urges the Government of India to recommend the
adoption of these monographs published in the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India, Part-II
(formulations) – Vol III for the purpose of methods of preparations and quality standards of
Ayurvedic compound formulation for use in their Government, Semi government,
Government aided institutions and Voluntary public organizations. Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia
of India, Part-II (Formulations) Vol-III may also be notified by the Government of India as a
book of standards for implementation of Drugs and Cosmetic Act 1940 and Rules there under
(as amended from time to time) all over India, just as the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India
Part-I Vol-I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII and the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India, Part-II
(formulations), Vol-I, II have been included in the First Schedule of the Drugs and Cosmetic
Act 1940.
Prof. S. S. Handa Dr. S. K. Sharma Dr. G. S. Lavekar
Chairman Vice-Chairman Member Secretary
(APC) (APC) (APC)

XXVI
 ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee duly acknowledges the contributions made by the
staff of the participating institutions associated with the APC project work for developing
quality standards of Ayurvedic Compound Formulations.
The Committee expresses gratitude to the Secretary, Department of AYUSH. Ms. S. Jalaja
and Joint Secretary Shri B. Anand for providing financial and administrative support. The
Committee also sincerely thank Dr. MM Padhi, Deputy Director [Tech.]; Dr. Pramila Pant,
Assistant Director [Chem.]; Dr. Bishnupriya Dhar, Assistant Director [P’cognosy]; Dr. B.S.
Sharma, Research Officer [Ay.]; Dr. Chhote Lal, Dr. AKS Bhadoria and Dr. MN Rangne; Dr.
K. Sandhya Rani, S.R.F. [Ayu.]; Dr. Nikhil Jirankalgikar S.R.F. [Ayu.]; Mr. Chinmay Rath
S.R.F. [Bot.]; Ms. Kuljeet Kaur S.R.F. [Pharmacy] Ms. Talat Anjum Research Officer [Bot.]
and other associated officers, for their constant efforts in bringing out this volume. Thanks are
also due to Dr. Rajeev Kumar Sharma, Senior Scientific Officer, Dr. Jayaprkash, Research
Officer, Sh. Ravindra Singh, Assistant Director [Chem.]; Sh. N.S. Mehra, Research Officer,
C. Arunachalam, Research Assistant; PLIM, Ghaziabad. The Committee also acknowledges
Mr. Ashish, Ms. Deepti and Ms. Meenakshi, D.E.O., for typing and arranging the technical
data as required.

XXVII
 INTRODUCTION
The Ayurvedic system of medicine has been prevalent in India since the Vedic period, and
still remains the mainstay of medical relief to over 60 per cent of the population of the nation.
In earlier times the practitioners of Ayurveda (Vaidya) were themselves collecting herbs and
other ingredients and preparing medicines. For the purpose of acquiring raw materials
Vaidyas now depend on commercial organizations trading in crude herbal drugs. Likewise,
with passage of time a number of Ayurvedic Pharmaceutical units have come up for the
manufacture of Ayurvedic drugs and formulations on commercial scale.
Under the circumstances and responding to opinions of the scientific community after
independence, the Govt. of India began a series of measures to introduce a quality control
system, from 1964 onwards similar to that existing already under the Drugs and Cosmetics
Act, 1940, for western medicine. The Government of India introduced an amendment in 1964
to the Drug and Cosmetics Act 1940, to control to a limited measure the Ayurvedic, Siddha
and Unani drugs.
The Act was accordingly amended in 1964, to ensure only a limited control over the
production and sale of Ayurvedic medicines namely:-
i. The manufacture should be carried out under prescribed hygienic conditions,
under the supervision of a person having prescribed qualifications;
ii. The raw materials used in the preparation of drugs should be genuine and
properly identified; and
iii. The formula or the true list of all the ingredients contained in the drugs should be
displayed on the label of every container.
To start with, development of standards for the identity, purity and strength of single drugs
and those of formulations at a later stage, assumed importance for the effective enforcement
of the provision of the Act. If the raw materials to be used in a medicine and stage-by-stage
processes of manufacturers are standardised, the final product namely, the compound
formulation could be expected to conform to uniform standards. The requirement that the list
of ingredients be displayed on the label will enable analysts to verify label claims. It will also
ensure that the manufacturers do not make false claim. Arrangements to evolve and lay down
physical, chemical and biological standards, wherever even necessary, to identify the drugs
and ascertain their quality and to detect adulterations are an urgent necessity of the profession.
Setting up of Drug Standardisation Units, Research Centres, Drug Testing Institutes and
Central Drug Laboratories for Ayurvedic Medicines both at national and regional level for
this purpose are therefore, essential. The several Committees appointed by the Government of
India to assess and evaluate the status and practice of Ayurvedic Medicine have stressed the
importance of preparing an Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia, which is precisely a book of
standards.

XXVIII
Having regard to all these considerations, the Central Council of Ayurvedic Research
recommended the constitution of Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee consisting of experts
on Ayurveda and other sciences. The Government of India accepted the recommendations of
the Central Council of Ayurvedic Research and constituted the First Ayurvedic
Pharmacopoeia Committee, vide their letter No. 14-8/62-ISM, dated the 20th September, 1962
for a period of three years with effect from the date of its first meeting under the
Chairmanship of Col. Sir R. N. Chopra with the following member :-
1. Col. Sir Ram Nath Chopra, Drugs Research Laboratory, Chairman
Srinagar
2. Vaidya B.V. Gokhale, 29/14-15, Erandavane, Deccan Member
Gymkhana, Poona-4
3. Vaidya D.A. Kulkarni, Principal, Post Graduate, Training Member
Centre in Ayurveda, Jamnagar
4. Kaviraj B.N. Sircar, 779-780, Nicholson Road, Kashmere Gate, Member
Delhi-6
5. Shri A.N. Namjoshi, Navyug Mansion, 19-A, Sleater Road, Member
Bombay-7
6. [Link], Profossor of Pharmacology, Grant Medical Member
College, Bombay
7. Dr. C.G. Pandit, Director, Indian Council of Medical Research, Member
New Delhi
8. Dr. G.K. Karandikar, Dean, Medical College, Aurangabad Member

9. Dr. G.S. Pendse, Honorary Director, Indian Drug Research Member

Association, 955-Sadashiv Peth, Lakshmi Road, Poona-2
10. Dr. M.V. Venkataraghavan, Chellakoti, Nungabakkum, Member
Madras-34
11. Ayurvedacharya Kaladi K. Parameswaran Pillai, Laksmivilasam Member
Vaidyasala, Vanchiyur, Trivandrum
12. Dr. V. Narayanaswamy, 70, Tana Street, Vepeiy, Madras-7 Member
13. Vaidya [Link] Shastri, Pardeshi Lane, Panvel, District Member
Kolaba, Bombay
14. S.K. Borkar, Drug Controller (India), Directorate General of Member
Health Services, Government of India, New Delhi
15. Shri Bapalal [Link], Principal, O.H. Nazar Ayurveda Member
Mahavidyalaya, Surat

XXIX
16. Kumari Savita Satakopan, Drugs Control Laboratory, Near Member
Polytechnic, National Highway 8, Baroda
17. Vaidya Vasudev M. Dwivedi, Director of Ayurveda, Government Member
of Gujrat, Ahmedabad
18. Shri P.V. Bhatt, [Link]., Chemist, The Ayurvedic Rasashala, Member
Deccan Gymkhana, Poona
19. Vaidya Ram Sushil Singh, Assistant Director of Ayurveda, Member
Director of Medical Services (Ayurveda), Govt. of U.P.
20. Dr.Y. Kondal Rao, Secretary, Indian Medical Practitioner’s Member
Cooperative Pharmacy & Stores Limited, Adyar, Madras-20
21. Dr. V. Srinivasan, [Link]., M.B.B.S., Ph.D., Director, Sarabhai Member
Chemicals Research Institute, Shahibag, Ahmedabad-4
22. Dr. C. Dwarakanath, Adviser in Indian System of Medicine, Member Secretary
Ministry of Health, New Delhi

The Committee was assigned the following functions :-

1. To prepare an official Formulary in two parts :-
(a) Single drugs, of whose identity and therapeutic value there is no doubt; and
(b) Compound preparations, which are frequently used in Ayurvedic practice
throughout the country.
2. To provide standards for drug and medicines of therapeutic usefulness or
pharmaceutical necessity commonly used in Ayurvedic practice.
3. To lay down tests for identity, quality and purity.
4. To ensure as far as possible uniformity, physical properties and active constituents;
and
5. To provide all other information regarding the distinguishing characteristics,
methods of preparation, dosage, method of administration with various anupanas
or vehicles and their toxicity.
As a first step in this direction the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee started preparing the
official Formulary of Ayurveda in two parts as mentioned under the assigned functions of the
Committee. Since the work of preparation of Ayurvedic Formulary could not be completed
after the expiry of first three years, the Government of India extended the term of the
Committee by another three years vide their notification No. F. 20-1/66-RISM, dated 14th
January, 1966 and a gain for a further period of three years vide their notification No. F. 1-
1/69-APC, dated 9th January, 1969.

XXX
During the years that followed, Ayurvedic Formulary, Part I and II and Ayurvedic
Pharmacopoeia of India, Part – I, Volume I - V were published, the former containing the
compound formulations from classical Ayurvedic texts prescribed in Schedule - I to the Drug
and Cosmetics Act, and the later, laying down standards for single drugs of plant origin.
Amendment to the provisions introduced in 1982 further strengthen the ASU system by
defining misbranded, adulterated and spurious drugs in the ASU system.
Subsequently under the 10th Five Year Plan a project was initiated by the Department to
develop Method of Preparation, Standard Operative Procedures, Pharmacopoeial Standards
and Shelf Life of Compound formulations of Ayurveda appearing in Ayurvedic Formulary of
India, Parts I & II.
The work of the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee was transferred along with some
technical staff to Central Council for Research in Ayurveda and Siddha, New Delhi as a
secretariat for APC vide letter no. X-19011/6/94-APC (AYUSH), dated 29th March, 2006.
Prof. A. N. Namjoshi (1972, 1981, 1988 and 1994) and Vaidya I. Sanjeeva Rao (1998), Dr.
P.D. Sethi (2001), Ms. Savita Satakopan (2005-06) and Prof. S.S. Handa (2006-09) were
Chairmen of reconstituted Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee during the specified periods.
The present Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee (APC) was reconstituted under the Deptt.
of AYUSH vide letter No.5-5/CCRAS-2006/TECH./APC/HQRS dated 19th March, 2009
consisting of following members.

Prof. S.S. Handa, M. Pharma, Ph.D., Chairman

(Former Director, RRL, Jammu), 522-A, Block ‘C’,
Sushant Lok, Phase-I,
Gurgaon, Haryana – 122 001.
Dr. S.K. Sharma, M.D. (Ayu.), Ph.D. Vice-Chairman
Advisor (Ayurveda),
Department of AYUSH,
Red Cross Society Building,
New Delhi – 110 001.
OFFICIAL MEMBERS
1. Dr. G.S. Lavekar, AVP; Ph.D. Member-Secretary
Director General, (Ex-officio)
Central Council for Research in Ayurveda & Siddha,
61-65, Institutional Area,
D-Block, Janakpuri,
New Delhi – 110 058.

XXXI
2. Dr. D.R. Lohar, [Link].; Ph.D. Member (Ex-officio)
Director,
Pharmacopoeial Laboratory for Indian Medicine,
Central Govt. Offices Complex, Kamla Nehru Nagar,
Ghaziabad – 201 002.
3. Managing Director, Member (Ex-officio)
Indian Medicines Pharmaceutical Corporation Ltd.,
Mohan, Via – Ram Nagar,
Distt.- Almora, Uttranchal.
4. Drugs Controller General (India), Member (Ex-officio)
Ministry of Health & Family Welfare,
Nirman Bhawan, New Delhi – 110 011.
NON-OFFICIAL MEMBERS
Phytochemistry & Chemistry Sub-Committee
1. Dr. P.D. Sethi, M. Pharm., Ph.D., Chairman
(Former Director,
Central Indian Pharmacopoeial Laboratory)
B-140, Shivalik Enclave,
New Delhi – 110 017.
2. Prof. V.K. Kapoor, M. Pharm., Ph.D. Member
(Former Dean and Chairman,
University Institute of Pharmaceutical Sciences,
Panjab University, Chandigarh)
1473, Pushpac Complex, 49B,
Chandigarh - 160 047.
3. Dr. Jayaraman Arunachalam, Member
Head, national Centre for Compositional Characterization
of Materials-Bhaba Atomic Research Centre (BARC),
DAE/Govt. of India, ECIL, Hyderabad – 500 062
4. Dr. (Miss.) A. Saraswati, Member
Director (Institute), CSMDRIA&S,
Arinagar Anna Govt. Hospital Campus
Arumbakkam, Chennai – 600 062
5. Dr. D. Vijaya Kumar, Member
Scientist E-I, Reaction Engineering Laboratory,
Indian Institute of Chemical Technology (CSIR),
Hyderabad – 500 007
XXXII
Pharmacognosy Sub-Committee
1. Ms. S. Satakopan, [Link]. Chairman
(Senior Scientific Officer (Retd.), Government of
Gujarat, Gujarat State Food and Drug Control
Administration, Vadodara)
7/4, Padmam Flats, Seventh Street,
Nanganallur, Chennai – 600 061.
2. Dr. (Mrs.) Shanta Mehrotra, Ph.D., Member
Emeritus Scientist,
National Botanical Research Institute,
Rana Pratap Marg, P.B. No.-436,
Lucknow – 226 001 (U.P.).
3. Dr. M.A. Iyengar, Ph.D, Member
Former Prof. & Head of Pharmacognosy ,
Manipal College of Pharmaceutical Sciences
Res-14, HIG, HUDCO, Manipal – 576 104.
4. Dr. Indira Balachandran, Member
Centre for Medicinal Plants Research,
Aryavaidyasala, Kottakal,
Malappuram, Kerala -6776 503
Formulary Sub-Committee
(Rasa Shastra / Bhaishajya Kalpana – Ayurvedic Pharmacy)
1. Prof. S.K. Dixit, A.B.M.S.; [Link].M; Ph.D. Chairman
(Former Head, Deptt. of Rasa Shastra, BHU),
B-3/402, Shivala, Varanasi 221 005 (UP.).
2. Dr. B.L. Gaur, Ph.D.; Member
Vice-Chancellor,
Jodhpur Ayurvedic University,
Jodhpur, Rajasthan
3. Dr. S. S. Savrikar, M.D. Ph.D. (Ay.) Member
(Former Vice-chancellor, GAU Jamnagar)
Head, Dept. of Rasashastra, RA Podar Ayurved
Medical College, Worli, Mumbai
4. Dr. P. Madhavankutty Varrier, Member
Aryavaidyasala, Kottakal,
Malappuram, Kerala -6776 503

XXXIII
 Ayurveda Sub-Committee
(Single Drugs of Plants, Minerals, Metals, Animal origin)
1. Prof. V.K. Joshi, M.D. (Ay.), Ph.D. Chairman
Deptt. of Dravyaguna,
Institute of Medical Sciences,
Banaras Hindu University (BHU),
Varanasi – 221 005 (U.P.).
2. Dr. K. Raghunathan, Member
Former Deputy Director, CCRAS
H. No. 664, Sector-28, Faridabad - 121 008
3. Dr. M.R. Uniyal, Member
(Former Director, CRIA, CCRAS),
Advisor, Medicinal Plants, Govt. of Uttarakhand,
E 141, Nehru Colony, Dharampur, Dehradun
4. Dr. M. C. Sharma, Member
Director, NIA Jaipur
1. The term of the Committee shall be for a period of three years from the date of its first
meeting and the members shall hold office for that period.
2. The Chairman of the APC shall have the powers to form sub-committees whenever
required and to co-opt experts from outside for such sub-committees.
3. The Committee shall have the power to frame procedures for functioning.
4. The functions of the Committee shall be as follows:
(i) To prepare Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India of single drugs and compound
formulations.
(ii) To prescribe working standards for compound Ayurvedic formulations including tests
for identity, purity, strength and quality so as to ensure uniformity of the finished
formulations.
(iii) Keeping in view the time constraint, to identify such methods, procedures and plan of
work as would enable to publish the formulary and standards of all commonly used
drugs to be brought out in a phased manner.
(iv) To prepare remaining parts of the official formulary of compound preparations from
the classical texts including standardized composition of reputed institution.
(v) To develop and standardize methods of preparations, dosage form, toxicity profile etc.

XXXIV
(vi) To develop quality standards, safety, efficacy profile of intermediates likes extracts of
Ayurvedic raw drugs.
(vii) To develop the quality standards, safety, efficacy profile of different parts of the
plants; as well as to include new plants as Ayurvedic drugs.
(viii) Any other matter relating to the quality standards, shelf life, identification, new
formulations etc.
5. The following are the targets focus of the Committee:
(i) To evolve standards of single drugs mentioned in the Ayurvedic Formularies of India.
(ii) To evolve standards for compound formulations mentioned in the Ayurvedic
Formularies of India & other Ayurvedic formulations of National Priority.
(iii) To prepare draft SOPs of Ayurvedic Formularies of India from the classical texts and
other authentic sources.

XXXV
 CONTRIBUTING LABORATORIES & INSTITUTIONS

The following institutions have carried out the scientific work of Monographs under
APC scheme.

1. University Institute of Pharmaceutical Sciences, Punjab University, Chandigrah-160014

2. Ram Narayan Ruia College, Matunga, Mumbai

3. Captain Srinivasa Murty Drug Research Institute Ayurveda (CSMDRIA), Aringner Anna
Government Hospital Campus, Arumbakkam, Chennai-600016

4. Indian Institute of Chemical Technology (CSIR), Hyderabad-500007

5. B.V. Patel, Pharmaceutical Education, and Research Development (PERD) Centre,

Thaltej, Ahmedabad-380054

6. Indian Institute of Integrative Medicine (Formerly RRL), Jammu

7. National Botanical Research Institute (Council of Scientific & Industrial Research), Rana
Pratap Marg, P.B. No. 436, Lucknow-226001

8. Institute of Minerals and Materials Technology (Formerly RRL) CSIR, Bhubaneswar

9. Institute of Post Graduate Teaching & Research in Ayurveda, Gujrat Ayurveda

University, Jamnagar

XXXVI
MONOGRAPHS

XXXVII
XXXVIII
 CONTENTS
1. BRËHMYARKA ................................................................................................................ 2
2. GULËBËRKA ................................................................................................................... 4
3. JAÙËMËêSYARKA ........................................................................................................ 6
4. KËKAMËCYARKA.......................................................................................................... 8
5. MUÛÚÌTIKËRKA .......................................................................................................... 10
6. NÌLOÚUPUâPËRKA ...................................................................................................... 12
7. PARPAÙËRKA ................................................................................................................ 14
8. PUDÌNËRKA................................................................................................................... 16
9. PUNARNAVËRKA ......................................................................................................... 18
10. áATËHVËRKA ............................................................................................................... 20
11. VANYËJAMODËRKA ................................................................................................... 22
12. YAVËNYARKA .............................................................................................................. 24
13. AáVAGANDHËDI LEHYA ............................................................................................ 27
14. HARIDRË KHAÛÚA ...................................................................................................... 29
15. NËRIKELA KHAÛÚA .................................................................................................... 32
16. CITRAKËDI CÍRÛA ..................................................................................................... 35
17. SUKUMËRA GHÎTA ..................................................................................................... 40
18. SAPTË×GA GUGGULU................................................................................................. 44
19. VARËDI GUGGULU....................................................................................................... 47
20. VIÚA×GËDI GUGGULU ............................................................................................... 50
21. AÛU TAILA ..................................................................................................................... 55
22. APËMËRGA KâËRA TAILA ........................................................................................ 58
23. ARIMEDËDI TAILA ....................................................................................................... 60
24. ASANABILVËDI TAILA ................................................................................................ 63
25. BALË TAILA ................................................................................................................... 65
26. BALËHAÙHËDI TAILA ................................................................................................ 69
27. BHÎ×GARËJA TAILA................................................................................................... 71
28. BÎHAT SAINDHAVËDYA TAILA ............................................................................... 73
29. CITRAKËDI TAILA ........................................................................................................ 76

i
30. HI×GVËDI TAILA.......................................................................................................... 78
31. JYOTIâMATÌ TAILA ...................................................................................................... 80
32. KANAKA TAILA ............................................................................................................. 82
33. MAHËNËRËYAÛA TAILA .......................................................................................... 84
34. NËLPËMARËDI TAILA................................................................................................ 88
35. NÌLÌBHÎ×GËDI TAILA ............................................................................................... 90
36. PAØCAGUÛA TAILA ..................................................................................................... 92
37. PRABHAØJANA VIMARDANA TAILA ....................................................................... 94
38. PRASËRIÛÌ TAILA ........................................................................................................ 97
39. TUVARAKA TAILA ...................................................................................................... 100
40. YAâÙÌMADHUKA TAILA ........................................................................................... 102
41. ARKA VAÙÌ................................................................................................................... 105
42. CITRAKËDI GUÙIKË .................................................................................................. 107
43. ELËDI GUÙIKË ............................................................................................................ 110
44. LAáUNËDI VAÙÌ ......................................................................................................... 113
45. LAVA×GËDI VAÙÌ ..................................................................................................... 116
46. PLÌHËRI VAÙIKË........................................................................................................ 118
47. PRABHËKARA VAÙÌ .................................................................................................. 121
48. RAJAéPRAVARTINÌ VAÙÌ ........................................................................................ 123
49. SAØJÌVANÌ VAÙÌ........................................................................................................ 126
50. áA×KHA VAÙÌ ............................................................................................................. 129
51. PUNARNAVËDI MAÛÚÍRA ..................................................................................... 132

ii
 ARKA
General Descripition:
Arka is a liquid preparation obtained by distillation of certain liquids or drugs soaked in water
using the Arkayantra or any convenient modern distillation apparatus.
General Method of Preparation:
The drugs are cleaned and coarsely powdered. Some quantity of water is added to the drugs for
soaking and kept over-night. The following morning it is poured into the Arkayantra and the
remaining water is added and boiled. The vapour is condensed and collected in a receiver. In the
beginning, the vapour consists of only steam and may not contain the essential principles of the
drugs. It should therefore be discarded. The last portion also may not contain therapeutically
essential substance and should be discarded. The aliquots collected in between contain the active
ingredients and may be mixed together to ensure uniformity of the Arka.
Characteristics:
Arka is a suspension of the distillate in water having slight turbidity and colour according to the
nature of the drugs used and smell of the predominant drug.

1
 BRËHMYARKA
(AFI Part III, 2:11)

Definition:
Br¡hmyarka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of the entire plant of Bacopa
monnieri.

Formulation Composition:
1 Br¡hm¢ API Bacopa monnieri Pl. 1.0 kg
2 Jala API for soaking and for Potable Water – 30.0 l
preparation of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take Br¡hm¢ of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, dry and powder the ingredient and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) to
obtain coarse powder.
Place 1.0 kg of Br¡hm¢ powder in a round bottom standard joint flask of 50 l capacity. Add
30.0 l of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly, double surface condenser and receiving flask and
enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e. Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts and
continue the distillation to collect about 20.0 l of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Br¡hmyarka is a turbid pale yellow liquid with a faint odour and slightly astringent taste.

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka in 1 ml of toluene or in any
suitable solvent. In a separate setup extract Br¡hm¢ oil from Br¡hm¢ API. Apply 2 µl each of the
solutions on TLC plate separately and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl
acetate (97: 3) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and spray the
plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. and
examine under ultraviolet light at 254 nm. Both the chromatograms show major spots at Rf 0.17
(purple brown), 0.35 (red brown) and 0.63 (saffron red).
Gas chromatography:
Carry out the gas chromatography using a 30 m fused silica capillary column walls coated with
BP-10 maintained at 1500 for 2 min. programmed at the rate of 70/min to 2000, again 150/17 min.

2
to 2600 and detector at 3000 with a flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/ min. with injection port
temperature 2800.
Inject separately 0.1µl of oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the crude drug as well as of Arka
and programme the column as given in preceding paragraph.
Both the chromatograms show major peaks at Rt 14.12, 20.42 and 14.23, 21.78.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (200): 0.998 to 1.0, Appendix 3.2

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Buddhimandat¡ (mental retardation), Sm¤tibhrama (impaired memory)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided doses

3
 GULËBËRKA
(AFI Part III, 2:6)

Definition:
Gul¡b¡rka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of dried petals of Rosa
damascena.

Formulation Composition
1 Gul¡ba (API) Rosa damascena Dry petals 1.0 kg
2 Jala API for soaking and for Potable Water – 12.5 l
Preparation of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take Gul¡ba petals of pharmacopoeial quality and wash.
 Place 1.0 kg of Gul¡ba petals in a round bottom standard joint flask of 30 l capacity. Add 12.5
l of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly with distillation and receiving heads, double surface
condenser and receiving flask and enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e.
Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts and
continue the distillation to collect about 10.0 l of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Gul¡b¡rka is a hazy liquid with pleasing fragrance of rose flower, sweetish to slightly bitter in
taste.

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka under assay in 1 ml of
toluene. Dissolve separately 0.1 ml each of cirtonellol, geraniol and phenyl ethanol in 1 ml each
of toluene. Apply 2 µl each of the solution of the oil and reference solution on TLC plate and
develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using ethyl acetate: hexane (20: 80) as mobile phase. After
development, allow the plate to dry in air and spray the plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid
reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.42 (orange-red)
corresponding to geraniol and 0.46 (pinkish-purple) corresponding to cirtronellol in visible light.
Gas chromatography:
Carry out the gas chromatography using a 30 m fused silica capillary column walls coated with
FFAP maintained at 900 for 2 min. then programmed at the rate of 70/ min. to 2200 and detector at
2600 and with a flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/min.

4
Inject separately 0.1 µl of oil obtained by hydro-distillation of drug under assay and, programme
the column as given in preceding paragraph.
The chromatogram shows major peak at Rt 12.52 (corresponding to linalool), 16.64
(corresponding to citronellol), 17.34 (corresponding to nerol), 18.25 (corresponding to geraniol)
and 19.68 (corresponding to phenyl ethanol).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (200): 1.0 Appendix 3.2

Assay:
Gul¡b¡rka contains 0.035 to 0.08 per cent v/v of essential oil, determined for a well stirred
quantity of not less than 2.0 l. (Appendix 2.2.11).
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
D¡ha (burning sensation), T¤À¸¡ (thirst), H¤ll¡sa (nausea), Netraroga (eye diseases)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided doses
External use : 2-3 drops in each eye, 2/3 times a day

5
 JAÙËMËêSYARKA
(AFI Part 1, 2:3)

Definition:
Ja¶¡m¡Æsyarka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of rhizomes of Nardostachys
jatamansi.

Formulation Composition:
1 Ja¶¡m¡Æs¢ API Nardostachys jatamansi Rz. 1.0 kg
2 Jala API for soaking and for Potable Water – 25.0 l
preparation of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take Ja¶¡maÆs¢ of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, dry and powder the ingredient and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) to
obtain coarse powder.
 Place 1.0 kg of Ja¶¡maÆs¢ powder in a round bottom standard joint flask of 50 l capacity.
Add 25.0 l of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly with double surface condenser and receiving flask and
enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e. Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts and
continue the distillation to collect about 18.0 l of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Ja¶¡m¡Æsyarka is a liquid having a slight turbidity with a spicy, slightly pungent and lingering
bitter taste.

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka under assay in 1 ml of toluene
or in any suitable solvent. In a separate setup extract Ja¶¡maÆs¢ oil from Ja¶¡maÆs¢ API. Apply
4 µl each of the oil solutions on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using
toluene (double run) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and spray
the plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min.
Both the chromatograms show major spots at Rf 0.25 (bluish purple), 0.33 (blue), 0.42 (pink),
0.69 and 0.79 (both pinkish purple) in visible light.

6
Gas chromatography:
Carry out the gas chromatography analysis procedure using a 30 m fused silica capillary column
walls coated with FFAP maintained at 900 for 2 min, then programmed at the rate of 70/min to
2200 and detector at 2600 and with a flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/ min.
Inject separately 0.1µl of oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the crude drug as well as of the oil
of the Arka under assay and, after 2 min. increase the temperature of the column to 2200 at a rate
of 70/min.
Both the chromatograms show major peaks at Rt 20.26, 21.61, 22.51 (corresponding to patchouli
alcohol), 23.01, 24.06 and 26.22.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (200): 0.995 to 1.0, Appendix 3.2

Assay:
Ja¶¡m¡Æsyarka contains 0.04 to 0.06 per cent v/v of essential oil, determined for a well stirred
quantity of not less than 2.0 l. (Appendix2.2.11).
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Agnim¡ndya (digestive impairment); Arocaka (tastelessness); Mukhadaurgandhya (halitosis);
Unm¡da (mania/psychosis); Apasm¡ra (epilepsy)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided doses

7
 KËKAMËCYARKA
(AFI Part III, 2:1)

Definition:
K¡kam¡cyarka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of fruits of Solanum nigrum.

Formulation Composition:
1 K¡kam¡c¢ API Solanum nigrum Fr. 1.0 kg
2 Jala API for soaking and for preparation Potable Water – 30.0 l
of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take K¡kam¡c¢ of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, dry and powder the ingredient and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) to
obtain coarse powder.
 Place 1.0 kg of K¡kam¡c¢ powder in a round bottom standard joint flask of 50 l capacity. Add
30.0 l of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly, double surface condenser and receiving flask and
enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e. Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts control
and continue the distillation to collect about 20.0 1 of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
K¡kam¡cyarka is a light greenish liquid with slight turbidity, taste slightly bitter.

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka in 1 ml of toluene. In a
separate setup extract K¡kam¡c¢ oil from K¡kam¡c¢ API and dissolve 0.1 ml of oil in 1 ml of
toluene or in any suitable solvent. Apply 2 µl each of the solution of oils on TLC plate separately
and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate (97: 3) as mobile phase.
After development, allow the plate to dry in air and spray the plate with acetic anhydride
sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. Both the chromatograms
show major spots at Rf 0.17 (yellowish Grey) and 0.63 (sky blue) in visible light.
Gas chromatography:
Carry out Gas chromatography using a 30 m fused silica capillary column walls coated with BP-
10 maintained at 1500 for 2 min programmed at the rate of 70/min to 2000 again 150/17 min to
2600 and detector at 3000 and with a flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/ min with injection port
temperature 2600.

8
Inject separately 0.1µl each of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the crude drug as well as
of the Arka and programme the column as given above.
Both the chromatograms show major peaks at Rt 22.01, 23.53 and 23.75.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (200): 0.998 to 1.0, Appendix 3.2

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
H¤droga (heart diseases); Yak¤droga (liver disorders); áotha (inflammation); Chardi (emesis);
Netraroga (disorders of eye)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided doses

9
 MUÛÚÌTIKËRKA
(AFI Part III, 2:12)

Definition:
Mu¸·¢tik¡rka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of flowers of Sphaeranthus
indicus.

Formulation Composition:
1 Mu¸·¢tik¡ (API) Sphaeranthus indicus Fl. 1.0 kg
2 Jala API for soaking and for Potable Water – 35.0 l
preparation of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take Mu¸·¢tik¡ of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, dry and powder the ingredient and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) to
obtain coarse powder.
 Place 1.0 g of Mu¸·¢tik¡ powder in a round bottom standard joint flask of 50 l capacity. Add
35.0 l of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly with double surface condenser and receiving flask and
enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e. Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts and
continue the distillation to collect about 20.0 l of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Mu¸·¢tik¡rka is a slightly turbid dark brownish liquid.

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of Arka in 1 ml of toluene or in any
suitable solvent, similarly dissolve separately 0.1 ml of Mu¸·¢tik¡ oil obtained by hydro-
distillation of Mu¸·¢tik¡ API. Apply 2 µl each of the solutions of the oil on TLC plate and
develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate (97: 3) as mobile phase. After
development, allow the plate to dry in air and spray the plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid
reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min and examine under ultraviolet light at 254
nm. Both the chromatograms show major spots at Rf 0.16 (orange-red), 0.35 (red- brown) and
0.63 (saffron-red).

10
Gas chromatography:
Carry out the gas chromatography using 30 m fused silica capillary column having walls coated
with BP-10 maintained at 900 for 2 min. then programmed at the rate of 70/min to 2200, injection
port temperature 2400 and detector at 2600 and with a flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/min.
Inject 0.1 µl of oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka and programme the column as given
in preceeding paragraph. The chromatogram shows peaks at Rt 42.15 (all mixed), 42.46 and
42.75.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (200): 0.998 to1.0, Appendix 3.2

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Pl¢h¡rti (splenic disorders), Meha (increased frequency and turbidity of urine), V¡t¡rti (disorders
due to vitiation of v¡ta doÀa), Tvakroga (skin diseases), AruÆÀik¡ (dandroff)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided dose

11
 NÌLOÚUPUâPËRKA
(AFI Part III, 2:8)

Definition:
N¢lo·upuÀp¡rka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of the entire plant of Borago
officinalis.

Formulation Composition:
1 N¢lo·upuÀpa (API) Borago officinalis Pl. 1.0 kg
2 Jala API for soaking and for Potable Water – 30.0 l
preparation of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take N¢lo·upuÀpa of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, dry and powder the ingredient and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) to
obtain coarse powder.
 Place 1.0 kg of N¢lo·upuÀpa powder in a round bottom standard joint flask of 50 l capacity.
Add 30.0 l of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly with distillation and receiving heads, double surface
condenser and receiving flask and enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e.
Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts and
continue the distillation to collect about 15.0 l of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
N¢lo·upuÀp¡rka is a slightly turbid pale liquid with a slightly spicy and sour taste.

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of Arka in 1 ml of toluene and 0.1 ml of
authentic N¢lo·upuÀpa oil in 1 ml of toluene in any suitable solvent. Apply 2 µl each of the oil
solution on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate (97:
3) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and spray the plate with
anisaldehyde sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. and examine
under ultraviolet light at 254 nm. It shows major spots at Rf 0.17 (orange-red), 0.35 (red-brown)
and 0.63 (saffron-red).
Gas chromatography:
Carry out the gas chromatography using a 30 m fused silica capillary column coated with BP-10
maintained at 1500 for 2 min. then programmed at the rate of 70/ min. to 2000 and again 150/17

12
min. to 2600 and detector at 3000 keeping flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/min. with injection port
temperature 2800.
Inject separately 0.1 µl of oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka and programme the
column as given in preceding paragraph. The chromatogram shows major peaks at Rt 11.94,
13.07, 13.83, 14.11 and 23.14.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (200): 0.998 to1.0, Appendix 3.2

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Kapharoga (diseases due to vitiation of kapha doÀa), K¡sa (cough), áv¡sa (dyspnoea/asthma),
Ka¸¶Åaroga (throat diseases)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided doses

13
 PARPAÙËRKA
(AFI Part III, 2:9)

Definition:
Parpa¶¡rka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of the entire plant of Fumaria
vaillantii.

Formulation Composition:
1 Parpa¶a API Fumaria parviflora Pl. 1.0 kg
(= F. vaillantii)
2 Jala API for soaking and for Potable Water – 30.0 l
preparation of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take Parpa¶a of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, dry and powder the ingredient and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) to
obtain coarse powder.
 Place 1.0 kg of Parpa¶a powder in a round bottom standard joint flask of 50 l capacity. Add
30.0 1 of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly with distillation and receiving heads, double surface
condenser and receiving flask and enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e.
Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts and
continue the distillation to collect about 20.0 l of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Parpa¶¡rka is a slightly turbid light yellow liquid with a sweet odour.

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka under assay in 1 ml of toluene
or in any suitable solvent. In a separate setup extract Parpa¶a oil from Parpa¶a API and dissolve
0.1 ml of the oil in 1ml of toluene or in any suitable solvent. Apply 2 µl each of the solution on
TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene as mobile phase. After
development, allow the plate to dry in air and spray the plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid
reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.17 (orange-
red.), 0.35 (red-brown) and 0.63 (saffron-red) in visible light.

14
Gas chromatography:
Carry out the gas chromatography using a 30 m fused silica capillary column, walls coated with
BP-10 maintained at 1500 for 2 min then programmed at the rate of 70/ min. to 2000, again 150/17
min. to 2600 and detector at 3000 and with a flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/min. with injection port
temperature 2800.
Inject 0.1 µl of oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka under assay and programme the
column as given in preceding paragraph. The chromatogram shows major peak at Rt 14.14, 23.67.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (200): 0.998 to 1.0, Appendix 3.2

Assay:
Parpa¶¡rka contains not less than 0.02 per cent v/v of essential oil, determined for a well stirred
quantity of not less than 2.0 l. (Appendix2.2.11).
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Kaphajvara (fever due to kapha doÀa); T¤À¸¡ (thirst); Atis¡ra (diarrhoea); D¡ha (burning
sensation); Raktapitta (bleeding disorders); Bhrama (vertigo)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided doses

15
 PUDÌNËRKA
(AFI Part II, 2:1 )

Definition:
Pud¢n¡rka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of aerial parts of Mentha viridis.

Formulation Composition:
1 Pud¢n¡ API Mentha viridis A. Pt. 1.0 kg
2 Jala API for soaking and for Potable Water – 30.0 l
preparation of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take Pud¢n¡ of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, dry and powder the ingredient and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) to
obtain coarse powder.
 Place 1.0 kg of Pud¢n¡ powder in a round bottom standard joint flask of 50 l capacity. Add
30.0 1 of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly with distillation and receiving heads, double surface
condenser and receiving flask and enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e.
Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts and
continue the distillation to collect about 15.0 l of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Pud¢n¡rka is a slightly turbid liquid with a pleasant mint odour; slightly bitter to taste, producing
a cooling sensation.

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka under assay and 0.1 g each of
1-menthol, menthone and menthyl acetate in 1 ml of toluene each. Apply 4 µl of the solution of
oil and 2 µl each of reference solutions on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm
using methanol: toluene (1: 19) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air
and spray the plate with vanillin sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10
min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.15 (maroon purple corresponding to menthol), 0.30 (bluish
purple, corresponding to menthone) and 0.45 (dark maroon purple, corresponding to menthyl
acetate) in visible light.

16
Gas chromatography:
Carry out the gas chromatography using a 30 m fused silica capillary column, walls coated with
FFAP maintained at 900 for 2 min then programmed at the rate of 70/ min to 2200, and detector at
2600 and with a flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/min with injection port temperature 2200.
Inject 0.1 µl of oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka under assay and programme the
column as given in preceding paragraph. The chromatogram shows major peaks at Rt 6.37
(corresponding to limonene), 10.81 (corresponding to menthone), 11.3 (corresponding to iso-
menthone), 12.82 (corresponding to menthyl acetate) and 13.97 (corresponding to 1-menthol).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (320): 0.9831 to 1.0, Appendix 3.2

Assay:
Pud¢n¡rka contains 0.14 to 0.18 per cent v/v of essential oil, determined for a well stirred quantity
of not less than 2.0 l. (Appendix2.2.11).
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Chardi (vomiting); Aj¢r¸a (indigestion); Udara¿£la (abdominal pain); Agnim¡ndya (digestive
impairment)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided doses

17
 PUNARNAVËRKA
(AFI Part III, 2:10)

Definition:
Punarnav¡rka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of roots of Boerhaavia diffusa.

Formulation Composition:
1 Punarnav¡ (Rakta Punarnav¡ API) Boerhaavia diffusa Rt. 1.0 kg
2 Jala API for soaking and for Potable Water – 35.0 l
preparation of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take Punarnav¡ of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, dry and powder the ingredient and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) to
obtain coarse powder.
 Place 1.0 kg of Punarnav¡ powder in a round bottom standard joint flask of 50 l capacity.
Add 35.0 l of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly, double surface condenser and receiving flask and
enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e. Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts and
continue the distillation to collect about 20.0 l of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Punarnav¡rka is a slightly milky turbid liquid.

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka in 1 ml of toluene. In a
separate setup extract Punarnav¡ oil from Punarnav¡ API and dissolve 0.1 ml of oil in 1 ml of
toluene or in any suitable solvent. Apply 2 µl each of the solution of oils on TLC plate and
develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate (97: 3) as mobile phase. After
development, allow the plate to dry in air and spray the plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid
reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min and examine under ultraviolet light at 254
nm. Both the chromatograms show major spot at Rf 0.63 (saffron red).
Gas chromatography:
Carry out the gas chromatography using a 30 m fused silica capillary column walls coated with
BP-10 maintained at 1500 for 2 min programmed at the rate of 70/min to 2000 again 150/17 min to
2600 and detector at 3000 and with a flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/min with injection port
temperature 2600.

18
Inject 0.1µl of oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the crude drug as well as oil of Arka and
programme the column as given in preceding paragraph.
The chromatograms show major peaks at Rt 13.93 and 22.89.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (200): 0.999 to 1.0, Appendix 3.2

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Jalodara (ascites), áotha (inflammation), Netraroga (disorders of eyes); Gr¡h¢ ; Raktapitta
(bleeding disorders)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided doses
External use: 2-3 drops in each eye, 2/3 times a day

19
 áATËHVËRKA
(AFI Part III, 2:14)

Definition:
áat¡hv¡rka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of fruits of Anethum sowa.

Formulation Composition:
1 áat¡hv¡ API Anethum sowa Fr. 1.0 kg
2 Jala API for soaking and for Potable Water – 12.0 l
preparation of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take áat¡hv¡ of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, dry and powder the ingredient and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) to
obtain coarse powder.
 Place 1.0 kg of áat¡hv¡ powder in a round bottom standard joint flask of 30 l capacity. Add
12.0 l of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly with double surface condenser and receiving flask and
enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e. Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts and
continue the distillation to collect about 7.0 l of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
áat¡hv¡rka is a slightly turbid liquid with pleasing flavour of sowa fruits and a sweetish spicy,
slightly bitter taste.

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka under assay in 1 ml of toluene
or in any suitable solvent. Dissolve separately 0.1 g of carvone in 1 ml of toluene. Apply 2 µl
each of the solution of oil and reference solution on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of
8 cm using toluene (double run) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air
and spray the plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about
10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.10 (blue purple), 0.32 (pink corresponding to carvone), 0.46
(pinkish blue), 0.55 (dark coke coloured) in visible light.
Gas chromatography:
Carry out the gas chromatography using a 30 m fused silica capillary column walls coated with
BP-10 maintained at 900 for 2 min then programmed at the rate of 70/min to 2300 for 5 min and
detector at 2600 and with a flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/ min.

20
Inject separately 0.1 µl each of oil obtained by hydro-distillation of drug under assay and, carvone
reference standard and programme the column as given above.
The chromatogram shows major peaks at Rt 5.2, 8.7, 10.4 and 11.5 (corresponding to carvone).

Assay:
áat¡hv¡rka contains 0.20 to 0.50 per cent v/v of essential oil, determined for a well stirred
quantity of not less than 2.0 l. (Appendix 2.2.11).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (200): 0.991 to 0.998, Appendix 3.2

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Jvara (fever); V¡ta Kaphaja roga (diseases due to v¡ta and kapha doÀa); Vra¸a¿£la (pain due to
wound): AkÀiroga (diseases of eye), Agnim¡ndya (digestive impairment), Atis¡ra (diarrhoea)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided doses

21
 VANYËJAMODËRKA
(AFI Part III, 2:15)

Definition:
Vany¡jamod¡rka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of fruits of Trachyspermum
roxburghianum.

Formulation Composition:
1 Vany¡jamod¡ (API) Trachyspermum roxburghianum Fr. 1.0 kg
2 Jala API for soaking and for Potable Water – 20.0 l
preparation of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take the raw materials of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, dry and powder the ingredient and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) to
obtain coarse powder.
 Place 1.0 kg of Vany¡jamod¡ powder in a round bottom standard joint flask of 30 l capacity.
Add 20.0 l of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly with distillation and receiving heads, double surface
condenser and receiving flask and enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e.
Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts and
continue the distillation to collect about 15.0 l of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Vany¡jamod¡rka is a cloudy milky turbid liquid having characteristic spicy odour with slightly
pungent lingering bitter taste.

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka under assay in 1 ml of toluene
or in any suitable solvent. Dissolve 0.1 mg of each of β-cycloavandulal and seslin in 1 ml of
toluene separately. Apply 2 µl of the solution of the oil and reference solutions on TLC plate.
Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using ethyl acetate: hexane (2: 8) as mobile phase. After
development, allow the plate to dry in air and spray the plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid
reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.22 (greenish-
blue corresponding to sesline), 0.44 (peach coloured, corresponding to β-cycloavandulal), 0.51
(pink), 0.58 (red-orange) and 0.67 (bluish-purple) in visible light.

22
Gas chromatography:
Carry out the gas chromatography using a 30 m fused silica capillary column walls coated with
FFAP maintained at 900 for 2 min then programmed at the rate of 70/min to 2200 with injection
port at 2400 and detector at 2600 and with a flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/min.
Inject separately 0.1 µl each of oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the crude drug as well as of
the Arka under assay along with reference.
Both the chromatograms show major peaks at Rt 7.25 corresponding to limonene, 12.60
corresponding to seslin, 15.65 corresponding to β-cycloavandulal and 16.69 corresponding to
cadinene.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (200): 0.995 to 0.998, Appendix 3.2

Assay:
Vany¡jamod¡rka contains 0.20 to 0.30 per cent of essential oil, determined for a well stirred
quantity of not less than 2.0 l. (Appendix2.2,11).

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Agnim¡ndya (digestive impairment); Aj¢r¸a (dyspepsia); Bastiroga (urinary bladder disorder);
V¡takapharoga (diseases due to v¡ta and kapha doÀa)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided doses

23
 YAVËNYARKA
(AFI Part II, 2:2)

Definition:
Yav¡nyarka is a liquid preparation obtained by hydro-distillation of fruits of Trachyspermum
ammi.

Formulation Composition:
1 Yav¡n¢ API Trachyspermum ammi Fr. 1.0 kg
2 Jala API for soaking and for Potable Water – 12.0 l
preparation of Arka

Method of preparation:
 Take Yav¡n¢ of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, dry and powder the ingredient and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) to
obtain coarse powder.
 Place 1.0 kg of Yav¡n¢ powder in a round bottom standard joint flask of 20 l capacity. Add
12.0 l of Jala.
 Attach the proper distillation assembly with double surface condenser and receiving flask and
enough circulating water to condense the distillate i.e. Arka.
 Place the flask on a heating mantle. Adjust the temperature control when boiling starts and
continue the distillation to collect about 7.0 l of Arka.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Yav¡nyarka is a colourless slightly cloudy liquid with the characteristic odour of Yav¡n¢ with a
bitter burning taste

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Dissolve separately 0.1 ml of the oil obtained by hydro-distillation of the Arka under assay and
0.1 g of thymol in 1 ml of toluene. Apply 4 µl of the solution of oil and 2 µl of reference solution
on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using ethyl acetate: hexane (3: 17) as
mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and observe under ultraviolet light
(256 nm).The plate shows one blue fluorescent spot at Rf 0.54 (corresponding to thymol). Spray
the plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min.
It shows major spots at Rf 0.32 (purple), 0.54 (maroon red, corresponding to thymol) and 0.64
(bluish Grey) in visible light.

24
Gas chromatography:
Carry out the gas chromatography using a 30 m fused silica capillary column walls coated with
FFAP maintained at 900 for 2 min. then programmed at the rate of 70/min to 2200 and detector at
2600 and with a flow rate of carrier gas 1.5 ml/ min and injection port temperature at 2600.
Inject separately 0.1 µl each of oil obtained by hydro-distillation of drug under assay and, γ-
terpinene, p-cymene and thymol reference standards and programme the column as given above.
The chromatogram shows major peaks at Rt 7.96 (corresponding to γ-terpinene), 8.32
(corresponding to p-cymene) and 23.93 (corresponding to thymol).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Specific gravity (200): 0.995 to 0.999, Appendix 3.2

Assay:
Yav¡nyarka contains 0.20 to 0.60 per cent of essential oil, determined for a well stirred quantity
of not less than 2.0 l. (Appendix 2.2.11).

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Agnim¡ndya (digestive impairment); Trika¿£la (pain in sacral region)

Dose:
10 to 20 ml per day in divided doses

25
 AVALEHA
General Descripition:
Avaleha or Lehya is a semi-solid preparation of drugs, prepared with addition of jaggery, sugar or
sugar-candy and boiled with prescribed juices or decoction.
These preparations generally have
(1) KaÀ¡ya or other liquids,
(2) Jaggery, sugar or sugar-candy,
(3) Powders or pulps of certain drugs,
(4) Ghee or oil and
(5) Honey.
Jaggery, sugar or sugar-candy is dissolved in the liquid and strained to remove the foreign
particles. This solution is boiled over a moderate fire. When pressed between two fingers if p¡ka
becomes thready (Tantuvat), or when it sinks in water without getting easily dissolved, it should
be removed from the fire. Fine powders of drugs are then added in small quantities and stirred
continuously to form a homogenous mixture. Ghee or oil, if mentioned, is added while the
preparation is still hot and mixed well. Honey, if mentioned is added when the preparation
becomes cool and mixed well.
The Lehya should neither be hard nor a thick fluid. When pulp of the drugs is added and ghee or
oil is present in the preparation, this can be rolled between the fingers. When metals are
mentioned, the bhasmas of the metals are used. In case of drugs like Bhall¡taka, purification
process is to be followed.
The Lehya should be kept in glass or porcelain jars. It can also be kept in a metal container which
does not react with it. Normally, Lehyas should be used within one year.

26
 AáVAGANDHËDI LEHYA
(AFI Part-I, 3:2)
Definition:
A¿vagandh¡di lehya is a semisolid preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 áarkar¡ API Sugar – 1.356 kg
2 A¿vagandh¡ API Withania somnifera Rt. 192 g
3 S¡riv¡ (áveta s¡riv¡ API) Hemidesmus indicus Rt. 192 g
4 J¢raka (áveta j¢raka API) Cuminum cyminum Fr. 192 g
5 Madhusnuh¢ API Smilax glabra ∗ Rt. Tr. 192 g
6 Dr¡kÀ¡ API Vitis vinifera Dr. Fr. 192 g
7 Gh¤ta (Gogh¤ta API) Clarified butter from cow milk – 226 g
8 Madhu API Honey – 452 g
9 El¡ (S£kÀmail¡ API) Elettaria cardamomum Sd. 24 g
10 Jala API Potable Water – 452 ml

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredient number 2 to 5 and 9 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine powder.
 Wash, clean Dr¡kÀ¡, soak in water till fully swollen and crush to make paste.
 Take Gh¤ta in a stainless steel vessel and heat till it becomes free from moisture.
 Add soaked Dr¡kÀ¡ to the Gh¤ta and fry it to make moisture free, then add powdered
ingredients and fry till it turns to a soft bolus.
 Add sugar to water and heat, maintaining the temperature between 800 and 900. After the
sugar dissolves, filter the hot syrup through muslin cloth.
 Add the fried paste to the syrup, heat with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature
between 900 and 1000 and observe the mixture for formation of soft bolus, which does not
disperse in water. Stop heating and allow to cool.
 Add honey when it comes to room temperature.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
A blackish brown, semisolid paste with a spicy pleasant odour and bitter astringent taste

∗
Official Substitute
27
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of Avaleha with 75 ml n-hexane (25 ml x 3) under reflux on a water bath for 30 min.
Pool the extracts, filter and concentrate the filtrate to 10 ml and carry out thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using
toluene: ethyl acetate (9: 1) as mobile phase. After developing the plate, allow it to dry. Spray the
plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. The
plate shows major spots at Rf 0.10, 0.15, 0.26, 0.42 (all bluish grey), 0.54 and 0.70 (both purple)
in visible light.
Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 2 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 1 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 19 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 46 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 28 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (1% aqueous solution): 4.7 to 5.0, Appendix 3.3
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
Raktavik¡ra (disorders of blood), K¤¿atva (emaciation/cachexia), Ar¿a (piles), Unam¡da
(psychosis), used as Balya (tonic), Ras¡yana (rejuvenating agents), V¡j¢kara (aphrodisiac)
Dose:
6 to 12 g with milk

28
 HARIDRË KHAÛÚA
(AFI Part I, 3:31)

Definition:
Haridr¡ Kha¸·a consists of Kha¸·a in the form of granules made with the ingredients in the
Formulation Composition given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 Haridr¡ API Curcuma longa Rz. 384 g
2 HaviÀ (Gogh¤ta API) Clarified butter from cow milk – 288 g
3 Kha¸·a (áarkar¡ API) Sugar Syrup 2.400 kg
4 Trika¶u
a. áu¸¶h¢ API Zingiber officinale Rz. 48 g
b. Marica API Piper nigrum Fr. 48 g
c. Pippal¢ API Piper longum Fr. 48 g
5 Trij¡ta
a. Tvak API Cinnamomum zeylanicum St. Bk. 48 g
b. S£kÀmail¡ API Elettaria cardamomum Sd. 48 g
c. Tvakpatra API Cinnamomum tamala Lf. 48 g
6 K¤mighna (Vi·a´ga API) Embelia ribes Fr. 48 g
7 Triv¤t¡ (Triv¤t API) Operculina turpethum Rt. 48 g
8 Triphal¡
a. Har¢tak¢ API Terminalia chebula P. 48 g
b. Bibh¢taka API Terminalia bellerica P. 48 g
c. Ëmalak¢ API. Emblica officinalis P. 48 g
9 Ke¿ara (N¡gake¿ara API) Mesua ferrea Stmn. 48 g
10 Must¡ API Cyperus rotundus Rt. Tr. 48 g
11 Lauha (Lauha bhasma (API)) Calcined Lauha – 48 g
12 KÀ¢ra (Godugdha (API))∗ Cow milk –

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Lauha to prepare Lauha bhasma.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 4 to 10 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine powder and
mix them all to a homogeneous mixture along with Lauha bhasma.
 Wash, clean, dry Haridr¡, powder and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to
obtain fine powder.

∗
To prevent spoilage of the preparation, it is advisable not to use Godugdha as an ingredient in
the Formulation; instead, the recommended dose of the Formulation should be taken alongwith
Godugdha as Sahap¡na.
29
 Fry Haridr¡ powder in Gh¤ta maintaining the temperature between 800 to 900 till Haridr¡ turns
brown and its typical smell emanates.
 Prepare sugar syrup and filter while hot through muslin cloth.
 Add the fried Haridr¡ to the syrup, heat with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature at
about 900. Stop heating when a thick bolus is formed and allow to cool to 500.
 Add mixture of fine powders and mix thoroughly to prepare a homogeneous mixture. Allow
to cool to 350.
 Pass the mixture through a granulator to obtain granules of suitable size. Allow the granules to
cool to room temperature.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Yellowish to brown granular material with taste and odour characteristic of turmeric along with
pungency

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of the formulation in 75 ml methanol (25 ml x 3) under reflux on a water bath for 30
min. Combine the extracts, filter and concentrate to 10 ml, and carry out thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using
toluene: ethyl acetate: methanol: formic acid (3: 3: 0.8: 0.2) as mobile phase. After development,
allow the plate to dry in air and examine under ultraviolet light. The plate shows major spots at Rf
0.48, 0.57, 0.66, 0.76, 0.96 under 254 nm and fluorescent spots at Rf 0.13, 0.20, 0.30, 0.37, 0.71
(all blue); 0.55, 0.60,0.76 (all yellow) under 366 nm. Spray the plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric
acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. The plate shows major spots at Rf
0.65, 0.72, 0.80, 0.86, (all purple) in visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 3 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 1 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 14 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Loss on drying: Not more than 6 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (10 % aqueous solution): 3.3 to 3.7, Appendix 3.3
Total Sugar estimated as 80 to 85 per cent, Appendix 5.1
Reducing Sugar:
Total Iron: Not more than 0.05 per cent, Appendix 5.6

Assay:
Haridr¡ Kha¸·a granular material contains 1.0 to 1.4 per cent of curcumin when determined by
the following procedure.

30
Dissolve 4 mg accurately weighed curcumin in methanol in a 25 ml-volumetric flask and make up
the volume. Transfer the aliquots (0.4 -1.4 ml) of stock solution to 10- ml volumetric flasks and
make up the volume with methanol to obtain standard solutions containing 6.4 to 22.4 µg/ml
curcumin, respectively.
Apply 10 µl each of the standard solutions prepared above on precoated TLC plate. Develop the
plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: methanol (5: 0.5: 1) as mobile phase. Scan
the plate in the TLC scanner at a wave length 429 nm. Record the peak area under curve for a
peak corresponding to curcumin and plot the calibration curve by plotting peak area vs
concentration of curcumin.
Weigh about 5 g, accurately weighed Haridr¡ Kha¸·a and extract with methanol (25 ml x 4).
Filter, pool the filtrates, concentrate and make up the volume to 25 ml with methanol in a
volumetric flask.
Apply 5 µl of the sample solution on TLC plate and carry out thin layer chromatography.
Develop, dry and scan the plate as described in preceding paragraph for calibration curve of
curcumin. Calculate the amount curcumin in the sample solution from the calibration of curcumin.

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed amber coloured glass containers, protected from light and
moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
á¢tapitta (urticaria); Ka¸·£ (itching); Vispho¶a (blister); Dadru (taeniasis); Udarda (urticaria);
Ko¶ha (urticaria)

Dose:
6 g with milk

31
 NËRIKELA KHAÛÚA
(AFI Part I, 3:16)

Definition:
N¡rikela Kha¸·a is a Kha¸·a preparation cut in the form of tabloid slices, using the ingredients
in the Formulation Composition given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 N¡rikela API Cocus nucifera Enm. 192 g
2 Sarpi (Gogh¤ta API) Clarified butter from cow milk – 48 g
3 Kha¸·a (áarkar¡ API) Sugar candy – 192 g
4 N¡rikela paya (N¡rikela API) Cocus nucifera Tender Coconut 768 ml
water
5 Dhany¡ka (Dh¡nyaka API) Coriandrum sativum Fr. 3g
6 Pippal¢ API Piper longum Fr. 3g
7 Payoda (Must¡ API) Cyperus rotundus Rz 3g
8 Tug¡ (VaÆ¿alocana API) Bamboo manna S. C. 3g
9 Dvij¢ra
a. áveta j¢raka API Cuminum cyminum Fr. 3g
b. K¤À¸a j¢raka API Carum carvi Fr. 3g
10 Trij¡ta
a. Tvak API Cinnamomum zeylanicum St. Bk. 3g
b. Tvakpatra API Cinnamomum tamala Lf. 3g
c. S£kÀmail¡ API Elettaria cardamomum Sd. 3g
11 Ibhake¿ara (N¡gake¿ara API) Mesua ferrea Stmn. 3g

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 5 to 11 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine powder and
mix them all to a homogeneous mixture.
 Cut ingredient number 1 of the Formulation Composition into small pieces and grind to a
paste.
 Fry the paste in Gh¤ta maintaining the temperature between 800 to 900 till it turns brown and
its typical smell emanates.
 Strain N¡rikela paya through a muslin cloth.
 Add sugar to N¡rikela paya and heat, maintaining the temperature between 800 and 900. After
the sugar dissolves, filter the hot syrup through muslin cloth.
 Add the fried paste to the syrup, heat with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature about
900 and observe the mixture for formation of soft bolus, which does not disperse in water.
Stop heating and allow to cool to 500.
 Add mixture of fine powders and mix thoroughly to prepare a homogeneous blend.

32
 Spread the paste on a plate greased with Gh¤ta and cut into small diamond shaped pieces.
Allow to cool it to room temperature.
 Store in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.
Description:
Brown polygonal solid brittle pieces of various shapes and sizes, sweet with smell characteristic
of coconut
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 20 g of the formulation powder with 50 ml of methanol by refluxing on a water bath.
Filter the extract and concentrate to 10 ml and carry out thin layer chromatography. Apply 20 µl
of the extract on a TLC plate and develop the plate to distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl
acetate: formic acid: methanol (6: 6: 1.6: 1.6) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate
to dry in air and examine under ultraviolet light. The plate shows major spots at Rf 0.24, 0.71,
0.78 under 254 nm and four light fluorescent spots at Rf 0.11, 0.75, 0.78 (all blue), 0.72 (red)
under 366 nm. Spray the plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at
1050 for about 10 minutes. The plate shows major spots at Rf 0.19 (black), 0.66 (purple), 0.73
(brown), 0.78 (green) and 0.84 (purple) in visible light.
Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 3.0 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 1.0 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 40 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Loss on drying: Not more than 8.0 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (5 % aqueous solution): 4.5 to 5.50, Appendix 3.3
Total Sugar estimated as 46 to 52 per cent, Appendix 5.1
Reducing Sugars:
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed amber coloured glass containers, protected from light and
moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
Aruci (tastelessness); Vami (vomiting); á£la (pain/colic); Amlapitta (hyperacidity); Raktapitta
(bleeding disorder); KÀata (wound); KÀaya (Pthisis); Daurbalya (weakness)

Dose:
6 to 12 g to be chewed and swallowed with milk
33
 CÍRÛA
General Descripition:
Drugs in the Formulation Composition of the particular C£r¸a are collected, dried,
powdered individually and passed through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to prepare a fine
powder. They are mixed in the specified proportion and stored in well closed container.
The term C£r¸a may be applied to the powder prepared by a single drug or a combination
of more drugs.
Raja and KÀoda are the synonyms for C£r¸a. C£r¸as may be of plant origin, or mixed
with other ingredients. The following points are to be noted.
If metals / minerals are used, they are in the form of bhasma or sind£ra unless otherwise
mentioned.
In cases where P¡rada and Gandhaka are mentioned, prepare Kajjal¢ and add other drugs,
one by one, according to the formula.
In general aromatic drugs like Hi´gu [Asafoetida] etc. should be fried before they are
converted to fine powders.
Specific care should be taken in case of Salts and Sugars. Formulations with hygroscopic
components should not usually be prepared during rainy seasons. If so, specific precautions
should be taken during storage.
C£r¸as should be stored in air tight containers. Polyethylene and foil packing also
provides damp proof protection.
Special precaution for storage should be taken in cases of formulations with salts, sugars
and KÀ¡ras.

34
 CITRAKËDI CÍRÛA
(AFI Part-I, 7:11)

Definition:
Citrak¡di C£r¸a is a powder preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 Citraka API Plumbago zeylanica Rt. 12 g
2 N¡gara (áu¸¶h¢ API) Zingiber officinale Rz. 12 g
3 Hi´gu API Ferula foetida Exd. 12 g
4 Pippal¢ API Piper longum Fr. 12 g
5 Pippal¢ja¶¡ (Pippal¢m£la API) Piper longum St. 12 g
6 Cavya API Piper retrofractum St. 12 g
7 Ajamod¡ API Apium leptophyllum Fr. 12 g
8 Marica API Piper nigrum Fr. 12 g
9 Svarjik¡ (Svarj¢kÀ¡ra (API)) Crude alkaline earth – 6g
10 YavakÀ¡ra API Hordeum vulgare Water soluble 6g
Ash of Pl.
11 Sindhu (Saindhava Lava¸a (API)) Rock salt – 6g
12 Sauvarcala (Sauvarcala Lava¸a (API)) Black salt – 6g
13 Vi·a Lava¸a Black salt∗ 6g
14 S¡mudraka (S¡mudra Lava¸a API) Sea salt – 6g
15 Romaka Lava¸a Rock salt* 6g
16 M¡tulu´ga API - rasa Citrus medica Fr. juice QS

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Hi´gu to prepare Hi´gu - áuddha (Appendix [Link]).
 Roast Svarjik¡ kÀ¡ra and Yava kÀ¡ra in a stainless steel pan on low flame till free from
moisture.
 Roast coarsely powdered Saindhava, Sauvarcala, Vi·a, S¡mudra and Romaka Lava¸as in a
stainless steel pan on low flame till free from moisture, powder separately and pass through
180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1, 2 and 4 to 8 of the Formulation Composition
and powder separately. The powders should completely pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve
number 44) and not less than 50 per cent pass through through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve
number 85).
 Weigh each ingredient separately and mix together. Pass the c£r¸a through 355 µm IS Sieve
(sieve number 44) to obtain a homogenous blend.
∗
Official Substitute
35
 Cut and squeeze the M¡tulu´ga fruits and filter the juice through muslin cloth to obtain
M¡tulu´ga rasa.
 Soak the powder mixture in M¡tulu´ga rasa in a ceramic vessel and dry under sunlight till the
powder absorbs all the juice.
 After complete drying, grind and pass the c£r¸a through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44).
 Store in the container and pack it air-tight.

Description:
 Brown-coloured, smooth powder with pleasant odour, sour, spicy and pungent taste. The
powder completely passes through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) and not less than 50
per cent pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).

Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about 2 g of Cur¸a, and wash it with water thoroughly to remove salt without loss of Cur¸a.
Remove water and use the washed Cur¸a for the following mounts: warm a few mg of material
with chloral hydrate, wash and mount in glycerin; treat a few mg with iodine in potassium iodide
solution and mount in glycerin; heat a few mg in 2 per cent aqueous potassium hydroxide, wash in
water and mount in glycerin. Observe the following characters in the different mounts.
Tangentially elongated cork cells in surface view; tiers of ray parenchyma cells in tangential
view; thin walled bifurcated fibres with sharp tip upto 500 µ in length (Citraka); abundant large
simple oval shaped starch grains with eccentric hilum upto 60 µ in size, fragments of septate
fibres (áu¸¶h¢); uniseriate multicellular trichome, stone cells with broad lumen (Pippal¢);
abundant simple and compound starch grains having 2-7 components round to oval with central
hilum appearing like a point up to 28 µ in size (Pippal¢m£la); parenchymatous tissue with
prominent intercellular space; bordered barrel shaped pitted and scalariform vessels up to 350 µ
in length and 140 µ in width; elongated sclereids with narrow lumen upto 600 µ in length
(Cavya); epidermal tissue debris showing papillose and striated cells; fragments of epidermis
with papillary outgrowth; fragment of yellowish brown vittae (Ajamod¡); beaker shaped stone
cells; spiral vessels; stone cells associated with parenchyma cells from hypodermis (Marica). In
addition general characteristics such as abundant perisperm cells from Marica and Pippal¢, vessels
members and stone cells are also present.
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 4 g of formulation powder in 75 ml alcohol (25 ml x 3) under reflux on a water bath for 30
min. Filter the extracts, pool the filtrates, concentrate to 10 ml and carry out the thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl of extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm
using toluene: ethyl acetate (5: 4) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air
and examine under ultraviolet light (366 nm). It shows major spots at Rf 0.11, 0.23, 0.35 (all pale
blue), 0.50, 0.67, 0.85 (all fluorescent blue) 0.58 (dark blue) and 0.76 (blue). Spray the plate with
vanillin-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. The plate shows
36
major spots at Rf 0.19, 0.26, 0.73, 0.86 (all pink), 0.36 (dark grey), 0.47 (yellow), 0.50 (green),
0.60, 0.95 (both violet) and 0.82 (grey) in visible light.
Chemical tests:
Dissolve 1 g of sample in 10 ml of water and filter. The filtrate complies with Tests for Sulphates
(Appendix 5.13.5) and Sulphides (Appendix 5.13.8).
Dissolve 1 g of sample in 10 ml of N hydrochloric acid and filter. The filtrate complies with Test
for Magnesium (Appendix 5.13.3).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 34 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 3.2 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 11 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 41 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 8 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (10 % aqueous solution): 4 to 5, Appendix 3.3

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Arocaka (tastlessness), Ëmaja¿£la (intestinal colic), Graha¸¢ (malabsorption syndrome), Gulma
(abdominal lump), Agnim¡ndya (digestive impairment), KaphadoÀa (vitiation of kapha doÀa)

Dose:
3 g with warm water

37
 GHÎTA
General Description:
Gh¤tas are preparations in which the Gh¤ta is boiled with prescribed liquid
[Svarasa/KaÀ¡ya etc.] and fine paste [Kalka] of the drugs specified in the formulation
composition. Unless specified otherwise Gh¤ta means Gogh¤ta.
General Method of Preparation:
1. There are usually three essential components in the manufacture of Gh¤ta Kalpan¡.
a. Drava [Any liquid medium as prescribed in the composition]
b. Kalka [Fine paste of the specified drugs]
c. Sneha dravya [Fatty medium - Gh¤ta]
and, occasionally,
d. Gandha dravya [Perfuming agents]
2. Unless otherwise specified in the verse, if Kalka is one part by weight, Gh¤ta should
be four parts and the Drava dravya should be sixteen parts.
3. There are a few exceptions for the above general rule:
a. Where Drava dravya is either Kv¡tha or Svarasa, the ratio of Kalka should be one-
sixth and one-eighth respectively to that of Gh¤ta.
If the Drava dravya is either KÀ¢ra or Dadhi or M¡Æsa rasa or Takra, the ratio of
Kalka should be one-eighth to that of Gh¤ta.
When flowers are advised for use as Kalka, it should be one-eighth to that of
Gh¤ta.
b. Where the numbers of Drava-dravya are four or less than four, the total quantity
should be four times to that of Gh¤ta.
c. Where the number of Drava-dravyas is more than four, each drava should be equal
to that of Gh¤ta.
d. If, Kalka dravya is not prescribed in a formulation, the drugs specified for the
Drava-dravya [Kv¡tha or Svarasa] should be used for the preparation of Kalka.
e. Where no Drava dravya is prescribed in a formulation, four parts of water should
be added to one part of Gh¤ta.
4. In general, the Gh¤ta should be subjected to M£rcchana process, followed by addition
of increments of Kalka and Drava-dravya in specified ratio. The contents are to be
stirred continuously throughout the process in order to avoid charring.
5. The process of boiling is to be continued till the whole amount of moisture gets
evaporated and characteristic features of Gh¤ta appear.
6. The whole process of P¡ka should be carried out on a mild to moderate flame.

38
 7. Three stages of P¡ka are specified for therapeutic purposes.
a. M¤du P¡ka: In this stage, the Kalka looks waxy and when rolled between fingers,
it rolls like lac without sticking. The Gh¤ta obtained at this stage is used for Nasya
[Nasal instillation].
b. Madhyama P¡ka: In this stage, the Kalka becomes harder and rolls into Varti. It
burns without crackling sounds when exposed to fire and phena [froth] will
disappear in Gh¤ta. The Gh¤ta obtained at this stage is used for P¡na [Internal
administration] and Basti [Enema].
c. Khara P¡ka: Further heating of the Gh¤ta, leads to Khara paka. Kalka becomes
brittle when rolled between fingers. The Gh¤ta obtained at this stage is used only
for Abhya´ga [External application].
8. The period of P¡ka depends upon the nature of liquid media used in the process.
a. Takra or Ëranala 5 Nights
b. Svarasa 3 Nights
c. KÀ¢ra 2 Nights
9. P¡tra P¡ka: It is the process by which the Gh¤ta is augmented or flavored by certain
prescribed substances. The powdered drugs are suspended in a vessel containing
warm, filtered Gh¤ta.
The medicated Gh¤ta will have the odour, colour and taste of the drugs used in the
process.
Gh¤tas are preserved in good quality of glass, steel or polythene containers. These
medicated preparations retain the therapeutic efficacy for sixteen months.

39
 SUKUMËRA GHÎTA
(AFI Part-I, 6:44)

Definition:
Sukum¡ra gh¤ta is a medicated preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Gh¤ta as the basic ingredient.
Formulation Composition:
1 Punarnava (Rakta Punarnav¡ API) Boerhaavia diffusa Pl. 4.800 kg
2 Da¿am£la
a. Bilva API Aegle marmelos Rt./St. Bk. ∗ 480 g
b. áyon¡ka API Oroxylum indicum Rt./St. Bk.* 480 g
c. Gambh¡ri API Gmelina arborea Rt./St. Bk.* 480 g
d. P¡¶al¡ API Stereospermum suaveolens Rt./St. Bk.* 480 g
e. Agnimantha API Premna integrifolia** Rt./St. Bk.* 480 g
f. á¡lapar¸¢ API Desmodium gangeticum Pl. 480 g
g. P¤¿nipar¸¢ API Uraria picta Pl. 480 g
h. B¤hat¢ API Solanum indicum Pl. 480 g
i. Ka¸¶ak¡r¢ API Solanum surratense Pl. 480 g
k. GokÀura API Tribulus terrestris Pl. 480 g
3 Payasy¡ (KÀ¢rak¡kol¢ API) Fritillaria roylei Sub. Rt. 480 g
4 A¿vagandh¡ API Withania somnifera Rt. 480 g
5 Era¸·a API Ricinus communis Rt. 480 g
6 áat¡var¢ API Asparagus racemosus Rt. Tr. 480 g
7 Dvidarbham£la
a. Darbha API Imperata cylindrica Rt. 480 g
b. Ku¿a API Desmostachya bipinnata Rt. Stck. 480 g
8 áaram£la (áara API) Saccharum bengalense Rt. & Rt. 480 g
(= S. munja) Stck.
9 K¡¿am£la (K¡¿a API) Saccharum spontaneum Rt. Stck. 480 g
10 IkÀum£la (IkÀu API) Saccharum officinarum Rt. Stck. 480 g
11 Po¶agala API Typha elephantina Rt. 480 g
12 Jala API for decoction Potable Water – 49.152 l
reduced to 6.144 l
13 Gu·a API Jaggery – 1.440 kg
14 Era¸·a taila (API) Ricinus communis Sd. oil 768 ml
15 Gh¤ta (Gogh¤ta API) Clarified butter from cow milk – 1.536 kg
16 Payas (Godugdha (API) ) Cow milk – 1.536 kg
17 K¤À¸¡ (Pippal¢ API) Piper longum Fr. 96 g
18 K¤À¸¡m£la (Pippal¢m£la API) Piper longum St. 96 g
19 Saindhava (Saindhava Lava¸a (API)) Rock salt – 96 g
20 YaÀ¶¢ API Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 96 g

∗
Part actually used in the formulation
** Official Substitute
40
21 Madh£ka API Madhuca indica Fl. 96 g
22 M¤dv¢k¡ (Dr¡kÀ¡ API) Vitis vinifera Dr. Fr. 96 g
23 Yav¡n¢ API Trachyspermum ammi Fr. 96 g
24 N¡gara (áu¸¶h¢ API) Zingiber officinale Rz. 96 g

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Gh¤ta to prepare m£rcchita Gh¤ta (Appendix [Link]).
 Treat Era¸·a taila to prepare m£rcchita Era¸·a taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 11 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for four hours, heat and reduce the
volume to one-eighth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Strain the Godugdha through muslin cloth.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 17, 18 and 20 to 24 of the Formulation
Composition, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to
obtain fine powder. Roast coarsely powdered Saindhava Lava¸a in a stainless steel pan on
low flame till free from moisture, powder and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number
85) (Kalka dravya).
 Transfer the powdered ingredients to wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare homogeneous blend.
 Take m£rcchita Gh¤ta in a stainless steel vessel and heat it mildly.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding Kv¡tha, Gu·a, Era¸·a taila and
Godugdha.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the
first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Continue the process of heating next day. Constantly check the Kalka by rolling between the
fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka easily rolls into a varti without sticking (Madhyama p¡ka
lakÀa¸a) to the fingers. Expose the varti and gh¤ta to flame and confirm the absence of
crackling sound indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
A greenish yellow coloured, soft, low-melting medicated fat, unctuous to touch with a pleasant
odour and astringent taste

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of formulation in 25 ml of n-hexane under reflux on a water bath for 30 min. Filter and
concentrate the extract to 10 ml and carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 10 µl of the

41
extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using n-hexane: ethyl acetate (8.5:
1.5) as mobile phase. After development of plate, allow it to dry in air. Spray the plate with
anisaldehyde sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating it at 1050 for about 10 min. It shows
major spots at Rf 0.10, 0.19 (both green), 0.26, 0.38, 0.78 (all blue) and 0.88 (bluish black) in
visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4618 to 1.4622, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.796 to 0.884, Appendix 3.2
Congealing point: 160 to 220 Appendix 3.4.2
Saponification value: 213 to 277, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 32 to 34, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 3, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Vi·vibandha (constipation); Udara (diseases of abdomen); Gulma (abdominal lump); Pl¢h¡ roga
(splenic diseases); Vidradhi (abcess); áopha (oedema); Yoni¿£la (pain in female genital tract);
Ar¿a (piles); V¤ddhi (hydrocoele); V¡tavy¡dhi (diseases due to v¡ta doÀa); V¡tarakta (gout)

Dose:
6 - 12 g per day in divided doses with warm water /milk

42
 GUGGULU
General Description:
Guggulu is an oleoresin (Niry¡sa) obtained from the plant Commiphora wightii.
Preparations having the oleo-gum resin as main effective ingredient are known as Guggulu. There
are five different varieties of Guggulu described in the Ayurvedic texts. However two of the
varieties, namely, MahiÀ¡kÀa and Kanaka Guggulu are usually preferred for medicinal
preparations. MahiÀ¡kÀa Guggulu is dark greenish brown and Kanaka Guggulu is yellowish
brown in color.
Before using, Guggulu is cleaned in the following manner:
1. Sand, stone, plant debris, glass etc. are first removed.
2. It is then broken into small pieces.
3. It is thereafter bundled in a piece of cloth and boiled in Dola Yantra containing any one
of the following fluids.
a. Gom£tra,
b. Triphal¡ kaÀ¡ya,
c. Nirgu¸·¢patra Svarasa with Haridr¡ C£r¸a,
d. V¡s¡patra KaÀ¡ya,
e. V¡s¡patra Svarasa and
f. Dugdha.
The boiling of Guggulu in Dol¡ Yantra is carried on until all the Guggulu passes into the
fluid through the cloth. By pressing with fingers, much of the fluid that can pass through is taken
out. The residue in the bundle is discarded. The fluid is filtered and again boiled till it forms a
mass. This mass is dried and then pounded with a pestle in a stone mortar, adding ghee in small
quantities till it becomes waxy.
Guggulu cleaned as above, is soft, waxy and brown in color. Characteristics of
preparations of Guggulu vary depending on the other ingredients added to the preparations.
Guggulu is kept in glass or porcelain jars free from moisture and stored in a cool place.
The potency is maintained for two years when prepared with ingredients of plant origin and
indefinitely when prepared with metals and minerals.

Note: Guggulu formulations can also be prepared in a tablet dosage form, without the use of
excipients, but they should comply with the general tests for Tablets.

43
 SAPTË×GA GUGGULU
(AFI Part III, 5:3)

Definition:
Sapt¡´ga Guggulu va¶¢ is a preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with Guggulu as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Guggulu API - áuddha Commiphora wightii O. R. 6g
2 Triphal¡
a. Har¢tak¢ API Terminalia chebula P. 1g
b. Bibh¢taka API Terminalia belerica P. 1g
c. Ëmalak¢ API Emblica officinalis P. 1g
3 VyoÀa
a. áu¸¶h¢ API Zingiber officinale Rz. 1g
b. Marica API Piper nigrum Fr. 1g
c. Pippal¢ API Piper longum Fr. 1g
4 Ëjya (Gogh¤ta API) Clarified butter from cow milk – QS

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of the pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Guggulu to prepare Guggulu - áuddha (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 2 and 3 of the formulation composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine powder and
mix them all to a homogeneous mixture.
 Crush weighed quantity of áuddha-Guggulu, add fine powder of other mixed ingredients to it
and pound well. Add Gh¤ta to an extent required to facilitate the pounding and continue
pounding till a semi-solid uniformly mixed mass of suitable plasticity is obtained.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
and smeared with Gh¤ta or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Spherical pills, black in colour with agreeable odour and bitter taste

44
Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about 5 g of the sample, powder it and add chloroform (20 ml); stir for 10 min. thoroughly
over a water-bath; pour out chloroform. Repeat the process thrice adding fresh quantities of
chloroform; discard chloroform. Wash the sediment thoroughly in hot water. Take a few mg of
washed material, stain with iodine solution and mount in 50 per cent glycerin. Clarify another few
mg of the material with chloral hydrate and mount in 50 per cent glycerin. Take a few mg of
washed material on glass slide, moisten it with alcoholic solution of phloroglucinol, allow to stand
until nearly dry and mount in 1-2 drops of concentrated hydrochloric acid. Observe the following
characters in different mounts.
Fragment of thick-walled epicarp cells in surface view several showing thin septa division, a few
fibres crossing each other at right angles (Har¢tak¢); simple, short trichomes with a bulbous base,
epicarp tissue showing cicatrices (Bibh¢taka); fragments of polygonal parenchyma cells
containing calcium oxalate crystals, abundant crushed parenchymatous large cells showing
characteristic corner thickenings (Ëmalak¢); large oval as well as circular starch grains, upto 75
µm in length, with hilum at its broader end, resin containing yellow parenchymatous cells, non-
lignified septate fibres several showing dentation on one side owing to pressure exerted by
adjacent parenchyma cells, short, spiral xylem vessels (áu¸¶h¢); fragmented tissue from
hypodermis, with groups of stone cells interspersed among parenchyma tissue, thick-walled
polygonal stone cells from testa (Marica); spindle-shaped sclerenchymatous cells with large
lumen and pitted walls (Pippal¢); in general sclereids of various sizes and shapes are also present.
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of formulation powder in 75 ml of n-hexane under reflux on a water-bath for 30 min.
Filter the extract, concentrate to 25 ml and carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 10 µl
of extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: acetone (9: 1)
as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and examine under ultraviolet
light. It shows major spots at Rf 0.17, 0.35, 0.47 and 0.56 (all fluorescent blue) under 366 nm and
at Rf 0.24, 0.32, 0.38, 0.44 (all black) under 254 nm. Spray the plate with anisaldehyde-sulphuric
acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.25
(yellow), 0.30 (red), and 0.38, 0.48 (both brown) in visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 6 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 2 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 24 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 38 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 13 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (1 % aqueous solution): 3.3 to 3.5, Appendix 3.3

45
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
N¡·¢vra¸a (sinus); DuÀ¶avra¸a (non-healing ulcer); Bhagandara (fistula-in-ano); á£la (pain)

Dose:
3 g daily in divided doses

Anup¡na:
Triphal¡ kv¡tha, Phalatrik¡di kv¡tha, UÀ¸odaka

46
 VARËDI GUGGULU
(AFI Part III, 5:1)
Definition:
Var¡di Guggulu va¶¢ is a preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation Composition
given below with Guggulu as the basic ingredient.
Formulation Composition:
1 Var¡
a. Har¢tak¢ API Terminalia chebula P. 4g
b. Bibh¢taka API Terminalia belerica P. 4g
c. Ëmalak¢ API Emblica officinalis P. 4g
2 Nimba API Azadirachta indica St. Bk. 12 g
3 Arjuna API Terminalia arjuna St. Bk. 12 g
4 A¿vattha API Ficus religiosa St. Bk. 12 g
5 Khadira S¡ra (Khadira API) Acacia catechu Wd. extract 12 g
6 Asana API Pterocarpus marsupium Ht. Wd. 12 g
7 V¡saka (V¡s¡ API) Adhatoda zeylanica Rt. 12 g
8 Guggulu API - áuddha Commiphora wightii O. R. 84 g
Method of preparation:
 Take all the ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Guggulu to prepare Guggulu -áuddha (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 7 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine powder and
mix them all to a homogeneous mixture.
 Crush weighed quantity of áuddha-Guggulu, add fine powder of other mixed ingredients to it
and pound well. Add Gh¤ta to an extent required to facilitate the pounding and continue
pounding till a semi-solid uniformly mixed mass of suitable plasticity is obtained.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
and smeared with Gh¤ta or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.
Description:
Spherical pills, black in colour with agreeable odour, taste bitter

Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about 5 g of the sample, powder it and add chloroform (20 ml); stir for 10 min thoroughly
over a water-bath; pour out chloroform. Repeat the process thrice adding fresh quantities of
47
chloroform; discard chloroform. Wash the sediment thoroughly in hot water. Take a few mg of
washed material, stain with iodine solution and mount in 50 per cent glycerin. Clarify another few
mg with chloral hydrate and mount in 50 per cent glycerin. Take a few mg of washed material on
glass slide, moisten it with alcoholic solution of phloroglucinol, allow to stand until nearly dry
and mount in 1-2 drops of concentrated hydrochloric acid. Observe the following characters in
different mounts.
Fragment of thick-walled epicarp cells in surface view several showing thin septa division, a few
fibres crossing each other at right angles (Har¢tak¢); simple, short trichomes with a bulbous base,
epicarp tissue showing cicatrices (Bibh¢taka); fragments of polygonal parenchyma cells
containing calcium oxalate crystals, abundant crushed parenchymatous large cells showing
characteristic corner thickenings (Ëmalak¢); groups of parenchymatous cells containing isolated
prisms of calcium oxalate crystals, large groups of well developed long thick walled lignified
fibres associated with phloem elements (Nimba); idioblasts upto 600µm or more in size,
containing abundant prisms and rhombs of calcium oxalate crystals, crystal fibres associated with
phloem fibres, cells containing rosette crystals of calcium oxalate, parenchyma cells from cortical
tissue containing rosette crystals (Arjuna); groups of fibres associated with phloem tissue, but
non lignified, thin walled along with thick walled phloem parenchyma containing prismatic
crystals of calcium oxalate, crystal fibres from phloem, with prismatic crystals of calcium oxalate
in each cell (A¿vattha); xylem vessels filled with tyloses, associated with tracheids and fibre
tracheids with thick wall, simple pits and narrow lumen (Asana); tissue from cortex with group of
rectangular stone cells showing distinct pits and pit canals, vessel group with simple pits and
without tyloses, cortical tissue with several cells showing yellow contents (V¡s¡); in general
abundant dark brownish tissues from rhytidoma, associated with stone cells, abundant starch
grains, isolated and compound within parenchymatous cells, abundant loose crystals of calcium
oxalate in the form of prisms, rhombs and rosettes are also present.
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of formulation powder in 75 ml of n-hexane under reflux on a water-bath for 30 min.
Filter the extract, concentrate to 25 ml and carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 10 µl
of extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: acetone (9: 1)
as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and examine under ultraviolet
light. It shows major spots at Rf 0.17, 0.35, 0.41 and 0.56 (all fluorescent blue) under 366 nm and
at Rf 0.32, 0.37 (both black) under 254 nm. Spray the plate with anisaldehyde-sulphuric acid
reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.16, 0.38, 0.48
(all brown) and 0.30 (red) in visible light.
Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 12 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 4.0 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 18 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 29 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 14 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (1 % aqueous solution): 3.5 to 4.2, Appendix 3.3
48
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
UpadaÆ¿a (syphilis/soft chancre); RaktadoÀa (blood disorders); DuÀ¶avra¸a (non-healing ulcer)
Dose:
2 g daily in divided doses
Anup¡na:
Triphal¡ kv¡tha, MaµjiÀ¶h¡di kv¡tha, UÀ¸odaka

49
 VIÚA×GËDI GUGGULU
(AFI Part III, 5:2)

Definition:
Vi·a´g¡di Guggulu va¶¢ is a preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with Guggulu as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Vi·a´ga API Embelia ribes Fr. 60 g
2 Triphal¡
a. Har¢tak¢ API Terminalia chebula P. 20 g
b. Bibh¢taka API Terminalia belerica P. 20 g
c. Ëmalak¢ API Emblica officinalis P. 20 g
3 VyoÀa
a. áu¸¶h¢ API Zingiber officinale Rz. 20 g
b. Marica API Piper nigrum Fr. 20 g
c. Pippal¢ API Piper longum Fr. 20 g
4 Guggulu API - áuddha Commiphora wightii O. R. 180 g
5 Sarpi (Gogh¤ta API) Clarified butter from cow milk – QS

Method of preparation:
 Take all the ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Guggulu to prepare Guggulu - áuddha (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 3 of the formulation composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine powder and
mix them all to a homogeneous mixture.
 Crush weighed quantity of áuddha-Guggulu, add fine powder of other mixed ingredients to it
and pound well. Add Gh¤ta to an extent required to facilitate the pounding and continue
pounding till a semi-solid uniformly mixed mass of suitable plasticity is obtained.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
and smeared with Gh¤ta or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Spherical pills, black in colour with agreeable odour, bitter taste

50
Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about 5 g of the sample, powder it and add chloroform (20 ml); stir for 10 min. thoroughly
over a water-bath; pour out chloroform. Repeat the process thrice adding fresh quantities of
chloroform; discard chloroform. Wash the sediment thoroughly in hot water. Take a few mg of
washed material, stain with iodine solution and mount in 50 per cent glycerin. Clarify another few
mg of the washed material with chloral hydrate and mount in 50 per cent glycerin. Take a few mg
of washed material on glass slide, moist it with alcoholic solution of phloroglucinol, allow to
stand until nearly dry and mount in 1-2 drops of concentrated hydrochloric acid. Observe the
following characters in different mounts.
Fragment of thick-walled epicarp cells in surface view several showing thin septa division, a few
fibres crossing each other at right angles (Har¢tak¢); simple, short trichomes with a bulbous base,
epicarp tissue showing cicatrices (Bibh¢taka); fragments of polygonal parenchyma cells
containing calcium oxalate crystals, abundant crushed parenchymatous large cells showing
characteristic corner thickenings (Ëmalak¢); large oval as well as circular starch grains, upto 75
µm in length, with hilum at its broader end, resin containing yellow parenchymatous cells, non-
lignified septate fibres several showing dentation on one side owing to pressure exerted by
adjacent parenchyma cells, short, spiral xylem vessels (áu¸¶h¢); fragmented tissue from
hypodermis, with groups of stone cells interspersed among parenchyma tissue, thick-walled
polygonal stone cells from testa (Marica); spindle-shaped sclerenchymatous cells with large
lumen and pitted walls (Pippal¢); stone cell layers with prominent pits and narrow lumen from
testa, lignified scelerieds with broad lumen and pitted walls from testa layers, associated with
parenchymatous cells containing prisms of calcium oxalate (Vi·a´ga); in general sclereids of
various sizes and shapes are also seen.
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of formulation powder in 75 ml of n-hexane under reflux on a water-bath for 30 min.
Filter the extract, concentrate to 25 ml and carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 10 µl
of extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: acetone (9: 1)
as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and examine under ultraviolet
light. It shows major spots at Rf 0.11, 0.27, 0.33 and 0.48 (all fluorescent blue) under 366 nm and
at Rf 0.17, 0.26, 0.32, 0.38 (all black) under 254 nm. Spray the plate with anisaldehyde-sulphuric
acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.23 (red),
0.33 (black) and 0.43 (brown) in visible light.
Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 6 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 2 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 23 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 30 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 13 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (1 % aqueous solution): 3.0 to 4.0, Appendix 3.3

51
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
DuÀ¶a vra¸a (non-healing ulcer); Apac¢ (chronic lymphadenopathy/scrofula); Meha (excessive
flow of urine); KuÀ¶ha (diseases of skin); N¡·¢vra¸a (sinus)

Dose:
12 g daily in divided doses

Anup¡na:
Triphal¡ kv¡tha, áigru kv¡tha, Madhu, UÀ¸odaka

52
 TAILA
General Descripition:
Tailas are preparations in which Taila is boiled with prescribed liquid media [Svarasa /
Kv¡tha Etc.] and a fine paste [Kalka] of the drugs specified in the formulation composition.
Unless specified otherwise Taila means Tila Taila.
General Method of Preparation:
1. The Taila preferably should be fresh.
2. There are usually three essential components in the manufacture of Taila Kalpan¡.
a. Drava [Any liquid medium as prescribed in the composition]
b. Kalka [Fine paste of the specified drug]
c. Sneha dravya [Fatty medium -Taila]
and, occasionally,
d. Gandha dravya [Perfuming agents]
3. Unless otherwise specified in the verse, if Kalka is one part by weight, Taila should be
four parts and the Drava dravya should be sixteen parts.
4. There are a few exceptions for the above general rule:
a. Where Drava dravya is either Kv¡tha or Svarasa, the ratio of Kalka should be
one-sixth and one-eighth respectively to that of Taila.
If the Drava dravya is either KÀ¢ra or Dadhi or M¡Æsa rasa or Takra, the ratio
of Kalka should be one-eighth to that of Taila.
When flowers are advised for use as Kalka, it should be one-eighth to that of
Taila.
b. Where the numbers of Drava dravyas are four or less than four, the total
quantity should be four times to that of Taila.
c. Where the number of Drava dravyas is more than four, each drava should be
equal to that of Taila.
d. If, Kalka dravya is not prescribed in a formulation, the drugs specified for the
Drava dravya [Kv¡tha or Svarasa] should be used for the preparation of Kalka.
e. Where no Drava dravya is prescribed in a formulation, four parts of water
should be added to one part of Taila.

5. In general, the Taila should be subjected to M£rcchana process, followed by addition of

increments of Kalka and Drava dravya in specified ratio. The contents are to be stirred
continuously thoroughout the process in order to avoid charring.

53
 6. The process of boiling is to be continued till the whole amount of moisture gets
evaporated and characteristic features of Taila appear.
7. The whole process of P¡ka should be carried out on a mild to moderate flame.
8. Three stages of P¡ka are specified for therapeutic purposes.
a. M¤du P¡ka: In this stage, the Kalka looks waxy and when rolled between
fingers, it rolls like lac without sticking. The Taila obtained at this stage is used
for Nasya [Nasal instillation].
b. Madhyama P¡ka: In this stage, the Kalka becomes harder and rolls in to Varti. It
burns without crackling sounds when exposed to fire and phena [Froth] will
appear over the Taila. Taila obtained at this stage is used for P¡na [Internal
administration] and Basti [Enema].
c. Khara P¡ka: Further heating of the Taila, leads to Khara P¡ka. Kalka becomes
brittle when rolled in between fingers. The Taila obtained at this stage is used
only for Abhya´ga [External application].
9. The period of P¡ka depends upon the nature of liquid media used in the process.
a. Takra or Ëranala 5 Nights
b. Svarasa 3 Nights
c. KÀ¢ra 2 Nights
10. P¡tra p¡ka: It is the process by which the Taila is augmented or flavored by certain
prescribed substances. The powdered drugs are suspended in a vessel containing warm,
filtered Taila.
The medicated Taila will have the odour, colour and taste of the drugs used in the process. If a
considerable amount of milk is used in the preparation, the Taila will become thick and may
solidify in cold seasons.
Tailas are preserved in good quality of glass, steel or polythene containers. These medicated
preparations retain the therapeutic efficacy for sixteen months.

54
 AÛU TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:1)
Definition:
A¸u Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.
Formulation Composition:
1 J¢vant¢ API Leptadenia reticulata Rt. 28 g
2 Jala (Hr¢vera API) Coleus vettiveroides Rt. 28 g
3 Devad¡ru API Cedrus deodara Ht. Wd. 28 g
4 Jalada (Must¡ API) Cyperus rotundus Rz. 28 g
5 Tvak API Cinnamomum zeylanicum St. Bk. 28 g
6 Sevya (U¿¢ra API) Vetiveria zizanioides Rt. 28 g
7 Gop¢ (áveta S¡riv¡ API) Hemidesmus indicus Rt. 28 g
8 Hima (áveta Candana API) Santalum album Ht. Wd. 28 g
9 D¡rv¢ (D¡ruharidr¡ API) Berberis aristata St. 28 g
10 Madhuka (YaÀ¶¢ API) Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 28 g
11 Plava (Kaivarta Must¡ (API)) Cyperus scariosus Rz. 28 g
12 Agaru API Aquilaria agallocha Ht. Wd. 28 g
13 Var¢ (áat¡var¢ API) Asparagus racemosus Rt. 28 g
14 Pu¸·r¡hva (Prapau¸·ar¢ka API) Nelumbo nucifera Fl. 28 g
15 Bilva API Aegle marmelos Rt.∗/ St. Bk. 28 g
16 Utpala API Nymphaea stellata Fl. 28 g
17 Dh¡van¢dvaya
a. B¤hat¢ API Solanum indicum Pl. 28 g
b. Ka¸¶ak¡r¢ API Solanum surratense Pl. 28 g
(= S. xanthocarpum)
18 Surabhi (R¡sn¡ API) Alpinia officinarum** Rz. 28 g
19 Sthir¡dvaya
a. á¡lapar¸¢ API Desmodium gangeticum Pl. 28 g
b. P¤¿nipar¸¢ API Uraria picta Pl. 28 g
20 K¤imihara (Vi·a´ga API) Embelia ribes Fr. 28 g
21 Patra (Tvakpatra API) Cinnamomum tamala Lf. 28 g
22 Tru¶i (S£kÀmail¡ API) Elettaria cardamomum Sd. 28 g
23 Re¸uk¡ API Vitex negundo Sd. 28 g
24 Kamalakiµjalka (Kamala API) Nelumbo nucifera Adr. 28 g
25 Jala API for decoction Potable Water – 72.800 l
reduced to 7.280 l
26 Drugs 1-24 for Kalka 122 g

∗
Actual part used in the formulation
** Official Substitute
55
27 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 728 ml
28 Ëjadugdha (Aj¡dugdha API) Goat milk – QS ∗

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 24 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Divide the kv¡tha dravya in 10 equal parts and store separately. Add water for decoction 10
times to one part of kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the volume to one-tenth.
Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Wash, clean, dry the drugs under ingredient number 26 (kalka dravya) of the Formulation
Composition, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to
obtain fine powder. Transfer the powdered ingredients to wet grinder and grind with sufficient
quantity of water to prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding one part of kv¡tha.
 Heat with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the first
hour of heating. Stop the heating when the kalka gets separated at the bottom of the vessel in
the form of loose paste (m¤du p¡ka lakÀa¸a) and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama)
over the oil. Allow to stand overnight.
 Repeat the process for nine more times each day adding one part of freshly prepared kv¡tha.
In last i.e. 10th p¡ka, along with the kv¡tha, add Aj¡dugdha .
 On the last day, constantly check the kalka by rolling between the fingers. Stop the heating
when the kalka easily rolls into a varti without sticking (madhyama p¡ka lakÀa¸a) to the
fingers and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the varti and oil to
flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, reddish brown in colour with characteristic odour

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 1 ml of formulation with 10 ml of methanol. Allow the mixture to stand till the two layers
separate. Separate the methanolic layer, filter and carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply
5 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl
acetate: chloroform: methanol (8: 0.5: 0.5: 0.2) as mobile phase. Spray the plate with 10 per cent

∗
equal to Taila obtained after 9th P¡ka
56
methanolic sulphuric acid followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. It shows spots at Rf 0.15,
0.48, 0.60, 0.73 and 0.81 (all brown).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4646 to 1.4659, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.760 to 0.771, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 188 to 200, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 88 to 106, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 3, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
TvakraukÀya (dryness of skin); Palita (greying of hair); Írdhvajatrugata roga (diseases of head
and neck); Skandha ¿uÀkat¡ (emaciation of shoulder); Gr¢v¡ ¿uÀkat¡ (wasting in cervical region);
VakÀa ¿uÀkat¡ (emaciation of chest muscles)

Dose:
5 to 10 drops per nostril as Nasya

57
 APËMËRGA KâËRA TAILA
(AFI Part II, 8:1)

Definition:
Ap¡m¡rga KÀ¡ra Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the
Formulation Composition given below with Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 M¡rga KÀ¡ra Achyranthes aspera Water soluble ash of Pl. 16 parts
(Ap¡m¡rga KÀ¡ra API)
2 Jala API Potable Water – 96 parts
3 Ap¡m¡rga API Achyranthes aspera Pl. 6 parts
4 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 24 parts

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Add 6 parts of water to 1 part of KÀ¡ra (Appendix 6.2.3), and dissolve completely (KÀ¡ra
jala).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredient number 3 of the Formulation Composition, powder and pass
through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) (kalka dravya).
 Transfer the powder to wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to prepare
homogenous blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Tila Taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka. Stir thoroughly while adding the KÀ¡ra jala.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the
first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Continue the process of heating intermittently over a period of three days. Constantly check
the kalka by rolling between the fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka breaks down into pieces on attempting to form a varti (khara
p¡ka lakÀa¸a). Expose the kalka and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound
indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, pink in colour

58
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 1 ml of formulation with 10 ml of methanol and keep the mixture over night with
occasional shakings. Allow the two layers to separate and carry out the thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl of the extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8
cm using dichloromethane: toluene: methanol (7: 2: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow
the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with Liebermann Burchard reagent followed by heating at
1050 for about 10 min and examine under ultraviolet light (366 nm). It shows major spots at Rf
0.45 (light purple), 0.60 (light blue), 0.65 (fluorescent blue) and 0.80 (cream).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4600 to 1.4805, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.895 to 0.924, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 182 to 202, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 100 to 110, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 3.0, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 3, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Kar¸an¡da (tinnitus); B¡dhirya (deafness)

Dose:
Ear drops - 2 to 5 drops in each ear once or twice a day

59
 ARIMEDËDI TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:2)

Definition:
Arimed¡di Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Khadira API Acacia catechu Wd. 9.600 kg
2 Arimedavalka (Arimeda API) Acacia leucophloea St. Bk. 4.800 kg
3 Jala API for decoction Potable Water – 49.152 l
reduced to 12.288 l
4 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 3.072 l
5 Sevya (U¿¢ra API) Vetiveria zizanioides Rt. 12 g
6 Ambu (Hr¢vera API) Coleus vettiveroides Rt. 12 g
7 Patta´ga API Caesalpinia sappan Ht. Wd. 12 g
8 Gairika API- áuddha Red ochre – 12 g
9 Candanadvaya
a. áveta candana API Santalum album Ht. Wd. 12 g
b. Rakta candana API Pterocarpus santalinus Ht. Wd. 12 g
10 Rodhra (Lodhra API) Symplocos racemosa St. Bk. 12 g
11 Pu¸·r¡hva (Prapau¸·ar¢ka API) Nelumbo nucifera Fl. 12 g
12 YaÀ¶y¡hva (Ya¿¶¢ API) Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 12 g
13 L¡kÀ¡ (API ) Lacca laccifera Secretion of 12 g
Lac insect
14 Aµjanadvaya
a. Ras¡µjana (API) Berberis aristata St. Ext. 12 g
b. Sauv¢r¡µjana (API) - áuddha Lead sulphide – 12 g
15 Dh¡tak¢ API Woodfordia fruticosa Fl. 12 g
16 Ka¶phala API Myrica esculenta St. Bk. 12 g
17 Dvini¿¡
a. Haridr¡ API Curcuma longa Rz. 12 g
b. D¡ruharidr¡ API Berberis aristata St. 12 g
18 Triphl¡
a. Har¢tak¢ API Terminalia chebula P. 12 g
b. Bibh¢taka API Terminalia belerica P. 12 g
c. Ëmalak¢ API Emblica officinalis P. 12 g
19 Caturj¡ta
a. Tvak API Cinnamomum zeylanicum St. Bk. 12 g
b. S£kÀmail¡ API Elettaria cardamomum Sd. 12 g
c. Tvakpatra API Cinnamomum tamala Lf. 12 g
d. N¡gake¿ara API Mesua ferrea Stmn. 12 g

60
20 Jo´gaka (Agaru API) Aquilaria agallocha Ht. Wd. 12 g
21 Musta (Must¡ API) Cyperus rotundus Rz. 12 g
22 MaµjiÀ¶h¡ API Rubia cordifolia St. 12 g
23 Nyagrodhapraroha (Nyagrodhaja¶¡ API) Ficus benghalensis A. Rt. 12 g
24 M¡Æs¢ (Ja¶¡m¡Æs¢ API) Nardostachys jatamansi Rz./ Rt. 12 g
25 Yav¡saka API Alhagi pseudalhagi Pl. 12 g
26 Padmaka API Prunus cerasoides Ht. Wd. 12 g
27 Aileya (Elav¡luka API) Prunus avium St. Bk. 12 g
28 Sama´g¡ (Lajj¡lu API) Mimosa pudica Pl. 12 g
29 J¡t¢patrik¡ (J¡t¢phala API) Myristica fragrans Ar. 48 g
30 J¡t¢phala API Myristica fragrans Sd. 48 g
31 Lava´ga API Syzygium aromaticum Fl. Bd. 48 g
32 Ka´kolik¡ (Ka´kola API) Piper cubeba Fr. 48 g
33 Karp£ra API Cinnamomum camphora Subl. Ext. of 192 g
A. Pt.
Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Treat Gairika to prepare Gairika - áuddha (Appendix [Link]) and Sauvir¡µjana to prepare
Sauv¢r¡µjana - áuddha (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 and 2 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the volume to
one-fourth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Wash, dry the ingredients numbered 5 to 7, 9 to 13 and 15 to 32 of the Formulation
Composition, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to
obtain fine powder.
 Transfer the powdered ingredients to wet grinder alongwith Gairika - áuddha, Ras¡µjana and
Sauv¢r¡µjana - áuddha, and grind with sufficient quantity of water to prepare homogeneous
blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding kv¡tha.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during
the first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Continue the process of heating intermittently over a period of three days. Constantly check
the kalka by rolling between the fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka easily rolls into a varti without sticking (Madhyama p¡ka
lakÀa¸a) to the fingers and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the
varti and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Powder Karp£ra, pass through 355 µm IS Sieve, add to the oil and mix homogeneously.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.
61
Description:
Medicated oil, yellowish red in colour with a pleasant odour
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
a) Shake 1 ml of formulation with 10 ml of methanol for 10 min and keep the mixture for 12 h at
370. Filter and carry out thin layer chromatography. Apply 3 µl of the extract on a TLC plate.
Develop the plate up to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate (9: 1) as mobile phase.
After development, allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with10 per cent methanolic
sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. The plate shows major spots
at Rf 0.16, 0.22 (both faint brown), 0.30, 0.60 (both yellow) 0.35 (faint purple), 0.42 (light
purple), 0.48 (light yellow), 0.74 (light brown), 0.86 (brown) in visible light.
b) Detection of Eugenol:
Extract 0.5 ml of formulation with 10 ml of chloroform for 15 min and filter.
Dissolve 1 mg of eugenol in 10 ml of chloroform.
Apply 5 µl each of the sample extract and eugenol solution on TLC plate and develop the plate to
8 cm using toluene: chloroform: acetone (3: 5: 0.2) as mobile phase. After development, allow the
plate to dry in air, spray anisaldehyde reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about10 min. The
plate shows a spot at Rf 0.62 (brown corresponding to eugenol) in visible light.
Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4646 to 1.4665, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.8123 g to 0.839, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 180 to 190, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 95 to 105, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 3, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
Mukha roga (diseases of mouth), Danta roga (diseases of tooth), N¡s¡ roga (diseases of nose)
Dose:
Nasya: 5 to 10 drops per nostril;
External use: for Kavalagraha (gargling), local application in buccal cavity and áirodh¡r¡
62
 ASANABILVËDI TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:3)

Definition:
Asanabilv¡di Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Asana API Pterocarpus marsupium Ht. Wd. 384 g
2 Bilva API Aegle marmelos Rt.∗ /St. Bk. 384 g
3 Bal¡ API Sida cordifolia Pl. 384 g
4 Am¤ta (Gu·£c¢ API) Tinospora cordifolia St. 384 g
5 Jala API for decoction Potable Water – 12.288 l
reduced to 3.072 l
6 Madhuka (YaÀ¶¢ API) Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 25.6 g
7 N¡garaka (áu¸¶h¢ API) Zingiber officinale Rz. 25.6 g
8 Triphal¡
a. Har¢tak¢ API Terminalia chebula P. 25.6 g
b. Bibh¢taka API Terminalia bellirica P. 25.6 g
c. Ëmalak¢ API Emblica officinalis P. 25.6 g
9 Payas (Godugdha (API) ) Cow milk – 768 ml
10 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 768 ml

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 4 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the volume to
one-fourth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Wash, dry the ingredients numbered 6 to 8 (kalka dravya) of the Formulation Composition,
powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine
powder.
 Transfer the powdered ingredients to wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding kv¡tha.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during
the first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.

∗
Part actually used in the formulation
63
 Next day, add Godugdha and continue the process of heating. Constantly check the kalka by
rolling between the fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka easily rolls into a varti without sticking (Madhyama p¡ka
lakÀa¸a) to the fingers and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the
varti and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.
Description:
Medicated oil, brown in colour with the characteristic odour of sesame oil
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 2 g of formulation with 10 ml of toluene for 10 min and keep the mixture for 12 h at 370.
Filter and dilute the extract in toluene in the proportion of 1: 4. Apply 5 µl of the diluted extract
on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: methanol:
glacial acetic acid (6: 0.5: 0.2: 0.1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in
air. Spray the plate with Liebermann Burchard reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10
min. The plate shows major spots at Rf 0.41, 0.47, 0.58, 0.67 and 0.77 (all brown) in visible light.
Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4646 to 1.4665, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.920 to 0.931, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 180 to 190, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 100 to 110 Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 3, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
Nayana roga (diseases of the eye); Kar¸a roga (diseases of the ear); áiroroga (diseases of head)

Dose:
External use - for Abhya´ga (massage on whole body)
Nasya - 2 to 4 drops per nostril once or twice a day
Eye drops - 2 to 4 drops once or twice a day
Ear drops - 5 to 10 drops once or twice a day
64
 BALË TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:33)

Definition:
Bal¡ Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Bal¡ (API) Sida cordifolia Rt. 4.800 kg
2 Chinnaruh¡ (Gu·£c¢ API) Tinospora cordifolia St. 1.200 kg
3 R¡sn¡ API Alpinia officinarum∗ Rz. 0.600 kg
4 Jala API for decoction Potable Water – 30.720 l
reduced to 3.072 l
5 Dadhimastu (Godadhi (API)) Whey from curd of cow milk – 3.072 l
6 IkÀu Niry¡sa (IkÀu API) Saccharum officinarum St. juice 3.072 l
7 áukta (K¡µjika (API)) Sour gruel – 3.072 l
8 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 3.072 l
9 Ëjapaya (Aj¡dugdha (API)) Goat milk – 1.536 l
10 áa¶h¢ (áa¶¢ API) Hedychium spicatum Rz. 48 g
11 Sarala API Pinus roxburghii Ht. Wd. 48 g
12 D¡ru (Devad¡ru API) Cedrus deodara Ht. Wd. 48 g
13 El¡ (S£kÀmail¡ API) Elettaria cardamomum Sd. 48 g
14 MaµjiÀ¶h¡ API Rubia cordifolia Rt. 48 g
15 Aguru (Agaru API) Aquilaria agallocha Ht. Wd. 48 g
16 Candana (Rakta candana API) Pterocarpus santalinus Ht. Wd. 48 g
17 Padmaka API Prunus cerasoides Ht. Wd. 48 g
18 Atibal¡ API Abutilon indicum Rt. 48 g
19 Must¡ API Cyperus rotundus Rz. 48 g
20 á£rpapar¸¢dvaya
a. Mudgapar¸¢ API Vigna trilobata Pl. 48 g
b. M¡Àapar¸¢ API Teramnus labialis Pl. 48 g
21 Hare¸u (Re¸uk¡ (API)) Vitex negundo* Fr 48 g
22 YaÀ¶y¡hva (YaÀ¶¢ API) Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 48 g
23 Surasa (Tulas¢ API) Ocimum sanctum Pl. 48 g
24 Vy¡ghranakha API Capparis sepiaria Fr. 48 g
25 ÎÀabhaka (API) Pueraria tuberosa* Rt. Tr. 48 g
26 J¢vaka API Pueraria tuberosa* Rt .Tr. 48 g
27 Pal¡¿a rasa (Pal¡¿a (API)) Butea monosperma Exd. 48 g

∗
Official Substitute
65
28 N¢lik¡ (N¢l¢ API) Indigofera tinctoria Pl. 48 g
29 J¡tiko¿a (J¡tipatr¢ (API)) Myrstica fragrans Ar. 48 g
30 Sp¤kk¡ API Anisomeles malabarica Pl. 48 g
31 Ku´kuma API Crocus sativus Stmn./Stg. 48 g
32 áaileya API Parmelia perlata Pl. 48 g
33 J¡tik¡ (J¡t¢phala API) Myrstica fragrans Sd. 48 g
34 Ka¶phala API Myrica esculenta St. Bk. 48 g
(= M. nagi)
35 Ambu (Hr¢vera API) Coleus vettiveroides Rt. 48 g
36 Tvak API Cinnamomum zeylanicum St. Bk. 48 g
37 Kunduruka (Kunduru API) Boswellia serrata Exd. 48 g
38 Karp£ra API Cinnamomum camphora Subl. Ext. 48 g
of A. Pt.
39 TuruÀka API Altingia excelsa∗ Exd. 48 g
40 ár¢niv¡saka (Sarala API) Pinus roxburghii Exd. 48 g
41 Lava´ga API Syzygium aromaticum Fr. Bd. 48 g
42 Nakha (Vy¡ghranakha API) Capparis sepiaria Fr. 48 g
43 Ka´kola API Piper cubeba Fr. 48 g
44 Ku˦ha API Saussurea lappa Rt. 48 g
45 M¡Æs¢ (Ja¶¡m¡Æs¢API) Nardostachys jatamansi Rz. 48 g
46 Priya´gu API Callicarpa macrophylla Fl. 48 g
47 Sthau¸eya API Taxus baccata Lf. 48 g
48 Tagara API Valeriana wallichii Rz. 48 g
49 Dhy¡ma (RohiÀa API) Cymbopogon martinii Pl. 48 g
50 Vac¡ API Acorus calamus Rz. 48 g
51 Madanaka (Madana API) Xeromphis spinosa Fr. 48 g
52 Plava (Kaivarta Must¡ (API) ) Cyperus scariosus Rz. 48 g
53 N¡gakesara (N¡gake¿ara API) Mesua ferrea Stmn. 48 g

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 A day prior to the sneha p¡ka, initiate to prepare Mastu (Appendix 6.2.5).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 3 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the volume to
one-tenth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Wash and clean the cut pieces of IkÀu, and squeeze the juice and strain through muslin cloth
to obtain IkÀu svarasa.
 Strain the Aj¡dugdha through muslin cloth.
∗
Official Substitute
66
 Wash, dry the ingredients numbered 10 to 37 and 39 to 53 (kalka dravya) of the Formulation
Composition, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to
obtain fine powder. Transfer the powdered ingredients to wet grinder and grind with sufficient
quantity of water to prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding kv¡tha and svarasa.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the
first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Next day, add Aj¡dugdha, Mastu and K¡µjika and continue the process of heating
intermittently over a period of five days. Constantly check the kalka by rolling between the
fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka easily rolls into a varti without sticking (madhyama p¡ka
lakÀa¸a) to the fingers and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the
varti and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Powder Karp£ra, pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44), add to the oil and mix
homogeneously.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.
Description:
Medicated oil, light golden yellow in color with a pleasant odour
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 2 ml of the formulation with 20 ml of alcohol for 3 h. Allow the two layers to separate.
Separate the alcohol layer, filter and concentrate to 5 ml and carry out the thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl of the extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8
cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: n-hexane (6: 3: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the
plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with ethanol-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050
for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.32, 0.43, 0.53 and 0.62 in visible light.
Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4651 to 1.4680, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.915 to 0.940, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 188 to 200, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 80 to 100, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12
67
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Chardi (emesis); Gulma (abdominal lump); K¡sa (cough); áv¡sa (asthma); Jvara (fever);
M£rcch¡ (syncope); KÀata (wound); KÀaya (pthisis); Apasm¡ra (epilepsy); V¡tavy¡dhi (diseases
due to v¡ta doÀa); Pl¢h¡ (splenic disease); áoÀa (emaciation/cachexia)

Dose:
5-10 ml per day in divided doses;
Also for external use

68
 BALËHAÙHËDI TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:37)

Definition:
Bal¡ha¶h¡di Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Bal¡ (API) Sida cordifolia Rt. 307.2 g
2 Ha¶h¡ (Ëmalak¢ API) Emblica officinalis P. 307.2 g
3 Am¤t¡ (Gu·£c¢ API) Tinospora cordifolia St. 307.2 g
4 Mudga API Phaseolus radiatus Sd. 307.2 g
5 M¡Àa API Phaseolus mungo Sd. 307.2 g
6 Jala API for decoction Potable Water – 12.288 l
reduced to 3.072 l
7 Tilodbhava (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 768 ml
8 Candana (Rakta Candana API) Pterocarpus santalinus Ht. Wd. 42.66 g
9 Ëmaya (KuÀ¶ha API) Saussurea lappa Rt. 42.66 g
10 YaÀ¶i (YaÀ¶¢ API) Glycyrriza glabra Rt. 42.66 g

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 3 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Wash and clean the ingredient number 4 and 5 of the Formulation Composition and tie them
in a muslin cloth bundle.
 Add water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya, soak for 4 h, immerse the bundle in it and heat
and reduce the volume to one-fourth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 8 to 10 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) (kalka dravya).
 Transfer the kalka dravya to the wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Tila Taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding kv¡tha.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during
the first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Continue the process of heating intermittently over a period of three days. Constantly check
the kalka by rolling between the fingers.

69
 Stop the heating when the kalka breaks down into pieces on attempting to form a varti (khara
p¡ka lakÀa¸a) and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the kalka and
oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, brownish yellow in colour with a pleasant odour

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 2 g of the formulation with 20 ml of alcohol for 3 h. Allow the two layers to separate.
Separate the alcohol layer, filter and concentrate to 5 ml and carry out the thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl of the extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8
cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: n- hexane (6: 3: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the
plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with ethanol-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050
for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.16, 0.22, 0.27, 0.32, 0.43, 0.53 and 0.75 (all pink
changing to purple) in visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4650 to 1.4620, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.929 to 0.936, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 175 to 190, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 84 to 94, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 5, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
áiroruj¡ (headache)

Dose:
External application for áiro-abhya´ga

70
 BHÎ×GARËJA TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:42)

Definition:
Bh¤´gar¡ja Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 M¡rkava Svarasa (Bh¤´gar¡ja API) Eclipta alba Pl. 3.072 l
2 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 768 ml
3 MaµjiÀ¶h¡ API Rubia cordifolia Rt. 48 g
4 Padmaka API Prunus cerasoides Ht. Wd. 48 g
5 Lodhra API Symplocos racemosa St. Bk. 48 g
6 Candana (Rakta Candana API) Pterocarpus santalinus Ht. Wd. 48 g
7 Gairika API - áuddha Red ochre – 48 g
8 Bal¡ API Sida cordifolia Rt. 48 g
9 Rajan¢dvaya
a. Haridr¡ API Curcuma longa Rz. 48 g
b. D¡ruharidr¡ API Berberis aristata St. 48 g
10 Ke¿ara (N¡gake¿ara API) Mesua ferrea Stmn. 48 g
11 Priya´gu API Callicarpa macrophylla Fl. 48 g
12 MadhuyaÀ¶ik¡ (YaÀ¶¢ API) Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 48 g
13 Prapau¸·ar¢ka API Nelumbo nucifera Rt. 48 g
14 Gop¢ (áveta S¡riv¡ API) Hemidesmus indicus Rt. 48 g
Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Treat Gairika to prepare Gairika - áuddha (Appendix [Link]).
 Take fresh Bh¤´gar¡ja and wash thoroughly with water. Grind and filter through muslin cloth
to obtain svarasa.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 3 to 6 and 8 to 14 of the Formulation Composition,
powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) (kalka dravya).
 Transfer the kalka dravya to the wet grinder alongwith Gairika - áuddha and grind with
sufficient quantity of water to prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Tila Taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding svarasa.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during
the first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Continue the process of heating intermittently over a period of three days. Constantly check
the kalka by rolling between the fingers.

71
 Stop the heating when the kalka breaks down into pieces on attempting to form a varti (khara
p¡ka lakÀa¸a) and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the kalka and
oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.
Description:
A medicated oil, light brownish yellow in color with a pleasant odour
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 2 ml of the formulation with 20 ml of alcohol for 3 h. Allow the two layers to separate.
Separate the alcohol layer, filter and concentrate to 5 ml and carry out the thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl of the extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8
cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: n-hexane (6: 3: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the
plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with ethanol-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050
for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.18, 0.23, 0.29, 0.34, 0.44 and 0.77 (all pink
changing to black) in visible light.
Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4651 to 1.4660, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.910 to 0.932, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 188 to 194, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 90 to 100, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
Ke¿ap¡ta (loss of hair); Netraroga (diseases of eyes); Kar¸aroga (diseases of ear); áiroroga
(diseases of head); Many¡stambha (neck rigidity/torticollis); Galagraha (difficulty in swallowing);
Kh¡litya (premature baldness); Indralupta (alopecia areata)
Dose:
External application over the scalp for áiro-Abhya´ga

72
 BÎHAT SAINDHAVËDYA TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:40)

Definition:
B¤hat Saindhav¡dya Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the
Formulation Composition given below with m£rcchita Era¸·a taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Saindhava (Saindhava Lava¸a (API)) Rock salt – 24 g
2 áreyas¢ (Gajapippal¢ API) Scindapsus officinalis Fr. 24 g
3 R¡sn¡ API Alpinia galanga∗ Rz. 24 g
4 áatapuÀp¡ (áat¡hv¡ API) Anethum sowa Fr. 24 g
5 Yam¡nik¡ (Yav¡n¢ API) Trachyspermum ammi Fr. 24 g
6 Sarjik¡ (Svarj¢kÀ¡ra (API)) Crude alkaline earth – 24 g
7 Marica API Piper nigrum Fr. 24 g
8 Ku˦ha API Saussurea lappa Rt. 24 g
9 áu¸¶h¢ API Zingiber officinale Rz. 24 g
10 Sauvarcala (Sauvarcala Lava¸a (API)) Black salt – 24 g
11 Vi·a (Vi·a Lava¸a (API)) 24 g
12 Vac¡ API Acorus calamus Rz. 24 g
13 Ajamod¡ API Apium leptophyllum Fr. 24 g
14 Madhuka (YaÀ¶¢ API) Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 24 g
15 J¢raka (áveta J¢raka API) Cuminum cyminum Fr. 24 g
16 PauÀkara (PuÀkara API) Inula racemosa Rt. 24 g
17 Ka¸¡ (Pippal¢ API) Piper longum Fr. 24 g
18 Era¸·a Taila (API) Ricinus communis Sd. oil 768 ml
19 áatapuÀpaj¡mbu (áat¡hv¡ API) Anethum sowa Fr. 192 g
Jala API for pha¸¶a Potable Water – 768 ml
20 K¡µjika (API) Sour gruel – 1.536 l
21 Mastu (Godadhi (API)) Curd whey from cow milk – 1.536 l

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Era¸·a taila to prepare m£rcchita Era¸·a taila (Appendix [Link]).
 A day prior to the sneha p¡ka, initiate to prepare Mastu (Appendix 6.2.5).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredient number 19 of the Formulation Composition, powder and pass
through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (ph¡¸¶a dravya).

∗
Official Substitute
73
 Add boiling water to the ph¡¸¶a dravya and soak. Filter when luke warm through muslin cloth
to obtain pha¸¶a.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 2 to 9 and 12 to 17 of the Formulation
Composition, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85). Roast
coarsely powdered Saindhava Lava¸a, Sauvarcala Lava¸a and Vi·a Lava¸a in a stainless
steel pan on low flame till free from moisture, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS
Sieve (sieve number 85) (kalka dravya).
 Transfer the kalka dravya to the wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Era¸·a Taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding ph¡¸¶a.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during
the first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Next day, add Mastu and K¡µjika and continue the process of heating intermittently over a
period of five days. Constantly check the kalka by rolling between the fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka easily rolls into a varti without sticking (madhyama p¡ka
lakÀa¸a) to the fingers and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the
varti and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, golden yellow in color, odour unpleasant and characteristic of castor oil

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 2 ml of the formulation with 20 ml of alcohol for 3 h. Allow the two layers to separate.
Separate the alcohol layer, filter and concentrate to 5 ml and carry out the thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl of the extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8
cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: n-hexane (6: 3: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the
plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with ethanol-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050
for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.25, 0.43, 0.64 and 0.71 in visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4601 to 1.4670, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.947 to 0.974, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 178 to 200, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 70 to 90, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 10, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 5, Appendix 3.10

74
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Ën¡ha (distension of abdomen); Ëntrav¤ddhi (hernia); M£trak¤cchra (dysuria); A¿mar¢
(calculus); H¤t¿£la (angina pectoris); P¡r¿va¿£la (intercostal neuralgia and polydynia); Ardita
(facial palsy); Ëmav¡ta (rheumatism); Sandhigata V¡ta (osteoarthropathy); Mand¡gni (reduced
digestive fire); V¡ta roga (diseases due to v¡ta doÀa); Ka¶i¿£la (lower backache); J¡nu¿£la (pain
in the knee); Íru¿£la (pain in the thigh region); P¤À¶ha¿£la (backache); B¡hy¡y¡ma
(opisthotonus)

Dose:
5 ml per day in divided doses; also used for Abhya´ga and Basti

75
 CITRAKËDI TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:16)

Definition:
Citrak¡di Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:

1 Citraka API Plumbago zeylanica Rt. 16 g

2 Arkam£la (Arka API) Calotropis procera Rt. 16 g
3 Triv¤t API Ipomoea turpethum Rt. 16 g
4 P¡¶h¡ API Cissampelos pareira Rt. 16 g
5 Malap£ (Phalgu API ) Ficus hispida Rt. Bk. 16 g
6 Hayam¡raka (Karav¢ra API) Nerium indicum Rt. Bk. 16 g
7 Sudh¡ (Snuh¢ API) Euphorbia neriifolia Rt. 16 g
8 Vac¡ API Acorus calamus Rz 16 g
9 L¡´galak¢ (L¡´gal¢ API ) Gloriosa superba Rz./Rt. 16 g
10 Saptapar¸a API Alstonia scholaris St. Bk. 16 g
11 Suvarcik¡ (Svarj¢kÀ¡ra (API)) Crude alkaline earth – 16 g
12 JyotiÀmat¢ API Celastrus paniculatus Sd. 16 g
13 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 768 ml
14 Jala API Potable Water – 3.072 l

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Treat Citraka to prepare Citraka - áuddha (Appendix [Link]), Karav¢ra to prepare Karav¢ra -
áuddha (Appendix [Link]), and L¡´gal¢ to prepare L¡´gal¢ - áuddha (Appendix [Link]);
powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine
powder.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 2 to 5, 7, 8, 10 and 12 of the Formulation
Composition, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to
obtain fine powder.
 Roast Svarj¢kÀ¡ra in a stainless steel pan on low flame till free from moisture.
 Transfer all the ingredients to wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding water.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during
the first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.

76
 Continue the process of heating intermittently over a period of three days. Constantly check
the kalka by rolling between the fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka breaks down into pieces on attempting to form a varti (khara
p¡ka lakÀa¸a) and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the kalka and
oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, reddish brown in colour with a faint odour

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 1 ml and carry out thin layer chromatography of formulation with 10 ml of chloroform and
keep the mixture for 12 h at 370. Filter the extract. Apply 3 µl of the extract on TLC plate.
Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: glacial acetic acid (8: 2: 0.1)
as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with 10 per cent
methanolic sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. The plate shows
major spots at Rf 0.37, 0.42, 0.50 (all reddish brown) and 0.55 (brown) in visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4646 to 1.4665, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.832 to 0.854, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 185 to 200, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 95 to 105, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 5, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 3, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Bhagandara (fistula- in- ano)

Dose:
External use: for Abhya´ga (massage on whole body) and local application
77
 HI×GVËDI TAILA
(AFI Part II, 8:18)

Definition:
Hi´gv¡di Taila is a medicated preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita SarÀapa Taila as basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Hi´gu API Ferula foetida Exd. 1 part
2 Tumburu API Zanthoxylum armatum Fr. 1 part
3 áu¸¶h¢ API Zingiber officinale Rz. 1 part
4 S¡rÀapa Taila (SarÀapa Taila API) Brassica campestris Sd. oil 12 parts
5 Jala API Potable Water – 48 parts

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat SarÀapa taila to prepare m£rcchita SarÀapa taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Treat Hi´gu to prepare Hi´gu - áuddha (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 2 and 3 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85). Transfer the powdered
ingredients to wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to prepare homogenous
blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita SarÀapa Taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka. Stir thoroughly while adding the water in specified ratio.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the
first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Continue the process of heating intermittently over a period of three days. Constantly check
the kalka by rolling between the fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka breaks down into pieces on attempting to form a varti (khara
p¡ka lakÀa¸a) and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the kalka and
oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, reddish in colour with characteristic odour of asafoetida

78
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
a) Shake 0.5 ml of formulation with 10 ml of methanol and keep the mixture overnight at 370 with
occasional shakings. Filter the extract and carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 10 µl
of the extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: acetone:
methanol (8.5: 1.5: 0.2) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and
spray with Liebermann Burchard reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min and
examine the plate under ultraviolet light (366nm). It shows major spots at Rf 0.35 (fluorescent
blue), 0.45 (pinkish blue), 0.50 (light blue) and 0.65, 0.75 (both light pink).
b) Extract 2 ml of formulation with 10 ml of methanol by keeping the mixture for about 15 min.
Filter the extract and carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 5 µl of the extract on TLC
plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: formic acid (14: 8:
0.15) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with
Liebermann Burchard reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min and examine the plate
under ultraviolet light (366nm). It shows major spots at Rf 0.25 (fluorescent light blue), 0.30(light
fluorescent blue, corresponding to ferulic acid) 0.35 (faint yellow), 0.43 (blue), 0.56 (light blue),
0.69 (fluorescent blue), 0.78 (white), 0.81, 0.84 and 0.88 (all pink).
Chemical test:
Complies with Test for Hi´gu (Appendix 5.13.13)

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4471 to 1.4781, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.880 to 0.918, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 180 to 190, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 100 to 105, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 3, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
Kar¸a¿£la (otalgia)
Dose:
Externally as ear drops- 5-10 drops in the affected ear once or twice a day (Kar¸ap£ra¸a)
79
 JYOTIâMATÌ TAILA
(Syn. SIDDHA JYOTIâMATÌ TAILA)
(AFI Part I, 8:18)

Definition:
JyotiÀmat¢ Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 May£rakakÀ¡ra Achyranthes aspera Water soluble Ash of Pl. 896 g
(Ap¡m¡rgakÀ¡ra API)
2 Jala API Potable water 5.376 l
3 JyotiÀmat¢ Taila (API) Celastrus paniculatus Sd. oil 768 ml

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Add 6 parts of water to 1 part of KÀ¡ra (Appendix 6.2.3), and dissolve completely (KÀ¡ra
jala).
 Take JyotiÀmat¢Taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add equal quantity of KÀ¡ra jala. Stir thoroughly and heat with constant stirring maintaining
the temperature between 500 and 900 during the first hour of heating. Stop the heating all the
water gets evaporated. Allow to stand overnight.
 Repeat the process for six more times each day adding fresh KÀ¡ra jala in equal quantity.
 Stop heating when all the water is evaporated. Expose the oil to flame and confirm the
absence of crackling sound indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Very thick oil, reddish in colour

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 1 ml of formulation in 10 ml of methanol and keep the mixture for 12 h at 370. Filter the
extract. Apply 4 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using
toluene: ethyl acetate: glacial acetic acid (7: 2: 0.2) as mobile phase. After development, allow the
plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with Liebermann Burchard reagent followed by heating at 1050
for about 10 min and examine under ultraviolet light (366 nm). The plate shows major spots at Rf
0.15 (fluorescent green), 0.24 (faint green), 0.32 (pink), 0.35 (fluorescent green), 0.40 (pink), 0.49
(faint blue), 0.53 (light blue) and 0.67(pink).

80
Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4232 to 1.4556, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.850 to 0.923, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 100 to 110, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 51 to 55, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 4, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 4, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
ávitraroga (leucoderma/ vitiligo)

Dose:
Externally for Abhya´ga (application on affected area)

81
 KANAKA TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:4)

Definition:
Kanaka Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Madhuka (YaÀ¶¢ API) Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 768 g
2 Jala API for decoction Potable Water – 3.072 ml
reduced to 768 ml
3 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 192 ml
4 Priya´gu API Calicarpa macrophylla Fl. 6.4 g
5 MaµjiÀ¶h¡ API Rubia cordifolia St. 6.4 g
6 Candana (Rakta Candana API) Pterocarpus santalinus Ht. Wd. 6.4 g
7 Utpala API Nymphaea stellata Fl. 6.4 g
8 Ke¿ara (N¡gake¿ara API) Mesua ferrea Stmn. 6.4 g

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredient number 1 of the Formulation Composition, powder and pass
through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the volume to
one-fourth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Wash, dry the ingredients numbered 4 to 8 (kalka dravya) of the Formulation Composition,
powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine
powder.
 Transfer the powdered ingredients to wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding kv¡tha.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during
the first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Continue the process of heating intermittently over a period of three days. Constantly check
the kalka by rolling between the fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka easily rolls into a varti without sticking (Madhyama p¡ka
lakÀa¸a) to the fingers and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the
varti and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

82
Description:
Medicated oil, reddish brown in colour with a faint odour

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 2 ml of formulation with 10 ml of ethyl acetate, keep the mixture for 12 h and filter. Dilute
the extract in ethyl acetate (1: 4). Apply 5 µl of the diluted extract on the TLC plate. Develop the
plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: chloroform: methanol (8.5: 1.2: 0.2: 0.2)
as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with Liebermann
Burchard reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min and examine under ultraviolet
light (366 nm). The plate shows major spots at Rf 0.11, 0.31, 0.46, 0.54, 0.65 (all blue), 0.74
(black) and 0.80 (faint blue).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4641 to1.4660, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0. 918 to 0.923, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 190 to 200, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 100 to 110, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 3, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 2, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Mukha roga (diseases of oral cavity); Vya´ga (local hyper pigmentation); N¢lik¡ (mole)

Dose:
External use: for Abhya´ga (apply locally)
Nasya - 2 to 4 drops per nostril once or twice a day

83
 MAHËNËRËYAÛA TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:45)

Definition:
Mah¡n¡r¡ya¸a Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Bilva API Aegle marmelos St. Bk. 960 g
2 A¿vagandh¡ API Withania somnifera Rt. 960 g
3 B¤hat¢ API Solanum indicum Pl. 960 g
4 ávadaÆÀ¶r¡ (GokÀura API) Tribulus terrestris Pl. 960 g
5 áyon¡ka API Oroxylum indicum St. Bk. 960 g
6 V¡¶y¡laka (Bal¡ (API)) Sida cordifolia Rt. 960 g
7 P¡ribhadra API Erythrina indica Rt. 960 g
8 KÀudr¡ (Ka¸¶ak¡r¢ API) Solanum surattense Pl. 960 g
9 Ka¶hill¡ (Rakta Punarnav¡ API) Boerhavia diffusa Pl. 960 g
10 Atibal¡ API Abutilon indicum Rt. 960 g
11 Agnimantha API Premna integrifolia∗ St. Bk. 960 g
12 Sara¸¢ (Pras¡ri¸¢ API) Paedaria foetida Pl. 960 g
13 P¡¶al¢ (P¡¶al¡ API) Stereospermum suaveolens St. Bk. 960 g
14 Jala API for decoction Potable Water – 98.304 l
reduced to 24.576 l
15 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 6.144 l
16 Godugdha** (API) Cow milk – 6.144 l
17 áat¡var¢rasa (áat¡var¢ API) Asparagus racemosus Rt. Tr. juice 6.144 l
18 R¡sn¡ API Alpinia galanga* Rz. 96 g
19 A¿vagandh¡ API Withania somnifera Rt. 96 g
20 MiÀi (Mi¿rey¡ API) Foeniculum vulgare Fr. 96 g
21 D¡ru (Devad¡ru API) Cedrus deodara Ht. Wd. 96 g
22 Ku˦ha API Saussurea lappa Rt. 96 g
23 Par¸¢catuÀka
a. á¡lapar¸¢ API Desmodium gangeticum Pl. 96 g
b. P¤¿nipar¸¢API Uraria picta Pl. 96 g
c. Mudgapar¸¢ API Vigna trilobata Pl. 96 g
d. M¡Àapar¸¢ API Teramnus labialis Pl. 96 g
24 Agaru API Aquillaria agallocha Ht. Wd. 96 g

∗
Official Substitute
** Aj¡dugdha (Goat milk) may also be alternatively used.
84
25 Ke¿ara (N¡gake¿ara API) Messua ferrea Stmn. 96 g
26 Sindh£ttha Rock salt – 96 g
(Saindhava Lava¸a (API))
27 M¡Æs¢ (Ja¶¡m¡Æs¢ API) Nardostachys jatamansi Rt./Rz. 96 g
28 Rajan¢dvaya
a. Haridr¡ API Curcuma longa Rz. 96 g
b. D¡ruharidr¡ API Berberis aristata St. 96 g
29 áaileyaka (áaileya API) Parmelia perlata Pl. 96 g
30 Candana (Rakta candana API) Pterocarpus santalinus Ht. Wd. 96 g
31 PuÀkara API Inula racemosa Rt. 96 g
32 El¡ (S£kÀmail¡ API) Elettaria cardamomum Sd. 96 g
33 Asra (MaµjiÀ¶h¡ API) Rubia cordifolia St. 96 g
34 YaÀ¶¢ API Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 96 g
35 Tagara API Valeriana wallichii Rz. 96 g
36 Abda (Must¡ API) Cyperus rotundus Rz. 96 g
37 Patra (Tvak patra API) Cinnamomum tamala Lf. 96 g
38 Bh¤´ga (Tvak API) Cinnamomum zeylanicum St. Bk. 96 g
39 A˦avarga
a. J¢vaka API Pueraria tuberosa* Rt. Tr. 96 g
b. ÎÀabhaka API Pueraria tuberosa∗ Rt. Tr. 96 g
c. Med¡ (API) Asparagus racemosus* Rt. 96 g
d. Mah¡med¡ API Asparagus racemosus* Rt. 96 g
e. K¡kol¢ API Withania somnifera* Rt. 96 g
f. KÀ¢rak¡kol¢ API Withania somnifera* Rt. 96 g
g. Îddhi API Dioscorea bulbifera* Rz. 96 g
h. V¤ddhi API Dioscorea bulbifera* Rz. 96 g
40 Ambu (Hr¢vera API) Coleus vettiveroides Rt. 96 g
41 Vac¡ API Acorus calamus Rz. 96 g
42 Pal¡¿a API Butea monosperma St. Bk. 96 g
43 Sthau¸eya API Taxus baccata Lf. 96 g
44 V¤¿c¢raka (áveta Punarnav¡ API) Boerhaavia verticillata Pl. 96 g
45 Coraka API Angelica glauca Rz. 96 g
46 Karp£ra API Cinnamomum camphora Subl. Ext. 48 g
of A. Pt.
47 K¡¿m¢ra (Ku´kuma API) Crocus sativus Sty./Stg. 48 g
Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).

∗
Official Substitute
85
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 13 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the volume to
one-fourth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Wash and clean the cut pieces of áat¡var¢, grind and squeeze through muslin cloth to obtain
áat¡var¢ svarasa.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 18 to 25 and 27 to 45 of the Formulation
Composition, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85). Roast
coarsely powdered Saindhava Lava¸a in a stainless steel pan on low flame till free from
moisture, powder and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) (kalka dravya).
 Transfer the kalka dravya to the wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Strain the Godugdha through muslin cloth.
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding kv¡tha, svarasa.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the
first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Next day, add Godugdha and continue the process of heating intermittently over a period of
five days. Constantly check the kalka by rolling between the fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka easily rolls into a varti without sticking (madhyama p¡ka
lakÀa¸a) to the fingers and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the
varti and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Powder Karp£ra and Ku´kuma, pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44), add to the
oil and mix homogeneously.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, yellowish brown in color with an unpleasant odour

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 2 ml of the formulation with 20 ml of alcohol for 3 h. Allow the two layers to separate.
Separate the alcohol layer, filter and concentrate to 5 ml and carry out the thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm
using toluene: ethyl acetate: n-hexane (6: 3: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the
plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with ethanol-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050
for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.28, 0. 41, 0.54 and 0.65 (all brown) in visible light.

86
Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4575 to 1.4660, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.926 to 0.955, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 188 to 196, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 80 to 100, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 5, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in air-tight containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Ardita (facial palsy); Badhiratva (deafness); Pa´gutva (paraplegia); G¡tra kampa (tremors);
Many¡stambha (neck rigidity/torticollis) Hanustambha (lockjaw); Ek¡´ga¿oÀa (wasting of one
limb); áukrakÀaya (oligospermia); Vandhyatva (infertility); áiroroga (headache), Jihv¡stambha
(glossal palsy); Danta¿£la (toothache); Unm¡da (Mania/psychosis); Kubja (humpback/ kyphosis);
Jvara (fever); Jar¡ (senility); K¡r¿ya (emaciation); Sn¡yubhagna (rupture of ligament);
Asthibhagna (bone fracture)

Dose:
5-10 ml per day in divided doses; Nasya: 2 to 3 drops per nostril; Abhya´ga (massage on affected
parts) and Anuv¡sana Basti

87
 NËLPËMARËDI TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:24)

Definition:
N¡lp¡mar¡di taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 N¡lp¡mara
a. Nyagrodha API Ficus bengalensis St. Bk. 15 g
b. Udumbara API Ficus racemosa St. Bk. 15 g
c. A¿vattha API Ficus religiosa St. Bk. 15 g
d. PlakÀa API Ficus lacor St. Bk. 15 g
2 Triphala
a. Har¢tak¢ API Terminalia chebula P. 15 g
b. Bibh¢taka API Terminalia bellirica P. 15 g
c. Ëmalak¢ API Emblica officinalis P. 15 g
3 Candana (Rakta candana API) Pterocarpus santalinus Ht. Wd. 15 g
4 Sevya (U¿¢ra API) Vetiveria zizanioides Rt. 15 g
5 Ku˦ha API Saussurea lappa Rt. 15 g
6 Cova½½i (MaµjiÀ¶h¡ API) Rubia cordifolia Rt. 15 g
7 Coram API Kaempferia galanga Rz. 15 g
8 Akil (Agaru API) Aquilaria agallocha Ht. Wd. 15 g
9 Paimaµµa½ Curcuma longa Rz. fresh- juice 1.536 l
(Haridr¡ (API) - Ërdra) rasa
10 Parpa¶a API- rasa ∗ Fumaria parviflora Pl. - juice 1.536 l
11 E¸¸a (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 768 ml
Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Take fresh Haridr¡ and wash thoroughly. Grind and filter through muslin cloth to obtain
svarasa.
 Wash, clean, dry the Parpa¶a, powder and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44).
Add eight times water to it and soak for 4 h. Boil and reduce the volume to one-fourth. Filter
through muslin cloth to obtain Parpa¶a rasa.
 Wash, dry the ingredients numbered 4 to 16 (kalka dravya) of the Formulation Composition,
powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine
powder. Transfer the powdered ingredients to wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of
water to prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
∗
Dried whole plant of Parpa¶a is used and Parpa¶a rasa is prepared as per á¡r´gadhara saÆhit¡-
Madhyamakha¸·a, 1/4.
88
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding Haridr¡ svarasa and Parpa¶a rasa.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during
the first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Continue the process of heating intermittently over a period of three days. Constantly check
the kalka by rolling between the fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka breaks down into pieces on attempting to form a varti (khara
p¡ka lakÀa¸a) and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the kalka and
oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.
Description:
Medicated oil, reddish brown in colour with an odour of turmeric
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 5 ml of formulation with 10 ml of methanol and keep the mixture for 12 h. Filter and carry
out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 5 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a
distance of 8 cm using toulene: ethyl acetate: chloroform: methanol (8: 1: 0.2: 0.2) as mobile
phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and examine under ultraviolet light (254
nm). The plate shows major spots at Rf 0.21, 0.46, 0.56, 0.68, 0.78 (all black).
Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4646 to 1.4665, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.784 to 0.824, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 190 to 200, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 100 to 110, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 4, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
Cori-Cira´´u (itches and scabies), Visarpa (erysipelas) and KuÀ¶ha (skin diseases/leprosy)
Dose:
External application for Abhya´ga
89
 NÌLÌBHÎ×GËDI TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:26)

Definition:
N¢l¢bh¤´g¡di Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 N¢l¢ Rasa (N¢l¢ API) Indigofera tinctoria Lf. juice 768 ml
2 Bh¤´ga Rasa (Bh¤´gar¡ja API) Eclipta alba Pl. juice 768 ml
3 áatakratu lat¡ Rasa (K¡katikt¡ API) Cardiospermum halicacabum Pl. juice 768 ml
4 Dh¡tr¢ Phala Rasa (Ëmalak¢ API) Emblica officinalis P. juice 768 ml
5 Ëjaka KÀ¢ra (Aj¡dugdha (API)) Goat milk 768 ml
6 N¡likera KÀ¢ra (N¡rikela (API)) Cocos nucifera Milk from 768 ml
End.
7 Mahiˢ Kˢra (Mahiˢdugdha (API)) Buffalo milk Р768 ml
8 Dhen£dbhava (Godugdha (API)) Cow milk – 768 ml
9 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 768 ml
10 YaÀ¶y¡hva (YaÀ¶¢ API) Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 32 g
11 Guµj¡ API Abrus precatorius Rt. 32 g
12 Aµjana (Ras¡µjana (API)) Berberis sps. Ext. 32 g

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Take fresh N¢l¢, Bh¤´gar¡ja, K¡katikt¡ and Ëmalak¢ and wash thoroughly with water. Grind
and filter separately through muslin cloth to obtain svarasa.
 Wash and clean the cut pieces of N¡rikela, grind and squeeze through muslin cloth to obtain
N¡rikela KÀ¢ra.
 Strain the Aj¡dugdha, MahiÀ¢dugdha and Godugdha separately through muslin cloth.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 10 to 12 (kalka dravya) of the Formulation
Composition, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to
obtain fine powder. Transfer the powdered ingredients to wet grinder and grind with sufficient
quantity of water to prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a Stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding svarasa.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during
the first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Next day, add N¡rikela KÀ¢ra, Aj¡dugdha, MahiÀ¢dugdha and Godugdha and continue the
process of heating intermittently over a period of three days. Constantly check the kalka by
rolling between the fingers.

90
 Stop the heating when the kalka breaks down into pieces on attempting to form a varti (khara
p¡ka lakÀa¸a) and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the kalka and
oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, dark brown in colour, odour characteristic of sesame oil

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 2 ml of the formulation with 20 ml of alcohol for 3 h. Allow the two layers to separate.
Separate the alcohol layer, filter and concentrate to 5 ml and carry out the thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl of the extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8
cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: n-hexane (6: 3: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the
plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with ethanol-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050
for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.18, 0.23, 0.35, 0.45 and 0.82 (all brown) in visible
light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4510 to 1.4620, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.905 to 0.928, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 194 to 212, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 80 to 90, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 5, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 4, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Ke¿ap¡ta (hair fall) and Palita (premature greying of hair)

Dose:
External application for áiro-abhya´ga

91
 PAØCAGUÛA TAILA
(AFI Part II, 8:7)

Definition:
Paµcagu¸a Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila Taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Har¢tak¢ API Terminalia chebula P. 60 g
2 Ëmalak¢ API Phyllanthus emblica P. 60 g
3 Bibh¢taka API Terminalia bellirica P. 60 g
4 Nimba patra (Nimba API) Azadirachta indica Lf. 180 g
5 Sambh¡lu patra (Nirgu¸·¢ API) Vitex negundo Lf. 180 g
6 Jala API for decoction Potable Water – 4.320 l
reduced to 1.080 l
7 Tila Taila API Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 960 ml
8 Moma (Madh£cchiÀ¶a (API)) Hive of Apis species Bees wax 48 g
9 Gandhaviroj¡ (Sarala API) Pinus roxburghii Resin 48 g
10 áil¡rasa (TuruÀka (API)) Altingia excelsa ∗ Exd. 48 g
11 R¡la (á¡la API) Shorea robusta Exd. 48 g
12 Guggulu API - áuddha Commiphora wightii O.R. 48 g
13 Karp£ra API Cinnamomum camphora Subl. Ext. of A. 60 g
Pt.
14 T¡rap¢na Taila (API) Pinus roxburghii Volatile Oil 30 ml
15 Tailapar¸a Taila API Eucalyptus globulus Volatile Oil 30 ml
16 Kejopu¶¢ Taila (API) Melaleuca leucadendron Fixed Oil 30 ml

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Treat Guggulu to get Guggulu - áuddha. (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 5 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the volume to
one-fourth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a Stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of ingredients numbered 8 to 12 of the Formulation Composition, stir
thoroughly while adding kv¡tha.

∗
Official Substitute
92
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the
first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Continue the process of heating intermittently over a period of three days.
 Expose the oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth, add powdered Karp£ra and allow to cool.
 Add T¡rap¢na Taila, Tailaparna Taila and Kejopu¶¢ Taila and mix thoroughly.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, thick, reddish yellow in colour with characteristic odour of Eucalyptus

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 1 ml of formulation with 10 ml of methanol and keep the mixture for 12 h. Filter the extract
and carry out thin layer Chromatography. Apply 3 µl of the diluted extract on TLC plate. Develop
the plate upto a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: methanol: glacial acetic acid (8.5:
0.5: 0.2: 0.1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate
with Liebermann Burchard reagent followed by heating at 1050 for 10 min. The plate shows major
spots at Rf 0.21, 0.27, 0.32, 0.38, 0.42, 0.48, 0.55, 0.71, 0.81, 0.84 (all brown) in visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4703 to 1.5030, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.910 to 0.926, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 160 to 184, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 100 to 110, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 3, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
Sandhiv¡ta (osteoarthropathy); Kar¸a¿£la (otalgia); Vra¸opac¡ra (wounds)

Dose:
Externally on wound and for Abhya´ga on whole body
93
 PRABHAØJANA VIMARDANA TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:30)

Definition:
Prabhaµjana Vimardana taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the
Formulation Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Bal¡ (API) Sida cordifolia Rt. 102.4 g
2 áat¡var¢ API Asparagus racemosus Rt. Tr. 102.4 g
3 áigru API Moringa oleifera St. Bk. 102.4 g
4 Varu¸a API Crataeva nurvala St. Bk. 102.4 g
5 Arka API Calotropis procera Rt. 102.4 g
6 Karaµjaka (Karaµja API) Pongamia pinnata St. Bk. 102.4 g
7 Era¸·a API Ricinus communis Rt. 102.4 g
8 Kora¸¶a (Sahacara API) Barleria prionitis Pl. 102.4 g
9 V¡jigandh¡ (A¿vagandh¡ API) Withania somnifera Rt. 102.4 g
10 Pras¡ri¸¢ API Paederia foetida Pl. 102.4 g
11 VariÀ¶ha Paµcam£la
a. Bilva API Aegle marmelos St. Bk. 102.4 g
b. áyon¡ka API Oroxylum indicum Rt. 102.4 g
c. Gambh¡r¢ API Gmelina arborea St. Bk. 102.4 g
d. P¡¶al¡ API Stereospermum suaveolens St. Bk. 102.4 g
e. Agnimantha API Premna integrifolia∗ Rt. 102.4 g
12 Jala API for decoction Potable Water – 24.576 l
reduced to 6.144 l
13 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 1.536 l
14 KÀ¢ra (Godugdha (API)) Cow milk – 3.072 l
15 Dadhi (Godadhi (API)) Curd from cow milk – 1.536 l
16 K¡µjika (API) Sour gruel – 1.536 l
17 Tagara API Valeriana wallichii Rz. 12 g
18 Amarak¡À¶ha (Devad¡ru API) Cedrus deodara Ht. Wd. 12 g
19 El¡ (S£kÀmail¡ API) Elettaria cardamomum Sd. 12 g
20 áu¸¶h¢ API Zingiber officinale Rz. 12 g
21 SarÀapa API Brassica campestris Sd. 12 g
22 Coraka API Angelica glauca Rz. 12 g
23 áat¡hv¡ API Anethum sowa Fr. 12 g
24 Ku˦ha API Saussurea lappa Rt. 12 g

∗
Official Substitute
94
25 Sindh£ttha (Saindhava Lava¸a (API)) Rock salt – 12 g
26 R¡sn¡ API Alpinia galanga∗ Rz. 12 g
27 K¡l¡nus¡rik¡ (Meth¢ API) Trigonella foenum-graecum Sd. 12 g
28 Vac¡ API Acorus calamus Rz. 12 g
29 Citraka API Plumbago zeylanica Rt. 12 g
30 M¡Æs¢ (Ja¶¡m¡Æs¢ API) Nardostachys jatamansi Rz. 12 g
31 Sarala API Pinus roxburghii Ht. Wd. 12 g
32 Ka¶urohi¸¢ (Ka¶uk¡ API) Picrorhiza kurroa Rz. 12 g

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 A day prior to the sneha p¡ka, prepare Godadhi.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 11 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the volume to
one-fourth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 17 to 24 and 26 to 32 of the Formulation
Composition, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85). Roast
coarsely powdered Saindhava Lava¸a in a stainless steel pan on low flame till free from
moisture, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) (kalka
dravya).
 Transfer the kalka dravya to the wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Strain the Godugdha through muslin cloth.
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding kv¡tha.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during
the first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 next day, add Godugdha, Godadhi and K¡µjika and continue the process of heating
intermittently over a period of five days. Constantly check the kalka by rolling between the
fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka breaks down into pieces on attempting to form a varti (khara
p¡ka lakÀa¸a) and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the kalka and
oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, golden yellow in color with a pleasant odour

∗
Official Substitute
95
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 2 ml of the formulation with 20 ml of alcohol for 3 h. Allow the two layers to separate.
Separate the alcohol layer, filter and concentrate to 5 ml and carry out the thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl of the extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8
cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: n-hexane (6: 3: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the
plate to dry in air and spray the plate with ethanol-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at
1050 for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.39 (light green), and 0. 47, 0.59 (both light
black) in visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4510 to 1.4640, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.908 to 0.945, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 187 to 204, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 84 to 95, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 5, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
V¡tagulma (abdominal lump due to v¡ta doÀa); V¡tavidradhi (abscess due to v¡ta doÀa);
Antrav¤ddhi (Hernia); á£la (pain); Ardita (facial palsy); V¡taroga (diseases due to v¡ta doÀa
/neurological disease); Ka¶i¿£la (lower backache); P¤À¶ha¿£la (lumbago); M£·hagarbha
(malpresentation of the foetus)

Dose:
External application for Abhya´ga

96
 PRASËRIÛÌ TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:32)

Definition:
Pras¡ri¸¢ taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with m£rcchita Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 Pras¡ra¸¢ (Pras¡ri¸¢ API) Paederia foetida Pl. 4.8 kg
2 Jala API for decoction Potable water – 12.288 l
reduced to 3.072 l
3 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 3.072 l
4 Dadhi (Godadhi (API)) Curd from cow milk – 3.072 l
5 K¡µjika (API) Sour gruel – 3.072 l
6 KÀ¢ra (Godugdha (API)) Cow milk – 12.288 l
7 Madhuka (YaÀ¶¢ API) Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 32 g
8 Pippal¢m£la API Piper longum St. 32 g
9 Citraka API Plumbago zeylanica Rt. 32 g
10 Saindhava (Saindhava Lava¸a (API)) Rock salt – 32 g
11 Vac¡ API Acorus calamus Rz. 32 g
12 Pras¡ri¸¢ API Paederia foetida Pl. 32 g
13 Devad¡ru API Cedrus deodara Ht. Wd. 32 g
14 R¡sn¡ API Alpinia galanga ∗ Rz. 32 g
15 Gajapippal¢ API Scindapsus officinalis Fr. 32 g
16 Bhall¡ta (Bhall¡taka API) - áuddha Semecarpus anacardium Fr. 32 g
17 áatapuÀp¡ (áat¡hv¡ API) Anethum sowa Fr. 32 g
18 M¡Æs¢ (Ja¶¡m¡Æs¢ API) Nardostachys jatamansi Rz. 32 g

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 A day prior to the sneha p¡ka, iniate to prepare Godadhi.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 of the Formulation Composition, powder and
pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the volume to
one-fourth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 7 to 9 and 11 to 18 of the formulation
composition, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44). Roast

∗
Official Substitute
97
 coarsely powdered Saindhava Lava¸a in a stainless steel pan on low flame till free from
moisture, powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) (kalka
dravya).
 Transfer the kalka dravya to the wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Strain the Godugdha through muslin cloth.
 Take m£rcchita Tila Taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding kv¡tha.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the
first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Next day, add Godadhi, K¡µjika and Godugdha and continue the process of heating
intermittently over a period of five days. Constantly check the kalka by rolling between the
fingers.
 Stop heating when the kalka breaks down into pieces on attempting to form a varti (khara
p¡ka lakÀa¸a) and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the kalka and
oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, brownish yellow in colour with a pleasant odour

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 2 ml of the formulation with 20 ml of alcohol for 3 h. Allow the two layers to separate.
Separate the alcohol layer, filter and concentrate to 5 ml and carry out the thin layer
chromatography. Apply 10 µl of the extract on TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8
cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: n-hexane (6: 3: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the
plate to dry in air and spray the plate with ethanol-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at
1050 for about 10 min. It shows major spots at Rf 0.21, 0.35, 0.46 and 0.83 (all pink changing to
purple) in visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4570 to 1.4650, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.906 to 0.936, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 190 to 200, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 80 to 90, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10

98
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Hanustambha (lockjaw); Ka¶istambha (restricted movement of the lumbo-sacral region); G¤dhras¢
(Sciatica); Khaµja (limp); Kaubja (hump/kyphosis); Pa´gutva (paraplegia); V¡ta¿leÀmaroga
(diseases due to v¡ta and kapha doÀa); Ardita (facial palsy); P¤À¶hastambha (stiffness of back);
áiro-gr¢v¡-stambha (stiffness of head and neck)

Dose:
External application for Abhya´ga

99
 TUVARAKA TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:20)

Definition:
Tuvaraka Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 Tuvaraka taila (API) Hydnocarpus laurifolia Sd. oil 768 ml
2 Khadira API Acacia catechu Ht. Wd. 576 g
3 Jala API for decoction Potable Water – 9.2160 l
reduced to 2.304 l
4 Tuvaraka API - Kalka Hydnocarpus laurifolia Sd. 128 g

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredient number 2 of the formulation composition, powder separately
and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the volume to
one-fourth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredient number 4 (kalka dravya) of the Formulation Composition,
powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine
powder.
 Transfer the powdered ingredient to wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Take Tuvaraka taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it mildly.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding kv¡tha.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring, maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during
the first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Next day, continue the process of heating. Constantly check the kalka by rolling between the
fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka easily rolls into a varti without sticking (madhyama p¡ka
lakÀa¸a) to the fingers and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the
varti and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, dark reddish in colour

100
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 5 ml of formulation with 10 ml of methanol for 30 min. Allow the two layers to separate
and draw the methanolic layer. Filter and carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 10 µl of
the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate:
glacial acetic acid: methanol (8: 1.5: 0.3: 0.3) as mobile phase. Spray the plate with 10 per cent
methanolic sulphuric acid followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. Examine the plate under
ultraviolet light (366 nm). It shows major spots at Rf 0.39 (blue), 0.58 (white) and 0.70 (blue).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4635 to 1.4748, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.831 to 0.881, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 190 to 200, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 75 to 85, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 6, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
KÀudrakuÀ¶ha (group of minor skin diseases); MahakuÀ¶ha (group of major skin diseases); Meha
(excessive flow of urine)

Dose:
10 to 20 drops with cow milk or butter; used externally for abhyanga also.

Pathya:
Milk, sweet, citrus fruits, apple, banana, sweet grapes, old boiled rice, barley, wheat bread, butter
milk

Apathya:
Amla, Lava¸a and Ka¶u rasa

101
 YAâÙÌMADHUKA TAILA
(AFI Part I, 8:47)

Definition:
YaÀ¶¢madhuka Taila is a medicated oil preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below with Tila taila as the basic ingredient.

Formulation Composition:
1 YaÀ¶¢madhuka (YaÀ¶¢ API) Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 96 g
2 KÀ¢ra (Godughda API) Cow milk – 3.072 l
3 Dh¡tr¢phala (Ëmalak¢ API) - Svarasa Emblica officinalis P. 3.072 l
4 Taila (Tila Taila API) Sesamum indicum Sd. oil 768 ml

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Tila taila to prepare m£rcchita Tila taila (Appendix [Link]).
 Take fresh Ëmalak¢ and wash thoroughly with water. Grind and filter through muslin cloth to
obtain svarasa.
 Strain the Godugdha through muslin cloth.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredient number 1 of the formulation composition, powder it and pass
through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine powder (kalka dravya).
 Transfer the powdered ingredient to wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare homogeneous blend (kalka).
 Take m£rcchita Tila taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it.
 Add increments of kalka, stir thoroughly while adding the Ëmalak¢ rasa and Godugdha.
 Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the
first hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
 Continue the process of heating intermittently over a period of three days. Constantly check
the kalka by rolling between the fingers.
 Stop the heating when the kalka easily rolls into a varti without sticking (madhyama p¡ka
lakÀa¸a) to the fingers and at the appearance of froth (phenodgama) over the oil. Expose the
varti and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture.
 Filter while hot (about 800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
 Store it in glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Medicated oil, reddish yellow in colour with a pleasant odour

102
Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Shake 0.5 ml of formulation in 10 ml of methanol and keep the mixture for 12 h. Filter and carry
out thin layer chromatography. Apply 10 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a
distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: methanol: glacial acetic acid (8: 1: 0.5: 0.2) as
mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with Liebermann
Burchard reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min and observe under ultraviolet light
(366 nm). It shows major spots at Rf 0.50, 0.55 (both light blue) and 0.65 (fluorescent).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.4470 to 1.4740, Appendix 3.1
Specific gravity at 400: 0.899 to 0.925, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 190.0 to 200, Appendix 3.7
Iodine value: 105 to 115, Appendix 3.8
Acid value: Not more than 3.0, Appendix 3.9
Peroxide value: Not more than 3.0, Appendix 3.10

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Mineral oil: Absent, Appendix 3.12

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Palita (premature greying of hair); Ke¿apatana (hair-fall)

Dose:
For Nasya, external application on scalp, face and whole body

103
 VAÙÌ AND GUÙIKË
General Descripition:
Medicines prepared in the form of pills are known as Va¶¢ and Gu¶ik¡s. Such pills are
small, spherical, solid dosage forms, containing one or more drugs of plant, animal or mineral
origin. Pills form a convenient way of administering bitter or unpleasant substances as medicines
in a pre-defined dose. In earlier days, pills were made extemporaneously by the Vaidya-
Pharmacist in the following manner. The drugs of plant origin are dried and made into fine
powders, separately. The minerals are made into Bhasma or Sind£ra, unless otherwise mentioned.
In case where P¡rada and Gandhaka are mentioned, Kajjal¢ is made first and other drugs are
added, one by one, according to the formula. These are put into a Khalva and ground to a soft
paste with the prescribed fluids. When more than one liquid is mentioned for grinding, they are
used in succession. Sugandha Dravyas, like Kast£r¢, Karp£ra, which are included in the formula,
are added. When the mass is properly ground and kneaded to a bolus, it is in a condition to be
made into pills. In cases where sugar or jaggery (Gu·a) is mentioned, P¡ka of these should be
made on mild fire and removed from the oven. The powders of the ingredients are added to the
P¡ka and briskly mixed. When still warm, Va¶¢/Gu¶ik¡s should be rolled and dried in shade. The
criterion to determine the final stage of the formulation before making pills is that it should not
stick to the fingers when rolled. In contemporary times, pill making machine may be
recommended for turning out larger batches by the pharmacists. In this method, the prepared mass
may be expelled in the form of cylindrical threads of required size, which are cut at regular
intervals to give units of a pre set size. These are rolled to a spherical form by hand and dried in
shade or in sun as specified in the texts.
Characteristics and Preservation
Pills made of plant drugs when kept in air tight containers can be used for two years. Pills
containing minerals and metals e.g. mercurycan be used for longer period as RasauÀadhi.
Pills and Va¶¢s should not lose their original colour, smell, taste and form. When sugar,
salt or KÀ¡ra is an ingredient, the pills should be protected from moisture.
The average weight of vati and gutika should be + 10 percent of the labeled weight and
disintegration time should not be more than an hour, unless specified otherwise.

104
 ARKA VAÙÌ
(AFI Part II, 10:2)

Definition:
Arka Va¶¢ is a pill preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation Composition given
below.

Formulation Composition:
1 Sauvarcala (Sauvarcala Lava¸a (API)) Black salt – 1 part
2 S¡dara (Naras¡ra API) - áuddha Sal ammoniac – 1 part
3 ArkapuÀpa (Arka (API)) Calotropis procera Fl. Bd. 1 part
4 Marica API Piper nigrum Fr. 1 part
5 Jala API Potable Water – QS

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Naras¡ra to get Naras¡ra - áuddha (Appendix [Link]).
 Roast coarsely powdered Sauvarcala Lava¸a in a stainless steel pan on low flame till free
from moisture, powder and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 3 and 4 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Mix all the ingredients thoroughly to prepare a homogenous blend.
 Add Jala in required quantity and triturate well to prepare a bolus.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Spherical pills, cream coloured, with characteristic odour and taste of black salt

Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about 10 g of the formulation, powder and wash thoroughly in water, till the added salts are
totally removed. Filter without loss of powder. Take a small quantity of the washed powder, add a
little chloral hydrate solution and warm; wash to remove chloral hydrate and mount in 50 per cent
glycerin. Take another small portion of this washed powder and mount in iodine water. Observe
the following characters in different mounts:

105
Trichomes, epidermal cells, fibrous layer from staminal corona, rosettes of calcium oxalate,
xylem vessels with spiral thickenings, cortical cells of the pedicel, fragments of pollinium,
thickwalled cells, pollen grains (Arka PuÀpa); polygonal hypodermal cells interspersed with
group of stone cells, isodiametric stone cells with thick walls, fibres, polygonal perisperm cells
with starch grains and oil globules (Marica).
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 1 g of sample in 10 ml of methanol under reflux on a water-bath for about 30 min. Filter
the extract and carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 5 µl of the extract on TLC plate
and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: methanol: glacial acetic
acid (8: 0.6: 1: 0.2) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the
plate with Liebermann Burchard reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. It shows
major spots at Rf 0.25, 0.31, 0.66 (all faint blue) 0.53 (black) and 0.60, 0.79 (both faint green) in
visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 25 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 3.0 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 10 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 40 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 8 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (1 % aqueous solution): 5 to 6., Appendix 3.3

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Kaphaja Agnim¡ndya (digestion impairment due to kapha doÀa)

Dose:
500 mg - 1 g per day in divided doses with warm water

106
 CITRAKËDI GUÙIKË
(AFI Part I, 12:11)

Definition:
Citrak¡di Gu¶ik¡ is a pill preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation Composition
given below.
Formulation Composition:
1 Citraka API Plumbago zeylanica Rt. 1 part
2 Pippal¢m£la API Piper longum St. 1 part
3 DvikÀ¡ra
a. YavakÀ¡ra API Hordeum vulgare Water soluble ash of Pl. 1 part
b. SarjikÀ¡ra (Svarj¢kÀ¡ra (API)) Crude alkaline earth – 1 part
4 Paµcalava¸a
a. Sauvarcala Lava¸a (API) Black salt – 1 part
b. Saindhava Lava¸a (API) Rock salt – 1 part
c. Vi·a Lava¸a Black salt∗ 1 part
d. S¡mudra Lava¸a API Sea salt – 1 part
e. Audbhida Lava¸a Rock salt* 1 part
5 VyoÀa
a. áu¸¶h¢ API Zingiber officinale Rz. 1 part
b. Marica API Piper nigrum Fr. 1 part
c. Pippal¢ API Piper longum Fr. 1 part
6 Hi´gu API - áuddha Ferula foetida Exd. 1 part
7 Ajamod¡ API Apium leptophyllum Fr. 1 part
8 Cavya API Piper chaba St. 1 part
9 M¡tulu´ga♣ API - rasa Citrus aurantifolia Fr. Juice QS
Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Hi´gu to get Hi´gu -áuddha. (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients number 1, 2, 5, 7 and 8 of the Formulation Composition,
powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Roast coarsely powdered ingredients numbered 4 of the Formulation Composition in a
stainless steel pan on low flame till free from moisture, powder separately and pass through
180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Roast ingredients numbered 3 of the Formulation Composition in a stainless steel pan on low
flame till free from moisture.

∗
Official Substitute
♣
D¡·ima rasa from seeds with flesh intact may also be alternatively used.
107
 Wash and clean fresh M¡tulu´ga fruits, cut into halves, squeeze and strain the juice through
muslin cloth to obtain M¡tulu´ga svarasa.
 Mix all the ingredients thoroughly to prepare a homogenous blend.
 Add svarasa in required quantity and triturate well to prepare a bolus.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Light brown coloured pills with characteristic asafoetida odour and bitter taste

Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about five Va¶¢s, crush, wash in water repeatedly to get rid of salts; collect the residue and
dry; stain a small portion in iodine and mount in glycerin (80 per cent), clear a portion in chloral
hydrate, wash in water and mount in glycerin (80 per cent); clear another portion in 2 per cent
potassium hydroxide solution, wash in water and mount in glycerin; observe the following
characters:
Fragments of yellowish brown vittae (Ajamod¡); a few needle and spindle shaped fibers with
thick walls and narrow lumen, and isolated, circular, pitted stone cells (Cavya); group of
isodiameric or slightly elongated stone cells with moderately thickened walls, interspersed with
thin walled polygonal parenchyma cells (Marica), group of elongated, spindle shaped, wide
lumened lignified stone cells often associated with spiral vessel units (Pippal¢); abundant elliptic,
oblong starch grains upto 60 microns in length with hilum nearer the narrower, beaked end
(áu¸¶h¢); simple and compound starch grains having 2-7 components, round to oval with central
hilum appearing like a point (Pippal¢m£la); narrow long reticulately pitted tracheids and very
long lignified pitted fibres (Citraka).
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of the powdered formulation with 70 ml of ethanol in a Soxhlet apparatus on a water
bath for 6 h, filter the extract and carry out thin layer chromatography. Apply 20 µl of the extract
on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using n-hexane: acetone (7.5: 2.5) as mobile
phase. After development, allow to dry in a current of cold air and examine under ultraviolet light
(254 nm). It shows spots at Rf 0.17, 0.22 and 0.38 (all black). Spray the plate with anisaldehyde-
sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 C for about 10 min. The plate shows major
spots at Rf, 0.28 (black), 0.39 (red) and 0.63, 0.69 (both pink) in visible light.

108
Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 51 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 5 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 8 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 46 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 10 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (10 % aqueous solution): 3. 5 to 4.5, Appendix 3.3
Assay:
Contains not less than 0.10 per cent of piperine when assayed by the following method.
Dissolve 1.0 mg of piperine in a mixture of methanol: chloroform (1: 1) and make up the volume
to 10 ml in a volumetric flask. Apply 1, 2, 6, 10, 14, 18 µl of solution on TLC plate and develop
the plate to 8 cm using n-hexane: acetone (7: 3) as mobile phase. After development, dry the plate
in a current of hot air and scan in the TLC scanner at a wavelength of 338 nm. Note the peak area
and prepare the calibration curve by plotting peak area vs concentration of piperine.
Extract accurately weighed 2g powder of vati in 75 ml of alcohol in Soxhlet apparatus for 6 h.
Filter the extract while hot and dry completely and weigh. Take 100 mg in volumetric flask and
dissolve in a mixture of methanol-chloroform (1:1) and make up the volume to 25 ml. Apply 25
µl of the test solutions on TLC plate. Develop, dry and scan the plate as described in the
proceeding paragraph for calibration curve of piperine. Record the area under the curve for a peak
corresponding to piperine in the test solution. Calculate the amount of piperine in the test solution
from the calibration curve of piperine.
Sodium: Not less than 12.0 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.10
Potassium: Not less than 5.0 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.10
Chloride: Not less than 21.00 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.11

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Agnim¡ndya (digestive impairment); ËmadoÀa (products of impaired digestion and metabolism);
Graha¸¢ (malabsorption syndrome)

Dose:
500 mg - 1 g per day in divided doses with warm water/ Butter milk

109
 ELËDI GUÙIKË
(AFI Part I, 12:3.)

Definition:
El¡di Gu¶ik¡ is a pill preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation Composition
given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 El¡ (S£kÀmail¡ API) Elettaria cardamomum Sd. 6g
2 Patra (Tvakpatra API) Cinamomum tamala Lf. 6g
3 Tvak API Cinamomum verum St. Bk. 6g
(= C. zeylanicum)
4 Pippal¢ API Piper longum Fr. 24 g
5 Sit¡ (áarkar¡ API) Sugar candy – 48 g
6 Madhuka (YaÀ¶¢ API) Glycyrrhiza glabra Rt. 48 g
7 Kharj£ra API Phoenix sylvestris P. 48 g
8 M¤dv¢k¡ (Dr¡kÀ¡ API) Vitis vinifera Dr. Fr. 48 g
9 Madhu API Honey – QS

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 4 and 6 of the Formulation Composition,
powder separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Wash, clean the ingredients numbered 7 and 8 of the Formulation Composition and grind
separately to prepare soft pulp.
 Roast coarsely powdered Sit¡ in a stainless steel pan on low flame till free from moisture,
powder and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Add powdered Sit¡ to the soft pulp and grind well.
 Add powdered ingredients numbered 1 to 4 and 6 of the Formulation Composition to the pulp
and triturate with Madhu to prepare a bolus.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.
Description:
A soft spherical pill, blackish brown in colour, odour cinnamon like with a sweet and pungent
taste

110
Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about 10 Va¶¢s, keep in lukewarm water for 15 minutes, stir and centrifuge at 2000 rpm for
five minutes and decant the supernatant without loss of sediment. Take the sediment, wash in
water and repeat the centrifuging; mount a small quantity of sediment in 50 per cent glycerin,
mount another small quantity of sediment each in Iodine and 0.001 per cent saffranin water.
Observe the following characters in the different mounts.
Epidermal cells with oil cells, sclerenchymatous cells from testa (S£kÀmail¡), sclereids with
inner walls thickened; short, very thick fibres (Tvak); lower epidermis with stomata, fragments of
spiral vessels, short trichomes, thick-walled cells of upper epidermis, schizogenous mucilage cells
(Tvakpatra); spindle shaped and wide lumened sclereids, perisperm cells in abundance
(Pippal¢); calcium oxalate crystals, fragments of large vessels, lignified xylem parenchyma,
groups of fibres with crystal sheath, elongated fibres (YaÀ¶¢); stone cells, vessels with spiral
thickening, loose fibrous mass (Kharj£ra); parenchyma cells with clusters of raphides and
spherical pigmented cells, medullary rays, xylem vessels with spiral thickening (Dr¡kÀ¡).
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 1 g of formulation in 10 ml of methanol under reflux for about 30 min. Filter the extract
and carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 4 µl of the extract on TLC plate and develop
the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: methanol: glacial acetic acid
(8:1:0.7:0.2) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate
with Liebermann Burchard reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. It shows major
spots at Rf 0.25, 0.31, 0.49, 0.51, 0.66 (all faint blue) 0.53 (black), 0.56 (blue) and 0.60, 0.79 (both
faint green) in visible light.
Extract 1 g of formulation in 10 ml of methanol under reflux for about 2 h. Filter the extract and
carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 5 µl of the extract on TLC plate and develop the
plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: (7:3) as mobile phase. After development,
allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate in Liebermann Burchard reagent followed by heating
at 1050 for about 10 min and examine the plate under ultraviolet light (366nm). It shows major
spots at Rf 0.11, 0.19, 0.28 (all fluorescent blue), 0.16 (faint pink), 0.24 (fluorescent green), 0.32
(black), 0.37 (light blue), 0.49 (fluorescent green, corresponding to piperine), 0.66 (faint yellow).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 3.0 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 1.0 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 40 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 48 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 14 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (1 % aqueous solution): 5 to 6, Appendix 3.3

111
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Chardi (emesis); Hikk¡ (hiccup); K¡sa (cough); áv¡sa (asthma); Bhrama (vertigo); M£rcch¡
(syncope); Raktapitta (bleeding disorder); RaktaniÀ¶h¢vana (haemoptysis); Jvara (fever); Mada
(intoxication); T¤À¸¡ (thirst); Aruci (anorexia); P¡r¿va¿£la (pleurodyria); áoÀa (cachexia);
Pl¢h¡roga (splenic disease); Ëmav¡ta (rheumatism); Svarabheda (hoarseness of voice);
KÀatakÀaya (emaciation due to injury); áukrakÀaya (oligospermia)

Dose:
2- 4 g per day in divided doses with honey

112
 LAáUNËDI VAÙÌ
(AFI Part I, 12:27)

Definition:
La¿un¡di va¶¢ is a pill preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation Composition
given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 La¿una API Allium sativum Bl. 1 part
2 J¢raka (áveta J¢raka API) Cuminum cyminum Fr. 1 part
3 Saindhava (Saindhava Lava¸a (API )) Rock salt – 1 part
4 Gandhaka API-áuddha Sulphur – 1 part
5 Trika¶u
a. áu¸¶h¢ API Zingiber officinale Rz. 1 part
b. Marica API Piper nigrum Fr. 1 part
c. Pippal¢ API Piper longum Fr. 1 part
6 R¡ma¶ha (Hi´gu API) - áuddha Ferula foetida Exd. 1 part
7 Nimbu (Nimb£ API) - rasa Citrus limon Fr. QS

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Gandhaka to get Gandhaka - áuddha. (Appendix [Link]).
 Treat Hi´gu to get Hi´gu - áuddha. (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 2 and 5 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Roast coarsely powdered Saindhava Lava¸a in a stainless steel pan on low flame till free from
moisture, powder and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Clean Rasona and grind to prepare fine paste.
 Wash and clean fresh Nimb£ fruits, cut into halves, squeeze and strain the juice through
muslin cloth to obtain Nimb£ svarasa.
 Mix all the ingredients thoroughly to prepare a homogenous blend.
 Add svarasa in required quantity and triturate well to prepare a bolus.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Brown coloured pills with characteristic garlic odour and saline taste

113
Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about 5 or 6 Va¶¢s and crush to a powder; add chloroform and stir thoroughly; let stand for
some time to allow the heavier sulphur to settle down and the lighter plant debris to remain on
top; pour the supernatant with the plant debris in another container, and repeat the process with
chloroform; remove supernatant with plant debris to a dish, and allow chloroform to evaporate;
wash the debris in alcohol once,followed by washing in water 2 or 3 times, to remove the salt; dry
the debris and prepare mounts for microscopy by staining a small portion in iodine, and clearing
another portion in chloral hydrate. Observe the following characteristics in the mounts.
A few fragments of thin walled elongated parenchyma cells showing stomata with spiral vessels
and cells containing rhomboid crystals of calcium oxalate (La¿una); group of elongated stone
cells from the mesocarpic layer and multicellular, multiseriate trichome (áveta J¢raka);
parenchyma cells, rounded to oval with small intercellular spaces, with a few cells loosely packed
with cells filled with oleoresin, abundant starch granules, individual grain elliptic oblong with
hilum nearer the narrower, beaked end (áu¸¶h¢); group of isodiameric or slightly elongated stone
cells with moderately thickened walls, interspersed with thin walled polygonal parenchyma cells
from hypodermis (Marica); groups of elongated, spindle shaped, wide lumened lignified stone
cells, often associated with narrow groups of spiral vessels (Pippal¢). In addition, abundant
perisperm cells, packed with minute starch grains, characteristic of Pippal¢ and Marica, and
loose oval starch grains upto 60 microns long from áu¸¶h¢ are also observed.
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of the powdered sample with 70 ml of ethanol in a Soxhlet apparatus on a water bath
for 6 h, filter and carry out thin layer chromatography of the filtrate.
Apply 20.0 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using n-
hexane: acetone (7.6: 2.4) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and
examine under ultraviolet light (254 nm). It shows spots at Rf 0.17, 0.22, 0.39 and 0.75 (all black).
Spray the plate with anisaldehyde-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10
min. The plate shows major spots at Rf 0.15 (violet), 0.21 (yellow), 0.29, 0.77 (both black) and
0.37, 0.44 (both purple) in visible light.
Chemical tests:
Test for Sulphur:
Extract 1.0 g of the sample with 10 ml of carbon disulphide. Filter the carbon disulphide solution
and evaporate the solvent. The residue complies with the Test for sulphur (Appendix 5.13.11)
Dissolve 1 g of sample in 10 ml of deionised water and filter. The filtrate complies with the Test
for Chlorides (Appendix 5.13.6).
Complies with the Test for Hi´gu (Appendix 5.13.13)

114
Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 17 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 5 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 14 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 23 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 8 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (10 % aqueous solution): 3 to 4, Appendix 3.3

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Vis£cik¡ (gastro-enteritis with piercing pain); Aj¢r¸a (dyspepsia); Atis¡ra (diarrhoea)

Dose:
500 mg - 1 g per day in divided doses with warm water

115
 LAVA×GËDI VAÙÌ
(AFI Part I, 12:26)

Definition:
Lava´g¡di Va¶¢ is a pill preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation Composition
given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 Lava´ga API Syzigium aromaticum Fl. Bd. 1 part
2 Marica API Piper nigrum Fr. 1 part
3 AkÀaphalatvak (Bibh¢taka API) Terminalia belerica P. 1 part
4 Khadiras¡ra (Khadira API) Acacia catechu Wd. Ext. 3 parts
5 Babb£lav¤kÀaja (Babb£la API) KaÀ¡ya Acacia nilotica St. Bk. QS

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopeial quality.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 3 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Powder separately the ingredient number 4 of the Formulation Composition and pass through
180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredient number 5 of the Formulation Composition, powder separately
and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add four times water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the
volume to one-fourth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Mix all the ingredients thoroughly to prepare a homogenous blend.
 Add kv¡tha in required quantity and triturate well to prepare a bolus.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Spherical pill, blackish brown in colour with a pleasant odour, taste bitter and astringent

Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about 10 Va¶¢s, powder and wash thoroughly in water. Filter without loss of powder. Take a
small quantity of the washed powder, add a little chloral hydrate solution, warm and wash to

116
remove chloral hydrate. Take a small quantity of residue and mount in 50 per cent glycerin,
mount another small quantity each of residue in iodine and in 0.001 per cent saffranin water.
Observe the following characters in the different mounts.
Polygonal perisperm cells with starch grains and oil globules, polygonal hypodermal cells,
pericarp, elongated and isodiametric stone cells, fibres (Marica); short trichomes with a swollen
basal cell, stone cells (Bibh¢taka); tricolpate pollen grains, fibres, spiral tracheids, calcium
oxalate crystals in rosette aggregates, schizolysigenous oil cavity embedded in parenchyma,
(Lava´ga).
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 1 g of powdered sample with 10 ml of n-hexane by keeping the mixture for 2 h with
occasional shakings, filter the extract and evaporate the filtrate on water bath at 600. Dissolve the
residue in 10 ml of methanol, filter and carry out the thin layer chromatography. Apply 10 µl on
TLC plate and develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: glacial acetic
acid (8: 2: 0.2) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate
with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. It shows major
spots at Rf 0.20 (pink), 0.24 (faint brown), 0.29 (light blue corresponding to piperine), 0.35, 0.43
(both black), 0.54 (brown), 0.74 (dark brown corresponding to eugenol) in visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 5.0 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 1.0 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 26 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 22 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 14 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (1% aqueous solution): 4 to 5, Appendix 3.3

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
K¡sa (cough); áv¡sa (asthma)

Dose:
500 mg - 1 g per day in divided doses (to be kept in mouth till it dissolves)

117
 PLÌHËRI VAÙIKË
(AFI Part I, 12:17)

Definition:
Pl¢h¡ri Va¶ik¡ is a pill preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation Composition
given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 Sah¡s¡ra (Kum¡r¢ (API)) Aloe barbadensis Fresh Lf. P.∗ 1 part
2 Abhra (Abhraka Bhasma (API)) Calcined Mica – 1 part
3 K¡s¢sa (K¡¿¢¿a API) - áuddha Green vitreol – 1 part
4 La¿una API Allium sativum Bl. 1 part
5 Dro¸apuÀp¢ API - Svarasa Leucas cephalotus Juice of fresh Pl. QS
Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat K¡¿¢¿a to get K¡¿¢¿a - áuddha (Appendix [Link]).
 Treat Abhraka to get Abhraka bhasma.
 Clean Rasona and grind to prepare fine paste. .
 Take fresh Dro¸apuÀp¢ and wash thoroughly with water. Grind and filter through muslin cloth
to obtain svarasa.
 Wash and clean fresh Kum¡r¢ and separate the pulp to obtain Kum¡r¢ svarasa.
 Mix all the ingredients thoroughly to prepare a homogenous blend.
 Add svarasa in required quantity and triturate well to prepare a bolus.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.
Description:
Reddish brown coloured pills with characteristic garlic odour and bitter taste
Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about five Va¶¢s, crush, wash in slow running water on a 150 µm IS Sieve (sieve number
100) to allow minerals to be washed away. Collect the material left on the sieve, without loss of
material; take a small amount, clear in chloral hydrate solution, wash in water and mount in
glycerin (80 per cent), observe the following characters:

∗
Kany¡s¡ra may alternatively be used.
118
A few fragments of thin walled elongated parenchyma cells with stomata, spiral vessels and
parenchymatous cells containing rhomboid crystals of calcium oxalate (La¿una); isolated acicular
needles of calcium oxalate crystals (Sah¡s¡ra).
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of the powdered sample with 70 ml of ethanol in a Soxhlet apparatus on a water bath
for 6 h, filter and carry out thin layer chromatography. Apply 20 µl of the filtrate on TLC plate.
Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using n-butanol: isopropanol: acetic acid: water (3: 1: 1: 1)
as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with
anisaldehyde-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. The plate
shows major spots at Rf 0.41 (deep green), 0.56 (light green), 0.67 and 0.90 (pink) in visible light.

Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 60 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 14 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 8 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 45 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 12 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (10 % aqueous solution): 3 to 4, Appendix 3.3

Assay:
Not less than 0.25 per cent of aloin when assayed by the following method.
Dissolve 2.5 mg of aloin in mixture of methanol: chloroform (1: 1) and make up the volume to 25
ml in another volumetric flask. Apply 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 µl of solution on TLC plate and develop
the plate to 8 cm using ethyl acetate: methanol: water (8: 1.35: 1) as mobile phase. After
development dry the plate in a current of hot air and scan in the TLC scanner at a wavelength of
366 nm. Note the peak area and prepare the calibration curve by plotting peak area vs
concentration of aloin.
Extract accurately weighed about 7 g of powdered Va¶¢s in 100 ml of alcohol in a Soxhlet
apparatus for 6 h. Filter the extract while hot and dry completely and weigh. Take 25 mg of
extract in volumetric flask and dissolve in a mixture of methanol: chloroform (1: 1) and make up
the volume to 25 ml. Apply 7 µl of the test solutions on TLC plate. Develop, dry and scan the
plate as described in the proceeding paragraph for calibration curve of aloin. Record the area
under the curve for a peak corresponding to aloin in the test solution. Calculate the amount of
aloin in the test solution from the calibration curve of aloin.
Total Iron: Not less than 18.5 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.6
Aluminum: Not less than 1.5 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.
Magnesium: Not less than 0.9 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.7
Potassium: Not less than 1.9 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.10
Silicates: Not less than 9.5 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.9

119
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Plih¡-yak¤droga (spleno-hepato disease); Gulma (abdominal lump); Agnim¡ndya (digestive
impairment); áotha (inflammation); K¡sa (cough); áv¡sa (asthma); T¤À¸¡ (thirst); Kampa
(tremor); D¡ha (burning sensation); Chardi (emesis); Bhrama (vertigo)

Dose:
500 mg per day in divided doses

120
 PRABHËKARA VAÙÌ
(AFI Part I, 12:15)
Definition:
Prabh¡kara Va¶¢ is a pill preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation Composition
given below.
Formulation Composition:
1 M¡kÀika (Svar¸am¡kÀika Bhasma (API)) Calcined Chalcopyrite – 1 part
2 Lauha (Lauha Bhasma (API)) Calcined Lauha – 1 part
3 Abhra (Abhraka Bhasma (API)) Calcined Abhraka – 1 part
4 Tug¡kÀ¢r¢ (VaÆ¿alocana (API)) Bamboo manna S. C. 1 part
5 áil¡jatu (API) - áuddha 1 part
6 P¡rthav¡ri (Arjuna API) - Kv¡tha Terminalia arjuna St. Bk. QS
Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Svar¸am¡kÀika to get Svar¸am¡kÀika bhasma.
 Treat Lauha to get Lauha bhasma.
 Treat Abhraka to get Abhraka bhasma.
 Treat áil¡jatu to get áil¡jatu- áuddha (Appendix [Link])
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredient number 6 of the Formulation Composition, powder separately
and pass through 355 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 44) (kv¡tha dravya).
 Add four times water for decoction to the kv¡tha dravya and soak for 4 h, heat and reduce the
volume to one-fourth. Filter through muslin cloth to obtain kv¡tha.
 Mix all the ingredients thoroughly to prepare a homogenous blend.
 Add kv¡tha in required quantity and triturate well to prepare a bolus.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.
Description:
Reddish brown pills with a faint odour and acrid taste

Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about 5 Va¶¢s, triturate with water in a mortar, collect in a beaker stir with glass rod, swirl
gently and pour off the supernatant in to another beaker; repeat this process 3 to 4 times, so that as
much of the bhasmas and minerals components can be floated and removed. Add strong sulphuric

121
acid, stir, and remove sulphuric acid by pouring it off. Wash the residue, and mount a small
quantity in water and another in glycerin; observe the characters:
Angular, flat, structure less plates, appear in good relief in lower powers in water mounts, but
only faintly visible in glycerin mounts; it is invisible between crossed polars in the polarising
microscope in both mounts (Vaƿalocana).
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of the powdered formulation with 50 ml of ethanol in a Soxhlet apparatus on a water
bath for 6 h, filter and carry out thin layer chromatography. Apply 20.0 µl of the extract on TLC
plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using chloroform: methanol (9: 1) as mobile phase.
After development, allow the plate to dry in air and examine under ultraviolet light (366 nm). It
showed spots at 0.29 (dark blue) and 0.40, 0.45, 0.54, 0.63 (all faint blue). Spray the plate with
anisaldehyde-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. The plate
shows major spots at Rf 0.26 (red), 0.31, 0.41 (both brown), and 0.37 (black) in visible light.
Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 70 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 3 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 7 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 14 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 13 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (10 % aqueous solution): 7.0 to 8.5, Appendix 3.3
Assay:
Total Iron: Not less than 21.5 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.6
Calcium: Not less than 3.0 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.4
Copper: Not less than 0.05 per cent w/w Appendix 5.5
Silicates: Not less than 36.5 per cent w/w Appendix 5.9
Sulphur: Not less than 6.0 per cent w/w Appendix 5.12
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
H¤droga (heart disease)
Dose:
250 mg - 500 mg per day in divided doses with water/ Arjuna kv¡tha/milk

122
 RAJAéPRAVARTINÌ VAÙÌ
(AFI Part I, 12:25)

Definition:
RajaÅpravartin¢ Va¶¢ is a pill preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation
Composition given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 Kany¡s¡ra (API) Aloe barbadensis Dry Ext. 1 part
2 K¡s¢sa (Ka¿¢¿a API) - áuddha Green vitreol – 1 part
3 R¡ma¶ha (Hi´gu API) - áuddha Ferula foetida Exd. 1 part
4 Ùa´ka¸a API - áuddha Borax – 1 part
5 Kanyak¡ (Kum¡r¢ (API)) - Svarasa Aloe barbadensis Lf. QS

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat K¡s¢sa to get Ka¿¢¿a - áuddha. (Appendix [Link])
 Treat Hi´gu to get Hi´gu - áuddha. (Appendix [Link]).
 Treat Ta´ka¸a to get Ta´ka¸a - áuddha. (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash and clean fresh Kum¡r¢ and separate the pulp to obtain Kum¡r¢ svarasa.
 Dissolve the Kany¡s¡ra in Kum¡r¢ svarasa.
 Mix all the ingredients thoroughly to prepare a homogenous blend.
 Add svarasa in required quantity and triturate well to prepare a bolus.
 Expel the mass through va¶¢ machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut the va¶¢s to a
desired weight.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Blackish grey coloured pills with a characteristic asafoetida odour and saline taste

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of the powdered sample with 50 ml of ethanol in a Soxhlet apparatus on a water bath
for 6 h, filter and carry out thin layer chromatography.
a) Apply 20 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using n-
hexane: acetone (7. 5: 2.5) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and
examine under ultraviolet light (366 nm). It shows spots at Rf 0.25 (dark blue) and 0.30, 0.39

123
(both faint blue). Spray the plate with anisaldehyde-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at
1050 for about 10 min. The plate shows major spots at Rf 0.25 (reddish brown), 0.34 (pale brown),
0.43 and 0.61 (brown) in visible light.
b) Apply 20 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using ethyl
acetate: methanol: water (10: 1.35: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry
in air. Spray the plate with ethanolic potassium hydroxide reagent followed by heating at 1050 for
about 10 min. The plate shows major spots at Rf 0.27 (reddish yellow) and 0.72 (red) in visible
light.
Chemical Test:
Complies with Tests for Hi´gu (Appendix 5.13.13), Borax (Appendix 5.13.10) and
Anthraquinones (Appendix 5.13.12)

Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 36 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 26 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 3.0 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 30 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 12 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (10 % aqueous solution): 6.5 to 7.5, Appendix 3.3

Assay:
Not less than 0.56 per cent of aloin when assayed by the following method.
Dissolve accurately weighed about 2.5 mg of aloin in methanol-chloroform (1: 1) and make up
the volume to 25 ml in another volumetric flask. Apply 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 µl of solution on TLC
plate and develop the plate to 8 cm using ethyl acetate: methanol: water (8: 1.35: 1) as mobile
phase. After development dry the plate in a current of hot air and scan in the TLC scanner at a
wavelength of 366 nm. Note the peak area and prepare the calibration curve by plotting peak area
vs concentration of aloin.
Extract accurately weighed about 7 g powder of Va¶¢s in 100 ml of alcohol in Soxhlet apparatus
for 6 h. Filter the extract while hot and dry completely and weigh. Take 25 mg in volumetric
flask. Make the volume to 25 ml with methanol-chloroform (1: 1). Apply 10 µl of the test
solutions on TLC plate. Develop, dry and scan the plate as described in the proceeding paragraph
for calibration curve of aloin. Record the area under the curve for a peak corresponding to aloin in
the test solution. Calculate the amount of aloin in the test solution from the calibration curve of
aloin.
Sodium: Not less than 4.5 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.10
Total Iron: Not less than 3.5 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.6

124
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Rajorodha (obstructed menstrual flow); KaÀ¶¡rtava (dysmenorrhoea); Ërtavavedan¡
(dysmenorrhoea)

Dose:
500 mg - 1 g per day in divided doses with Warm water/ Tila kv¡tha/Kulattha kv¡tha

125
 SAØJÌVANÌ VAÙÌ
(AFI Part I, 12:35)

Definition:
Saµj¢van¢ Va¶¢ is a pill preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation Composition
given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 Vi·a´ga API Embelia ribes Fr 1 part
2 N¡gara (áu¸¶h¢ API) Zingiber officinale Rz. 1 part
3 K¤À¸¡ (Pippal¢ API) Piper longum Fr. 1 part
4 Pathy¡ (Har¢tak¢ API) Terminalia chebula P. 1 part
5 Ëmala (Ëmalak¢ API) Emblica officinalis P. 1 part
6 Bibh¢taka API Terminalia bellirica P. 1 part
7 Vac¡ API Acorus calamus Rz. 1 part
8 Gu·£c¢ API Tinospora cordifolia St. 1 part
9 Bhall¡taka API - áuddha Semecarpus anacardium Fr. 1 part
10 ViÀa (Vatsan¡bha API) - áuddha Aconitum chasmanthum Rt. Tr. 1 part
11 Gom£tra (API) Cow urine – QS

Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Bhall¡taka to get Bhall¡taka - áuddha. (Appendix [Link]).
 Treat Vatsan¡bha to get Vatsan¡bha - áuddha. (Appendix [Link]).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 8 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Mix all the ingredients thoroughly to prepare a homogenous blend.
 Powder Bhall¡taka - áuddha and Vatsan¡bha- áuddha separately and pass through 180 µm IS
Sieve (sieve number 85) and add to the mixture to prepare a homogenous blend.
 Strain the Gom£tra through muslin cloth.
 Add Gom£tra in required quantity and triturate well to prepare a bolus.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Black coloured pills with a pleasant odour and acrid taste

126
Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about 5 Va¶¢s, crush, take in a beaker containing chloroform sufficient to wash the powder
two times; remove chloroform, allow to dry; wash the powder once in alcohol and again dry; take
a small amount and wash in water and mount in glycerin (80 per cent); take another small portion,
clear in chloral hydrate solution, wash in water and mount in glycerin; observe the following
characters:
Groups of stone cells from testa with very thick walls and radiating pit canals (Vi·a´ga);
abundant thin walled parenchyma cells, rounded to oval with small intercellular spaces, with a
few cells loosely packed with starch grains upto 60 microns, individual grain elliptic, oblong, with
hilum nearer the narrower, beaked end and some cells filled with oleoresin (áu¸¶h¢); group of
elongated, spindle shaped, wide lumened lignified stone cells often associated with spiral narrow
vessels (Pippal¢); polygonal epidermal cells from pericarp, where walls are slightly beaded, with
thin septa dividing the cells (Har¢tak¢); a few short stout unicellular thick walled trichomes with
a basal epidermal cell (Bibh¢taka); large mesocarpic parenchyma cells, with typical corner
thickenings, cells of epidermal tissue with small crystals of calcium oxalate (Ëmalak¢); tissue
debris showing moderately thick walled parenchymatous cells sorrounding large, irregularly
shaped air spaces, cells contain spherical starch grains (Vac¡); rounded, hemispherical and
irregularly ovoid starch grains with central hilum and isolated crystal fibres (Gu·£c¢); a few
large isolated or group of rectangular or angular stone cells with thin walls and wide pitted lumen
(Vatsan¡bha);large lysigenous cavities without contents,radially elongated thick walled sclerides
from endocarp, and occasional papillary oil cell from epicarp (Bhall¡taka).

Thin layer chromatography:

Extract 5 g of the powdered sample with 70 ml of ethanol in a Soxhlet apparatus on a water bath
for 6 h, filter and carry out thin layer chromatography.
a) Apply 20.0 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using n-
hexane: acetone (7.5: 2.5) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air and
spray the plate with anisaldehyde-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10
min. The plate shows major spots at Rf 0.36, 0.41 (both dark pink), 0.48 (brown), 0.62, 0.69 (both
purple) and 0.75 (violet) in visible light.
b) Apply 20 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene:
ethyl acetate: diethyl amine (7: 2: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in
air. Spray the plate with Dragendroff reagent and dry the plate followed by dipping in 5 per cent
ethanolic sulphuric acid. The plate shows major spots at Rf 0.49 and 0.59 (both orange) in visible
light.

127
Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 4 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 1 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 18 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 17 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 10 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (10 % aqueous solution): 4.0 to 5.5, Appendix 3.3

Assay:
Not less than 0.047 per cent of piperine when assayed by the following method.
Dissolve 1.0 mg of piperine in a mixture of methanol: chloroform (1: 1) and make up the volume
to 10 ml in another volumetric flask. Apply 1, 2, 6, 10, 14, 18 µl of solution on TLC plate and
develop the plate to 5.5 cm using n-hexane: acetone (7: 3) as mobile phase. After development,
dry the plate in a current of hot air and scan in the TLC scanner at a wavelength of 338 nm. Note
the peak area and prepare the calibration curve by plotting peak area vs concentration of piperine.
Extract accurately weighed 2 g powder of Va¶¢s in 75 ml of alcohol in Soxhlet apparatus for 6 h.
Filter the extract while hot and dry completely and weigh. Take 100 mg in volumetric flask and
dissolve in a mixture of methanol: chloroform (1: 1) and make up the volume to 25 ml. Apply 25
µl of the test solutions on TLC plate. Develop, dry and scan the plate as described in the
proceeding paragraph for calibration curve of piperine. Record the area under the curve for a peak
corresponding to piperine in the test solution. Calculate the amount of piperine in the test solution
from the calibration curve of piperine.

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.

Therapeutic uses:
Aj¢r¸a (indigestion); Gulma (abdominal lump); Vis£cik¡ (gastroenteritis with piercing pain);
Sarpadaƿa (snake bite)

Dose:
250 - 500 mg per day in divided doses with warm water/ Ërdraka svarasa

128
 áA×KHA VAÙÌ
(AFI Part I, 12:32)
Definition:
áa´kha Va¶¢ is a pill preparation made with the ingredients in the Formulation Composition given
below.

Formulation Composition:
1 Ciµc¡ API -kÀ¡ra Tamarindus indica St. Bk. 48 g
2 Pa¶uvraja (Paµca lava¸a each in 48 g
equal quantity)
a. Saindhava Lava¸a (API) Rock salt –
b. S¡mudra Lava¸a API Sea salt –
c. Sauvarcala Lava¸a (API) Black salt –
d. Vi·a Lava¸a Black salt∗
e. Audbhida Lava¸a Rock salt*
3 áa´kha (áa´kha Bhasma (API)) Calcined Conch – 48 g
4 Hi´gu API - áuddha Ferula foetida Exd. 48 g
5 VyoÀa
a. áu¸¶h¢ API Zingiber officinale Rz. 48 g
b. Marica API Piper nigrum Fr. 48 g
c. Pippal¢ API Piper longum Fr. 48 g
6 Rasa (P¡rada API) - áuddha Mercury – 3g
7 Am¤ta (Vatsan¡bha API) - áuddha Aconitum chasmanthum Rt. Tr. 3g
8 Val¢ (Gandhaka API) - áuddha Sulphur – 3g
9 Nimb£ API - Svarasa Citrus limon Fr. juice QS
Method of preparation:
 Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat áa´kha to prepare áa´kha bhasma. ♣
 Treat Hi´gu to get Hi´gu - áuddha (Appendix [Link]), Vatsan¡bha to get Vatsan¡bha -
áuddha (Appendix [Link]), P¡rada to get P¡rada - áuddha (Appendix [Link]) and Gandhaka
to get Gandhaka - áuddha (Appendix [Link]).
 Triturate P¡rada - áuddha and Gandhaka - áuddha together in a Khalvayantra to prepare
Kajjal¢. (Appendix 6.2.1).
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 5 of the Formulation Composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Powder Vatsan¡bha - áuddha and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
∗
Official Substitute
♣
Alternative method: Make thin paste of Ciµc¡ kÀ¡ra and Paµca Lava¸a in Nimb£ Svarasa. Heat
and quench áa´kha - áuddha repeatedly in this paste till it disintegrates to powder.
129
 Roast coarsely powdered Saindhava, S¡mudra, Sauvarcala, Vi·a and Audbhida Lava¸as in a
stainless steel pan on low flame till free from moisture, powder separately and pass through
180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85).
 Prepare Ciµc¡ kÀ¡ra (Appendix 6.2.3) and roast in a stainless steel pan on low flame till free
from moisture.
 Wash and clean fresh Nimb£ fruits, cut into halves, squeeze and strain the juice through
muslin cloth to obtain Nimb£ svarasa.
 Mix all the ingredients thoroughly to prepare a homogenous blend.
 Add svarasa in required quantity and triturate well to prepare a bolus.
 Expel the mass through rolling machine to obtain cylindrical threads and cut them to a desired
weight.
 Roll the va¶¢s on flat surface to round them by circular motion of palm covered with a glove
or use suitable mechanical device.
 Dry the rounded va¶¢s in a tray-dryer at a temperature not exceeding 600 for 10 to 12 h.
 Store va¶¢s in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.
Description:
Light grey pills with a characteristic asafoetida odour and salty taste.
Identification:
Microscopy:
Take about five Va¶¢s, crush, wash in slow running water on a 150 µm IS Sieve (sieve number
100) to allow mineral and water soluble matter to be washed away. Collect the material on sieve,
wash repeatedly in water and mount a small portion in glycerin (80 per cent); warm a small
portion in chloral hydrate solution, wash and mount in glycerin; observe the following characters:
Groups of isodiametric or slightly elongated stone cells with moderately thickened walls,
interspersed with thin walled polygonal parenchyma cells from hypodermis (Marica); group of
elongated, spindle shaped, wide lumened lignified stone cells (Pippal¢); a few large isolated or
group of rectangular or angular stone cells with thin walls and wide pitted lumen (Vatsan¡bha);
abundant thin walled parenchyma cells, rounded to oval with small intercellular spaces, with a
few cells loosely packed with starch grains, individual grain elliptic, oblong, varying upto 60
microns with hilum nearer the narrower, beaked end and some cells filled with oleoresin
(áu¸¶h¢); abundant loose starch grains and perisperm cells are general characters.
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 5 g of the powdered formulation with 70 ml of ethanol in a Soxhlet apparatus on a water
bath for 6 h, filter and carry out thin layer chromatography.
a) Apply 20.0 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using n-
hexane: acetone (7.5: 2.5) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air spray
the plate with anisaldehyde-sulphuric acid reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min.
The plate shows major spots at Rf , 0.13 (brown), 0.19, 0.23 (both green), 0.35 (purple), 0.40
(blue), 0.58 (pink) and 0.60 (violet)in visible light.

130
b) Apply 20.0 µl of the extract on TLC plate. Develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using
toluene: ethyl acetate: diethyl amine (7: 2: 1) as mobile phase. After development, allow the plate
to dry in air. Spray the plate with Dragendroff reagent and dry the plate followed by dipping in 5
per cent ethanolic sulphuric acid. The plate shows two major spots at Rf. 0.49 and 0.59 (both
orange) in visible light.
Chemical tests:
Complies with Tests for Hi´gu (Appendix 5.13.13) and Sulphur (Appendix 5.13.11)
Physico-chemical parameters:
Total Ash: Not more than 43 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 6 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 8 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 53 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 12 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (10 % aqueous solution): 8.0 to 9.0, Appendix 3.3
Assay:
Not less than 0.15 per cent of piperine when assayed by the following method.
Dissolve 1.0 mg of piperine in a mixture of methanol: chloroform (1: 1) and make up the volume
to 10 ml in another volumetric flask. Apply 1, 2, 6, 10, 14, 18 µl of solution on TLC plate and
develop the plate to 5.5 cm using n-hexane: acetone (7: 3) as mobile phase. After development,
dry the plate in a current of hot air and scan in the TLC scanner at a wavelength of 338 nm. Note
the peak area and prepare the calibration curve by plotting peak area vs concentration of piperine.
Extract accurately weighed 2 g powder of Va¶¢s in 75 ml of alcohol in Soxhlet apparatus for 6 h.
Filter the extract while hot and dry completely and weigh. Take 100 mg in volumetric flask and
dissolve in a mixture of methanol-chloroform (1:1) and make up the volume to 25 ml. Apply 20
µl of the test solutions on TLC plate. Develop, dry and scan the plate as described in the
preceeding paragraph for calibration curve of piperine. Record the area under the curve for a peak
corresponding to piperine in the test solution. Calculate the amount of piperine in the test solution
from the calibration curve of piperine.
Mercury: 0.6-1.10 per cent w/w, Appendix 5.8
Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflatoxins: Complies with Appendix 2.6
Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protected from light and moisture.
Therapeutic uses:
Agnim¡ndya (digestive impairment); Graha¸¢ (malabsorption syndrome); Arocaka
(tastelessness); Pakti¿£la (duodenal ulcers); KÀaya (pthisis)
Dose:
500 mg - 1 g per day in divided doses with Honey/Warm water/Butter milk

131
 PUNARNAVËDI MAÛÚÍRA
(AFI Part I, 19:1)

Definition:
Punarnav¡di Ma¸·£ra is a compressed tablet preparation made with the ingredients in the
Formulation Composition given below.

Formulation Composition:
1 Punarnav¡ (Rakta Punarnav¡ API) Boerhaavia diffusa Rt. 48 g
2 Triv¤t API Ipomea turpethum Rt. 48 g
3 VyoÀa
a. áu¸¶h¢ API Zingiber officinale Rz. 48 g
b. Marica API Piper nigrum Fr. 48 g
c. Pippal¢ API Piper longum Fr. 48 g
4 Vi·a´ga API Embelia ribes Fr. 48 g
5 D¡ru (Devad¡ru API) Cedrus deodara Ht. Wd. 48 g
6 Citraka API Plumbago zeylanica Rt. 48 g
7 Ku˦ha API Saussurea lappa Rt. 48 g
8 Haridr¡dvaya
a. Haridr¡ API Curcuma longa Rz. 48 g
b. D¡ruharidr¡ API Berberis aristata St. 48 g
9 Triphal¡
a. Har¢tak¢ API Terminalia chebula P. 48 g
b. Ëmalak¢ API Emblica officinalis P. 48 g
c. Bibh¢taka API Terminalia bellirica P. 48 g
10 Dant¢ API Baliospermum montanum Rt. 48 g
11 Cavya API Piper chaba St. 48 g
12 Kali´gaka (Indrayava API) Holarrhena antidysenterica Sd. 48 g
13 Pippal¢ API Piper longum Fr. 48 g
14 Pippal¢m£la API Piper longum St. 48 g
15 Musta (Must¡ API) Cyperus rotundus Rz. 48 g
16 Ma¸·£ra (Ma¸·£ra Bhasma (API)) Calcined Ma¸·£ra 1.920 kg
17 Gom£tra (API) Cow urine 6.144 l

Method of preparation:
 Take all the ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
 Treat Ma¸·£ra to prepare Ma¸·£ra bhasma.
 Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 15 of the formulation composition, powder
separately and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve (sieve number 85) to obtain fine powder and
mix them all to a homogeneous mixture.
 Strain Gom£tra through muslin cloth.

132
 Add Gom£tra to Ma¸·£ra bhasma, heat in a stainless steel container stirring continuously and
observe the mixture for formation of a thick paste.
 Stop the heating and allow to cool to 500.
 Add mixture of fine powders and mix thoroughly to prepare a homogeneous lumpy mass
(dough). Allow to cool.
 Pass the dough through a granulator to obtain granules and add 0.5 per cent of talc powder as
lubricant. Subject the granules to compression in a tablet punching machine.
 Store tablets in containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

Description:
Reddish brown coloured tablet with the characteristic odour of Gom£tra

Identification:
Thin layer chromatography:
Extract 2 g of formulation with 20 ml of alcohol for 400 for about 3 h. Filter and concentrate the
extract to 5 ml and carry out thin layer chromatography. Apply 10 µl of extract on TLC plate and
develop the plate to a distance of 8 cm using toluene: ethyl acetate: acetic acid (5: 4.5: 0.5) as
mobile phase. After development, allow the plate to dry in air. Spray the plate with anisaldehyde
sulphuric acide reagent followed by heating at 1050 for about 10 min. The plate shows spots at Rf
0.30 (light blue), 0.66 (yellow), 0.70 (green) and 0.76, 0.85 (both blue).

Physico-chemical parameters:
Total ash: Not more than 60 per cent, Appendix 2.2.3
Acid-insoluble ash: Not more than 28 per cent, Appendix 2.2.4
Alcohol-soluble extractive: Not less than 15 per cent, Appendix 2.2.5
Water-soluble extractive: Not less than 24 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Loss on drying: Not more than 8 per cent, Appendix 2.2.8
pH (10% aqueous solution): 6 to 7, Appendix 3.3
Disintegration time Not more than 30 min., Appendix 3.14
Average weight 250 (+5) mg, Appendix 3.15

Assay:
Total Iron: Not less than 14 per cent w/w Appendix 5.6

Other requirements:
Microbial limits: Complies with Appendix 2.4
Aflotoxins : Complies with Appendix 2.6

Storage:
Store in a cool place in tightly closed containers, protect from light and moisture.

133
Therapeutic uses:
P¡¸·u roga (anaemia), Graha¸¢ (malabsorption syndrome), áotha (inflammation), Pl¢h¡ roga
(splenic disease), ViÀamajvara (intermittent fever), Ar¿a (haemorrhoids), KuÀ¶ha (diseases of
skin), K¤mi (helminthiasis/worm infestation)

Dose:
1 to 2 g per day in divided doses

Anup¡na:
Buttermilk, water

134
1.1. Nessler Cylinders ............................................................................................................................... 137
1.2. Sieves 137
1.3. Thermometers .................................................................................................................................... 138
1.4. Ultraviolet Lamp (For general purposes and for chromatography work) .......................................... 139
1.5. Volumetric Glassware ........................................................................................................................ 139
1.6. Weights and Balances ........................................................................................................................ 139
1.7. Muslin Cloth ...................................................................................................................................... 139
2.1. Microscopic identification: ................................................................................................................ 140
2.2. Determination of Quantitative Data: .................................................................................................. 144
2.2.1. Net Content: .............................................................................................................. 144
2.2.2. Foreign Matter: ......................................................................................................... 144
2.2.3. Determination of Total Ash: ..................................................................................... 144
2.2.4. Determination of Acid-Insoluble Ash: ..................................................................... 144
2.2.5. Determination of Alcohol Soluble Extractive: ......................................................... 144
2.2.6. Determination of Water Soluble Extractive: ............................................................ 145
2.2.7. Determination of Ether Soluble Extractive (Fixed Oil Content): ............................. 145
2.2.8. Determination of Moisture Content (Loss on Drying): ............................................ 145
2.2.9. Determination of Volatile Oil in Drugs .................................................................... 145
2.2.10. Thin-Layer Chromatography (TLC): .................................................................... 147
2.2.11. Fatty oil estimation: .............................................................................................. 149
2.3. Limit Tests: ........................................................................................................................................ 149
2.3.1. Limit Test for Arsenic .............................................................................................. 149
2.3.2. Limit Test for Chlorides: .......................................................................................... 154
2.3.3. Limit Test for Heavy metals: .................................................................................... 154
2.3.4. Limit Test for Iron .................................................................................................... 157
2.3.5. Limit Test for Lead ................................................................................................... 157
2.3.6. Limit Test for Sulphates: .......................................................................................... 159
2.3.7. Heavy Metals by Atomic absorption spectrophotometry: ........................................ 159
2.4. Microbial Limit Tests:........................................................................................................................ 165
2.4.1. Total Aerobic Microbial Count: ............................................................................... 174
2.4.2. Tests for Specified Micro-organisms: ...................................................................... 176
2.5. Pesticide Residue: ............................................................................................................................. 180
2.5.1. Test for Pesticides:.................................................................................................... 184
2.5.2. Quantitative Analysis: .............................................................................................. 185
2.6. Test for Aflatoxins: ............................................................................................................................ 188
2.7. Gas Chromatography: ........................................................................................................................ 190
3.1. Refractive Index: ................................................................................................................................ 193
3.2. Weight per Millilitre and Specific Gravity: ....................................................................................... 193
3.3. Determination of pH Values: ............................................................................................................. 194
3.4. Determination of Melting Range and Congealing Range: ................................................................. 194
3.4.1. Determination of Melting Range: ............................................................................. 194
3.4.2. Determination of Congealing Range: ....................................................................... 197
3.5. Determination of Boiling Range: ....................................................................................................... 198

137
3.6. Solubility in Water: ............................................................................................................................ 199
3.7. Determination of Saponification Value: ............................................................................................ 200
3.8. Determination of Iodine Value:.......................................................................................................... 200
3.9. Determination of Acid Value: ............................................................................................................ 201
3.10. Determination of Peroxide Value:...................................................................................................... 202
3.11. Determination of Unsaponifiable Matter: .......................................................................................... 202
3.12. Detection of Mineral Oil (Holde’s Test):........................................................................................... 203
3.13. Rancidity Test (Kreis Test): ............................................................................................................... 203
3.14. Disintegration test for tablets: ............................................................................................................ 203
3.15. Uniformity of Weight of Single Dose Preparations ........................................................................... 205
5.1. Estimation of Sugars .......................................................................................................................... 235
5.2. Determination of Aluminum: ............................................................................................................. 237
5.3. Determination of Borax: .................................................................................................................... 237
5.4. Determination of Calcium: ................................................................................................................. 237
5.5. Determination of Copper: .................................................................................................................. 238
5.6. Determination of Iron :....................................................................................................................... 238
5.7. Determination of Magnesium: ........................................................................................................... 239
5.8. Determination of Mercury: ................................................................................................................ 240
5.9. Determination of Silica (SiO2): .......................................................................................................... 240
5.10. Estimation of Sodium and Potassium by Flame Photometer: ............................................................ 240
5.11. Determination of Sodium Chloride: ................................................................................................... 241
5.12. Determination of Sulphur:.................................................................................................................. 241
5.13. Qualitative Reactions : ....................................................................................................................... 242
5.13.1 Sodium ...................................................................................................................... 242
5.13.2. Potassium .............................................................................................................. 242
5.13.3. Magnesium ............................................................................................................ 242
5.13.4. Carbonates and Bicarbonates ................................................................................ 242
5.13.5. Sulphates ............................................................................................................... 243
5.13.6. Chlorides ............................................................................................................... 243
5.13.7. Calcium ................................................................................................................. 243
5.13.8. Sulphides ............................................................................................................... 243
5.13.9. Test for Mercury : ................................................................................................. 243
5.13.10. Test for Boron : ..................................................................................................... 244
5.13.11. Test for Sulphur: ................................................................................................... 244
5.13.12. Test for anthraquinones : ...................................................................................... 244
5.13.13. Test for Hi´gu:....................................................................................................... 244
[Link]¡ Paribh¡À¡: ................................................................................................................................... 245
6.1.1. Kalka:........................................................................................................................ 245
6.1.2. Kv¡tha / KaÀ¡ya: ...................................................................................................... 245
6.1.3. C£r¸a: ........................................................................................................................ 245
6.1.4. Pu¶ap¡ka Svarasa: ..................................................................................................... 245
6.1.5. Svarasa: ..................................................................................................................... 245
6.1.6. Hima KaÀ¡ya:........................................................................................................... 245

137
 6.1.7. Ph¡¸¶a ........................................................................................................................ 246
6.2. S¡m¡nya paribh¡À¡: ........................................................................................................................... 246
6.2.1. Kajjal¢: ..................................................................................................................... 246
6.2.2. K¡µjika:..................................................................................................................... 246
6.2.3. KÀ¡ra Preparation: ................................................................................................... 246
6.2.4. C£r¸odaka: ................................................................................................................ 246
6.2.5. Mastu Preparation: .................................................................................................... 246
6.2.6. PrakÀepa: ................................................................................................................. 247
6.2.7. Bh¡van¡: .................................................................................................................... 247
6.2.8. áodhana: .................................................................................................................... 247
[Link]. Godant¢ áodhana: ........................................................................................................ 247
[Link]. Gairika áodhana: ........................................................................................................... 247
[Link]. Gandhaka áodhana: ..................................................................................................... 248
[Link]. Guggulu áodhana: ........................................................................................................ 248
[Link]. Ùa´ka¸a áodhana: ......................................................................................................... 248
[Link]. Tuttha áodhana: ............................................................................................................ 248
[Link]. Bhall¡taka áodhana: ..................................................................................................... 249
[Link]. ManaÅ¿il¡ áodhana: ..................................................................................................... 249
[Link]. Vatsan¡bha áodhana: ................................................................................................... 249
[Link]. Karav¢ra áodhana: ........................................................................................................ 249
[Link]. Citraka áodhana: ........................................................................................................... 250
[Link]. L¡´gal¢ áodhana:............................................................................................................ 250
[Link]. áil¡jatu áodhana: ........................................................................................................... 250
[Link]. Harit¡la áodhana: .......................................................................................................... 250
[Link]. Hi´gu áodhana: .............................................................................................................. 250
[Link]. Vijay¡ áodhana: ............................................................................................................. 251
[Link]. K¡¿¢¿a áodhana: ........................................................................................................... 251
[Link]. Sauv¢r¡µjana áodhana: ................................................................................................. 251
[Link]. Naras¡ra áodhana:......................................................................................................... 251
[Link]. P¡rada S¡m¡nya áodhana: ............................................................................................. 251
[Link]. AÀ¶asaÆsk¡ra of P¡rada ............................................................................................... 252
[Link].a. Svedana: ................................................................................................................... 252
[Link].b Mardana: ................................................................................................................... 252
[Link].c. M£rcchana: ............................................................................................................... 253
[Link].d. Utth¡pana: ................................................................................................................. 253

137
 [Link].e. P¡tana: ....................................................................................................................... 253
[Link].f. Rodhana / Bodhana: ................................................................................................. 254
[Link].g. Niy¡mana: .................................................................................................................. 254
[Link]. h. D¢pana / Sand¢pana: ................................................................................................ 255
6.2.9. M£rchan¡: ................................................................................................................. 255
[Link]. M£rcchan¡ of Era¸·a Taila: ............................................................................................ 255
[Link]. M£rcchan¡ of Gh¤ta: .................................................................................................... 257
[Link]. M£rcchana of SarÀapa Taila: ....................................................................................... 258
[Link]. M£rcchana of Tila Taila: ............................................................................................... 259

6.3. Yantra Paribh¡À¡: ............................................................................................................................... 260

6.3.1. Khalva yantra:........................................................................................................... 260
6.3.2. Tiryak p¡tana yantra: ................................................................................................ 260
6.3.3. Úamaru yantra: ......................................................................................................... 260
6.3.4. Dol¡yantra: ................................................................................................................ 260
7.1. Metric Equivalents of Classical Weights and Measures .................................................................... 261
7.2. Metric System .................................................................................................................................... 262

137
137
APPENDICES

135
 APPENDIX - 1
APPARATUS FOR TESTS AND ASSAYS
1.1. Nessler Cylinders
Nessler cylinders which are used for comparative tests are matched tubes of clear colourless glass
with a uniform internal diameter and flat, transparent base. They comply with Indian Standard 4161-
1967. They are of transparent glass with a nominal capacity of 50 ml. The overall height is about 150
mm, the external height to the 50 ml mark 110 to 124 mm, the thickness of the wall 1.0 to 1.5 mm
and the thickness of the base 1.5 to 3.0 mm. The external height to the 50 ml mark of the cylinder
used for a test must not vary by more than 1 mm.

1.2. Sieves
Sieves for pharmacopoeial testing are constructed from wire cloth with square meshes, woven from
wire of brass, phosphor bronze or stainless steel. The wires should be of uniform circular cross-
section and should not be coated or plated. There must be no reaction between the material of the
sieve and the substance being sifted. Sieves conform to the specifications as given in IS 460 (Pt I)
1985 (Reaffirmed 1998) – in terms of aperture size of the sieve, and for the convenience of the users
the earlier IS 460-1978 – in terms of Sieve/Mesh Number has also been given in the following table:
Table 1
IS 460 (Pt I) 1985 IS 460-1978
(Reaffirmed 1998)
mm --
4.0 4
2.8 6
2.0 8
1.7 10
1.4 12
1.0 16
µm --
710 22
600 25
500 30

137
 425 36
355 44
250 60
180 85
150 100
125 120
106 150
90 170
75 200
63 240
53 300
45 350
Designation
Test sieves of metal wire cloth are designated by the nominal size of aperture of the wire cloth,
followed by the inscription ‘IS Sieve’.
Examples:
a. 5.60-mm IS Sieve
b. 425 µm IS Sieve
Nominal aperture sizes of 1 mm and above, as well as their associated tolerances and wire diameters,
are expressed in millimetres (mm) and for aperture sizes smaller than 1 mm, these are expressed in
micrometres (µm).

1.3. Thermometers
Unless otherwise specified, thermometers suitable for pharmacopoeial tests conform to Indian
Standard 4825-1968 and are standardised in accordance with the ‘Indian Standard Method of
Calibrating Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers’, 6274-1971.
The thermometers are of the mercury-in-glass type and are filled with a dried inert gas, preferably
nitrogen. They may be standardised for total immersion or for partial immersion. Each thermometer
should be employed according to the condition of immersion under which it was standardised. In the
selection of the thermometer it is essential to consider the conditions under which it is to be used.

138
1.4. Ultraviolet Lamp (For general purposes and for chromatography work)
An instrument consisting of mercury vapour lamp and a filter which gives an emission band with
maximum intensity at about 254 nm (near UV rays) and 366 nm (far UV rays) is used. To ensure that
the required emission is being given by the lamp, carry out the following test periodically.
Apply to a plate coated with silica gel G, 5 µl of a 0.04 per cent w/v solution of sodium salicylate in
ethanol (95%) for lamps of maximum output at 254 nm and 5 µl of a 0.2 per cent w/v solution in
ethanol (95%) for lamps of maximum output at 365 nm. Examine the spot in a position normal to the
radiation. The distance between the lamp and the plate under examination used in a pharmacopoeial
test should not exceed the distance used to carry out the above test.

1.5. Volumetric Glassware

Volumetric apparatus is normally calibrated at 270. However, the temperature generally specified for
measurements of volume in the analytical operations of the pharmacopoeia, unless otherwise stated,
is 250. The discrepancy is inconsequential as long as the room temperature in the laboratory is
reasonably constant and is around 270.
Pharmacopoeial assays involving volumetric measurements require the use of accurately calibrated
glassware. Volumetric apparatus must be suitably designed to assure accuracy. The design,
construction and capacity of volumetric glassware should be in accordance with those laid down by
the Bureau of Indian Standards. The tolerances on capacity for volumetric flasks, pipettes and
burettes, as laid down in the relevant Indian Standards, are permisibile.

1.6. Weights and Balances

Pharmacopoeial tests and assays require the use of analytical balances that vary in capacity,
sensitivity and reproducibility. The accuracy needed for a weighing should dictate the type of
balance. Where substances are to be “accurately weighed”, the weighing is to be performed so as to
limit the error to not more than 0.1 per cent. For example, a quantity of 50 mg is to be weighed to the
nearest 0.05 mg; a quantity of 0.1 g is to be weighed to the nearest 0.1 mg; and quantity of 10 g is to
be weighed to the nearest 10 mg. A balance should be chosen such that the value of three times the
standard deviation of the reproducibility of the balance, divided by the amount to be weighed, does
not exceed 0.001.

1.7. Muslin Cloth

Muslin cloth is a cotton fabric of plain weave where warp is 22 per cm +1 and weft is 18 +1 per
centimeter.
Method: Take a cardboard or an aluminium plate with a centimeter square opening. Keep the plate
on the cloth to be used, so that the edges on the X or Y axis coincides with a warp or weft yarn in the
[Link] the number of the threads of both warp and weft within the opening.

139
 APPENDIX - 2
TESTS AND DETERMINATIONS
2.1. Microscopic identification:
Microscopic identification of the botanical ingredients is a standard for statutory purposes in several
solid and semi-solid compound formulations. Microscopic identification tests are confined to those
formulations where the botanical ingredients are not more than ten, and are added ‘in situ’ in
powder form as ‘PrakÀepa Dravyas’. Such comminuted ingredients lend themselves for microscopic
identification, as they are not drastically changed in cell structure or contents while processing, and
appear intact in microscopic slide preparations, after proper treatment.
Appropriate processing for separation and isolation of botanical debris from a formulation without
loss of debris, by hand picking dry and wet sieving, washing, sedimentation, density separation or by
floatation etc. are the preliminary steps. This is followed by clearing the isolated debris in chemical
reagents, reacting it with suitable reagents and stains and finally mounting a little part on a slide in a
medium of suitable refractive index (see later part) that helps to show the unit structures in good
relief. Identification of the discrete, but disoriented units from the botanical ingredients in a
formulation will not be possible without proper isolation, and should not be attempted.
Monographs where the test is prescribed give both a relevant method of isolation and diagnostic
features specific to the expected ingredients in that formulation. Only a brief method and a few of the
characteristics for each ingredient are given, but an analyst may use other methods of isolation and
choose more characteristics to draw a correct conclusion.
Although monographs prescribe standards only for the ‘PrakÀepa Dravyas’, characteristics from other
ingredients that are processed into extracts or decoctions prior to their addition to a formulation may
also be seen in a slide preparation, giving rise to recognisable unique characteristics. In addition, cell
or tissue structures common to several ingredients added to a formulation, and therefore not specific
to any one of them, would interfere. Caution should therefore be exercised so that such features are
not construed as parts from adulterants or substitutes or foreign parts. Proper study of the individual
ingredients using authentic material and reference to their monographs in the Ayurvedic
Pharmacopoeia for Single Drugs would help avoid errors of this nature. Skill in the recognition of
discrete and disoriented tissue components and the knowledge required to ascribe them to their
correct source should be acquired by the analyst.
A. Stains and Reagents for Microchemical Reactions:
The Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia volumes on single drugs already include microchemical reactions for
ergastic substances and may be consulted in addition to the following for use on isolated debris. If for
some reason the reagents suggested for preparation of material for microscopy in the monographs
itself, does not yield expected result for any sample under test, the relevant reagent given here may be
substituted for better results.

140
Acetic acid: Dilute 6 ml of glacial acetic acid with 100 ml of distilled water; used for identification
of cystoliths, which dissolve with effervescence.
Aniline Chloride Solution: Dissolve 2 g in a mixture of 65 ml of 30 per cent ethyl alcohol and 15
ml distilled water and add 2 ml of conc. hydrochloric acid. Lignified tissues are stained bright yellow.
Bismarck Brown: Dissolve 1 g in 100 ml of 95 per cent of ethyl alcohol; used as a general stain for
macerated material (with Schultze’s).
Chlorinated Soda Solution (Bleaching Solution): Dissolve 75 g of sodium carbonate in 125 ml of
distilled water; triturate 50 g of chlorinated lime (bleaching powder) in a mortar with 75 ml of
distilled water, adding it little by little. Mix the two liquids and shake occasionally for three or four
hours. Filter and store, protected from light. Used for lightening highly coloured material, by
warming in it and washing the tissues thoroughly.
Breamer’s reagent: Dissolve 1 g of sodium tungstate and 2 g of sodium acetate in sufficient
quantity of water to make 10 ml. Yellowish to brown precipitates; indicate the presence of tannins.
Canada Balsam (as a Mountant): Heat Canada balsam on a water bath until volatile matter is
removed and the residue sets to a hard mass on cooling. Dissolve residue in xylene to form a thin
syrupy liquid. Used for making permanent mounts of reference slides of selected debris.
Chloral Hydrate Solution: Dissolve 50 g of chloral hydrate in 20 ml of distilled water. A valuable
clarifying agent for rendering tissues transparent and clear, by freeing them from most of the ergastic
substances, but leaving calcium oxalate crystals unaffected.
Chloral Iodine: Saturate chloral hydrate solution with iodine, leaving a few crystals undissolved;
useful for detecting minute grains of starch otherwise undetectable.
Chlorziniciodine (Iodinated Zinc Chloride solution): Dissolve 20 g of zinc chloride and 6.5 g of
potassium iodide in 10 ml of distilled water. Add 0.5 g of iodine and shake for about fifteen minutes
before filtering. Dilute, if needed, prior to use. Renders cellulosic walls bluish violet and lignified
walls yellowish brown to brown.
Chromic acid Solution: 10 g of potassium chromate dissolved in 90 ml of dilute sulphuric acid: A
macerating agent similar to Schultze’s.
Corallin Soda: Dissolve 5 g of corallin in 100 ml of 90 per cent ethyl alcohol. Dissolve 25 g of
sodium carbonate in 100 ml distilled water; keep the solutions separate and mix when required, by
adding 1 ml of the corallin solution to 20 ml of the aqueous sodium carbonate solution. Prepare fresh
each time, as the mixture will not keep for long. Used for staining sieve plates and callus bright pink
and imparts a reddish tinge to starch grains and lignified tissues.
Ammoniacal solution of Copper oxide (Cuoxam): Triturate 0.5 g of copper carbonate in a mortar
with 10 ml of distilled water and gradually add 10 ml of strong solution of ammonia (sp. gr. 0.880)
with continued stirring; used for dissolving cellulosic materials.

141
Eosin: 1 per cent solution in 90 per cent ethyl alcohol; Stains cellulose and aleurone grains red.
Ferric Chloride solution: A 5 per cent solution of ferric chloride in distilled water. Taninn
containing tissues coloured bluish or greenish black.
Glycerin: Pure or diluted as required with one or two volumes of distilled water. Used as a general
mountant.
Haematoxylin, Delafield’s: Prepare a saturated solution of ammonia alum. To 100 ml of this add a
solution of 1 g of Haematoxylin in 6 ml of ethyl alcohol (97 per cent). Leave the mixed solution
exposed to air and light in an unstopped bottle for three or four days. Filter and add to the filtrate 25
ml of glycerin and 25 ml of methyl alcohol. Allow the solution to stand exposed to light, till it
acquires a dark colour (about two months). Refilter and store as a stock solution. Dilute it 3 or 4 times
volumes with distilled water. Stains cellulosic fibers blue; used only on water washed material.
Iodine Water: Mix 1 volume of decinormal iodine with 4 volumes of distilled water. Stains starch
blue, and reveals crystalloids and globoids when present in aleurone grains.
Iodine in Potassium iodide solution: Dissolve 1 g of potassium iodide in 200 ml of distilled water,
add 2 g of iodine to the solution and dissolved it; stains lignified walls yellow and cellulosic walls
blue.
Lactophenol (Amman’s Fluid): Phenol 20 g, Lactic acid 20 g, Glycerin 40 g, dissolved in distilled
water 20 ml; reveals starch grains in polarised light with a well marked cross at hilum, and also
minute crystals of calcium oxalate as brightly polarising points of light.
Methylene blue: A solution of 0.1 g of Methylene blue in 25 ml of ethyl alcohol (95 per cent). A
general stain for nucleus and bacteria.
Millon’s Reagent: Dissolve 1 volume of mercury in 9 volumes of fuming nitric acid (Sp. gr. 1.52),
keeping the mixture well cooled during reaction. Add equal volume distilled water when cool. Stains
proteins red.
Naphthol Solution: Dissolve 10 g of Naphthol in 100 ml of ethyl alcohol; a specific stain for
detection of inulin; cells containing inulin turn deep reddish violet.
Phloroglucinol: 1 g of phloroglucinol dissolved in 100 ml of 90 per cent ethyl alcohol; mount debris
in a few drops, allow to react for a minute, draw off excess of reagent with a filter paper strip, and add
a drop of conc. hydrochloric acid to the slide; lignified tissues acquire a deep purplish red colour;
very effective on water washed material but not in chloral hydrate washed debris, for which Alcoholic
solution of safranin is more effective (See Safranin).
Picric acid Solution (Trinitrophenol Solution): A saturated aqueous solution made by dissolving 1
g of picric acid in 95 ml of distilled water; stains animal and insect tissues, a light to deep yellow; in a
solution with ethyl alcohol, aleurone grains and fungal hyphae are stained yellow.

142
Potash, Caustic: A 5 per cent aqueous solution; used to separate tenacious tissues of epidermis and
also laticiferous elements and vittae, both of which are stained brown.
Ruthenium Red: Dissolve 0.008 g of ruthenium red in 10 ml of a 10 per cent solution of lead
acetate; (to be freshly prepared) used for identification of most kinds of mucilage containing tissues,
which turn pink. A 0.0008 g ruthenium red dissolved in 10 ml of distilled water and used immediately
stains cuticular tissues in debris to a light pink.
Safranin: A 1 per cent solution in ethyl alcohol 50 per cent; used to stain lignified cell walls deep
red, even after clearing with choral hydrate.
Schultze’s Maceration Fluid: Add isolated debris to 50 per cent conc. nitric acid in a test tube and
warm over water bath: add a few crystals of potassium chlorate while warming, till tissues soften;
cool, wash with water thoroughly and tease out for mounting hard tissues; isolated cell structures are
clearly revealed, but the structures are not useful for measurement of dimensions.
Sehweitzer’s reagent: Same as Ammoniacal Copper Oxide Solution (Cuoxam).
Sudan Red III: Dissolve 0.01 g of sudan red III in 5 ml of ethyl alcohol (90 per cent) and 5 ml of
pure glycerin; suberised walls of cork cells, and fatty material in cells are stained bright red.
Sulphovanadic Acid (Mandelin’s Reagent): Triturate 1 g of ammonium vandate with 100 ml conc.
sulphuric acid. Allow the deposit to subside and use the clear liquid. This is to be prepared fresh;
useful for identification of alkaloids, particularly strychnine which turns violet in the cells containing
it.
Table 2 - Refractive Indices of Certain Mountants
Alcohol 1.36
Benzene 1.50
Bromoform 1.59
Canada balsam 1.54
Cassia oil 1.60
Castor oil 1.48
Cedar Oil 1.51
Chloral Hydrate solution 1.44 to 1.48
Chloroform 1.44
Clove oil 1.53
Cresol 1.53
Glycerol 1.473
Kerosene 1.448
Lactophenol 1.444

143
 Methylene iodide 1.74
α-Monobromonaphthalene 1.66
Monobromo benzol 1.56
Olive oil 1.46 to 1.47
Water 1.333
Xylol 1.49

2.2. Determination of Quantitative Data:

2.2.1. Net Content:
The content of the final or retail pack shall not be less than 98 percent of the declared net content.

2.2.2. Foreign Matter:

The sample shall be free from visible signs of mould growth, sliminess, stones, rodent excreta, insects
or any other noxious foreign matter when examined as given below.
Take a representative portion from a large container, or remove the entire contents of the packing if
100 g or less, and spread in a thin layer in a suitable dish or tray. Examine in daylight with unaided
[Link] suspected particles, if any, to a petri dish, and examine with 10x lens in daylight.

2.2.3. Determination of Total Ash:

Incinerate about 2 to 3 g accurately weighed, of the ground drug in a tared platinum or silica dish at a
temperature not exceeding 6000 until free from carbon, cool and weigh. If a carbon free ash cannot be
obtained in this way, exhaust the charred mass with hot water, collect the residue on an ashless filter
paper, incinerate the residue and filter paper, add the filtrate, evaporate to dryness, and ignite at a
temperature not exceeding 6000. Calculate the percentage of ash with reference to the air-dried drug.

2.2.4. Determination of Acid-Insoluble Ash:

To the crucible containing total ash, add 25 ml of dilute hydrochloric acid. Collect the insoluble
matter on an ashless filter paper (Whatman 41) and wash with hot water until the filtrate is neutral.
Transfer the filter paper containing the insoluble matter to the original crucible, dry on a hot-plate and
ignite to constant weight. Allow the residue to cool in a suitable desiccator for 30 minutes and weigh
without delay. Calculate the content of acid-insoluble ash with reference to the air-dried drug.

2.2.5. Determination of Alcohol Soluble Extractive:

Macerate 5 g of the air dried drug, coarsely powdered, with 100 ml of alcohol the specified strength
in a closed flask for twenty-four hours, shaking frequently during six hours and allowing to stand for
eighteen hours. Filter rapidly, taking precautions against loss of solvent, evaporate 25 ml of the
filtrate to dryness in a tared flat bottomed shallow dish, and dry at 1050, to constant weight and

144
weigh. Calculate the percentage of alcohol-soluble extractive with reference to the air-dried drug. For
determination of methanol soluble extractive, use methanol in place of alcohol.

2.2.6. Determination of Water Soluble Extractive:

Proceed as directed for the determination of alcohol-soluble extractive, using chloroform-water
instead of ethanol.

2.2.7. Determination of Ether Soluble Extractive (Fixed Oil Content):

Transfer a suitably weighed quantity (depending on the fixed oil content) of the air-dried, crushed
drug to an extraction thimble, extract with solvent ether (or petroleum ether, b.p. 400 to 600) in a
continuous extraction apparatus (Soxhlet extractor) for 6 hours. Filter the extract quantitatively into a
tared evaporating dish and evaporate off the solvent on a water bath. Dry the residue at 1050 to
constant weight. Calculate the percentage of ether-soluble extractive with reference to the air-dried
drug.

2.2.8. Determination of Moisture Content (Loss on Drying):

Procedure set forth here determines the amount of volatile matter (i.e., water drying off from the
drug). For substances appearing to contain water as the only volatile constituent, the procedure given
below, is appropriately used.
Place about 10 g of drug (without preliminary drying) after accurately weighing (accurately weighed
to within 0.01 g) it in a tared evaporating dish. For example, for unground or unpowderd drug,
prepare about 10 g of the sample by cutting shredding so that the parts are about 3 mm in thickness.
Seeds and fruits, smaller than 3 mm should be cracked. Avoid the use of high speed mills in preparing
the samples, and exercise care that no appreciable amount of moisture is lost during preparation and
that the portion taken is representative of the official sample. After placing the above said amount of
the drug in the tared evaporating dish, dry at 1050 for 5 hours, and weigh. Continue the drying and
weighing at one hour interval until difference between two successive weighing corresponds to not
more than 0.25 per cent. Constant weight is reached when two consecutive weighing after drying for
30 minutes and cooling for 30 minutes in a desiccator, show not more than 0.01 g difference.

2.2.9. Determination of Volatile Oil in Drugs

The determination of volatile oil in a drug is made by distilling the drug with a mixture of water and
glycerin, collecting the distillate in a graduated tube in which the aqueous portion of the distillate is
automatically separated and returned to the distilling flask, and measuring the volume of the oil. The
content of the volatile oil is expressed as a percentage v/w.
The apparatus consists of the following parts (see Fig. 1). The clevenger’s apparatus described below
is recommended but any similar apparatus may be used provided that it permits complete distillation
of the volatile oil. All glass parts of the apparatus should be made of good quality resistance glass.

145
 Fig. 1 Apparatus for volatile oil determination

The apparatus is cleaned before each distillation by washing successively with acetone and water,
then inverting it, filling it with chromic sulphuric acid mixture, after closing the open end at G, and
allowing to stand, and finally rinsing with water.
Method of determination:
A suitable quantity of the coarsely powdered drug together with 75 ml of glycerin and 175 ml of
water in the one litre distilling flask, and a few pieces of porous earthen ware and one filter paper 15
cm cut into small strips, 7 to 12 mm wide, are also put in the distilling flask, which is then connected
to the still head. Before attaching the condenser, water is run into the graduated receiver, keeping the
tap T open until the water overflows, at P. Any air bubbles in the rubber tubing a—b are carefully
removed by pressing the tube. The tap is then closed and the condenser attached. The contents of the
flask are now heated and stirred by frequent agitation until ebullition commences. The distillation is
continued at a rate, which keeps the lower end of the condenser cool. The flask is rotated occasionally
to wash down any material that adheres to its sides.
At the end of the specified time (3 to 4 hours) heating is discontinued, the apparatus is allowed to cool
for 10 minutes and the tap T is opened and the tube L1 lowered slowly; as soon as the layer of the oil
completely enters into the graduated part of the receiver the tap is closed and the volume is read.

146
The tube L1 is then raised till the level of water in it is above the level of B, when the tap T is slowly
opened to return the oil to the bulb. The distillation is again continued for another hour and the
volume of oil is again read, after cooling the apparatus as before. If necessary, the distillation is again
continued until successive readings of the volatile oil do not differ.
The measured yield of volatile oil is taken to be the content of volatile oil in the drug. The dimensions
of the apparatus may be suitably modified in case of necessity.

2.2.10. Thin-Layer Chromatography (TLC):

Thin-layer chromatography is a technique in which a solute undergoes distribution between two
phases, stationary phase acting through adsorption and a mobile phase in the form of a liquid. The
adsorbent is a relatively thin, uniform layer of dry finely powdered material applied to a glass, plastic
or metal sheet or plate. Precoated plates are most commonly used. Separation may also be achieved
on the basis of partition or a combination of partition and adsorption, depending on the particular type
of support, its preparation and its use with different solvent.
Identification can be effected by observation of spots of identical Rf value and about equal magnitude
obtained, respectively, with an unknown and a reference sample chromatographed on the same plate.
A visual comparison of the size and intensity of the spots usually serves for semi-quantitative
estimation.
Apparatus:
(a) Flat glass plates of appropriate dimensions which allow the application at specified points of
the necessary quantities of the solution being examined and appropriate reference solutions
and which allow accommodation of the specified migration path-length. The plates are
prepared as described below; alternatively, commercially prepared plates may be used.
(b) An aligning tray or a flat surface on which the plates can be aligned and rested when the
coating substance is applied.
(c) The adsorbent or coating substance consisting of finely divided adsorbent materials, normally
5 µm to 40 µm in diameter is suitable for chromatography. It can be applied directly to the
plate or can be bonded to the plate by means of plaster of paris (Hydrated Calcium Sulphate)
or with any other suitable binders. The adsorbent may contain fluorescing material to help in
visualising spots that absorb ultra-violet light.
(d) A spreader which, when moved over the glass plate, will apply a uniform layer of adsorbent of
desired thickness over the entire surface of the plate.
(e) A storage rack to support the plates during drying and transportation.
(f) A developing chamber that can accommodate one or more plates and can be properly closed
and sealed. The chamber is fitted with a plate support rack that supports the plates, back to
back, with lid of the chamber in place.

147
 (g) Graduated micro-pipettes capable of delivering microlitre quantities say 10 µl and less.
(h) A reagent sprayer that will emit a fine spray and will not itself be attacked by the reagent.
(i) An ultra-violet light, suitable for observation at short (254 nm) and long (366 nm) ultra-violet
wavelengths.
Preparation of plates:
Unless otherwise specified in the monograph, the plates are prepared in the following manner.
Prepare a suspension of the coating substance in accordance with the instructions of the supplier and,
using the spreading device designed for the purpose, spread a uniform layer of the suspension, 0.20 to
0.30 mm thick, on a flat glass plate 20 cm long. Allow the coated plates to dry in air, heat at 1000 to
1050 for at least 1 hour (except in the case of plates prepared with cellulose when heating for 10
minutes is normally sufficient) and allow to cool, protected from moisture. Store the plates protected
from moisture and use within 3 days of preparation. At the time of use, dry the plates again, if
necessary, as prescribed in the monographs. Now a days pre coated plates of silica gel on
glass/aluminium/ plastic sheets are also available.
Method:
Unless unsaturated conditions are prescribed, prepare the tank by lining the walls with sheets of filter
paper; pour into the tank, saturating the filter paper in the process, sufficient of the mobile phase to
form a layer of solvent 5 to 10 mm deep, close the tank and allow to stand for 1 hour at room
temperature. Remove a narrow strip of the coating substance, about 5 mm wide, from the vertical
sides of the plate. Apply the solutions being examined in the form of circular spots about 2 to 6 mm
in diameter, or in the form of bands (10 to 20 mm x 2 to 6 mm unless otherwise specified) on a line
parallel with, and 20 mm from, one end of the plate, and not nearer than 20 mm to the sides; the spots
should be 15 mm apart. If necessary, the solutions may be applied in portions, drying between
applications. Mark the sides of the plate 15 cm, or the distance specified in the monograph, from the
starting line. Allow the solvent to evaporate and place the plate in the tank, ensuring that it is as
nearly vertical as possible and that the spots or bands are above the level of the mobile phase. Close
the tank and allow to stand at room temperature, until the mobile phase has ascended to the marked
line. Remove the plate and dry and visualise as directed in the monograph; where a spraying
technique is prescribed it is essential that the reagent be evenly applied as a fine spray.
For two-dimensional chromatography dry the plate after the first development and carry out the
second development in a direction perpendicular to the first.
When the method prescribed in the monograph specifies ‘protected from light’ or ‘in subdued light’
it is intended that the entire procedure is carried out under these conditions.
Visualisation:
The phrases ultra-violet light (254 nm) and ultra-violet light (366 nm) indicate that the plate should be
examined under an ultra-violet light having a maximum output at about 254 or at about 365 nm, as
the case may be.

148
The term secondary spot means any spot other than the principal spot. Similarly, a secondary band is
any band other than the principal band.
Rf Value :
Measure and record the distance of each spot from the point of its application and calculate the Rf
value by dividing the distance travelled by the spots by the distance travelled by the front of the
mobile phase.

2.2.11. Fatty oil estimation:

To estimate fatty oils, extract accurately weighed air-dried powdered plant material with petroleum
ether (40-600) in a Soxhlet apparatus. Dry the extract over anhydrous sodium sulphate and remove the
solvent under vacuum at 400. Weigh the residue and calculate the percentage with reference to the
weight of plant material used.

2.3. Limit Tests:

Table 3- Permissible Limits of Heavy Metals and Arsenic
[Link]. Heavy Metal contents and Arsenic Permissible limits
1 Lead 10 ppm
2 Arsenic 3 ppm
3 Cadmium 0.3 ppm
4 Mercury 1 ppm

2.3.1. Limit Test for Arsenic

In the limit test for arsenic, the amount of arsenic is expressed as arsenic, As ppm
Apparatus –
A wide-mouthed bottle capable of holding about 120 ml is fitted with a rubber bung through which
passes a glass tube. The latter, made from ordinary glass tubing, has a total length of 200 mm and an
internal diameter of exactly 6.5 mm (external diameter about 8 mm). It is drawn out at one end to a
diameter of about 1 mm and a hole not less than 2 mm in diameter is blown in the side of the tube,
near the constricted part. When the bung is inserted in the bottle containing 70 ml of liquid, the
constricted end of the tube is above the surface of the liquid, and the hole in the side is below the
bottom of the bung. The upper end of the tube is cut off square, and is either slightly rounded or
ground smooth.
Two rubber bungs (about 25 mm x 25 mm), each with a hole bored centrally and true, exactly 6.5 mm
in diameter, are fitted with a rubber band or spring clip for holding them tightly together.
Alternatively the two bungs may be replaced by any suitable contrivance satisfying the conditions
described under the General Test.

149
Reagents:
Ammonium oxalate AsT: Ammonium oxalate which complies with the following additional test:
Heat 5 g with 15 ml of water, 5 ml of nitric acid AsT, and 10 ml of sulphuric acid AsT in narrow
necked, round-bottomed flask until frothing ceases, cool, and apply the General Test; no visible stain
is produced.
Arsenic solution, dilute, AsT:
Strong Arsenic solution AsT 1 ml
Water sufficient to produce 100 ml
Dilute arsenic solution, AsT must be freshly prepared.
1 ml contains 0.01 mg of arsenic (As).
Arsenic solution, strong, AsT:
Arsenic trioxide 0.132 g
Hydrochloric acid 50 ml
Water sufficient to produce 100 ml
Brominated hydrochloric acid AsT:
Bromine solution AsT 1 ml
Hydrochloric acid AsT 100 ml
Bromine solution AsT:
Bromine 30 g
Potassium bromide 30 g
Water sufficient to produce 100 ml
It complies with the following test:
Evaporate 10 ml on a water-bath nearly to dryness, add 50 ml of purified water, 10 ml of hydrochloric
acid AsT and sufficient stannous chloride solution AsT to reduce the remaining bromine and apply
the General Test; the stain produced is not deeper than 1 ml standard stain, showing that the
proportion of arsenic present does not exceed 1 part per million.
Citric acid AsT: Citric acid which complies with the following additional tests: Dissolve 10 g in 50
ml of water add 10 ml of stannated hydrochloric acid AsT and apply the General Test; no visible stain
is produced.
Hydrochloric acid AsT: Hydrochloric acid diluted with water to contain about 32 per cent w/w of
hydrochloride acid and complying with the following additional tests:
(i) Dilute 10 ml with sufficient water to produce 50 ml, add 5 ml of ammonium thiocyanate
solution and stir immediately; no colour is produced.

150
 (ii) To 50 ml add 0.2 ml of bromine solution AsT, evaporate on a water-bath until reduced to
16 ml adding more bromine solution AsT, if necessary, in order that an excess, as indicated
by the colour, may be present throughout the evaporation; add 50 ml of water and 5 drops
of stannous chloride solution AsT, and apply the General Test; the stain produced is not
deeper than a 0.2 ml standard stain prepared with the same acid, showing that the
proportion of arsenic present does not exceed 0.05 part per million.
Hydrochloric acid (constant-boiling composition) As T : Boil hydrochloric acid AsT to constant
boiling Composition in the presence of hydrazine hydrate, using 1 ml of 10 per cent w/v solution in
water per litre of the acid.
Mercuric Chloride Paper ∗: Smooth white filter paper, not less than 25 mm in width, soaked in a
saturated solution of mercuric chloride, pressed to remove superfluous solution, and dried at about
600, in the dark. The grade of the filter paper is such that the weight is between 65 and 120 g per sq
mm; the thickness in mm of 400 papers is approximately equal numerically, to the weight in g per sq.
mm.
Nitric acid AsT: Nitric acid which complies with the following additional test:
Heat 20 ml in a porcelain dish with 2 ml of sulphuric acid AsT, until white fumes are given off. Cool,
add 2 ml of water, and again heat until white fumes are given off; cool, add 50 ml of water and 10 ml
of stannated hydrochloric acid AsT, and apply the General Test; no visible stain is produced.
Potassium chlorate AsT: Potassium chlorate which complies with the following additional test:
Mix 5 g in the cold with 20 ml of water and 22 ml of hydrochloric acid AsT; when the first reaction
has subsided, heat gently to expel chlorine, remove the last traces with a few drops of stannous
chloride solution AsT, add 20 ml of water, and apply the General Test; no visible stain is produced.
Potassium iodide AsT: Potassium iodide which complies with the following additional test:
Dissolve 10 g in 25 ml of hydrochloric acid AsT and 35 ml of water, add 2 drops of stannous chloride
solution AsT and apply the General Test; no visible stain is produced.
Potassium iodide AsT: Potassium iodide which complies with the following additional test:
Dissolve 10 g in 25 ml of hydrochloric acid AsT and 35 ml of water, add 2 drops of stannous chloride
solution AsT and apply the General Test; no visible stain is produced.
Sodium carbonate, anhydrous AsT: Anhydrous sodium carbonate which complies with the
following additional test:
Dissolve 5 g in 50 ml of water, add 20 ml of brominated hydrochloric acid AsT, remove the excess of
bromine with a few drops of stannous chloride solution AsT, and apply the General Test; no visible
stain is produced.

∗ NOTE –Mercuric chloride paper should be stored in a stoppered bottle in the dark. Paper which has been exposed to sunlight or
to the vapour of ammonia affords a lighter stain or no stain at all when employed in the limit test for arsenic.

151
Sodium Salicylate: Of the Indian Pharmacopoeia.
Stannated hydrochloric acid AsT:
Stannous chloride solution AsT 1 ml
Hydrochloric Acid AsT 100 ml
Stannous Chloride solution AsT: Prepared from stannous chloride solution by adding an equal
volume of hydrochloric acid, boiling down to the original volume, and filtering through a fine-grain
filter paper.
It complies with the following test:
To 10 ml add 6 ml of water and 10 ml of hydrochloric acid AsT, distil and collect 16 ml. To the
distillate and 50 ml of water and 2 drops of stannuous chloride solution AsT and apply the General
Test; the stain produced is not deeper than a 1-ml standard stain, showing that the proportion of
arsenic present does not exceed 1 part per million.
Sulphuric acid AsT: Sulphuric acid which complies with the following additional test:
Dilute 10 g with 50 ml of water, add 0.2 ml of stannous chloride solution AsT, and apply the General
Test; no visible stain is produced.
Zinc AsT: Granulated Zinc which complies with following additional test:
Add 10 ml of stannated hydrochloric acid AsT to 50 ml of water, and apply the General Test, using
10 of the zinc and allowing the action to continue for one hour; no visible stain is produced (limit of
arsenic). Repeat the test with the addition of 0.1 ml of dilute arsenic solution AsT; a faint but distinct
yellow stain is produced (test for sensitivity).
General Method of Testing: By a variable method of procedure suitable to the particular needs of
each substance, a solution is prepared from the substance being examined which may or may not
contain that substance, but contains the whole of the arsenic (if any) originally present in that
substance. This solution, referred to as the `test solution’, is used in the actual test.
General Test: The glass tube is lightly packed with cotton wool, previously moistened with lead
acetate solution and dried, so that the upper surface of the cotton wool is not less than 25 mm below
the top of the tube. The upper end of the tube is then inserted into the narrow end of one of the pair of
rubber bungs, either to a depth of about 10 mm when the tube has a rounded-off end, or so that the
ground end of the tube is flush with the larger end of the bung. A piece of mercuric chloride paper is
placed flat on the top of the bung and the other bung placed over it and secured by means of the
rubber band or spring clip in such a manner that the borings of the two bungs (or the upper bung and
the glass tube) meet to form a true tube 6.5 mm in diameter interrupted by a diaphragm of mercuric
chloride paper.
Instead of this method of attaching the mercuric chloride paper, any other method may be used
provided (1) that the whole of the evolved gas passes through the paper; (2) that the portion of the
paper in contact with the gas is a circle 6.5 mm in diameter; and (3) that the paper is protected from

152
sunlight during the test. The test solution prepared as specified, is placed in the wide-mouthed bottle,
1 g of potassium iodide AsT and 10 g of zinc AsT added, and the prepared glass tube is placed
quickly in position. The action is allowed to proceed for 40 minutes. The yellow stain which is
produced on the mercuric chloride paper if arsenic is present is compared by day light with the
standard stains produced by operating in a similar manner with known quantities of dilute arsenic
solution AsT. The comparison of the stains is made immediately at the completion of the test. The
standard stains used for comparison are freshly prepared; they fade on keeping.
By matching the depth of colour with standard stains, the proportion of arsenic in the substance may
be determined. A stain equivalent to the 1-ml standard stain, produced by operating on 10 g of
substance indicates that the proportion of arsenic is 1 part per million.
NOTE: (1) The action may be accelerated by placing the apparatus on a warm surface, care being
taken that the mercuric chloride paper remains dry throughout the test.
(2) The most suitable temperature for carrying out the test is generally about 400 but because
the rate of the evolution of the gas varies somewhat with different batches zinc AsT, the
temperature may be adjusted to obtain a regular, but not violent, evolution of gas.
(3) The tube must be washed with hydrochloric acid AsT, rinsed with water and dried
between successive tests.
Standard Stains: Solutions are prepared by adding to 50 ml of water, 10 ml of stannated
hydrochloric acid AsT and quantities of dilute arsenic solutions AsT varying from 0.2 ml to 1 ml. The
resulting solutions, when treated as described in the General Test, yield stains on the mercuric
chloride paper referred to as the standard stains.
Preparation of the Test Solution: In the various methods of preparing the test solution given below,
the quantities are so arranged unless otherwise stated, that when the stain produced from the solution
to be examined is not deeper than the 1-ml standard stain, the proportion of arsenic present does not
exceed the permitted limit.
Ammonium Chloride: Dissolve 2.5 g in 50 ml of water, and 10 ml of stannated hydrochloric acid
AsT.
Boric acid: Dissolve 10 g with 2 g of citric acid AsT in 50 ml water, and add 12 ml of stannated
hydrochloric acid AsT.
Ferrous Sulphate: Dissolve 5 g in 10 ml of water and 15 ml of stannated hydrochloric acid AsT and
disitil 20 ml; to the distillate add a few drops of bromine solution AsT. Add 2 ml of stannated
hydrochloric acid AsT, heat under a reflux condenser for one hour, cool, and add 10 ml of water and
10 ml of hydrochloric acid AsT.
Glycerin: Dissolve 5 g in 50 ml of water, and add 10 ml of stannated hydrochloric acid AsT.
Hydrochloric acid: Mix 10 g with 40 ml of water and 1 ml of stannous chloride solution AsT.

153
Magnesium Sulphate: Dissolve 5 g in 50 ml of water and add 10 ml of stannated hydrochloric acid
AsT.
Phosphoric acid: Dissolve 5 g in 50 ml of water and add 10 ml of stannated hydrochloric acid AsT
Potassium iodide: Dissolve 5 g in 50 ml of water and add 2 ml of stannated hydrochloric acid AsT.
Sodium bicarbonate: Dissolve 5 g in 50 ml of water and add 15 ml of brominated hydrochloric acid
AsT, and remove the excess of bromine with a few drops of stannous chloride solution AsT.
Sodium hydroxide: Dissolve 2.5 g in 50 ml of water, add 16 ml of brominated hydrochloric acid
AsT, and remove the excess of bromine with a few drops of stannous chloride solution AsT.

2.3.2. Limit Test for Chlorides:

Dissolve the specified quantity of the substance in water or prepare a solution as directed in the text
and transfer to a Nessler cylinder. Add 10 ml of dilute nitric acid, except when nitric acid is used in
the preparation of the solution, dilute to 50 ml with water, and add 1 ml of silver nitrate solution. Stir
immediately with a glass rod and allow to stand for 5 minutes. The opalescence produced is not
greater than the standard opalescence, when viewed transversely.
Standard Opalescence:
Place 1.0 ml of a 0.05845 per cent w/v solution of sodium chloride and 10 ml of dilute nitric acid in a
Nessler cylinder. Dilute to 50 ml with water and add 1 ml of silver nitrate solution. Stir immediately
with a glass rod and allow to stand for five minutes.

2.3.3. Limit Test for Heavy metals:

The test for heavy metals is designed to determine the content of metallic impurities that are coloured
by sulphide ion, under specified conditions. The limit for heavy metals is indicated in the individual
monographs in terms of the parts of lead per million parts of the substance (by weight), as determined
by visual comparison of the colour produced by the substance with that of a control prepared from a
standard lead solution.
Determine the amount of heavy metals by one of the following methods and as directed in the
individual monographs. Method A is used for substances that yield clear colourless solutions under
the specified test conditions. Method B is used for substances that do not yield clear, colourless
solutions under the test conditions specified for method A, or for substances which, by virtue of their
complex nature, interfere with the precipitation of metals by sulphide ion. Method C is used for
substances that yield clear, colourless solutions with sodium hydroxide solution.
Special Reagents:
Acetic acid Sp.: Acetic acid which complies with the following additional test : Make 25 ml alkaline
with dilute ammonia solution Sp., add 1 ml of potassium cyanide solution Sp., dilute to 50 ml with
water and add two drops of sodium sulphide solution; no darkening is produced.

154
Dilute acetic acid Sp.: Dilute acetic acid, which complies with the following additional test –
Evaporate 20 ml in a porcelain dish, nearly to dryness on a water-bath. Add to the residue 2 ml of the
acid and dilute with water to 25 ml, add 10 ml of hydrogen sulphide solution. Any dark colour
produced is not more than that of a control solution consisting of 2 ml of the acid and 4.0 ml of
standard lead solution diluted to 25 ml with water.
Ammonia solution Sp.: Strong ammonia solution which complies with the following additional test:
Evaporate 10 ml to dryness on a water-bath; to the residue add 1 ml of dilute hydrochloric acid Sp.
and evaporate to dryness. Dissolve the residue in 2 ml of dilute acetic acid Sp. Add sufficient water to
produce 25 ml.
Add 10 ml of hydrogen sulphide solution. Any darkening produced is not greater than in a blank
solution containing 2 ml of dilute acetic acid Sp. 1.0 ml of standard lead solution and sufficient water
to produce 25 ml.
Dilute ammonia solution Sp.: Dilute ammonia solution which complies with the following
additional test: To 20 ml, add 1 ml of potassium cyanide solution Sp., dilute to 50 ml with water, and
add two drops of sodium sulphide solution; no darkening is produced.
Hydrochloric acid: Hydrochloric acid which complies with the following additional test: Evaporate
off the acid in a beaker to dryness on a water-bath. Dissolve the residue in 2 ml of dilute acid Sp.,
dilute to 17 ml with water and add 10 ml of hydrogen sulphide solution; any darkening produced is
not greater than in a blank solution containing 2.0 ml of standard lead solution, 2 ml of dilute acetic
acid Sp. and dilute to 40 ml with water.
Dilute hydrochloric acid Sp.: Dilute hydrochloric acid, which complies with the following
additional test: Treat 10 ml of the acid in the manner described under Hydrochloric acid Sp.
Lead nitrate stock solution: Dissolve 0.1598 g of lead nitrate in 100 ml of water to which has been
added 1 ml of nitric acid, then dilute with water to 1000 ml. This solution must be prepared and
stored in polyethylene or glass containers free from soluble lead salts.
Standard lead solution: On the day of use, dilute 10.0 ml of lead nitrate stock solution with water to
100.0 ml. Each ml of standard lead solution contains the equivalent of 10 µg of lead. A control
comparison solution prepared with 2.0 ml of standard lead solution contains, when compared to a
solution representing 1.0 g of the substance being tested, the equivalent of 20 parts per million of
lead.
Nitric acid Sp.: Nitric acid which complies with the following additional test: Dilute 10 ml with 10
ml of water, make alkaline with ammonia solution Sp., add 1 ml of potassium cyanide solution Sp.,
dilute to 50 ml with water, and add two drops of sodium sulphide solution; no darkening is produced.
Potassium cyanide solution Sp.: See Appendix 2.3.5.

155
Sulphuric acid Sp.: Sulphuric acid which complies with following additional test: Add 5 g to 20 ml
of water make alkaline with ammonia solution Sp., add 1 ml of potassium cyanide solution Sp., dilute
to 50 ml with water and add two drops of sodium sulphide solution; no darkening is produced.
Method A
Standard solution: Into a 50 ml Nessler cylinder, pipette 2 ml of standard lead solution and dilute
with water to 25 ml. Adjust with dilute acetic acid Sp. or dilute ammonia solution Sp to a pH between
3.0 and 4.0, dilute with water to about 35 ml, and mix.
Test solution: In to a 50 ml Nessler cylinder, place 25 ml of the solution prepared for the test as
directed in the individual monograph, or using the stated volume of acid when specified in the
individual monograph, dissolve and dilute with water to 25 ml the specified quantity of the substance
being tested. Adjust with dilute acetic acid Sp. or dilute ammonia solution Sp. to a pH between 3.0
and 4.0, dilute with water to about 35 ml and mix.
Procedure: To each of the cylinders containing the standard solution and test solution, respectively,
add 10 ml of freshly prepared hydrogen sulphide solution, mix, dilute with water to 50 ml, allow to
stand for five minutes, and view downwards over a white surface; the colour produced in the test
solution is not darker than that produced in the standard solution.
Method B
Standard solution: Proceed as directed under Method A.
Test solution: Weigh in a suitable crucible the quantity of the substance specified in individual
monograph, add sufficient sulphuric acid Sp. to wet the sample, and ignite carefully at a low
temperature until thoroughly charred. Add to the charred mass 2 ml of nitric acid Sp. and five drops
of sulphuric acid Sp. and heat cautiously until white fumes are no longer evolved. Ignite, preferably
in a muffle furnace, at 5000 to 6000 until the carbon is completely burnt off. Cool, add 4 ml of
hydrochloric acid Sp., cover, digest on a water bath for 15 minutes, uncover and slowly evaporate to
dryness on a water-bath. Moisten the residue with one drop of hydrochloric acid Sp., add 10 ml of hot
water and digest for two minutes. Add ammonia solution sp., dropwise, until the solution is just
alkaline to litmus paper, dilute with water to 25 ml and adjust with dilute acetic acid Sp. to a pH
between 3.0 and 4.0. Filter if necessary, rinse the crucible and the filter with 10 ml of water, combine
the filtrate and washings in a 50 ml Nessler cylinder, dilute with water, to about 35 ml, and mix.
Procedure: Proceed as directed under Method A.
Method C
Standard solution: Into a 50 ml Nessler cylinder, pipette 2 ml of standard lead solution, add 5 ml of
dilute sodium hydroxide solution., dilute with water to 50 ml and mix.
Test solution: Into a 50 ml Nessler cylinder, place 25 ml of the solution prepared for the test as
directed in the individual monograph; or, if not specified otherwise in the individual monograph,

156
dissolve the specified quantity in a mixture of 20 ml of water and 5 ml of dilute sodium hydroxide
solution. Dilute 50 ml with water and mix.
Procedure: To each of the cylinders containing the standard solution and the test solution,
respectively add 5 drops of sodium sulphide solution, mix, allow to stand for five minutes and view
downwards over a white surface; the colour produced in the test solution is not darker than that
produced in the standard solution.

2.3.4. Limit Test for Iron

Standard Iron solution: Weigh accurately 0.1726 g of ferric ammonium sulphate and dissolve in 10
ml of 0.1 N sulphuric acid and sufficient water to produce 1000.0 ml. Each ml of this solution
contains 0.02 mg of Fe.
Method:
Dissolve the specified quantity of the substance being examined in 40 ml of water, or use 10 ml of the
solution prescribed in the monograph, and transfer to a Nessler cylinder. Add 2 ml of a 20 per cent
w/v solution of iron-free citric acid and 0.1 ml of thioglycollic acid, mix, make alkaline with iron-free
ammonia solution, dilute to 50 ml with water and allow to stand for five minutes. Any colour
produced is not more intense than the standard colour.
Standard colour: Dilute 2.0 ml of standard iron solution with 40 ml of water in a Nessler cylinder.
Add 2 ml of a 20 per cent w/v solution of iron-free citric acid and 0.1 ml of thioglycollic acid, mix,
make alkaline with iron-free ammonia solution, dilute to 50 ml with water and allow to stand for five
minutes.

2.3.5. Limit Test for Lead

The following method is based on the extraction of lead by solutions of dithizone. All reagents used
for the test should have as low a content of lead as practicable. All reagent solutions should be stored
in containers of borosilicate glass. Glassware should be rinsed thoroughly with warm dilute nitric
acid, followed by water.
Special Reagents:
(1) Ammonia-cyanide solution Sp.: Dissolve 2 g of potassium cyanide in 15 ml of strong ammonia
solution and dilute with water to 100 ml.
(2) Ammonium citrate solution Sp.: Dissolve 40 g of citric acid in 90 ml water. Add two drops of
phenol red solution then add slowly strong ammonia solution until the solution acquires a reddish
colour. Remove any lead present by extracting the solution with 20 ml quantities of dithizone
extraction solution until the dithizone solution retains its orange-green colour.
(3) Dilute standard lead solution: Dilute 10.0 ml of standard lead solution with sufficient 1 per
cent v/v solution of nitric acid to produce 100 ml. Each ml of this solution contains 1 µg of lead
per ml.

157
(4) Dithizone extraction solution: Dissolve 30 mg of diphenylthiocarbazone in 1000 ml of
chloroform and add 5 ml of alcohol. Store the solution in a refrigerator. Before use, shake a
suitable volume of the solution with about half its volume of 1 per cent v/v solution of nitric acid
and discard the acid.
(5) Hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution Sp.: Dissolve 20 g of hydroxylamine hydrochloride in
sufficient water to produce about 65 ml. Transfer to separator, add five drops of thymol blue
solution, add strong ammonia solution until the solution becomes yellow. Add 10 ml of a 4 per
cent w/v solution of sodium diethyldithiocarbamate and allow to stand for five minutes. Extract
with successive quantities, each of 10 ml, of chloroform until a 5 ml portion of the extract does
not assume a yellow colour when shaken with dilute copper sulphate solution. Add dilute
hydrochloric acid until the solution is pink and then dilute with sufficient water to produce 100
ml.
(6) Potassium cyanide solution Sp.: Dissolve 50 g of potassium cyanide in sufficient water to
produce 100 ml. Remove the lead from this solution by extraction with successive quantities,
each of 20 ml of dithizone extraction solution until the dithizone solution retains its orange-green
colour. Extract any dithizone remaining in the cyanide solution by shaking with chloroform.
Dilute this cyanide solution with sufficient water to produce a solution containing 10 g of
potassium cyanide in each 100 ml.
(7) Standard dithizone solution: Dissolve 10 ml of diphenylthiocarbazone in 1000 ml of
chloroform. Store the solution in a glass-stoppered, lead-free bottle, protected from light and in a
refrigerator.
(8) Citrate-cyanide wash solution: To 50 ml of water add 50 ml of ammonium citrate solution Sp.
and 4 ml of potassium cyanide solution Sp., mix, and adjust the pH, if necessary, with strong
ammonia solution to 9.0.
(9) Buffer solution pH 2.5: To 25.0 ml of 0.2 M potassium hydrogen phthalate add 37.0 ml of 0.1 N
hydrochloric acid, and dilute with sufficient water to produce 100.0 ml.
(10) Dithizone-carbon tetrachloride solution:– Dissolve 10 mg of diphenylthiocarbazone in 1000
ml of carbon tetrachloride. Prepare this solution fresh for each determination.
(11) pH 2.5 wash solution: To 500 ml of a 1 per cent v/v nitric acid add strong ammonia solution
until the pH of the mixture is 2.5, then add 10 ml of buffer solution pH 2.5 and mix.
(12) Ammonia-cyanide wash solution: To 35 ml of pH 2.5 wash solution add 4 ml of ammonia-
cyanide solution Sp., and mix.
Method
Transfer the volume of the prepared sample directed in the monograph to a separator and unless
otherwise directed in monograph, add 6 ml of ammonium citrate solution Sp., and 2 ml
hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution Sp., (For the determination of lead in iron salts use 10 ml of
ammonium citrate solution Sp.). Add two drops of phenol red solution and make the solution just

158
alkaline (red in colour) by the addition of strong ammonnia solution. Cool the solution if necessary,
and add 2 ml of potassium cyanide solution Sp. Immediately extract the solution with several
quantities each of 5 ml, of dithizone extraction solution, draining off each extract into another
separating funnel, until the dithizone extraction solution retains its green colour. Shake the combine
dithizone solutions for 30 seconds with 30 ml of a 1 per cent w/v solution of nitric acid and discard
the chloroform layer. Add to the solution exactly 5 ml of standard dithizone solution and 4 ml of
ammonia-cyanide solution Sp. and shake for 30 seconds; the colour of the chloroform layer is of no
deeper shade of violet than that of a control made with a volume of dilute standard lead solution
equivalent to the amount of lead permitted in the sample under examination.

2.3.6. Limit Test for Sulphates:

Reagents
Barium Sulphate reagent: Mix 15 ml of 0.5 M barium chloride, 55 ml of water, and 20 ml of
sulphate free alcohol, add 5 ml of a 0.0181 per cent w/v solution of potassium sulphate, dilute to 100
ml with water, and mix. Barium sulphate reagent must be freshly prepared.
0.5 M Barium Chloride: Barium chloride dissolved in water to contain in 1000 ml 122.1 g of
barium chloride.
Method
Dissolve the specified quantity of the substance in water, or prepare a solution as directed in the text,
transfer to a Nessler cylinder, and add 2 ml of dilute hydrochloric acid, except where hydrochloric
acid is used in the preparation of the solution. Dilute to 45 ml with water, add 5 ml of barium sulphate
reagent. Stir immediately with a glass rod, and allow to stand for five minutes. The turbidity produced
is not greater than the standard turbidity, when viewed transversely. Standard turbidity : Place 1.0 ml
of 0.1089 per cent w/v solution of potassium sulphate and 2 ml of dilute hydrochloric acid in a
Nessler cylinder,dilute to 45 ml with water, add 5 ml of barium sulphate reagent, stir immediately
with a glass rod and allow to stand for five minutes.

2.3.7. Heavy Metals by Atomic absorption spectrophotometry:

Atomic absorption spectrophotometry is used in the determination of heavy metal elements and some
nonmetal elements in the atomic state.
The light of characteristic wave length emitted from a cathodic discharge lamp is absorbed when it
passes through the atomic vapor generated from sample containing the element being examined
atomized to the ground state. The assay of the element being examined is tested by determining the
decreased degree of light intensity of radiation. Atomic absorption obeys the general rule for
absorption spectrophotometry. The assay is carried out by comparing the abosorbance of the test
preparation with that of the reference preparation.

159
Apparatus
An atomic absorption spectrophotometer consists of a light source, an atomic generator, a
monochromator and a detector system. Some are equipped with a background compensation system
and automatic sampling system, etc.
[Link] Source: A hollow-cathode discharge lamp is usually used. The cathode is made of the
element being examined.
[Link] Generator: There are four main types : flame atomizer, graphite furnace atomizer,
hydride-generated atomizer, cold vapor atomizer.
(1) Flame atomizer: It mainly consists of a nebulizer and a burner. Its function is to nebulize the test
solution into aerosol, which is mixed with combustion gas. And the mixture is introduced into the
flame generated by the burner. So that the substance being examined is to be dried, evaporated to
form the ground state atoms of the element being examined. The burning flame is generated by
different mixtures of gases, acetylene-air is mostly used. By modifying the proportion of combustion
gas, the temperature of the flame can be controlled and a better stability and a better sensitivity can be
obtained.
(2) Furnace atomizer: It consists of electric furnace and a power supply. Its function is to dry and
incinerate the substance being examined. During the stage of high temperature atomization, the
ground state atoms of the element being examined are to be formed. Graphite is commonly used as
the heater. Protection gas is introduced into the furnace to avoid oxidation and used to transfer the
sample vapor.
(3) Hydride-generated atomizer: It consists of hydride generator and atomic absorption cell. It is
used for the determination of the elements such as arsenic, selenium and antimony etc. Its function is
to reduce the element to be examined in acidic medium to the low-boiling and easily pyrolyzed
hydride. The hydride is then swept by a stream of carrier gas into the atomic absorption cell which
consists of quartz tube and heater etc., in which the hydride is pyrolyzed by heating to form the
ground-state atom.
(4) Cold vapor atomizer: It consists of a mercury vapor atomizer and an absorption cell. It is
suitable for the determination of mercury. Its function is to reduce the mercuric ion into mercury
vapor which is swept into the quartz absorption cell by carrier gas.
3. Monochromator: Its function is to separate the specified wavelength radiation from the
electromagnetic radiations erradiated from the light source. The optical path of the apparatus should
assure the good spectra resolution and has the ability to work well at the condition of narrow spectral
band (0.2 nm). The commonly used wavelength region is 190.0 - 900.0 nm.
4. Detector system: It consists of a detector, a signal processor and a recording system. It should
have relatively higher sensitivity and better stability and can follow the rapid change of the signal
absorption.

160
5. Background compensation system: System employed for the correction of atmospheric effects
on the measuring system. Four principles can be utilized for background compensation: continuous
spectrum sources (a deuterium lamp is often used in the UV region), the Zeeman effect, the self
inversion phenomenon and the non resonance spectrum. In the analysis using atomic absorption
spectrophotometry, the interference to the determination caused by background and other reasons
should be noticed. Changes of some experimental conditions, such as the wavelength, the slit width,
the atomizing condition, etc., may affect the sensitivity, the stability and the interference. If it is
flame, the suitable wavelength, slit width and flame temperature, the addition of complexing agents
and releasing agents and the use of Standard addition method may eliminate interference. If it is
furnace, system, the selection of suitable background compensation system and the addition of
suitable matrix modifying agents, etc may remove the interference. Background compensation
method shall be selected as specified in the individual monograph.
Procedure
Method (direct calibration method)
Prepare not less than 3 reference solutions of the element being examined of different concentrations,
covering the range recommended by the instrument manufacturer and add separately the
corresponding reagents as that for the test solution and prepare the blank reference solution with the
corresponding reagents. Measure the absorbances of the blank reference solution and each reference
solution of different concentrations separately, record the readings and prepare a calibration curve
with the average value of 3 readings of each concentration on the ordinate and the corresponding
concentration on the abscissa.
Prepare a test solution of the substance being examined as specified in the monograph, adjust the
concentration to fall within the concentration range of the reference solution. Measure the absorbance
3 times, record the readings and calculate the average value. Interpolate the mean value of the
readings on the calibration curve to determine the concentration of the element.
When used in the test for impurities, prepare two test preparations of the same concentration as
specified in the monograph. To one of the test preparation add an amount of the reference substance
equivalent to the limit of the element specified in the monograph. Proceed as directed above and
measure this solution to give an appropriate reading a; then measure the test preparation without the
addition of the reference substance under the same condition and record the reading b; b is not greater
than (a-b).
Determination of Lead, Cadmium, Arsenic, Mercury and Copper:
(1) Determination of lead (graphite oven method):
Determination conditions Reference condition: dry temperature: 100-1200, maintain 20 seconds;
ash temperature: 400-7500, maintain 20-25 seconds; atomic temperature: 1700-21000 , maintain 4-5
seconds; measurement wavelength: 283.3 nm; background calibration: deuterium lamp (D lamp) or
Zeeman effect.

161
Preparation of lead standard stock solution: Measure accurately a quantity of lead single-element
standard solution to prepare standard stock solution with 2 per cent nitric acid solution, which
containing 1 µg per ml, stored at 0-50.
Preparation of calibration curve: Measure accurately a quantity of lead standard stock solutions
respectively, diluted with 2 per cent nitric acid solution to the concentration of 0, 5, 20, 40, 60, 80 ng
per ml, respectively. Measure respectively accurately 1 ml the above solution, add respectively 1 ml
of 1 per cent ammonium dihydrogen phosphate and 0.2 per cent magnesium nitrate mix well, pipette
accurately 20 µl to inject into the atomic generator of graphite oven and determine their absorbance,
then draw the calibration curve with absorbance as vertical axis and concentration as horizontal
ordinate.
Preparation of test solution:
Method: Weigh accurately 0.5 g of the coarse powder of the substance being examined, transfer into a
casparian flask, add 5-10 ml of the mixture of nitric acid and perchloric acid (4 : 1), add a small
hopper on the flask-top, macerate overnight, heat to slake on the electric hot plate, keep somewhat-
boiling, if brownish-black, add again a quantity of the above mixture, continuously heat till the
solution becomes clean and transparent, then raise temperature, heat continuously to thick smoke, till
white smoke disperse, the slaked solution becomes colourless and transparent or a little yellow, cool,
transfer it into a 50 ml volumetric flask, wash the container with 2 per cent nitric acid solution add the
washing solution into the same volumetric flask and dilute with the same solvent to the volume, shake
well. Prepare synchronously the reagent blank solution according to the above procedure.
Determination: Measure accurately 1 ml of the test solution and its corresponding reagent blank
solution respectively, add 1 ml of solution containing 1per cent ammonium dihydrogen phosphate and
0.2 per cent magnesium nitrate, shake well, pipette accurately 10-20 µl to determine their absorbance
according to the above method of “Preparation of calibration curve”. Calculate the content of lead
(Pd) in the test solution from the calibration curve.
(2) Determination of cadmium (Cd) (graphite oven method):
Determination conditions Reference condition: dry temperature: 100-1200, maintain 20 seconds;
ash temperature: 300-5000, maintain 20-25 seconds; atomic temperature: 1500-19000, maintain 4-5
seconds; measurement wavelength: 228.8 nm; background calibration: deuterium lamp (D lamp) or
Zeeman effect.
Preparation of Cd standard stock solution: Measure accurately a quantity of Cd single-element
standard solution to prepare standard stock solution Cd with 2 per cent nitric acid, which containing
0.4 µg per ml Cd, stored at 0-50.
Preparation of calibration curve: Measure accurately a quantity of cadmium standard stock
solutions, diluted to the concentration of 1.6, 3.2, 4.8, 6.4 and 8.0 ng per ml with 2 per cent nitric
acid, respectively. Pipette accurately 10 µl the above solutions respectively, inject them into the

162
graphite oven, determine their absorbance, and then draw the calibration curve with absorbance as
vertical axis and concentration as horizontal ordinate.
Preparation of test solution: Reference to “Preparation of test solution” of Pb in the above.
Determination: Pipette accurately 10-20 µl of the test solution and its corresponding reagent blank
solution respectively, determine their absorbance according to the above method of “Preparation of
calibration curve. If interference occurs, weigh accurately respectively 1 ml of the standard solution,
blank solution and test solution, add 1 ml of a solution containing 1per cent ammonium dihydrogen
phosphate and 0.2 per cent magnesium nitrate, shake well, determine their absorbance according to
the method above, calculate the content of Cd in the test solution from the calibration curve.
(3) Determination of Arsenic (As) (hydride method):
Determination conditions Apparatus: suitable hydride generator device, reducing agent: a solution
containing 1 per cent sodium borohydride and 0.3 per cent sodium hydroxide; carrier liquid: 1 per
cent hydrochloric acid; carrier gas: nitrogen; measurement wavelength: 193.7 nm; background
calibration: deuterium lamp (D lamp) or Zeeman effect.
Preparation of As standard stock solution: Measure accurately a quantity of As single-element
standard solution to prepare standard stock solution with 2 per cent nitric acid solution, which
containis 1.0 µg per ml As, stored at 0-50.
Preparation of calibration curve: Measure accurately proper quantity of arsenic standard stock
solutions, diluted with 2 per cent nitric acid to the concentration of 2, 4, 8, 12 and 16 ng per ml
respectively. Accurately transfer 10 ml of each into 25 ml volumetric flask respectively, add 1 ml of
25 per cent potassium iodide solution (prepared prior to use), shake well, add 1 ml of ascorbic acid
solution (prepared prior to use), shake well, dilute with hydrochloric acid solution (20-100) to the
volume, shake well, close the stopper and immerse the flask in a water bath at 800 for 3 minutes.
Cool, transfer proper quantities of each solution respectively into the hydride generator device,
determine the absorbance, then plot the calibration curve with peak area (absorbance) as vertical axis
and concentration as horizontal ordinate.
Preparation of test solution: Reference to A or B method of “Preparation of test solution” of Pb in
the above.
Determination: Pipette accurately 10 ml of the test solution and its corresponding reagent blank
solution respectively, proceed as described under “Preparation of calibration curve” beginning at the
words “add 1 ml of 25 per cent potassium iodide solution”. Calculate the content of As in the test
solution from the calibration curve.
(4) Determination of Mercury (Hg) (cold absorption method):
Determination conditions: Apparatus: suitable hydride generator device; reducing agent: a
solution containing 0.5 per cent sodium borohydride and 0.1 per cent sodium hydroxide; carrier

163
liquid: 1 per cent hydrochloric acid; carrier gas: nitrogen; measurement wavelength: 253.6 nm;
background calibration: deuterium lamp (D lamp) or Zeeman effect.
Preparation of mercury standard stock solution: Measure accurately a proper quantity of
mercury single-element standard solution to prepare standard stock solution with 2 per cent nitric acid
solution, which containing 1.0 µg per ml Hg, stored at 0-50.
Preparation of calibration curve: Measure accurately 0, 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, 0.7 and 0.9 ml of mercury
standard stock solution, transfer into a 50 ml volumetric flask respectively, add 40 ml 4 per cent
sulphuric acid solution and 0.5 ml of 5 per cent potassium permanganate solution, shake well, drop 5
per cent hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution until the violet red just disappears, dilute with 4 per
cent sulfuric acid solution to the volume, shake well. A quantity of each solution is injected to the
hydride generator device, determine the absorbance, then plot the calibration curve with peak area
(absorbance) as vertical axis and concentration as horizontal ordinate.
Preparation of test solution:
Method : Transfer 1 g of the coarse powder of the substance being examined, accurately weighed,
into a casparian flask, add 5-10 ml of the mixture solution of nitric acid and perchloric acid (4 : 1),
mix well, fix a small hopper on the flask-top, immerse overnight, heat to slake on the electric hot
plate at 120-1400 for 4-8 hours until slaking completely, cool, add a quantity of 4 per cent sulfuric
acid solution and 0.5 ml of 5 per cent potassium permanganate solution, shake well, drop 5 per cent
hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution until the violet red colour just disappears, dilute with 4 per
cent sulphuric acid solutions to 25 ml, shake well, centrifugate if necessary, the supernatant is used as
the test solution. Prepare synchronally the reagent blank solute based on the same procedure.
Determination: Pipette accurately a quantity of the test solution and its corresponding reagent blank
solution, respectively, proceed as described under “Preparation of calibration curve” beginning at the
words “add 1 ml of 25 per cent potassium iodide solution”. Calculate the content of mercury (Hg) in
the test solution from the calibration curve.
(5) Determination of Copper (flame method):
Determination conditions: Measurement wavelength: 324.7 nm; flame: air -acetylene flame;
background calibration: deuterium lamp or Zeeman effect.
Preparation of copper standard stock solution: Measure accurately a proper quantity of
copper single-element standard solution, to prepare the standard stock solution with 2 per cent nitric
acid solution, which containing 10 µg per ml Cu, stored at 0-50.
Preparation of calibration curve: Measure accurately a quantity of copper standard stock solutions,
dilute with 2 per cent nitric acid to the concentrations of 0.05, 0.2, 0.4, 0.6 and 0.8 µg per ml,
respectively. Inject each standard solution into the flame and determine the absorbance, respective,
then plot the calibration curve with absorbance as vertical axis and concentration as horizontal
ordinate.

164
Preparation of test solution: Reference to “Preparation of test solution” of Pb in the above.
Determination:Pipette accurately quantities of the test solution and its corresponding reagent blank
solution respectively, proceed as described under “Preparation of calibration curve”. Calculate the
content of Cu in the test solution from the calibration curve.

2.4. Microbial Limit Tests:

The following tests are designed for the estimation of the number of viable aerobic micro-organisms
present and for detecting the presence of designated microbial species in pharmaceutical substances.
The term ‘growth’ is used to designate the presence and presumed proliferation of viable micro-
organisms.
Preliminary Testing
The methods given herein are invalid unless it is demonstrated that the test specimens to which they
are applied do not, of themselves, inhibit the multiplication under the test conditions of micro-
organisms that can be present. Therefore, prior to doing the tests, inoculate diluted specimens of the
substance being examined with separate viable cultures of Escherichia coli, Salmonella species,
Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Staphylococcus aureus. This is done by adding 1 ml of not less than 10-
3
dilutions of a 24 h broth culture of the micro-organisms to the first dilution (in buffer solution pH
7.2, fluid soyabean-casein digest medium or fluid lactose medium) of the test material and following
the test procedure. If the organisms fail to grow in the relevant medium the procedure should be
modified by (a) increasing the volume of diluent with the quantity of test material remaining the
same, or (b) incorporating a sufficient quantity of a suitable inactivating agent in the diluents, or (c)
combining the aforementioned modifications so as to permit growth of the organisms in the media. If
inhibitory substances are present in the sample, 0.5 per cent of soya lecithin and 4 per cent of
polysorbate 20 may be added to the culture medium. Alternatively, repeat the test as described in the
previous paragraph, using fluid casein digest-soya lecithin-polysorbate 20 medium to demonstrate
neutralization of preservatives or other antimicrobial agents in the test material. Where inhibitory
substances are contained in the product and the latter is soluble, the Membrane filtration method
described under Total Aerobic Microbial Count may be used.
If in spite of incorporation of suitable inactivating agents and a substantial increase in the volume of
diluent it is still not possible to recover the viable cultures described above and where the article is
not suitable for applying the membrane filtration method it can be assumed that the failure to isolate
the inoculated organism may be due to the bactericidal activity of the product. This may indicate that
the article is not likely to be contaminated with the given species of micro-organisms. However,
monitoring should be continued to establish the spectrum of inhibition and bactericidal activity of the
article.

165
Media
Culture media may be prepared as given below or dehydrated culture media may be used provided
that, when reconstituted as directed by the manufacturer, they have similar ingredients and / or yield
media comparable to those obtained from the formulae given below.
Where agar is specified in a formula, use agar that has a moisture content of not more than 15 per
cent. Where water is called for in a formula, use purified water. Unless otherwise indicated, the media
should be sterilized by heating in an autoclave at 1150 for 30 minutes.
In preparing media by the formulas given below, dissolve the soluble solids in the water, using heat if
necessary, to effect complete solution and add solutions of hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide in
quantities sufficient to yield the required pH in the medium when it is ready for use. Determine the
pH at 250 + 20.
Baird-Parker Agar Medium
Pancreatic digest of casein 10.0 g
Beef extract 5.0 g
Yeast extract 1.0 g
Lithium chloride 5.0 g
Agar 20.0 g
Glycine 12.0 g
Sodium pyruvate 10.0 g
Water to 1000 ml
Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute. Sterilise, cool to between 450 and 500, and add 10
ml of a one per cent w/v solution of sterile potassium tellurite and 50 ml of egg-yolk emulsion. Mix
intimately but gently and pour into plates. (Prepare the egg-yolk emulsion by disinfecting the surface
of whole shell eggs, aseptically cracking the eggs, and separating out intact yolks into a sterile
graduated cylinder. Add sterile saline solution, get a 3 to 7 ratio of egg-yolk to saline. Add to a sterile
blender cup, and mix at high speed for 5 seconds). Adjust the pH after sterilization to 6.8 + 0.2.
Bismuth Sulphite Agar Medium
Solution (1)
Beef extract 6g
Peptone 10 g
Agar 24 g
Ferric citrate 0.4 g
Brilliant green 10 mg
Water to 1000 ml

166
Dissolve with the aid of heat and sterilise by maintaining at 115º for 30 minutes.
Solution (2)
Ammonium bismuth citrate 3g
Sodium sulphite 10 g
Anhydrous disodium hydrogen Phosphate 5g
Dextrose monohydrate 5g
Water to 100 ml
Mix, heat to boiling, cool to room temperature, add 1 volume of solution (2) to 10 volumes of
solution (1) previously melted and cooled to a temperature of 55 0 and pour. Bismuth Sulphite Agar
Medium should be stored at 20 to 80 for 5 days before use.
Brilliant Green Agar Medium
Peptone 10.0 g
Yeast extract 3.0 g
Lactose 10.0 g
Sucrose 10.0 g
Sodium chloride 5.0 g
Phenol red 80.0 g
Brilliant green 12.5 mg
Agar 12.0 g
Water to 1000 ml
Mix, allow to stand for 15 minutes, sterilise by maintaining at 1150 for 30 minutes and mix before
pouring.
Buffered Sodium Chloride-Peptone Solution pH 7.0
Potassium dihydrogen phosphate 3.56 g
Disodium hydrogen phosphate 7.23 g
Sodium chloride 4.30 g
Peptone (meat or casein) 1.0 g
Water to 1000 ml
0.1 to 1.0 per cent w/v polysorbate 20 or polysorbate 80 may be added. Sterilise by heating in an
autoclave at 1210 for 15 minutes.
Casein Soyabean Digest Agar Medium
Pancreatic digest of casein 15.0 g
Papaic digest of soyabean meal 5.0 g

167
 Sodium chloride 5.0 g
Agar 15.0 g
Water to 1000 ml
Adjust the pH after sterilization to 7.3 + 0.2.
Cetrimide Agar Medium
Pancreatic digest of gelatin 20.0 g
Magnesium chloride 1.4 g
Potassium sulphate 10.0 g
Cetrimide 0.3 g
Agar 13.6 g
Glycerin 10.0 g
Water to 1000 ml
Heat to boiling for 1 minute with shaking. Adjust the pH so that after sterilization it is 7.0 to 7.4.
Sterilise at 1210 for 15 minutes.
Desoxycholate-Citrate Agar Medium
Beef extract 5.0 g
Peptone 5.0 g
Lactose 10.0 g
Trisodium citrate 8.5 g
Sodium thiosulphate 5.4 g
Ferric citrate 1.0 g
Sodium desoxycholate 5.0 g
Neutral red 0.02 g
Agar 12.0 g
Water to 1000 ml
Mix and allow to stand for 15 minutes. With continuous stirring, bring gently to the boil and maintain
at boiling point until solution is complete. Cool to 800, mix, pour and cool rapidly.
Care should be taken not to overheat Desoxycholate Citrate Agar during preparation. It should not be
remelted and the surface of the plates should be dried before use.
Fluid Casein Digest-Soya Lecithin-Polysorbate 20 Medium
Pancreatic digest of casein 20 g
Soya lecithin 5g
Polysorbate 20 40 ml
Water to 1000 ml
Dissolve the pancreatic digest of casein and soya lecithin in water, heating in a water-bath at 480 to
500 for about 30 minutes to effect solution. Add polysorbate 20, mix and dispense as desired.

168
Fluid Lactose Medium
Beef extract 3.0 g
Pancreatic digest of gelatin 5.0 g
Lactose 5.0 g
Water to 1000 ml
Cool as quickly as possible after sterilization. Adjust the pH after sterilization to 6.9 + 0.2.
Lactose Broth Medium
Beef extract 3.0 g
Pancreatic digest of gelatin 5.0 g
Lactose 5.0 g
Water to 1000 ml
Adjust the pH after sterilisation to 6.9+0.2.
Levine Eosin-Methylene Blue Agar Medium
Pancreatic digest of gelatin 10.0 g
Dibasic potassium phosphate 2.0 g
Agar 15.0 g
Lactose 10.0 g
Eosin Y 400 mg
Methylene blue 65 mg
Water to 1000 ml
Dissolve the pancreatic digest of gelatin, dibasic potassium phosphate and agar in water with
warming and allow to cool. Just prior to use, liquefy the gelled agar solution and the remaining
ingredients, as solutions, in the following amounts and mix. For each 100 ml of the liquefied agar
solution use 5 ml of a 20 per cent w/v solution of lactose, and 2 ml of a 2 per cent w/v solution of
eosin Y, and 2 ml of a 0.33 per cent w/v solution of methylene blue. The finished medium may not be
clear. Adjust the pH after sterilisation to 7.1+0.2.
MacConkey Agar Medium
Pancreatic digest of gelatin 17.0g
Peptone (meat and casein, equal parts) 3.0 g
Lactose 10.0 g
Sodium chloride 5.0 g
Bile salts 1.5 g
Agar 13.5 g

169
 Neutral red 30 mg
Crystal violet 1 mg
Water to 1000 ml
Boil the mixture of solids and water for 1 minute to effect solution. Adjust the pH after sterilisation to
7.1 + 0.2.
MacConkey Broth Medium
Pancreatic digest of gelatin 20.0g
Lactose 10.0 g
Dehydrated ox bile 5.0 g
Bromocresol purple 10 mg
Water to 1000 ml
Adjust the pH after sterilisation to 7.3+0.2.
Mannitol-Salt Agar Medium
Pancreatic digest of gelatin 5.0 g
Peptic digest of animal tissue 5.0 g
Beef extract 1.0 g
D-Mannitol 10.0 g
Sodium chloride 75.0 g
Agar 15.0 g
Phenol red 25 mg
Water to 1000 ml
Mix, heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to effect solution. Adjust the pH after
sterilisation to 7.4 + 0.2.
Nutrient Agar Medium : Nutrient broth gelled by the addition of 1 to 2 per cent w/v of agar.
Nutrient Broth Medium
Beef extract 10.0 g
Peptone 10.0 g
Sodium chloride 5 mg
Water to 1000 ml
Dissolve with the aid of heat. Adjust the pH to 8.0 to 8.4 with 5M sodium hydroxide and boil for 10
minutes. Filter, and sterilise by maintaining at 1150 for 30 minutes and adjust the pH to 7.3+0.1.

170
Pseudomonas Agar Medium for Detection of Flourescein
Pancreatic digest of casein 10.0 g
Peptic digest of animal tissue 10.0 g
Anhydrous dibasic potassium phosphate 1.5 g
Magnesium sulphate hepta hydrate 1.5 g
glycerin 10.0 ml
Agar 15.0 g
Water to 1000 ml
Dissolve the solid components in water before adding glycerin. Heat with frequent agitation and boil
for 1 minute to effect solution. Adjust the pH after sterilisation to 7.2+0.2.
Pseudomonas Agar Medium for Detection of Pyocyanin
Pancreatic digest of gelatin 20.0 g
Anhydrous magnesium chloride 1.4 g
Anhydrous potassium sulphate 10.0 g
Agar 15.0 g
Glycerin 10.0 ml
Water to 1000 ml
Dissolve the solid components in water before adding glycerin. Heat with frequent agitation and boil
for 1 minute to effect solution. Adjust the pH after sterilisation to 7.2+0.2.
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar Medium
Dextrose 40 g
Mixture of equal parts of peptic digest of
animal tissue and Pancreatic digest of casein 10 g
Agar 15 g
Water to 1000 ml
Mix, and boil to effect solution. Adjust the pH after sterilisation to 5.6 + 0.2.
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar Medium with Antibiotics
To 1 liter of Sabouraud Dextrose Agar Medium add 0.1 g of benzylpenicillin sodium and 0.1 g of
tetracycline or alternatively add 50 mg of chloramphenicol immediately before use.
Selenite F Broth
Peptone 5g
Lactose 4g
Disodium hydrogen phosphate 10 g

171
 Sodium hydrogen selenite 4g
Water to 1000 ml
Dissolve, distribute in sterile containers and sterilise by maintaining at 1000 for 30 minutes.
Fluid Selenite-Cystine Medium
Pancreatic digest of casein 5.0 g
Lactose 4.0 g
Sodium phosphate 10.0 g
Sodium hydrogen selenite 4.0 g
L-Cystine 10.0 mg
Water to 1000 ml
Mix and heat to effect solution. Heat in flowing steam for 15 minutes. Adjust the final pH to 7.0+0.2.
Do not sterilise.
Tetrathionate Broth Medium
Beef extract 0.9 g
Peptone 4.5 g
Yeast extract 1.8 g
Sodium chloride 4.5 g
Calcium carbonate 25.0 g
Sodium thiosulphate 40.7 g
Water to 1000 ml
Dissolve the solids in water and heat the solution to boil. On the day of use, add a solution prepared
by dissolving 5 g of potassium iodide and 6 g of iodine in 20 ml of water.
Tetrathionate-Bile-Brilliant Green Broth Medium
Peptone 8.6 g
Dehydrated ox bile 8.0 g
Sodium chloride 6.4 g
Calcium carbonate 20.0 g
Potassium tetrathionate 20.0 g
Brilliant green 70 mg
Water to 1000 ml
Heat just to boiling; do not reheat. Adjust the pH so that after heating it is 7.0+0.2.

172
Triple Sugar-Iron Agar Medium
Mix, allow standing for 15 minutes, bringing to boil and maintain at boiling point until solution is
complete, mix, distributing in tubes and sterilising by maintaining at 1150 for 30 minutes. Allow to
stand in a sloped form with a butt about 2.5 cm long.
Urea Broth Medium
Potassium dihydrogen orthophosphate 9.1 g
Anhydrous disodium hydrogen phosphate 9.5 g
Urea 20.0 g
Yeast extract 0.1 g
Phenol red 10 mg
Water to 1000 ml
Mix, sterilise by filtration and distribute aseptically in sterile containers.
Vogel-Johnson Agar Medium
Pancreatic digest of casein 10.0 g
Yeast extract 5.0 g
Mannitol 10.0 g
Dibasic potassium phosphate 5.0 g
Lithium chloride 5.0 g
glycerin 10.0 g
Agar 16.0 g
Phenol red 25.0 mg
Water to 1000 ml
Boil the solution of solids for 1 minute. Sterilise, cool to between 450 to 500 and add 20 ml of a 1 per
cent w/v sterile solution of potassium tellurite. Adjust the pH after sterilisation to 7.0+0.2.
Xylose-Lysine-Desoxycholate Agar Medium
Xylose 3.5 g
L-Lysine 5.0 g
Lactose 7.5 g
Sucrose 7.5 g
Sodium chloride 5.0 g
Yeast extract 3.0 g
Phenol red 80 mg
Agar 13.5 g

173
 Sodium desoxycholate 2.5 g
Sodium thiosulphate 6.8 g
Ferric ammonium citrate 800 mg
Water to 1000 ml
Heat the mixture of solids and water, with swirling, just to the boiling point. Do not overheat or
sterilise. Transfer at once to a water-bath maintained at about 500 and pour into plates as soon as the
medium has cooled. Adjust the final pH to 7.4 + 0.2.
Sampling : Use 10 ml or 10 g specimens for each of the tests specified in the individual monograph.
Precautions : The microbial limit tests should be carried out under conditions designed to avoid
accidental contamination during the test. The precautions taken to avoid contamination must be such
that they do not adversely affect any micro-organisms that should be revealed in the test.

2.4.1. Total Aerobic Microbial Count:

Pretreat the sample of the product being examined as described below.
Water-soluble products : Dissolve 10 g or dilute 10 ml of the preparation being examined, unless
otherwise specified, in buffered sodium chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0 or any other suitable
medium shown to have no antimicrobial activity under the conditions of test and adjust the volume to
100 ml with the same medium. If necessary, adjust the pH to about 7.
Products insoluble in Water (non-fatty): Suspend 10 g or 10 ml of the preparation being
examined, unless otherwise specified, in buffered sodium chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0 or any
other suitable medium shown not to have antimicrobial activity under the conditions of the test and
dilute to 100 ml with the same medium. If necessary, divide the preparation being examined and
homogenize the suspension mechanically.
A suitable surface-active agent such as 0.1 per cent w/v of polysorbate 80 may be added to assist the
suspension of poorly wettable substances. If necessary, adjust the pH of the suspension to about 7.
Fatty products: Homogenise 10 g or 10 ml of the preparation being examined, unless otherwise
specified, with 5 g of polysorbate 20 or polysorbate 80. If necessary, heat to not more than 400. Mix
carefully while maintaining the temperature in the water-bath or in an oven. Add 85 ml of buffered
sodium chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0 or any other suitable medium shown to have no
antimicrobial activity under the conditions of the test, heated to not more than 400 if necessary.
Maintain this temperature for the shortest time necessary for formation of an emulsion and in any
case for not more than 30 minutes. If necessary, adjust the pH to about 7.
Examination of the sample: Determine the total aerobic microbial count in the substance being
examined by any of the following methods.

174
Membrane filtration : Use membrane filters 50 mm in diameter and having a nominal pore size not
greater than 0.45 µm the effectiveness of which in retaining bacteria has been established for the type
of preparation being examined.
Transfer 10 ml or a quantity of each dilution containing 1 g of the preparation being examined to each
of two membrane filters and filter immediately. If necessary, dilute the pretreated preparation so that
a colony count of 10 to 100 may be expected. Wash each membrane by filtering through it three or
more successive quantities, each of about 100 ml, of a suitable liquid such as buffered sodium
chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0. For fatty substances add to the liquid polysorbate 20 or polysorbate
80. Transfer one of the membrane filters, intended for the enumeration of bacteria, to the surface of a
plate of casein soyabean digest agar and the other, intended for the enumeration of fungi, to the
surface of a plate of Sabouraud dextrose agar with antibiotics.
Incubate the plates for 5 days, unless a more reliable count is obtained in shorter time, at 300 to 350 in
the test for bacteria and 200 to 250 in the test for fungi. Count the number of colonies that are formed.
Calculate the number of micro-organisms per g or per ml of the preparation being examined, if
necessary counting bacteria and fungi separately.
Plate count for bacteria: Using Petri dishes 9 to 10 cm in diameter, add to each dish a mixture of 1
ml of the pretreated preparation and about 15 ml of liquefied casein soyabean digest agar at not more
than 450. Alternatively, spread the pretreated preparation on the surface of the solidified medium in a
Petri dish of the same diameter. If necessary, dilute the pretreated preparation as described above so
that a colony count of not more than 300 may be expected. Prepare at least two such Petri dishes
using the same dilution and incubate at 300 to 350 for 5 days, unless a more reliable count is obtained
in a shorter time. Count the number of colonies that are formed. Calculate the results using plates
with the greatest number of colonies but taking 300 colonies per plate as the maximum consistent
with good evaluation.
Plate count for fungi: Proceed as described in the test for bacteria but use Sabouraud dextrose agar
with antibiotics in place of casein soyabean digest agar and incubate the plates at 200 to 250 for 5
days, unless a more reliable count is obtained in a shorter time. Calculate the results using plates with
not more than 100 colonies.
Multiple-tube or serial dilution method : In each of fourteen test-tubes of similar size place 9.0 ml
of sterile fluid soyabean casein digest medium. Arrange twelve of the tubes in four sets of three tubes
each. Put aside one set of three tubes to serve as controls. Into each of three tubes of one set (“100”)
and into fourth tube (A) pipette 1 ml of the solution of suspension of the test specimen and mix. From
tube A pipette 1 ml of its contents into the one remaining tube (B) not included in the set and mix.
These two tubes contain 100 mg (or 100 µl) and 10 mg (or 10 µl) of the specimen respectively. Into
each of the second set (“10”) of three tubes pipette 1 ml from tube A, and into each tube of the third
set (“1”) pipette 1 ml from tube B. Discard the unused contents of tube A and B. Close well and
incubate all of the tubes. Following the incubation period, examine the tubes for growth. The three
control tubes remain clear. Observations in the tubes containing the test specimen, when interpreted

175
by reference to Table 4, indicate the most probable number of micro-organisms per g or per ml of the
test specimen.
Table 4 – Most Probable Total Count by Multiple-Tube Or Serial Dilution Method
Observed combination of numbers
of tubes showing growth in each set
[Link] mg (or ml) of specimen per Most probable number of micro-
tube organisms per g or per ml
100 10 1
(100 µl) (10 µl) (1 µl)
3 3 3 >1100
3 3 2 1100
3 3 1 500
3 3 0 200
3 2 3 290
3 2 2 210
3 2 1 150
3 2 0 90
3 1 3 160
3 1 2 120
3 1 1 70
3 1 0 40
3 0 3 95
3 0 2 60
3 0 1 40
3 0 0 23

2.4.2. Tests for Specified Micro-organisms:

Pretreatment of the sample being examined: Proceed as described under the test for total aerobic
microbial count but using lactose broth or any other suitable medium shown to have no antimicrobial
activity under the conditions of test in place of buffered sodium chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0.
Escherichia coli : Place the prescribed quantity in a sterile screw-capped container, add 50 ml of
nutrient broth, shake, allow to stand for 1 hour (4 hours for gelatin) and shake again. Loosen the cap
and incubate at 37 0 for 18 to 24 hours.

176
Primary test: Add 1.0 ml of the enrichment culture to a tube containing 5 ml of MacConkey broth.
Incubate in a water-bath at 360 to 380 for 48 hours. If the contents of the tube show acid and gas carry
out the secondary test.
Secondary test: Add 0.1 ml of the contents of the tubes containing (a) 5 ml of MacConkey broth,
and (b) 5 ml of peptone water. Incubate in a water-bath at 43.50 to 44.50 for 24 hours and examine
tube (a) for acid and gas and tube (b) for indole. To test for indole, add 0.5 ml of Kovac’s reagent,
shake well and allow to stand for 1 minute; if a red colour is produced in the reagent layer indole is
present. The presence of acid and gas and of indole in the secondary test indicates the presence of
Escherichia coli.
Carry out a control test by repeating the primary and secondary tests adding 1.0 ml of the enrichment
culture and a volume of broth containing 10 to 50 Escherichia coli (NCTC 9002) organisms, prepared
from a 24-hour culture in nutrient broth, to 5 ml of MacConkey broth. The test is not valid unless the
results indicate that the control contains Escherichia coli.
Alternative test: By means of an inoculating loop, streak a portion from the enrichment culture
(obtained in the previous test) on the surface of MacConkey agar medium. Cover and invert the
dishes and incubate. Upon examination, if none of the colonies are brick-red in colour and have a
surrounding zone of precipitated bile the sample meets the requirements of the test for the absence of
Escherichia coli.
If the colonies described above are found, transfer the suspect colonies individually to the surface of
Levine eosin-methylene blue agar medium, plated on Petri dishes. Cover and invert the plates and
incubate. Upon examination, if none of the colonies exhibits both a characteristic metallic sheen
under reflected light and a blue-black appearance under transmitted light, the sample meets the
requirements of the test for the absence of Escherichia coli. The presence of Escherichia coli may be
confirmed by further suitable cultural and biochemical tests.
Salmonella : Transfer a quantity of the pretreated preparation being examined containing 1 g or 1 ml
of the product to 100 ml of nutrient broth in a sterile screw-capped jar, shake, allow to stand for 4
hours and shake again. Loosen the cap and incubate at 350 to 370 for 24 hours.
Primary test: Add 1.0 ml of the enrichment culture to each of the two tubes containing (a) 10 ml of
selenite F broth and (b) tetrathionate-bile-brilliant green broth and incubate at 360 to 380 for 48 hours.
From each of these two cultures subculture on at least two of the following four agar media: bismuth
sulphate agar, brilliant green agar, deoxycholatecitrate agar and xylose-lysine-deoxycholate agar.
Incubate the plates at 360 to 380 for 18 to 24 hours. Upon examination, if none of the colonies
conforms to the description given in Table 5, the sample meets the requirements of the test for the
absence of the genus Salmonella.
If any colonies conforming to the description in Table 5 are produced, carry out the secondary test.
Secondary test: Subculture any colonies showing the characteristics given in Table 5 in triple sugar-
iron agar by first inoculating the surface of the slope and then making a stab culture with the same

177
inoculating needle, and at the same time inoculate a tube of urea broth. Incubate at 360 to 380 for 18 to
24 hours. The formation of acid and gas in the stab culture (with or without concomitant blackening)
and the absence of acidity from the surface growth in the triple sugar iron agar, together with the
absence of a red colour in the urea broth, indicate the presence of Salmonella. If acid but no gas is
produced in the stab culture, the identity of the organisms should be confirmed by agglutination tests.
Carry out the control test by repeating the primary and secondary tests using 1.0 ml of the enrichment
culture and a volume of broth containing 10 to 50 Salmonella abony (NCTC 6017) organisms,
prepared from a 24-hour culture in nutrient broth, for the inoculation of the tubes (a) and (b). The test
is not valid unless the results indicate that the control contains Salmonella.
Table 5 – Test for Salmonella
Medium Description of colony
Bismuth sulphite agar Black or green
Brilliant green agar Small, transparent and colourless, or opaque,
pinkish or white (frequently surrounded by a
pink or red zone)
Deoxycholate-citrate agar Colourless and opaque, with or without black
centers
Xylose-lysine-desoxy-cholate agar Red with or without black centres

Pseudomonas aeruginosa : Pretreat the preparation being examined as described above and
inoculate 100 ml of fluid soyabean-casein digest medium with a quantity of the solution, suspension
or emulsion thus obtained containing 1 g or 1 ml of the preparation being examined. Mix and
incubate at 350 to 370 for 24 to 48 hours. Examine the medium for growth and if growth is present,
streak a portion of the medium on the surface of cetrimide agar medium, each plated on Petri dishes.
Cover and incubate at 350 to 370 for 18 to 24 hours.
If, upon examination, none of the plates contains colonies having the characteristics listed in Table 6
for the media used, the sample meets the requirement for freedom from Pseudomonas aeruginosa. If
any colonies conforming to the description in Table 6 are produced, carry out the oxidase and pigent
tests.
Streak representative suspect colonies from the agar surface of cetrimide agar on the surfaces of
Pseudomonas agar medium for detection of fluorescein and Pseudomonas agar medium for detection
of pyocyanin contained in Petri dishes. Cover and invert the inoculated media and incubate at 330 to
370 for not less than 3 days. Examine the streaked surfaces under ultra-violet light. Examine the plates
to determine whether colonies conforming to the description in Table 6 are present.
If growth of suspect colonies occurs, place 2 or 3 drops of a freshly prepared 1per cent w/v solution
of N,N,N1,N1-tetramethyl-4-phenylenediamine dihydrochloride on filter paper and smear with the

178
colony; if there is no development of a pink colour, changing to purple, the sample meets the
requirements of the test for the absence of Pseudomonas aeruginosa.
Table 6 – Tests for Pseudomonas aeruginosa
Medium Characteristic Fluorescence Oxidase Gram stain
colonial morphology in UV light test
Cetrimide agar Generally greenish Greenish Positive Negative rods
Pseudomonas agar Generally colourless to Yellowish Positive Negative rods
medium for detection yellowish
of fluorescein
Pseudomonas agar Generally greenish Blue Positive Negative rods
medium for detection
of pyocyanin

Staphylococcus aureus : Proceed as described under Pseudomonas aeruginosa if, upon examination
of the incubated plates, none of them contains colonies having the characteristics listed in Table 7 for
the media used, the sample meets the requirements for the absence of Staphylococcus aureus.
If growth occurs, carry out the coagulase test. Transfer representative suspect colonies from the agar
surface of any of the media listed in Table 7 to individual tubes, each containing 0.5 ml of
mammalian, preferably rabbit or horse, plasma with or without additives. Incubate in water-bath at
370 examining the tubes at 3 hours and subsequently at suitable intervals up to 24 hours. If no
coagulation in any degree is observed, the sample meets the requirements of the test for the absence
of Staphylococcus aureus.
Table 7 – Tests for Staphylococcus aureus
Selective medium Characteristic colonial morphology Gram stain
Vogel-Johnson agar Black surrounded by yellow zones Positive cocci (in clusters)
Mannitol-salt agar Yellow colonies with yellow zones Positive cocci (in clusters)
Baird-Parker agar Black, shiny, surrounded by clear zones of 2 Positive cocci (in clusters)
to 5 mm

Validity of the tests for total aerobic microbial count:

Grow the following test strains separately in tubes containing fluid soyabean-casein digest medium at
300 to 350 for 18 to 24 hours or, for Candida albicans, at 200 for 48 hours.
Staphylococcus aureus (ATCC 6538; NCTC 10788)
Bacillus subtilis (ATCC 6633; NCIB 8054)
Escherichia coli (ATCC 8739; NCIB 8545)
Candida albicans (ATCC 2091; ATCC 10231)

179
Dilute portions of each of the cultures using buffered sodium chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0 to
make test suspensions containing about 100 viable micro-organisms per ml. Use the suspension of
each of the micro-organisms separately as a control of the counting methods, in the presence and
absence of the preparation being examined, if necessary.
A count for any of the test organisms differing by not more than a factor of 10 from the calculated
value for the inoculum should be obtained. To test the sterility of the medium and of the diluent and
the aseptic performance of the test, carry out the total aerobic microbial count method using sterile
buffered sodium chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0 as the test preparation. There should be no growth
of micro-organisms.
Validity of the tests for specified micro-organisms: Grow separately the test strains of
Staphylococcus aureus and Pseudomonas aeruginosa in fluid soyabean-casein digest medium and
Escherichia coli and Salmonella typhimurium at 300 to 350 for 18 to 24 hours. Dilute portions of each
of the cultures using buffered sodium chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0 to make test suspensions
containing about 103 viable micro-organisms per ml. Mix equal volume of each suspension and use
0.4 ml (approximately 102 micro-organisms of each strain) as an inoculum in the test for E. coli,
Salmonella, P. aeruginosa and S. aureus, in the presence and absence of the preparation being
examined, if necessary. A positive result for the respective strain of micro-organism should be
obtained.
Table 8- Microbial Contamination Limits
[Link]. Parameters Permissible limits
1. Staphylococcus aureus/g Absent
2. Salmonella sp./g Absent
3. Pseudomonas aeruginosa/g Absent
4. Escherichia coli Absent
5. Total microbial plate count (TPC) 105/g*
6. Total Yeast & Mould 103/g

*For topical use, the limit shall be 107/g

2.5. Pesticide Residue:

Definition: For the purposes of the Pharmacopoeia, a pesticide is any substance or mixture of
substances intended for preventing, destroying or controlling any pest, unwanted species of plants or
animals causing harm during or otherwise interfering with the production, processing, storage,
transport or marketing of vegetable drugs. The item includes substances intended for use as growth-
regulators, defoliants or desiccants and any substance applied to crops either before or after harvest to
protect the commodity from deterioration during storage and transport.
Limits: Unless otherwise indicated in the monograph, the drug to be examined at least complies with
the limits indicated in Table - 9, The limits applying to pesticides that are not listed in Table - 9 and

180
whose presence is suspected for any reason comply with the limits calculated using the following
expression:
ADI x M
MDD x 100
ADI = Acceptable Daily Intake, as published by FAO-WHO, in milligrams per kilogram of body
mass,
M = body mass in kilograms (60 kg),
MDD = daily dose of the drug, in kilograms.
If the drug is intended for the preparation of extracts, tinctures or other pharmaceutical forms whose
preparation method modifies the content of pesticides in the finished product, the limits are calculated
using the following expression:
ADI x M x E
MDD x 100
E = Extraction factor of the method of preparation, determined experimentally.
Higher limits can also be authorised, in exceptional cases, especially when a plant requires a
particular cultivation method or has a metabolism or a structure that gives rise to a higher than normal
content of pesticides.
The competent authority may grant total or partial exemption from the test when the complete history
(nature and quantity of the pesticides used, date of each treatment during cultivation and after the
harvest) of the treatment of the batch is known and can be checked precisely.
Sampling
Method: For containers up to 1 kg, take one sample from the total content, thoroughly mixed,
sufficient for the tests. For containers between 1 kg and 5 kg, take three samples, equal in volume,
from the upper, middle and lower parts of the container, each being sufficient to carry out the tests.
Thoroughly mix the samples and take from the mixture an amount sufficient to carry out the tests. For
containers of more than 5 kg, take three samples, each of at least 250 g from the upper, middle and
lower parts of the container. Thoroughly mix the samples and take from the mixture an amount
sufficient to carry out the tests.
Size of sampling: If the number (n) of containers is three or fewer, take samples from each container
as indicated above under Method. If the number of containers is more than three, take n+1 samples
for containers as indicated under Method, rounding up to the nearest unit if necessary.
The samples are to be analysed immediately to avoid possible degradation of the residues. If this is
not possible, the samples are stored in air-tight containers suitable for food contact, at a temperature
below 00, protected from light.

181
Reagents: All reagents and solvents are free from any contaminants, especially pesticides, that might
interfere with the analysis. It is often necessary to use special quality solvents or, if this is not
possible, solvents that have recently been re-distilled in an apparatus made entirely of glass. In any
case, suitable blank tests must be carried out.
Apparatus: Clean the apparatus and especially glassware to ensure that they are free from pesticides,
for example, soak for at least 16 h in a solution of phosphate-free detergent, rinse with large
quantities of distilled water and wash with acetone and hexane or heptane.
Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis of Pesticide Residues:
The analytical procedures used are validated according to the regulations in force. In particular, they
satisfy the following criteria :
- the chosen method, especially the purification steps, are suitable for the combination pesticide
residue/substance to be analysed and not susceptible to interference from co-extractives; the
limits of detection and quantification are measured for each pesticide-matrix combination to
be analysed.
- between 70 per cent to 110 per cent of each pesticide is recovered.
- the repeatability of the method is not less than the values indicated in Table 10
- the reproducibility of the method is not less than the values indicated in Table 10
- the concentration of test and reference solutions and the setting of the apparatus are such that
a linear response is obtained from the analytical detector.
Table -9
Substance Limit (mg/kg)
Alachlor 0.02
Aldrin and Dieldrin (sum of ) 0.05
Azinphos-methyl 1.0
Bromopropylate 3.0
Chlordane (sum of cis-, trans – and Oxythlordane) 0.05
Chlorfenvinphos 0.5
Chlorpyrifos 0.2
Chlorpyrifos-methyl 0.1
Cypermethrin (and isomers) 1.0
DDT (sum of p,p-‘DDT, o,p-‘DDT, p,p-‘DDE and p,p-‘TDE 1.0

182
Deltamethrin 0.5
Diazinon 0.5
Dichlorvos 1.0
Dithiocarbamates (as CS2) 2.0
Endosulfan (sum of isomers and Endosulfan sulphate) 3.0
Endrin 0.05
Ethion 2.0
Fenitrothion 0.5
Fenvalerate 1.5
Fonofos 0.05
Heptachlor (sum of Heptachlor and Heptachlorepoxide) 0.05
Hexachlorobenzene 0.1
Hexachlorocyclohexane isomers (other than γ) 0.3
Lindane (γ-Hexachlorocyclohexane) 0.6
Malathion 1.0
Methidathion 0.2
Parathion 0.5
Parathion-methyl 0.2
Permethrin 1.0
Phosalone 0.1
Piperonyl butoxide 3.0
Pirimiphos-methyl 4.0
Pyrethrins (sum of) 3.0
Quintozene (sum of quintozene, pentachloroaniline and methyl 1.0
pentachlorophenyl sulphide)

183
 Table -10
Concentration of the Repeatability (difference, Reproducibility
pesticide (mg/kg) + mg/kg) (difference, + mg/kg)
0.010 0.005 0.01
0.100 0.025 0.05
1.000 0.125 0.25

2.5.1. Test for Pesticides:

Organochlorine, Organophosphorus and Pyrethroid Insecticides:
The following methods may be used, in connection with the general method above, depending on the
substance being examined, it may be necessary to modify, sometimes extensively, the procedure
described hereafter. In any case, it may be necessary to use, in addition, another column with a
different polarity or another detection method (mass spectrometry) or a different method
(immunochemical methods) to confirm the results obtained.
This procedure is valid only for the analysis of samples of vegetable drugs containing less than 15 per
cent of water. Samples with a higher content of water may be dried, provided it has been shown that
the drying procedure does not affect significantly the pesticide content.
Extraction
To 10 g of the substance being examined, coarsely powdered, add 100 ml of acetone and allow to
stand for 20 min. Add 1 ml of a solution containing 1.8 µg/ml of carbophenothion in toluene.
Homogenise using a high-speed blender for 3 min. Filter and wash the filter cake with two quantities,
each of 25 ml, of acetone. Combine the filtrate and the washings and heat using a rotary evaporator at
a temperature not exceeding 400 C until the solvent has almost completely evaporated. To the residue
add a few milliliters of toluene and heat again until the acetone is completely removed. Dissolve the
residue in 8 ml of toluene. Filter through a membrane filter (45 µm), rinse the flask and the filter with
toluene and dilute to 10.0 ml with the same solvent (solution A).
Purification
Organochlorine, organophosphorus and pyrethroid insecticides:
Examine by size-exclusion chromatography.
The chromatographic procedure may be carried out using:
- a stainless steel column 0.30 m long and 7.8 mm in internal diameter packed with styre:e-
divinylbenzene copolymer (5 µm).
- as mobile phase toluene at a flow rate of 1 ml/min.

184
Performance of the column: Inject 100 µl of a solution containing 0.5 g/l of methyl red and 0.5 g/l
of oracet blue in toluene and proceed with the chromatography. The column is not suitable unless the
colour of the eluate changes from orange to blue at an elution volume of about 10.3 ml. If necessary
calibrate the column, using a solution containing, in toluene, at a suitable concentration, the
insecticide to be analysed with the lowest molecular mass (for example, dichlorvos) and that with the
highest molecular mass (for example, deltamethrin). Determine which fraction of the eluate contains
both insecticides.
Purification of the test solution: Inject a suitable volume of solution A (100 µl to 500 µl) and
proceed with the chromatography. Collect the fraction as determined above (solution B).
Organophosphorus insecticides are usually eluted between 8.8 ml and 10.9 ml. Organochlorine and
pyrethroid insecticides are usually eluted between 8.5 ml and 10.3 ml.
Organochlorine and pyrethroid insecticides: In a chromatography column, 0.10 m long and 5 mm
in internal diameter, introduce a piece of defatted cotton and 0.5 g of silica gel treated as follows: heat
silica gel for chromatography in an oven at 1500 for at least 4 h. Allow to cool and add dropwise a
quantity of water corresponding to 1.5 per cent of the mass of silica gel used; shake vigorously until
agglomerates have disappeared and continue shaking for 2 h using a mechanical shaker. Condition
the column using 1.5 ml of hexane. Prepacked columns containing about 0.50 g of a suitable silica gel
may also be used provided they are previously validated.
Concentrate solution B in a current of helium for chromatography or oxygen-free nitrogen almost to
dryness and dilute to a suitable volume with toluene (200 µl to 1 ml according to the volume injected
in the preparation of solution B). Transfer quantitatively onto the column and proceed with the
chromatography using 1.8 ml of toluene as the mobile phase. Collect the eluate (solution C).

2.5.2. Quantitative Analysis:

A. Organophosphorus insecticides: Examine by gas chromatography, using carbophenothion as
internal standard. It may be necessary to use a second internal standard to identify possible
interference with the peak corresponding to carbophenothion.
Test solution: Concentrate solution B in a current of helium for chromatography almost to dryness
and dilute to 100 µl with toluene.
Reference solution: Prepare at least three solutions in toluene containing the insecticides to be
determined and carbophenothion at concentrations suitable for plotting a calibration curve.
The chromatographic procedure may be carried out using:
- a fused-silica column 30 m long and 0.32 mm in internal diameter the internal wall of which
is covered with a layer 0.25 µm thick of poly (dimethyl) siloxane.
- hydrogen for chromatography as the carrier gas. Other gases such as helium for
chromatography or nitrogen for chromatography may also be used provided the
chromatography is suitably validated.
- a phosphorus-nitrogen flame-ionisation detector or a atomic emission spectrometry detector.

185
Maintaining the temperature of the column at 800 for 1 min, then raising it at a rate of 300 /min to
1500, maintaining at 1500 for 3 min, then raising the temperature at a rate of 40/min to 2800 and
maintaining at this temperature for 1 min and maintaining the temperature of the injector port at 2500
and that of the detector at 2750. Inject the chosen volume of each solution. When the chromatograms
are recorded in the prescribed conditions, the relative retention times are approximately those listed in
Table 11. Calculate the content of each insecticide from the peak areas and the concentrations of the
solutions.
Table 11- Relative Retention Times of Pesticides
Substance Relative retention times
Dichlorvos 0.20
Fonofos 0.50
Diazinon 0.52
Parathion-methyl 0.59
Chlorpyrifos-methyl 0.60
Pirimiphos-methyl 0.66
Malathion 0.67
Parathion 0.69
Chlorpyrifos 0.70
Methidathion 0.78
Ethion 0.96
Carbophenothion 1.00
Azinphos-methyl 1.17
Phosalon 1.18
B. Organochlorine and Pyrethroid Insecticides:
Examine by gas chromatography, using carbophenothion as the internal standard. It may be necessary
to use a second internal standard to identify possible interference with the peak corresponding to
carbophenothion.
Test solution: Concentrate solution C in a current of helium for chromatography or oxygen-free
nitrogen almost to dryness and dilute to 500 µl with toluene.
Reference solution: Prepare at least three solutions in toluene containing the insecticides to be
determined and carbophenothion at concentrations suitable for plotting a calibration curve.

186
The chromatographic procedure may be carried out using:
- a fused silica column 30 m long and 0.32 mm in internal diameter the internal wall of which
is covered with a layer 0.25 µm thick of poly (dimethyl diphenyl) siloxane.
- hydrogen for chromatography as the carrier gas. Other gases such as helium for
chromatography or nitrogen for chromatography may also be used, provided the
chromatography is suitably validated.
- an electron-capture detector.
- a device allowing direct cold on-column injection.
maintaining the temperature of the column at 800 for 1 min, then raising it at a rate of 300/min to 1500,
maintaining at 1500 for 3 min, then raising the temperature at a rate of 40/min to 2800 and maintaining
at this temperature for 1 min and maintaining the temperature of the injector port at 2500 and that of
the detector at 2750. Inject the chosen volume of each solution. When the chromatograms are
recorded in the prescribed conditions, the relative retention times are approximately those listed in
Table 12. Calculate the content of each insecticide from the peak areas and the concentrations of the
solutions.
Table 12- Relative Retention Times of Insecticides
Substance Relative retention times
α-Hexachlorocyclohexane 0.44
Hexachlorobenzene 0.45
β-Hexachlorocyclohexane 0.49
Lindane 0.49
δ-Hexachlorocyclohexane 0.54
ε-Hexachlorocyclohexane 0.56
Heptachlor 0.61
Aldrin 0.68
cis-Heptachlor-epoxide 0.76
o,p’- DDE 0.81
α-Endosulfan 0.82
Dieldrin 0.87
p,p’- DDE 0.87
o,p’- DDD 0.89

187
 Endrin 0.91
β-Endosulfan 0.92
o,p’- DDT 0.95
Carbophenothion 1.00
p,p’- DDT 1.02
cis-Permethrin 1.29
trans-Permethrin 1.31
Cypermethrin* 1.40
Fenvalerate* 1.47 and 1.49
Deltamethrin 1.54
*The substance shows several peaks.

2.6. Test for Aflatoxins:

Caution: Aflatoxins are highly dangerous and extreme care should be exercised in handling aflatoxin
materials.
This test is provided to detect the possible presence of aflatoxins B1, B2, G1 and G2 in any material of
plant origin. Unless otherwise specified in the individual monograph, use the following method.
Zinc Acetate – Aluminum Chloride Reagent: Dissolve 20 g of zinc acetate and 5 g of aluminum
chloride in sufficient water to make 100 ml.
Sodium Chloride Solution: Dissolve 5 g of sodium chloride in 50 ml of purified water.
Test Solution 1: Grind about 200 g of plant material to a fine powder. Transfer about 50 g of the
powdered material, accurately weighed, to a glass-stoppered flask. Add 200 ml of a mixture of
methanol and water (17: 3). Shake vigorously by mechanical means for not less than 30 minutes and
filter. [Note – If the solution has interfering plant pigments, proceed as directed for Test Solution 2.]
Discard the first 50 ml of the filtrate and collect the next 40 ml portion. Transfer the filtrate to a
separatory funnel. Add 40 ml of sodium chloride solution and 25 ml of hexane and shake for 1
minute. Allow the layers to separate and transfer the lower aqueous layer to a second separatory
funnel. Extract the aqueous layer in the separatory funnel twice, each time with 25 ml of methylene
chloride, by shaking for 1 minute. Allow the layers to separate each time, separate the lower organic
layer and collect the combined organic layers in a 125 ml conical flask. Evaporate the organic solvent
to dryness on a water bath. Cool the residue. If interferences exist in the residue, proceed as directed
for Cleanup Procedure; otherwise, dissolve the residue obtained above in 0.2 ml of a mixture of
chloroform and acetonitrile (9.8: 0.2) and shake by mechanical means if necessary.

188
Test Solution 2: Collect 100 ml of the filtrate from the start of the flow and transfer to a 250 ml
beaker. Add 20 ml of Zinc Acetate-Aluminum Chloride Reagent and 80 ml of water. Stir and allow to
stand for 5 minutes. Add 5 g of a suitable filtering aid, such as diatomaceous earth, mix and filter.
Discard the first 50 ml of the filtrate, and collect the next 80 ml portion. Proceed as directed for Test
Solution 1, beginning with “Transfer the filtrate to a separatory funnel.”
Cleanup Procedure: Place a medium-porosity sintered-glass disk or a glass wool plug at the bottom
of a 10 mm x 300 mm chromatographic tube. Prepare slurry of 2 g of silica gel with a mixture of
ethyl ether and hexane (3: 1), pour the slurry into the column and wash with 5 ml of the same solvent
mixture. Allow the absorbent to settle and add to the top of the column a layer of 1.5 g of anhydrous
sodium sulfate. Dissolve the residue obtained above in 3 ml of methylene chloride and transfer it to
the column. Rinse the flask twice with 1 ml portions of methylene chloride, transfer the rinses to the
column and elute at a rate not greater than 1 ml per minute. Add successively to the column 3 ml of
hexane, 3 ml of diethyl ether and 3 ml of methylene chloride; elute at a rate not greater than 3 ml per
minute; and discard the eluates. Add to the column 6 mL of a mixture of methylene chloride and
acetone (9: 1) and elute at a rate not greater than 1 ml per minute, preferably without the aid of
vacuum. Collect this eluate in a small vial, add a boiling chip if necessary and evaporate to dryness on
a water bath. Dissolve the residue in 0.2 ml of a mixture of chloroform and acetonitrile (9.8 : 0.2) and
shake by mechanical means if necessary.
Aflatoxin Solution: Dissolve accurately weighed quantities of aflatoxin B1, aflatoxin B2, aflatoxin
G1 and aflatoxin G2 in a mixture of chloroform and acetonitrile (9.8: 0.2) to obtain a solution having
concentrations of 0.5 μg /per ml each for aflatoxin B1 and G1 and 0.1μg per ml each for aflatoxins for
B2 and G2.
Procedure: Separately apply 2.5 µl, 5 µl, 7.5 µl and 10 µl of the Aflatoxin Solution and three 10 µl
applications of either Test Solution 1 or Test Solution 2 to a suitable thin-layer chromatographic plate
coated with a 0.25-mm layer of chromatographic silica gel mixture. Superimpose 5 µl of the
Aflatoxin Solution on one of the three 10 µl applications of the Test Solution. Allow the spots to dry
and develop the chromatogram in an unsaturated chamber containing a solvent system consisting of a
mixture of chloroform, acetone and isopropyl alcohol (85:10:5) until the solvent front has moved not
less than 15 cm from the origin. Remove the plate from the developing chamber, mark the solvent
front and allow the plate to air-dry. Locate the spots on the plate by examination under UV light at
365 nm: the four applications of the Aflatoxin Solution appear as four clearly separated blue
fluorescent spots; the spot obtained from the Test Solution that was superimposed on the Aflatoxin
Solution is no more intense than that of the corresponding Aflatoxin Solution; and no spot from any
of the other Test Solutions corresponds to any of the spots obtained from the applications of the
Aflatoxin Solution. If any spot of aflatoxins is obtained in the Test Solution, match the position of
each fluorescent spot of the Test Solution with those of the Aflatoxin Solution to identify the type of
aflatoxin present. The intensity of the aflatoxin spot, if present in the Test Solution, when compared
with that of the corresponding aflatoxin in the Aflatoxin Solution will give an approximate
concentration of aflatoxin in the Test Solution.

189
 Table13 - Permissible Limit of Aflatoxins*
[Link]. Aflatoxins Permissible Limit
1. B1 0.5 ppb
2. G1 0.5 ppb
3. B2 0.1 ppb
4. G2 0.1 ppb
*For Domestic use only

2.7. Gas Chromatography:

Gas chromatography (GC) is a chromatographic separation technique based on the difference in the
distribution of species between two non-miscible phases in which the mobile phase is a carrier gas
moving through or passing the stationary phase contained in a column. It is applicable to substances
or their derivatives, which are volatilized under the temperatures employed.
GC is based on mechanisms of adsorption, mass distribution or size exclusion.
Apparatus
The apparatus consists of an injector, a chromatographic column contained in an oven, a detector and
a data acquisition system (or an integrator or a chart recorder). The carrier gas flows through the
column at a controlled rate or pressure and then through the detector.
The chromatography is carried out either at a constant temperature or according to a given
temperature programme.
Injectors
Direct injections of solutions are the usual mode of injection, unless otherwise prescribed in the
monograph. Injection may be carried out either directly at the head of the column using a syringe or
an injection valve, or into a vaporization chamber which may be equipped with a stream splitter.
Injections of vapour phase may be effected by static or dynamic head-space injection systems.
Dynamic head-space (purge and trap) injection systems include a sparging device by which volatile
substances in solution are swept into an absorbent column maintained at a low temperature. Retained
substances are then desorbed into the mobile phase by rapid heating of the absorbent column.
Static head-space injection systems include a thermostatically controlled sample heating chamber in
which closed vials containing solid or liquid samples are placed for a fixed period of time to allow the
volatile components of the sample to reach equilibrium between the non-gaseous phase and the
vapour phase. After equilibrium has been established, a predetermined amount of the head-space of
the vial is flushed into the gas chromatograph.

190
Stationary Phases
Stationary phases are contained in columns, which may be:
- a capillary column of fused-silica close wall is coated with the stationary phase.
- a column packed with inert particles impregnated with the stationary phase.
- a column packed with solid stationary phase.
Capillary columns are 0.1 mm to 0.53 mm in internal diameter (Ф) and 5 to 6 m in length. The liquid
or stationary phase, which may be chemically bonded to the inner surface, is a film 0.1 µm to 5.0 µm
thick.
Packed columns, made of glass or metal, are usually 1 m to 3 m in length with an internal diameter
(Ф) of 2 mm to 4 mm. Stationary phases usually consist of porous polymers or solid supports
impregnated with liquid phase.
Supports for analysis of polar compounds on columns packed with low-capacity, low-polarity
stationary phase must be inert to avoid peak tailing. The reactivity of support materials can be
reduced by silanising prior to coating with liquid phase. Acid-washed, flux-calcinated diatomaceous
earth is often used. Materials are available in various particle sizes, the most commonly used particles
are in the ranges of 150 µm to 180 µm and 125 µm to 150 µm.
Mobile Phases
Retention time and peak efficiency depend on the carrier gas flow rate; retention time is directly
proportional to column length and resolution is proportional to the square root of the column length.
For packed columns, the carrier gas flow rate is usually expressed in milliliters per minute at
atmospheric pressure and room temperature, flow rate is measured at the detector outlet, either with a
calibrated mechanical device or with a bubble tube, while the column is at operating temperature. The
linear velocity of the carrier gas through a packed column is inversely proportional to the square root
of the internal diameter of the column for a given flow volume. Flow rates of 60 ml/min in a 4 mm
internal diameter column and 15 ml/min in a 2 mm internal diameter column, give identical linear
velocities and thus similar retention times.
Helium or nitrogen is usually employed as the carrier gas for packed columns, whereas commonly
used carrier gases for capillary columns are nitrogen, helium and hydrogen.
Detectors
Flame-ionisation detectors are usually employed but additional detectors which may be used include:
electron-capture, nitrogen-phosphorus, mass spectrometric, thermal conductivity, Fourier transform
infrared spectrophotometric and others, depending on the purpose of the analysis.

191
Method
Equilibrate the column, the injector and the detector at the temperatures and the gas flow rates
specified in the monograph until a stable baseline is achieved. Prepare the test solution (s) and the
reference solutions (s) as prescribed. The solutions must be free from solid particles.
Criteria for assessing the suitability of the system are described in the chapter on Chromatographic
separation techniques. The extent to which adjustments of parameters of the chromatographic system
can be made to satisfy the criteria of system suitability are also given in this chapter.

192
 APPENDIX - 3
PHYSICAL TESTS AND DETERMINATIONS
3.1. Refractive Index:
The refractive index (η) of a substance with reference to air, is the ratio of the sine of the angle of
incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction of a beam of light passing from air into the substance.
It varies with the wavelength of the light used in its measurement.
Unless otherwise prescribed, the refractive index is measured at 250 (+0.5) with reference to the
wavelength of the D line of sodium (λ 589.3 nm). The temperature should be carefully adjusted and
maintained since the refractive index varies significantly with temperature.
The Abbe’s refractometer is convenient for most measurements of refractive index but other
refractometer of equal or greater accuracy may be used. Commercial refractometers are normally
constructed for use with white light but are calibrated to give the refractive index in terms of the D
line of sodium light.
To achieve accuracy, the apparatus should be calibrated against distilled water which has a refractive
index of 1.3325 at 250 or against the reference liquids given in the following table.
Table 14
Reference Liquid η D200 Temperature Co-efficient
Δn/Δt
Carbon tetrachloride 1.4603 -0.00057
Toluene 1.4969 -0.00056
α-Methylnaphthalene 1.6176 -0.00048
* Reference index value for the D line of sodium, measured at 200.
The cleanliness of the instrument should be checked frequently by determining the refractive index of
distilled water, which at 250 is 1.3325.

3.2. Weight per Millilitre and Specific Gravity:

A. Weight per millilitre: The weight per millilitre of a liquid is the weight in g of 1 ml of a liquid
when weighed in air at 250, unless otherwise specified.
Method
Select a thoroughly clean and dry pycnometer. Calibrate the pycnometer by filling it with recently
boiled and cooled water at 250 and weighing the contents. Assuming that the weight of 1 ml of water
at 250 when weighed in air of density 0.0012 g per ml, is 0.99602 g. Calculate the capacity of the
pycnometer. (Ordinary deviations in the density of air from the value given do not affect the result of

193
a determination significantly). Adjust the temperature of the substance to be examined, to about 200
and fill the pycnometer with it. Adjust the temperature of the filled pycnometer to 250, remove any
excess of the substance and weigh. Substract the tare weight of the pycnometer from the filled weight
of the pycnometer. Determine the weight per milliliter dividing the weight in air, expressed in g, of
the quantity of liquid which fills the pycnometer at the specified temperature, by the capacity
expressed in ml, of the pycnometer at the same temperature.
B. Specific gravity: The specific gravity of a liquid is the weight of a given volume of the liquid at
250 (unless otherwise specified) compared with the weight of an equal volume of water at the same
temperature, all weighing being taken in air.
Method
Proceed as described under wt. per ml. Obtain the specific gravity of the liquid by dividing the weight
of the liquid contained in the pycnometer by the weight of water contained, both determined at 250
unless otherwise directed in the individual monograph.

3.3. Determination of pH Values:

The pH value of an aqueous liquid may be defined as the common logarithum of the reciprocal of the
hydrogen ion concentration expressed in g per litre. Although this definition provides a useful
practical means for the quantitative indication of the acidity or alkalinity of a solution, it is less
satisfactory from a strictly theoretical point of view. No definition of pH as a measurable quantity can
have a simple meaning, which is also fundamental and exact.
The pH value of a liquid can be determined potentiometrically by means of the glass electrode, a
reference electrode and a pH meter either of the digital or analogue type.

3.4. Determination of Melting Range and Congealing Range:

3.4.1. Determination of Melting Range:
The melting-range of a substance is the range between the corrected temperature at which the
substance begins to form droplets and the corrected temperature at which it completely melts, as
shown by formation of a meniscus.
Apparatus:
(a) A capillary tube of soft glass, closed at one end, and having the following dimensions:
(i) thickness of the wall, about 0.10 to 0.15 mm.
(ii) length about 10 cm or any length suitable for apparatus used.
(iii) internal diameter 0.9 to 1.1 mm for substances melting below 1000 or 0.8 to 1.2 mm for
substances melting above 1000.

194
Thermometers:
Accurately standardized thermometers covering the range 100 to 3000, the length of two degrees on
the scale being not less than 0.8 mm. These thermometers are of the mercury-in-glass, solid-stem
type; the bulb is cylindrical in shape, and made of approved thermometric glass suitable for the range
of temperature covered; each thermometer is fitted with a safety chamber. The smallest division on
the thermometer scale should vary between 0.10 to 1.50, according to the melting point of the
substance under test.
The following form of heating apparatus is recommended.
A glass heating vessel of suitable, construction and capacity fitted with suitable stiring device,
capable of rapidly mixing the liquids.
Suitable liquids for use in the heating vessel:
Glycerin Upto 1500
Sulphuric acid to which a small crystal of potassium nitrate or Upto 2000
4 Drops of nitric acid per 100 ml has been added
A liquid paraffin of sufficiently high boiling range Upto 2500
Seasame oil Upto 3000
30 parts of potassium sulphate, dissolved by heating in 70 Upto 3000
parts of sulphuric acid
Any other apparatus or method, preferably, the electric method may be used subject to a check by
means of pure substances having melting temperature covering the ranges from 00 to 3000 and with
suitable intervals.
The following substances are suitable for this purpose.
Substance Melting range
Vanillin 810 to 830
Acetanilide 1140 to 1160
Phenacetin 1340 to 1360
Sulphanilamide 1640 to 166.50
Sulphapyridine 1910 to 1930
Caffeine (Dried at 1000) 2340 to 2370

195
Procedure
Method I: Transfer a suitable quantity of the powdered and thoroughly dried substance to a dry
capillary tube and pack the powder by tapping the tube on a hard surface so as to form a tightly
packed column of 2 to 4 mm in height. Attach the capillary tube and its contents to a standardized
thermometer so that the closed end is at the level of the middle of the bulb; heat in a suitable
apparatus (preferably a round-bottom flask) fitted with an auxiliary thermometer regulating the rise of
temperature in the beginning to 30 per minute. When the temperature reached is below the lowest
figure of the range for the substance under examination, the heating of the apparatus is adjusted as
desired; if no other directions are given, the rate of rise of temperature should be kept at 10 to 20 per
minute. The statement ‘determined by rapid heating’ means that the rate of rise of temperature is 50
per minute during the entire period of heating.
Unless otherwise directed, the temperature at which the substance forms droplets against the side of
the tube and the one at which it is completely melted as indicated by the formation of a definite
meniscus, are read.
The following emergent stem corrections should be applied to the temperature readings.
Before starting the determination of the melting temperature the auxiliary thermometer is attached so
that the bulb touches the standard thermometer at a point midway between the graduation for the
expected melting temperature and the surface of the heating material. When the substance has melted,
the temperature is read on the auxiliary thermometer. The correction figure to be added to the
temperature reading of the standardized thermometer is calculated from the following formula
0.00015 N (T—t)
Where ‘T’ is the temperature reading of the standardized thermometer
‘t’ is the temperature reading of the auxiliary thermometer
‘N’ is the number of degrees of the scale of the standardized thermometer between the surface of the
heating material and level of mercury
The statement “melting range, a0 to b0” means that the corrected temperature at which the material
forms droplets must be at least a0, and that the material must be completely melted at the corrected
temperature, b0.
Method II: The apparatus employed for this test is the same as described for method I except for
such details as are mentioned in the procedure given below
Procedure: A capillary tube open at both ends is used for this test. Melt the material under test at as
low a temperature as possible. Draw into the capillary a column of the material about 10 mm high.
Cool the charged tube in contact with ice for at least 2 hours. Attach the tube to the thermometer by
means of rubber band and adjust it in the heating vessel containing water so that the upper edge of the
material is 10 mm below the water level. Heat in the manner as prescribed in Method I, until the
temperature is about 50 below the expected melting point and then regulate the rate of rise of

196
temperature between 0.50 to 10 per minute. The temperature at which the material is observed to rise
in the capillary tube is the melting temperature of the substance.

3.4.2. Determination of Congealing Range:

The congealing temperature is that point at which there exists a mixture of the liquid (fused) phase of
a substance and a small but increasing proportion of the solid phase. It is distinct from the freezing
point which is the temperature at which the liquid and solid phases of a substance are in equilibrium.
In certain cases, this may happen over a range of temperatures.
The temperature at which a substance solidifies upon cooling is a useful index of its purity if heat is
liberated when solidification takes place.
The following method is applicable to substances that melt between – 200 and 1500.
Apparatus
A test-tube (About 150 mm × 25 mm) placed inside another test-tube (about 160 mm × 40 mm) the
inner tube is closed by a stopper that carries a stirrer and a thermometer (About 175 mm long and
with 0.20 graduations) fixed so that the bulb is about 15 mm above the bottom of the tube. The stirrer
is made from a glass rod or other suitable material formed at one end into a loop of about 18 mm
overall diameter at right angles to the rod. The inner tube with its jacket is supported centrally in a 1-
litre baker containing a suitable cooling liquid to within 20 mm of the top. The thermometer is
supported in the cooling bath.
Method
Melt the substance, if a solid, at a temperature not more than 200 above its expected congealing point,
and pour it into the inner test-tube to a height of 50 to 57 mm. Assemble the apparatus with the bulb
of the thermometer immersed half-way between the top and bottom of the sample in the test-tube. Fill
the bath to almost 20 mm from the top of the tube with a suitable fluid at a temperature 40 to 50 below
the expected congealing point. If the substance is a liquid at room temperature, carry out the
determination using a bath temperature about 150 below the expected congealing point. When the
sample has cooled to about 50 above its expected congealing point stir it continuously by moving the
loop up and down between the top and bottom of the sample at a regular rate of 20 complete cycles
per minute. If necessary, congelation may be induced by scratching the inner walls of the test-tube
with the thermometer or by introducing a small amount of the previously congealed substance under
examination. Pronounced supercooling may result in deviation from the normal pattern of
temperature changes. If it happens, repeat the test introducing small fragments of the solid substance
under examination at 10 intervals when the temperature approaches the expected congealing point.
Record the reading of the thermometer every 30 seconds and continue stirring only so long as the
temperature is falling. Stop the stirring when the temperature is constant to starts to rise slightly.
Continue recording the temperature for at least 3 minutes after the temperature again begins to fall
after remaining constant.

197
The congealing point will be mean of not less than four consecutive readings that lie within a range of
0.20.

3.5. Determination of Boiling Range:

The boiling-range of a substance is the range of temperature within which the whole or a specified
portion of the substance distils.
Apparatus
The boiling-range is determined in a suitable apparatus, the salient features of which are described
below:
(a) Distillation flask: The flask shall be made of colourless transparent heat-resistant glass and well
annealed. It should have a spherical bulb having a capacity of about 130 ml. The side tube slopes
downwards in the same plane as the axis of the neck at angle of between 720 to 780. Other important
dimensional details are as under:
Internal diameter of neck 15 to 17 mm
Distance from top of neck to center of side tube 72 to 78 mm
Distance from the center of the side tube to surface of the
Liquid when the flask contains 100 ml liquid 87 to 93 mm
Internal diameter of side tube 3.5 to 4.5 mm
Length of side tube 97 to 103 mm
(b) Thermometer: Standardised thermometers calibrated for 100 mm immersion and suitable for the
purpose and covering the boiling range of the substance under examination shall be employed; the
smallest division on the thermometer scale may vary between 0.20 to 10 according to requirement.
(c) Draught Screen: suitable draught screen, rectangular in cross section with a hard asbestos board
about 6 mm thick closely fitting horizontally to the sides of the screen, should be used. The asbestos
board shall have a centrally cut circular hole, 110 mm in diameter. The asbestos board is meant for
ensuring that hot gases from the heat source do not come in contact with the sides or neck of the
flask.
(d) Asbestos Board: A 150 mm square asbestos board 6 mm thick provided with a circular hole
located centrally to hold the bottom of the flask, shall be used. For distillation of liquids boiling
below 600 the hole shall be 30 mm in diameter; for other liquid it should be 50 mm in diameter. This
board is to be placed on the hard asbestos board of the draught screen covering its 110 mm hole.
(e) Condenser: A straight water-cooled glass condenser about 50 cm long shall be used.
Procedure: 100 ml of the liquid to be examined is placed in the distillation flask, and a few glass
beads or other suitable substance is added. The bulb of the flask is placed centrally over a circular
hole varying from 3 to 5 cm in diameter (according to the boiling range of the substance under

198
examination), in a suitable asbestos board. The thermometer is held concentrically in the neck of the
flask by means of a well fitting cork in such a manner that the bulb of the thermometer remains just
below the level of the opening of the side-tube. Heat the flask slowly in the beginning and when
distillation starts, adjust heating in such a manner that the liquid distils at a constant rate of 4 to 5 ml
per minute. The temperature is read when the first drop runs from the condenser, and again when the
last quantity of liquid in the flask is evaporated.
The boiling ranges indicated, apply at a barometric pressure of 760 mm of mercury. If the
determination is made at some other barometric pressure, the following correction is added to the
temperatures read:
K - (760—p)
Where p is the barometric pressure (in mm) read on a mercury barometer, without taking into account
the temperature of the air;
K is the boiling temperature constant for different liquids having different boiling ranges as indicated
below:-
Observed Boiling range ‘K’
Below 1000 0.04
1000 to 1400 0.045
1410 to 1900 0.05
0 0
191 to 240 0.055
above 2400 0.06
If the barometric pressure is below 760 mm of mercury the correction is added to the observed
boiling-range; if above, the correction is subtracted.
The statement ‘distils between a0 and b0, , means that temperature at which the first drop runs from
the condenser is not less than a0 and that the temperature at which the liquid is completely evaporated
is not greater than b0.
Micro-methods of equal accuracy may be used.

3.6. Solubility in Water:

Take 100 ml of distil water in a Nessler cylinder and add air-dried and coarsely powdered drug up to
saturation. Then stir the sample continuously by twirling the spatula (rounded end of a microspatula)
rapidly. After 1 minute, filter the solution using Hirsch funnel, evaporate the filtrate to dryness in a
tared flat bottomed shallow dish and dry at 1050 to constant weight and calculate the solubility of the
drug in water (wt. in mg/100ml).

199
3.7. Determination of Saponification Value:
The saponification value is the number of mg of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the fatty
acids, resulting from the complete hydrolysis of 1 g of the oil or fat, when determined by the
following method :
Dissolve 35 to 40 g of potassium hydroxide in 20 ml water, and add sufficient alcohol to make 1,000
ml. Allow it to stand overnight, and pour off the clear liquor.
Weigh accurately about 2 g of the substance in a tared 250 ml flask, add 25 ml of the alcoholic
solution of potassium hydroxide, attach a reflux condenser and boil on a water-bath for one hour,
frequently rotating the contents of the flask cool and add 1 ml of solution of phenolphthalein and
titrate the excess of alkali with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid. Note the number of ml required (a). Repeat
the experiment with the same quantities of the same reagents in the manner omitting the substance.
Note the number of ml required (b) Calculate the saponification value from the following formula:-
(b–a) × 0.02805 × 1000
Saponification Value =
W
Where ‘W’ is the weight in g of the substance taken.

3.8. Determination of Iodine Value:

The Iodine value of a substance is the weight of iodine absorbed by 100 part by weight of the
substance, when determined by one of the following methods:-
Iodine Flasks—The Iodine flasks have a nominal capacity of 250 ml.
A. Iodine Monochloride Method—Place the substance accurately weighed, in dry iodine
flask, add 10 ml of carbon tetrachloride, and dissolve. Add 20 ml of iodine monochloride
solution, insert the stopper, previously moistened with solution of potassium iodine and allow
to stand in a dark place at a temperature of about 170 or thirty minutes. Add 15 ml of solution
of potassium iodine and 100 ml water; shake, and titrate with 0.1 N sodium thiosulphate,
using solution of starch as indicator. Note the number of ml required (a). At the same time
carry out the operation in exactly the same manner, but without the substance being tested,
and note the number of ml of 0.1 N sodium thiosulphate required (b).
Calculate the iodine value from the formula:-
(b–a) × 0.01269 × 100
Iodine Value =
W
Where ‘W’ is the weight in g of the substance taken.
The approximate weight, in g, of the substance to be taken may be calculated by dividing 20 by the
highest expected iodine value. If more than half the available halogen is absorbed, the test must be
repeated, a smaller quantity of the substance being used.

200
Iodine Monochloride Solution: The solution may be prepared by either of the two following methods:
(1) Dissolve 13 g of iodine in a mixture of 300 ml of carbon tetrachloride and 700 ml of glacial
acetic acid. To 20 ml of this solution, add 15 ml of solution of potassium iodide and 100 ml of water,
and titrate the solution with 0.1 N sodium thiosulphate. Pass chlorine, washed and dried, through the
remainder of the iodine solution until the amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulphate required for the
titration is approximately, but more than, doubled.
(2) Iodine trichloride 8g
Iodine 9g
Carbon tetrachloride 300 ml
Glacial acetic acid, sufficient to produce 1000 ml

Dissolve the iodine trichloride in about 200 ml of glacial acetic acid, dissolve the iodine in the carbon
tetrachloride, mix the two solutions, and add sufficient glacial acetic acid to produce 1000 ml. Iodine
Monochloride Solution should be kept in a stoppered bottle, protected from light and stored in a cool
place.
B. Pyridine Bromide Method—Place the substance, accurately weighed, in a dry iodine flask, add
10 ml of carbon tetrachloride and dissolve. Add 25 ml of pyridine bromide solution, allow to stand
for ten minutes in a dark place and complete the determination described under iodine monochloride
method, beginning with the words. Add 15 ml.
The approximate weight in gram, of the substance to be taken may be calculated by dividing 12.5 by
the highest expected iodine value. If more than half the available halogen is absorbed the test must be
repeated, a small quantity of the substance being used.
Pyridine bromide Solution: Dissolve 8 g pyridine and 10 g of sulphuric acid in 20 ml of glacial acetic
acid, keeping the mixture cool. Add 8 g of bromine dissolved in 20 ml of glacial acetic acid and dilute
to 100 ml with glacial acetic acid.
Pyridine bromide Solution should be freshly prepared.

3.9. Determination of Acid Value:

The acid value is the number of mg of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the free acids in 1 g
of the substance, when determined by the following method:
Weigh accurately about 10 g of the substance (1 to 5) in the case of a resin into a 250 ml flask and
add 50 ml of a mixture of equal volumes of alcohol and solvent ether, which has been neutralized
after the addition of 1 ml of solution of phenolphthalein. Heat gently on a water-bath, if necessary
until the substance has completely melted, titrate with 0.1 N potassium hydroxide, shaking constantly
until a pink colour which persists for fifteen seconds is obtained. Note the number of ml required.
Calculate the acid value from the following formula:

201
 a × 0.00561 × 1000
Acid Value =
W
Where ‘a’ is the number of ml of 0.1 N potassium hydroxide required and ‘W’ is the weight in g of
the substance taken.

3.10. Determination of Peroxide Value:

The peroxide value is the number of milliequivalents of active oxygen that expresses the amount of
peroxide contained in 1000 g of the substance.
Method
Unless otherwise specified in the individual monograph, weigh 5 g of the substance being examined,
accurately weighed, into a 250-ml glass-stoppered conical flask, add 30 ml of a mixture of 3 volumes
of glacial acetic acid and 2 volumes of chloroform, swirl until dissolved and add 0.5ml volumes of
saturated potassium iodide soluton. Allow to stand for exactly 1 minute, with occasional shaking, add
30 ml of water and titrate gradually, with continuous and vigorous shaking, with 0.01M sodium
thiosulphate until the yellow colour almost disappears. Add 0.5 ml of starch solution and continue the
titration, shaking vigorously until the blue colour just disappears (a ml). Repeat the operation omitting
the substance being examined (b ml). The volume of 0.01M sodium thiosulphate in the blank
determination must not exceed 0.1 ml.
Calculate the peroxide value from the expression
10 (a – b)
Peroxide Value =
W
Where W = weight, in g, of the substance.

3.11. Determination of Unsaponifiable Matter:

The unsaponifiable matter consists of substances present in oils and fats, which are not saponifiable
by alkali hydroxides and are determined by extraction with an organic solvent of a solution of the
saponified substance being examined.
Method
Unless otherwise specified in the individual monograph, introduce about 5 g of the substance being
examined, accurately weighed, into a 250-ml flask fitted with a reflux condenser. Add a solution of 2
g of potassium hydroxide in 40 ml of ethanol (95per cent) and heat on a water-bath for 1 hour,
shaking frequently. Transfer the contents of the flask to a separating funnel with the aid of 100 ml of
hot water and, while the liquid is still warm, shake very carefully with three quantities, each of 100
ml, of peroxide-free ether. Combine the ether extracts in a second separating funnel containing 40 ml
of water, swirl gently for a few minute, allow to separate and reject the lower layer. Wash the ether
extract with two quantities, each of 40 ml, of water and with three quantities, each of 40 ml, of a 3 per
cent w/v solution of potassium hydroxide, each treatment being followed by a washing with 40 ml of

202
water. Finally, wash the ether layer with successive quantities, each of 40 ml, of water until the
aqueous layer is not alkaline to phenolphthalein solution. Transfer the ether layer to a weighed flask,
washing out the separating funnel with peroxide-free ether. Distil off the ether and add to the residue
6 ml of acetone. Remove the solvent completely from the flask with the aid of a gentle current of air.
Dry at 1000 to 1050 for 30 minutes. Cool in a desiccator and weigh the residue. Calculate the
unsaponifiable matter as per cent w/w.
Dissolve the residue in 20 ml of ethanol (95per cent), previously neutralised to phenolphthalein
solution and titrate with 0.1M ethanolic potassium hydroxide. If the volume of 0.1M ethanolic
potassium hydroxide exceeds 0.2 ml, the amount weighed cannot be taken as the unsaponifiable
matter and the test must be repeated.

3.12. Detection of Mineral Oil (Holde’s Test):

Take 22 ml of the alcoholic potassium hydroxide solution in a conical flask and add 1ml of the
sample of the oil to be tested. Boil in a water bath using an air or water cooled condenser till the
solution becomes clear and no oily drops are found on the sides of the flask. Take out the flask from
the water bath, transfer the contents to a wide mouthed warm test tube and carefully add 25ml of
boiling distilled water along the side of the test tube. Continue shaking the tube lightly from side to
side during the addition. The turbidity indicates presence of mineral oil, the depth of turbidity
depends on the percentage of mineral oil present.

3.13. Rancidity Test (Kreis Test):

The test depends upon the formation of a red colour when oxidized fat is treated with conc.
hydrochloric acid and a solution of phloroglucinol in ether. The compound in rancid fats responsible
for the colour reaction is epihydrin aldehyde. All oxidized fats respond to the Kreis test and the
intensity of the colour produced is roughly proportional to the degree of oxidative rancidity.
Procedure
Mix 1 ml of melted fat and 1 ml of conc. hydrochloric acid in a test tube. Add 1 ml of a 1 per cent
solution of phloroglucinol in diethyl ether and mix thoroughly with the fat-acid mixture. A pink
colour formation indicates that the fat is slightly oxidized while a red colour indicates that the fat is
definitely oxidized.

3.14. Disintegration test for tablets:

This test determines whether tablets disintegrate within a prescribed time when placed in a liquid
medium under the prescribed experimental conditions.
Disintegration is defined as that state in which no residue of the tablet remains on the screen of the
apparatus or, if a residue remains, it consists of fragments of insoluble coating of the tablets. If discs
have been used with tablets, any residue remaining on the lower surfaces of the discs consists only of
fragments of shells.

203
Apparatus:
a) A rigid basket-rack assembly supporting six cylindrical glass tubes, 77.5 + 2.5 mm long, 21.5
mm in internal diameter and with a wall thickness of about 2 mm.
b) The tubes are held vertically by two superimposed transparent plastic plates, 90 mm in
diameter and 6 mm thick, perforated by six holes having the same diameter as the tubes. The
holes are equidistant from the centre of the plate and are equally spaced from one another.
Attached to the under side of the lower plate is a piece of woven gauze made from stainless
steel wire 635 µm in diameter and having nominal mesh apertures of 2.00 mm. The upper
plate is covered with a stainless steel disc perforated by six holes, each about 22 mm in
diameter, which fits over the tubes and holds them between the plastic plates. The holes
coincide with those of the upper plastic plate and the upper open ends of the glass tubes.
c) The plates held rigidly in position and 77.5 mm apart by vertical metal rods at the periphery
and a metal rod is also fixed to the centre of the upper plate to enable the assembly to be
attached to a mechanical device capable of raising and lowering it smoothly at a constant
frequency of between 28 and 32 cycles per minutes through a distance of 50 to 60 mm. The
design of the basket rack assembly may be somewhat different provided specification for the
glass tubes and the screen mesh size are unchanged.
d) A cylindrical disc for each tube, each 20.7 + 0.15 mm in a diameter and 9.5 + 0.15 mm thick,
made of transparent plastic with a relative density of 1.18 to 1.20 and pierced with five holes
each 2 mm in diameter, one in the centre and the other four spaced equally on a circle of
radius 6 mm from the centre of the disc. Four equally spaced grooves are cut in the lateral
surface of the disc in such a way that at the upper surface of the disc they are 9.5 mm wide
and 2.55 mm deep and at the lower surface 1.6 mm square.
e) The assembly is suspended in the liquid medium in a suitable vessel, preferably a 1000 ml
beaker. The volume of liquid is such that the wire mesh at its highest point is at least 25 mm
below the surface of the liquid, and at its lower point is at least 25 mm above the bottom of
the beaker.
f) A thermostatic arrangement for heating the liquid and maintaining the temperature at 370 + 20.
Method:
Introduce one tablet into each tube and add a disc to each tube. Suspend the assembly in the beaker
containing the specified liquid and operate the apparatus for the specified liquid and operate the
apparatus for the specified time. Remove the assembly from the liquid. The tablets pass the test if all
of them have disintegrated.
If 1 or 2 tablets fail to disintegrate, repeat the test on 12 additional tablets; not less than 16 of the total
of 18 tablets tested disintegrate.
If the tablets adhere to the disc and the preparation being examined fails to comply, repeat the test
omitting the discs. The preparation complies with the test if all the tablets in the repeat test
disintegrate.

204
 Fig.4. APPARATUS FOR DISINTEGRATION OF TABLETS

3.15. Uniformity of Weight of Single Dose Preparations

Weigh individually 20 units selected at random or, for single dose preparations in individual
containers, the contents of 20 units, and calculate the average weight. Not more than two of the
individual weights deviate from the average weight by more than the percentage shown in the
Table - 15 and none deviates by more than twice that percentage.
Table-15
Dosage form Average weight Percentage deviation
Uncoated and film-coated 80 mg or less 10
tablets
More than 80 mg but less than 7.5
250 mg

250 mg or more 5

205
 APPENDIX - 4
REAGENTS AND SOLUTIONS
Acetic Acid – Contains approximately 33 per cent w/v of C2H4O2. Dilute 315 ml of glacial acetic
acid to 1000 ml with water.
Acetic Acid, Glacial – CH3COOH =60.05.
Contains not less than 99.0 per cent w/w of C2H4O2. About 17.5 N in strength.
Description – At temperature above its freezing point a clear colourless liquid, odour, pungent
and characteristic; crystallises when cooled to about 100 and does not completely re-melt until
warmed to about 150.
Solubility – Miscible with water, with glycerin and most fixed and volatile oils.
Boiling range –Between 1170 and 1190.
Congealing temperature –Not lower than 14.80.
Wt. per ml –At 250about 1.047 g.
Heavy metals –Evaporate 5 ml to dryness in a porcelain dish on water-bath, warm the residue
with 2 ml of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid and water to make 25 ml; the limit of heavy metals is 10
parts per million, Appendix 2.3.3.
Chloride –5 ml complies with the limit test for chlorides, Appendix 2.3.2.
Sulphate –5 ml complies with the limit test for sulphates,
Certain aldehydic substances – To 5 ml add 10 ml of mercuric chloride solution and make
alkaline with sodium hydroxide solution, allow to stand for five minutes and acidify with dilute
sulphuric acid; the solution does not show more than a faint turbidity.
Formic acid and oxidisable impurities – Dilute 5 ml with 10 ml of water, to 5 ml of this
solution add 2.0 ml of 0.1 N potassium dichromate and 6 ml of sulphuric acid, and allow to
stand for one minute, add 25 ml of water, cool to 150, and add 1 ml of freshly prepared
potassium iodide solution and titrate the liberated iodine with 0.1 N sodium thiosulphate, using
starch solution as indicator. Not less than 1 ml of 0.N sodium thiosulphate is required.
Odorous impurities –Neutralise 1.5 ml with sodium hydroxide solution; the solution has no
odour other than a faint acetous odour.
Readily oxidisable impurities – To 5 ml of the solution prepared for the test for Formic Acid
and Oxidisable Impurities, add 20 ml of water and 0.5 ml of 0.1 N potassium permanganate; the
pink colour does not entirely disappear within half a minute.

206
 Non-volatile matter – Leaves not more than 0.01 per cent w/w of residue when evaporated to
dryness and dried to constant weight at 1050.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 1 g into a stoppered flask containing 50 ml of water and titrate
with N sodium hydroxide, using phenolphthalein solution as indicator. Each ml of sodium
hydroxide is equivalent to 0.06005 g of C2H4O2.
Acetic Acid, Lead-Free –Acetic acid which complies with following additional test, boil 25 ml
until the volume is reduced to about 15 ml, cool make alkaline with lead-free ammonia solution,
add 1 ml of lead free potassium cyanide solution, dilute to 50 ml with water, add 2 drops of
sodium sulphide solution; no darkening is produced.
Acetone – Propan-2-one; (CH3)2CO = 58.08
Description – Clear, colourless, mobile and volatile liquid; taste, pungent and sweetish; odour
characteristic; flammable.
Solubility –Miscible with water, with alcohol, with solvent ether, and with chloroform, forming
clear solutions.
Distillation range – Not less than 96.0 per cent distils between 55.50 and 570.
Acidity– 10 ml diluted with 10 ml of freshly boiled and cooled water; does not require for
neutralisation more than 0.2 ml of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide, using phenolphthalein solution as
indicator.
Alkalinty – 10 ml diluted with 10 ml of freshly boiled and cooled water, is not alkaline to
litmus solution.
Methyl alcohol –Dilute 10 ml with water to 100 ml. To 1 ml of the solution add 1 ml of water
and 2 ml of potassium permanganate and phosphoric acid solution. Allow to stand for ten
minutes and add 2 ml of oxalic acid and sulphuric acid solution; to the colourless solution add 5
ml of decolorised magenta solution and set aside for thirty minutes between 150 and 300; no
colour is produced.
Oxidisable substances –To 20 ml add 0.1 ml of 0.1 N potassium permanganate, and allow to
stand for fifteen minutes; the solution is not completely decolorised.
Water – Shake 10 ml with 40 ml of carbon disulphide; a clear solution is produced.
Non-volatile matter –When evaporated on a water-bath and dried to constant weight at 1050,
leaves not more than 0.01 per cent w/v residue.
Acetone Solution, Standard – A 0.05 per cent v/v solution of acetone in water.

207
Alcohol –
Description – Clear, colourless, mobile, volatile liquid, odour, characteristic and spirituous;
taste, burning, readily volatilised even at low temperature, and boils at about 780, flammable.
Alcohol containing not less than 94.85 per cent v/v and not more than 95.2 per cent v/v of
C2H5OH at 15.560.
Solubility –Miscible in all proportions with water, with chloroform and with solvent ether.
Acidity or alkalinity – To 20 ml add five drops of phenolphthalein solution; the solution
remains colourless and requires not more than 2.0 ml of 0.1N sodium hydroxide to produce a
pink colour.
Specific gravity –Between 0.8084 and 0.8104 at 250.
Clarity of solution –Dilute 5 ml to 100 ml with water in glass cylinder; the solution remains
clear when examined against a black background. Cool to 100 for thirty minutes; the solution
remains clear.
Methanol – To one drop add one of water, one drop of dilute phosphoric acid, and one drop of
potassium permanganate solution. Mix, allow to stand for one minute and add sodium
bisulphite solution dropwise, until the permanganate colour is discharged. If a brown colour
remains, add one drop of dilute phosphoric acid. To the colourless solution add 5 ml of freshly
prepared chromotropic acid solution and heat on a water-bath at 600 for ten minutes; no violet
colour is produced.
Foreign organic substances – Clean a glass-stoppered cylinder thoroughly with hydrochloric
acid, rinse with water and finally rinse with the alcohol under examination. Put 20 ml in the
cylinder, cool to about 150 and then add from a carefully cleaned pipette 0.1 ml 0.1 N potassium
permanganate. Mix at once by inverting the stoppered cylinder and allow to stand at 150 for five
minutes; the pink colour does not entirely disappear.
Isopropyl alcohol and t-butyl alcohol – To 1 ml add 2 ml of water and 10 ml of mercuric
sulphate solution and heat in a boiling water-bath; no precipitate is formed within three minutes.
Aldehydes and ketones – Heat 100 ml of hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution in a loosely
stoppered flask on a water-bath for thirty minutes, cool, and if necessary, add sufficient 0.05 N
sodium hydroxide to restore the green colour. To 50 ml of this solution add 25 ml of the alcohol
and heat on a water bath for ten minutes in a loosely stoppered flask. Cool, transfer to a
Nesseler cylinder, and titrate with 0.05 N sodium hydroxide until the colour matches that of the
remainder of the hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution contained in a similar cylinder, both
solutions being viewed down the axis of the cylinder. Not more than 0.9 ml of 0.05 N sodium
hydroxide is required.

208
 Fusel oil constituents – Mix 10 ml with 5 ml of water and 1 ml of glycerin and allow the
mixture to evaporate spontaneously from clean, odourless absorbent paper; no foreign odour is
perceptible at any stage of the evaporation.
Non-volatile matter – Evaporate 40 ml in a tared dish on a water-bath and dry the residue at
105º for one hour; the weight of the residue does not exceed 1 mg.
Storage – Store in tightly-closed containers, away from fire.
Labelling – The label on the container states “Flammable”.
Alcohol, Aldehyde-free. –Alcohol which complies with the following additional test :
Aldehyde – To 25 ml, contained in 300 ml flask, add 75 ml of dinitrophenyl hydrazine solution,
heat on a water bath under a reflux condenser for twenty four hours, remove the alcohol by
distillation, dilute to 200 ml with a 2 per cent v/v solution of sulphuric acid, and set aside for
twenty four hours; no crystals are produced.
Alcohol, Sulphate-free. –Shake alcohol with an excess of anion exchange resin for thirty
minutes and filter.
Ammonia, XN. –Solutions of any normality xN may be prepared by diluting 75 x ml of strong
ammonia solution to 1000 ml with water.
Ammonia Solution, Iron-free –Dilute ammonia solution which complies with the following
additional test :-
Evaporate 5 ml nearly to dryness on a water-bath add 40 ml of water, 2 ml of 20 per cent w/v
solution of iron free citric acid and 2 drops of thioglycollic acid, mix, make alkaline with iron-
free ammonia solution and dilute to 50 ml with water, no pink colour is produced.
Ammonium Chloride Solution –A 10.0 per cent w/v solution of ammonium chloride in water.

Ammonium molybdate- NH4Mo7O24.4H2O=1235.86

Analytical reagent grade of commerce.
White crystal or crystalline masses, sometimes with a yellowish or green tint.
Ammonium Thiocyanate – NH4SCN = 76.12.
Description – Colourless crystals.
Solubility – Very soluble in water, forming a clear solution, readily soluble in alcohol.
Chloride –Dissolve 1 g in 30 ml of solution of hydrogen peroxide, add 1 g of sodium
hydroxide, warm gently, rotate the flask until a vigorous reaction commences and allow to
stand until the reaction is complete; add a further 30 ml of hydrogen peroxide solution boil for

209
 two minutes, cool, and add 10 ml of dilute nitric acid and 1 ml of silver nitrate solution; any
opalescence produced is not greater than that obtained by treating 0.2 ml of 0.01 N hydrochloric
acid in the same manner.
Sulphated ash –Moisten 1 g with sulphuric acid and ignite gently, again moisten with sulphuric
acid and ignite; the residue weighs not more than 2.0 mg.
Ammonium Thiocyanate, 0.1N – NH4SCN = 76.12; 7.612 in 1000 ml. Dissolve about 8 g of
ammonium thiocyanate in 100o ml of water and standardise the solution as follows :
Pipette 30 ml of standardised 0.1 N silver nitrate into a glass stoppered flask, dilute with 50 ml
of water then add 2 ml of nitric acid and 2 ml of ferric ammonium sulphate solution and titrate
with the ammonium thiocyanate solution to the first appearance of a red brown colour. Each ml
of 0.1N silver nitrate is equivalent to 0.007612 g of NH4SCN.
Ammonium Thiocyanate Solution – A 10.0 per cent w/v solution of ammonium thiocyanate
solution.
Anisaldehyde-Sulphuric Acid Reagent – 0.5 ml anisaldehyde is mixed with 10 ml glacial acetic
acid, followed by 85 ml methanol and 5 ml concentrated sulphuric acid.
The reagent has only limited stability and is no longer usable when the colour has turned to
redviolet.
Bromine – Br2 =159.80.
Description –Reddish-brown, fuming, corrosive liquid.
Solubility –Slightly soluble in water, soluble in most organic solvents.
Iodine –Boil 0.2 ml with 20 ml of water, 0.2 ml of N sulphuric acid and a small piece of marble
until the liquid is almost colourless. Cool, add one drop of liquefied phenol, allow to stand for
two minutes, and then add 0.2 g of potassium iodide and 1 ml of starch solution; no blue colour
is produced.
Sulphate –Shake 3 ml with 30 ml of dilute ammonia solution and evaporate to dryness on a
water bath, the residue complies with the limit test for sulphates, Appendix 2.3.6.
Bromine Solution – Dissolve 9.6 ml of bromine and 30 g of potassium bromide in sufficient
water to produce 100 ml.
Canada Balsam Reagent –General reagent grade of commerce.

Carbon Tetrachloride – CCl4 = 153.82

Description – Clear, colourless, volatile, liquid; odour, characteristic.

210
 Solubility –Practically insoluble in water; miscible with ethyl alcohol, and with solvent ether.
Distillation range – Not less than 95 per cent distils between 760 and 770.
Wt. per ml – At 200, 1.592 to 1.595 g.
Chloride, free acid –Shake 20 ml with 20 ml of freshly boiled and cooled water for three
minutes and allow separation to take place; the aqueous layer complies with the following test :
Chloride – To 10 ml add one drop of nitric acid and 0.2 ml of silver nitrate solution; no
opalescence is produced.
Free acid –To 10 ml add a few drops of bromocresol purple solution; the colour produced does
not indicate more acidity than that indicated by the addition of the same quantity of the
indicator to 10 ml of freshly boiled and cooled water.
Free chlorine –Shake 10 ml with 5 ml of cadmium iodide solution and 1 ml of starch solution,
no blue colour is produced.
Oxidisable impurities –Shake 20 ml for five minutes with a cold mixture of 10 ml of sulphuric
acid and 10 ml of 0.1 N potassium dichromate, dilute with 100 ml of water and add 3 g of
potassium iodide : the liberated iodine requires for decolourisation not less than 9 ml of 0.1 N
sodium thiosulphate.
Non-volatile matter –Leaves on evaporation on a water-bath and drying to constant weight at
1050 not more than 0.002 per cent w/v of residue.
Caustic Alkali Solution, 5 per cent – Dissolve 5 g of potassium or sodium hydroxide in water
and dilute to 100 ml.
Charcoal, Decolourising –General purpose grade complying with the following test.
Decolourising powder –Add 0.10 g to 50 ml of 0.006 per cent w/v solution of bromophenol
blue in ethanol (20 per cent) contained in a 250 ml flask, and mix. Allow to stand for five
minutes, and filter; the colour of the filtrate is not deeper than that of a solution prepared by
diluting 1 ml of the bromophenol blue solution with ethanol (20 per cent) to 50 ml.
Chloral Hydrate –[Link](OH)2 = 165.40.
Description – Colourless, transparent crystals, odour, pungent but not acrid; taste, pungent and
slightly bitter, volatilises slowly on exposure to air.
Solubility –Very soluble in water, freely soluble in alcohol, in chloroform and in solvent ether.
Chloral alcoholate – Warm 1 g with 6 ml of water and 0.5 ml of sodium hydroxide solution :
filter, add sufficient 0.1 N iodine to impart a deep brown colour, and set aside for one hour; no
yellow crystalline precipitate is produced and no smell of iodoform is perceptible.
Chloride – 3 g complies with the limit test for chlorides, Appendix 2.3.2.

211
 Assay – Weigh accurately about 4 g and dissolve in 10 ml of water and add 30 ml of N sodium
hydroxide. Allow the mixture to stand for two minutes, and then titrate with N sulphuric acid
using phenolphthalein solution as indicator. Titrate the neutralised liquid with 0.1 N silver
nitrate using solution of potassium chromate as indicator. Add two-fifteenth of the amount of
0.1 N silver nitrate used to the amount of N sulphuric acid used in the first titration and deduct
the figure so obtained from the amount of N sodium hydroxide added. Each ml of N sodium
hydroxide, obtained as difference; is equivalent to 0.1654 g of C2H3Cl3O2.
Storage – Store in tightly closed, light resistant containers in a cool place.
Chloral Hydrate Solution –Dissolve 20 g of chloral hydrate in 5 ml of water with warming and
add 5 ml of glycerin.
Chloral Iodine Solution –Add an excess of crystalline iodine with shaking to the chloral hydrate
solution, so that crystals of undissolved iodine remain on the bottom of bottle. Shake before use
as the iodine dissolves, and crystals of the iodine to the solution. Store in a bottle of amber glass
in a place protected from light.
Chloroform – CHCl3 = 119.38
Description – Colourles, volatile liquid; odour, characteristic. Taste, sweet and burning.
Solubility –Slightly soluble in water; freely miscible with ethyl alcohol and with solvent ether.
Wt. per ml. : Between 1.474 and 1.478 g.
Boiling range – A variable fraction, not exceeding 5 per cent v/v, distils below 600 and the
remainder distils between 500 to 620.
Acidity –Shake 10 ml with 20 ml of freshly boiled and cooled water for three minutes, and
allow to separate. To a 5 ml portion of the aqueous layer add 0.1 ml of litmus solution; the
colour produced is not different from that produced on adding 0.1 ml of litmus solution to 5 ml
of freshly boiled and cooled water.
Chloride –To another 5 ml portion of the aqueous layer obtained in the test for Acidity, add 5
ml of water and 0.2 ml of silver nitrate solution; no opalescence is produced.
Free chlorine –To another 10 ml portion of the aqueous layer, obtained in the test for Acidity,
add 1 ml of cadmium iodide solution and two drops of starch solution; no blue colour is
produced.
Aldehyde –Shake 5 ml with 5 ml of water and 0.2 ml of alkaline potassium mercuri-iodide
solution in a stoppered bottle and set aside in the dark for fifteen minutes; not more than a pale
yellow colour is produced.
Decomposition products – Place 20 ml of the chloroform in a glass-stoppered flask, previously
rinsed with sulphuric acid, add 15 ml of sulphuric acid and four drops of formaldehyde solution,

212
 and shake the mixture frequently during half an hour and set aside for further half an hour, the
flask being protected from light during the test; the acid layer is not more than slightly coloured.
Foreign organic matter – Shake 20 ml with 10 ml of sulphuric acid in a stoppered vessel
previously rinsed with sulphuric acid for five minutes and set aside in the dark for thirty
minutes, both the acid and chloroform layers remain colourless. To 2 ml of the acid layer add 5
ml of water; the liquid remains colourless and clear, and has no unpleasent odour. Add a further
10 ml of water and 0.2 ml of silver nitrate solution; no opalescence is produced.
Foreign odour –Allow 10 ml to evaporate from a large piece of filter paper placed on a warm
plate; no foreign odour is detectable at any stage of the evaporation.
Non volatile matter – Not more than 0.004 per cent w/v determined on 25 ml by evaporation
and drying at 1050.
Storage : Store in tightly-closed, glass-stoppered, light-resistant bottles.
Copper Sulphate – CuSO4.5H2O = 249.68
Contains not less than 98.5 per cent and not more than the equivalent of 101.0 per cent of
CuSO4.5H2O.
Description – Blue triclinic prisms or a blue, crystalline powder.
Solubility –Soluble in water, very solube in boiling water, almost insoluble in alcohol; very
slowly soluble in glycerin.
Acidity and clarity of solution – 1 g, dissolved in 20 ml of water, forms a clear blue solution,
which becomes green on the addition of 0.1 ml of methyl orange solution.
Iron – To 5 g, add 25 ml of water, and 2 ml of nitric acid, boil and cool. Add excess of strong
ammonia solution, filter, and wash the residue with dilute ammonia solution mixed with four
times its volumes of water. Dissolve the residue, if any, on the filter with 2 ml of hydrochloric
acid, diluted with 10 ml of water; to the acid solutions add dilute ammonia solution till the
precipitation is complete; filter and wash; the residue after ignition weighs not more than 7 mg.
Copper Sulphate, Anhydrous – CuSO4 =159.6
Prepared by heating copper sulphate to constant weight at about 2300.
Copper Sulphate Solution –A10.0 per cent w/v solution of copper sulphate in water.

Cresol Red – 4,4/, –(3H-2, 1-Benzoxathiol-3 ylidene) di-O-cresol SS-dioxide; C12H8O5S = 382.4.
Gives a red colour in very strongly acid solutions, a yellow colour in less strongly acid and
neutral solutions, and a red colour in moderately alkaline solutions (pH ranges, 0.2 to 1.8, and
7.2 to 8.8).

213
Cresol Red Solution –Warm 50 ml of cresol red with 2.65 ml of 0.05 M sodium hydroxide and 5 ml
of ethanol (90 per cent); after solution is effected, add sufficient ethanol (20 per cent) to produce 250
ml.
Sensitivity –A mixitue of 0.1 ml of the solution and 100 ml of carbon dioxide-free water to
which 0.15 ml of 0.02 M sodium hydroxide has been added is purplish-red. Not more than 0.15
ml of 0.02 M hydrochloric acid is required to change the colour to yellow.
Disodium Ethylenediamine tetraacetate – (Disodium Acetate) C10H14N2Na2O8.2H2O = 372.2 ,
Analytical reagent grade.
Dragendorff Reagent –
Solution 1 –Dissolve 0.85 g of bismuth oxy nitrate in 40 ml of water and 10 ml of acetic acid.
Solution 2 –Dissolve 8 g of potassium iodide in 20 ml of water.
Mix equal volumes of solution 1 and 2, and to 10 ml of the resultant mixture add 100 ml of
water and 20 ml of acetic acid.
Dragendorff reagent with tartaric acid:
Solution A: 17 g bismuth sub-nitrate and 200 g tartaric acid in 800 ml water
Solution B: 160 g potassium iodide in 400 ml water.
Stock solution: solution A & solution B
Spray reagent: 50 ml stock solution + 500 ml water + 100 g tartaric acid
Dithizone;1,5-Diphenylthiocarbazone;Diphenylthiocarbazone;C6H5N:NCSNHNHC6H5= 56.32
Analytical Reagent grade of commerce.
Almost black powder; mp, about 1680, with decomposition.
Store in light-resistant containers.
Eosin – Acid Red 87; Tetrabromofluorescein disodium salt; C20H6O5Br4Na2 =691.86.
Description – Red powder, dissolves in water to yield a yellow to purplish-red solution with a
greenish-yellow fluorescence.
Solubility –Soluble in water and in alcohol.
Chloride –Dissolve 50 mg in 25 ml of water, add 1 ml of nitric acid, and filter; the filtrate
complies with the limit test for chlorides, Appendix 2.3.2.
Sulphated ash –Not more than 24.0 per cent, calculated with reference to the substance dried at
1100 for two hours, Appendix 2.2.6.

214
Eosin Solution –A 0.5 per cent w/v solution of eosin in water.

Eriochrome Black T –Mordant Black 11; Sodium 2(1-hydroxy-2-naphthylazo) 5-nitro-2-naphtol-4-

sulphonate; C20H12N3NaO7S = 461.38.
Brownish black powder having a faint, metallic sheen, soluble in alcohol, in methyl alcohol and
in hot water.
Ethyl Acetate –CH3. CO2C2H5 = 88.11.
Analytical reagent grade.
A colourless liquid with a fruity odour; boiling point, about 770; weight per ml about 0.90g.
Fehlings Solution –
A. Dissolve 69.278 g of CuSO4. 5H2O in water and make the volume up to 1 litre
B. Dissolve 100 g of sodium hydroxide and 340 g of Sodium potassium tartarate in water
and make the volume to 1 litre.
Mix equal volumes of A and B before the experiment.
Folin Ciocalteu reagent- Dilute commercially available Folin-Ciocalteu reagent (2N) with an equal
volume of distilled water. Transfer it in a brown bottle and store in a refrigerator (40). It should be
goldern in colour. Do not use it if it turns olive green.
Formic acid- HCOOH = 46.03
Description:-Colourless liquid, odour, very pungent, highly corrosive; wt per ml. about 1.20 g,
contains about 90.0 per cent of HCOOH and is about 23.6 M in strength.
Assay:- Weigh accurately, a conical flask containing 10ml of water, quickly add about 1ml of
the reagent being examined and weigh again. Add 50ml of water and titrate with 1M sodium
hydroxide using 0.5 ml of phenolphthalein solution as indicator. Each ml of 1M sodium
hydroxide is equivalent to 0.04603 g of HCOOH.
Gallic acid
Category: Astringent, styptic
Description: Off white powder; Needles from absolute methanol or chloroform.
Solubility: 1 g dissolves in 87 ml water, 3 ml boiling water, 6 ml alcohol, 100 ml ether, 10 ml
glycerol, 5 ml acetone. [Merck Index, 2001, 13th Edn., pp. 722]
Loss on Drying: NMT 10 %

215
 Calibration Curve: Weigh 25 mg of gallic acid and dissolve in 25 ml of methanol. Perform
serial dilutions to make the concentrations of 100 µg/ml, 200 µg/ml, 300 µg/ml, 400 µg/ml,
500 µg/ml and 600 µg/ml. Apply 5 µl of each concentration in triplicate on precoated thin
layer chromatographic plate of 0.2 mm thickness. Develop the plate in twin trough TLC
chamber (Solvent system: Toluene: Ethyl Acetate: Acetic Acid; 5:4:1 % v/v) upto 8 cm. Spray
the plate with Natural Products reagent. Dry the plate in a current of cold air and visualize the
plate at 366 nm. Scan the plate densitometrically at 366 nm. Record the peak area under curve
and plot the calibration curve for gallic acid.
Gallic acid calibration curve
y = 3225.6x + 2125
2
R = 0.9941
14000

12000

10000

8000
Area

6000

4000

2000

0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
Gallic acid (µg)

Assay : Contains not less than 0.008 per cent w/v of gallic acid and ethyl gallate, when assayed
by the following method:
Glycerine – C3H8O3 = 82.09.
Description – Clear, colorless, liquid of syrupy consistency; odourless, taste sweet followed by
a sensation of warmth. It is hygroscopic.
Solubility –Miscible with water and with alcohol; practically insoluble in chloroform, in
solvent ether and in fixed oils.
Acidity –To 50 ml of a 50 per cent w/v solution add 0.2 ml of dilute phenolphthalein solution;
not more than 0.2 ml of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide is required to produce a pink colour.
Wt. per ml –Between 1.252 g and 1.257 g, corresponding to between 98.0 per cent and 100.0
per cent w/w of C3H8O3.
Refractive index –Between 1.470 and 1.475 determined at 200.
Arsenic –Not more than 2 parts per million, Appendix 2.3.1.
Copper –To 10 ml add 30 ml of water, and 1 ml of dilute hydrochloric acid, and 10 ml of
hydrogen sulphide solution; no colour is produced.
Iron – 10 g complies with the limit test for iron, Appendix 2.3.4.

216
 Heavy metals – Not more than 5 parts per million, determined by Method A on a solution of 4
g in 2 ml of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid and sufficient water to produce 25 ml, Appendix 2.3.3.
Sulphate –1 ml complies with the limit test for sulphates, Appendix 2.3.6.
Chloride –1 ml complies with the limit test for chloride, Appendix 2.3.2.
Acraldehyde and glucose –Heat strongly; it assumes not more than a faint yellow, and not a
pink colour. Heat further; it burns with little or no charring and with no odour of burnt sugar.
Aldehydes and related substances – To 12.5 ml of a 50 per cent w/v solution in a glass-
stoppered flask add 2.5 ml of water and 1 ml of decolorised magenta solution. Close the flask
and allow to stand for one hour. Any violet colour produced is not more intense than that
produced by mixing 1.6 ml of 0.1 N potassium permanganate and 250 ml of water.
Sugar –Heat 5 g with 1 ml of dilute sulphuric acid for five minutes on a water-bath. Add 2 ml
of dilute sodium hydroxide solution and 1 ml of copper sulphate solution. A clear, blue
coloured solution is produced. Continue heating on the water-bath for five minutes. The
solution remains blue and no precipitate is formed.
Fatty acids and esters –Mix 50 ml with 50 ml of freshly boiled water and 50.0 ml of 0.5N
sodium hydroxide, boil the mixture for five minutes. Cool, add a few drops of phenolphthalein
solution and titrate the excess alkali with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid. Perform a blank
determination, not more than 1 ml of 0.5 N sodium hydroxide is consumed.
Sulphated ash –Not more than 0.01 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6
Storage –Store in tightly-closed containers.

Glycerin Solution –Dilute 33 ml of glycerin to 100 ml with water and add a small piece of camphor
or liquid phenol.
n- Hexane:- C6H14= 86.18
Analytical reagent grade of commerce containing not less than 90.05 of n-Hexane
Colourless, mobile, highly flammable liquid, bp 680; wt per ml, about 0.674 g
Hydrochloric Acid – HCl = 36.46
Concentrated Hydrochloric Acid
Description – Clear, colourless, fuming liquid; odour, pungent.
Arsenic –Not more than 1 part per million, Appendix 2.3.1.
Heavy metals –Not more than 5 parts per million, determined by Method A on a solution
prepared in the following manner : Evaporate 3.5 ml to dryness on a water-bath, add 2 ml of
dilute acetic acid to the residue, and add water to make 25 ml, Appendix 2.3.3.

217
 Bromide and iodide –Dilute 5 ml with 10 ml of water, add 1 ml of chloroform, and add drop by
drop, with constant shaking, chlorinated lime solution; the chloroform layer does not become
brown or violet.
Sulphite –Dilute 1 ml with 10 ml of water, and add 5 drops of barium chloride solution and 0.5
ml of 0.001 N iodine; the colour of the iodine is not completely discharged.
Sulphate –To 5 ml add 10 mg of sodium bicarbonate and evaporate to dryness on a water bath;
the residue, dissolved in water; complies with the limit test for sulphates, Appendix. 2.3.7.
Free chlorine –Dilute 5 ml with 10 ml of freshly boiled and cooled water, add 1 ml of cadmium
iodide solution, and shake with 1 ml of chloroform; the chloroform layer does not become
violet within one minute.
Sulphated ash –Not more than 0.01 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 4 g into a stoppered flask containing 40 ml of water, and titrare
with N sodium hydroxide, using methyl orange solution as indicator. Each ml of N sodium
hydroxide is equivalent to 0.03646 g of HCl.
Storage –Store in glass-stoppered containers at a temperature not exceeding 300.

Hydrochloric Acid, x N –Solution of any normality x N may be prepared by diluting 84 x ml of

hydrochloric acid to 1000 ml with water.
Hydrochloric Acid –(1 per cent w/v) Dilute 1 g of hydrochloric acid to 100 ml with water.

Dilute Hydrochloric Acid –

Description – Colourless liquid.
Arsenic, Heavy metals bromoide and iodide, Sulphate, free chlorine –Complies with the tests
described under Hydrochloric Acid, when three times the quantity is taken for each test.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 10 g and carry out the Assay described under Hydrochloric
Acid.
Storage –Store in stoppered containers of glass or other inert material, at temperature below
300.
Hydrochloric Acid, N – HCl = 36.460
36.46 g in 1000 ml
Dilute 85 ml of hydrochloric acid with water to 1000 ml and standardise the solution as follows:
Weigh accurately about 1.5 g of anhydrous sodium carbonate, previously heated at about 2700
for one hour. Dissolve it in 100 ml of water and add two drops of methyl red solution. Add the

218
 acid slowly from a burette with constant stirring, until the solution becomes faintly pink. Heat
again to boiling and titrate further as necessary until the faint pink colour no longer affected by
continued boiling. Each 0.5299 g of anhydrous sodium carbonate is equivalent to 1 ml of N
hydrochloric acid.
Hydrochloric Acid, Iron-Free –Hydrochloric acid, which complies with the following additional
test. Evaporate 5 ml on a water-bath nearly to dryness, add 40 ml of water, 2 ml of a 20 per cent w/v
solution of citric acid and two drops of thioglycollic acid, mix, make alkaline with dilute ammonia
solution, and dilute to 50 ml with water; no pink colour is produced.
Hydrogen Peroxide Solution – (20 Vol.) H2O2 = 34.02
Analytical reagent grade of commerce or hydrogen peroxide solution (100 Vol.) diluted with 4
volumes of water.
A colourless liquid containing about 6 per cent w/v of H2O2; weight per ml, about 1.02 g
Liebermann Burchard reagent –Add carefully 5 ml acetic anhydride and 5 ml conc sulphuric acid
to 50 ml absolute ethanol, while cooling in ice. Spray the plate and heat at 1050 C for about 10 min.
Use freshly prepared reagent.
Mercuric Chloride – HgCl2 =271.50.
Contains not less than 99.5 per cent of HgCl2;
Description – Heavy, colourless or white, crystalline masses, or a white crystalline powder.
Solubility –Soluble in water; freely soluble in alcohol.
Non-volatile matter –When volatilised, leaves not more than 0.1 per cent of residue.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 0.3 g and dissolve in 85 ml of water in a stoppered-flask, add
10 ml of calcium chloride solution, 10 ml of potassium iodide solution, 3 ml of formaldehyde
solution and 15 ml of sodium hydroxide solution, and shake continuously for two minutes. Add
20 ml of acetic acid and 35 ml of 0.1 N iodine. Shake continuously for about ten minutes, or
until the precipitated mercury is completely redissolved, and titrate the excess of iodine with 0.1
N sodium thiosulphate. Each ml of 0.1 N iodine is equivalent to 0.01357 g of HgCl2.
Mercuric Chloride, 0.2 M – Dissolve 54.30 g of mercuric chloride in sufficient water to produce
1000 ml.
Mercuric Chloride Solution –A 5.0 per cent w/v solution of mercuric chloride in water.

Mercuric Potassium Iodide Solution – See Potassium - Mercuric Iodide solution.

219
Methyl Alcohol : Methanol : CH3OH = 32.04.
Description – Clear, Colourless liquid with a characteristic odour.
Solubility –Miscible with water, forming a clear colourless liquid.
Specific Gravity – At 250, not more than 0.791.
Distillation range – Not less than 95 per cent distils between 64.50 and 65.50.
Refractive Index –At 200, 1.328 to 1.329.
Acetone –Place 1 ml in a Nessler cylinder, add 19 ml of water, 2 ml of a 1 per cent w/v solution
of 2-nitrobenzaldehyde in alcohol (50 per cent), 1 ml of 30 per cent w/v solution of sodium
hydroxide and allow to stand in the dark for fifteen minutes. The colour developed does not
exceed that produced by mixing 1 ml of standard acetone solution, 19 ml of water, 2 ml of the
solution of 2-nitrobenzaldehyde and 1 ml of the solution of sodium hydroxide and allowing to
stand in the dark for fifteen minutes.
Acidity –To 5 ml add 5 ml of carbon dioxide-free water, and titrate with 0.1 N sodium
hydroxide, using bromothymol blue solution as indicator; not more than 0.1 ml is required.
Non-volatile matter – When evaporated on a water-bath and dried to constant weight at 105º,
leaves not more than 0.005 per cent w/v of residue.
Methyl Alcohol, Dehydrated –Methyl alcohol, which complies with the following additional
requirement.
Water –Not more than 0.1 per cent w/w.

Methyl Orange – Sodium-p-di methylamineazobenzene sulphate, C14H14O3N3SNa.

An orange-yellow powder or crystalline scales, slightly soluble in cold water; insoluble in
alcohol; readily soluble in hot water.
Methyl Orange Solution –Dissolve 0.1 g of methyl orange in 80 ml of water and dilute to 100 ml
with alcohol.
Test for sensitivity –A mixture of 0.1 ml of the methyl orange solution and 100 ml freshly
boiled and cooled water is yellow. Not more than 0.1 ml of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid is required
to change the colour to red.
Colour change – pH 3.0 (red) to pH 4.4 (yellow).

Methyl Red – p-Dimethylaminoazobenzene-O-carboxylic acid, C15H15O2N3.

A dark red powder or violet crystals, sparingly soluble in water; soluble in alcohol.

220
Methyl red solution –Dissolve 100 mg in 1.86 ml of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide and 50 ml of alcohol
and dilute to 100 ml with water.
Test for sensitivity –A mixture of 0.1 ml of the methyl red solution and 100 ml of freshly boiled
and cooled water to which 0.05 ml of 0.02 N hydrochloric acid has been added is red. Not more
than 0.01 ml of 0.02 N sodium hydroxide is required to change the colour to yellow.
Colour change – pH 4.4 (red) to pH 6.0 (yellow).

Natural Product Reagent (Natural Product-Polyethylene Reagent) –

Solution A-1% ethyl acetate diphenylboric acid-Bethylaminoester(NP),
Solution B-5%ethyl acetatepolyethylene glycol 4000 (PEG)
Spray the plate with10 ml solution A and 8ml solution B respectively.
Nitric Acid –Contains 70.0 per cent w/w of HNO3 (limits, 69.0 to 71.0). About 16 N in strength.
Description – Clear, colourless, fuming liquid.
Wt. per ml – At 200, 1.41 to 1.42 g
Copper and Zinc –Dilute 1 ml with 20 ml of water, and add a slight excess of dilute ammonia
solution; the mixture does not become blue. Pass hydrogen sulphide; a precipitate is not
produced.
Iron –0.5 ml of complies with the limit test for iron, Appendix 2.3.4.
Lead –Not more than 2 parts per million, Appendix 2.3.5.
Chloride –5 ml neutralised with dilute ammonia solution, complies with the limit test for
chlorides, Appendix 2.3.2.
Sulphates –To 2.5 ml add 10 mg of sodium bicarbonate and evaporate to dryness on a water-
bath, the residue dissolved in water, complies with the limit test for sulphates, Appendix 2.3.7.
Sulphated ash – Not more than 0.01 per cent w/w, Appendix 2.2.6.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 4 g into a stoppered flask containing 40 ml of water, and titrate
with N Sodium hydroxide, using methyl orange solution as indicator. Each ml of N sodium
hydroxide is equivalent to 0.06301 g of HNO3.
Nitric Acid, xN –Solutions of any normality XN may be prepared by diluting 63x ml of nitric acid to
1000 ml with water.
Nitric Acid, Dilute –Contains approximately 10 per cent w/w of HNO3. Dilute 106 ml of nitric acid
to 1000 ml with water.

221
Petroleum Light – Petroleum Spirit.
Description – Colourless, very volatile, highly flammable liquid obtained from petroleum,
consisting of a mixture of the lower members of the paraffin series of hydrocarbons and
complying with one or other of the following definitions :
Light Petroleum –(Boiling range, 300 to 400).
Wt. per ml. –At 200, 0.620 to 0.630 g.
Light Petroleum –(Boiling range, 400 to 600).
Wt. per ml –At 200, 0.630 to 0.650 g.
Light Petroleum –(Boiling range, 600 to 800).
Wt. per ml. –At 200, 0.670 to 0.690.
Light Petroleum –(Boiling range, 800 to 1000).
Wt. per ml. –At 200, 0.700 to 0.720
Light Petroleum –(Boiling range, 1000 to 1200).
Wt. per ml –At 200, 0.720 to 0.740 g.
Light Petroleum –(Boiling range, 1200 to 1600).
Wt. per ml –At 200, about 0.75 g.
Non-volatile matter –When evaporated on a water-bath and dried at 1050, leaves not more than
0.002 per cent w/v of residue.
Phenolphthalein –C20H14O4.
A white to yellowish-white powder, practically insoluble in water, soluble in alcohol.
Phenolphthalein Solution –Dissolve 0.10 g in 80 ml of alcohol and dilute to 100 ml with water.
Test for sensitivity –To 0.1 ml of the phenolphthalein solution add 100 ml of freshly boiled and
cooled water, the solution is colourless. Not more than 0.2 ml of 0.02 N sodium hydroxide is
required to change the colour to pink.
Colour change – pH 8.2 (colourless) to pH 10.0 (red)

Phloroglucinol – 1 , 3 , 5 – Trihydroxybenzene , C6H3(OH)3 . 2H2O.

Description – White or yellowish crystals or a crystalline powder.
Solubility –Slightly soluble in water; soluble in alcohol, and in solvent ether.
Melting range –After drying at 1100 for one hour, 2150 to 2190.

222
 Sulphated ash – Not more than 0.1 per cent, Appendix 2.2.6.
Phloroglucinol should be kept protected from light.
Phosphoric Acid – H3PO4 = 98.00.
(Orthophosphoric Acid; Concentrated Phosphoric Acid).
Description – Clear and colourless syrupy liquid, corrosive.
Solubility –Miscible with water and with alcohol.

Phosphoric Acid, x N –
Solutions of any normality, x N may be prepared by diluting 49 x g of phosphoric acid with
water to 1000 ml.
Phosphoric Acid, Dilute –
Contains approximately 10 per cent w/v of H3PO4.
Dilute 69 ml of phosphoric acid to 1000 ml with water.
Potassium Chloride –KCl = 74.55
Analytical reagent grade
Potassium Chromate – K2CrO4 = 194.2
Analytical reagent grade
Potassium Chromate Solution –A 5.0 per cent w/v solution of potassium chromate.
Gives a red precipitate with silver nitrate in neutral solutions.
Potassium Cupri-Tartrate Solution –Cupric Tatrate Alkaline Solution: Fehling’s Solution.
(1) Copper Solution – Dissolve 34.66 g of carefully selected small crystals of copper
sulphate, showing no trace of efflorescence or of adhering moisture, in sufficient water to
make 500 ml. Keep this solution in small, well-stoppered bottles.
(2) Alkaline Tartrate Solution – Dissolve 176 g of sodium potassium tartrate and 77 g of
sodium hydroxide in sufficient water to produce 500 ml.
Mix equal volumes of the solutions No. 1 and No. 2 at the time of using.
Potassium Dichromate – K2Cr2O7 =294.18.
Contains not less than 99.8 per cent of K2Cr2O7.
Description – Orange-red crystals or a crystalline powder.

223
 Solubility – Soluble in water
Chloride –To 20 ml of a 5 per cent w/v solution in water and 10 ml nitric acid, warm to about
500and add a few drops of silver nitrate solution; not more than a faint opalescence is produced.
Assay –Carry out the assay described under Potassium Chromate, using 2 g. Each ml of 0.1 N
sodium thiosulphate is equivalent to 0.004904 g of K2Cr2O7.
Potassium Dichromate Solution – A 7.0 per cent w/v solution of potassium dichromate in water.

Potassium Dichromate, Solution 0.1N – K2Cr2O7 = 294.18, 4.903 g in 1000 ml.

Weigh accurately 4.903 g of potassium dichromate and dissolve in sufficient water to produce
1000 ml.
Potassium Dihydrogen Phosphate - KH2PO4 = 136.1
Analytical reagent grade of commerce.
Potassium Ferrocyanide – K4Fe(CN)6.3H2O =422.39.
Contains not less than 99.0 per cent of K4Fe(CN)6.3H2O.
Description –Yellow, crystalline powder.
Solubility –Soluble in water.
Acidity or Alkalinity –A 10 per cent w/v solution in water is neutral to litmus paper.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 1g and dissolve in 200 ml of water, add 10 ml of sulphuric acid
and titrate with 0.1 N potassium permanganate. Each ml of 0.1 N potassium permanganate is
equivalent to 0.04224 g of K4Fe (CN)6. 3H2O.
Potassium Ferrocyanide Solution –A 5.0 per cent w/v solution of potassium ferrocyanide in
water.
Potassium Hydrogen Phthalate –CO2H. C6H4. CO2K =204.22.
Contains not less than 99.9 per cent and not more than the equivalent of 100.1 per cent of
C8H5O4K calculated with reference to the substance dried at 1100 for one hour.
Description –White, crystalline powder.
Solubility –Slowly soluble in water, forming clear, colourless solution.
Acidity –A 2.0 per cent w/v solution in carbon dioxide free water gives with bromophenol blue
solution the grey colour indicative of pH 4.0.

224
 Assay –Weigh accurately about 9 g, dissolve in 100 ml of water and titrate with N sodium
hydroxide using phenolphthalein solution as indicator. Each ml of N Sodium hydroxide is
equivalent to 0.2042 g of C8H5O4K.
Potassium Hydrogen Phthalate, 0.02 M – Dissolve 4.084 g of Potassium hydrogen phthalate in
sufficient water to produce 1000 ml.
Potassium Hydrogen Phthalate, 0.2 M – Dissolve 40.84 g of potassium hydrogen phthalate in
sufficient water to produce 1000 ml.
Potassium Hydroxide –Caustic Potash : KOH = 56.11
Contains not less than 85.0 per cent of total alkali, calculated as KOH and not more than 4.0 per
cent of K2CO3.
Description – Dry white sticks, pellets or fused mass; hard, brittle and showing a crystalline
fracture; very deliquescent; strongly alkaline and corrosive.
Solubility –Freely soluble in water, in alcohol and in glycerin; very soluble in boiling ethyl
alcohol.
Aluminium, iron and matter insoluble in hydrochloric acid –Boil 5 g with 40 ml of dilute
hydrochloric acid, cool, make alkaline with dilute ammonia solution, boil, filter and wash the
residue with a 2.5 per cent w/v solution of ammonium nitrate; the insoluble residue, after
ignition to constant weight, weighs not more than 5 mg.
Chloride –0.5 g dissolved in water with the additon of 1.6 ml of nitric acid, complies with the
limit test for chlorides, Appendix 2.3.2.
Heavy metals –Dissolve 1 g in a mixture of 5 ml of water and 7 ml of dilute hydrochloric acid.
Heat to boiling, add 1 drop of phenolphthalein solution and dilute ammonia solution dropwise
to produce a faint pink colour. Add 2 ml of acetic acid and water to make 25 ml; the limit of
heavy metals is 30 parts per million, Appendix 2.3.3.
Sulphate –Dissolve 1 g in water with the addition of 4.5 ml of hydrochloric acid; the solution
complies with the limit test for sulphates, Appendix 2.3.6.
Sodium –To 3 ml of a 10 per cent w/v solution add 1 ml of water, 1.5 ml of alcohol, and 3 ml
of potassium antimonate solution and allow to stand; no white crystalline precipitate or
sediment is visible to the naked eye within fifteen minutes.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 2 g, and dissolve in 25 ml of water, add 5 ml of barium
chloride solution, and titrate with N hydrochloric acid, using phenolphthalein solution as
indicator. To the solution in the flask add bromophenol blue solution, and continue the titration
with N hydrochloric acid. Each ml of N hydrochloric acid, used in the second titration in

225
 equivalent to 0.06911 g of K2CO3. Each ml of N hydrochloric acid, used in the combined
titration is equivalent to 0.05611 g of total alkali, calculated as KOH.
Storage –Potassium Hydroxide should be kept in a well-closed container.

Potassium Hydroxide, xN – Solution of any normality, x N, may be prepared by dissolving 56.11x

g of potassium hydroxide in water and diluting to 1000 ml.
Potassium Hydroxide Solution –Solution of Potash.
An aqueous solution of potassium hydroxide containing 5.0 per cent w/v of total alkali,
calculated as KOH (limits, 4.75 to 5.25).
Assay –Titrate 20 ml with N sulphuric acid, using solution of methyl orange as indicator. Each
ml of N sulphuric acid is equivalent to 0.05611 g of total alkali, calculated as KOH.
Storage –Potassium hydroxide solution should be kept in a well-closed container of lead-free
glass or of a suitable plastic.
Potassium Iodide –KI = 166.00
Description – Colourless crystals or white powder; odourless, taste, saline and slightly bitter.
Solubility –Very soluble in water and in glycerin; soluble in alcohol.
Arsenic –Not more than 2 parts per million, Appendix 2.3.1.
Heavy metals -Not more than 10 parts per million, determined on 2.0 g by Method A, Appendix
2.3.3.
Barium –Dissolve 0.5 g in 10 ml of water and add 1 ml of dilute sulphuric acid; no turbidity
develops within one minute.
Cyanides –Dissolve 0.5 g in 5 ml of warm water, add one drop of ferrous sulphate solution and
0.5 ml of sodium hydroxide solution and acidify with hydrochloric acid; no blue colour is
produced.
Iodates –Dissolve 0.5 g in 10 ml of freshly boiled and cooled water, and add 2 drops of dilute
sulphuric acid and a drop of starch solution; no blue colour is produced within two minutes.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 0.5 g, dissolve in about 10 ml of water and add 35 ml of
hydrochloric acid and 5 ml of chloroform. Titrate with 0.05 M potassium iodate until the purple
colour of iodine disappears from the chloroform. Add the last portion of the iodate solution
drop-wise and agitate vigorously and continuously. Allow to stand for five minutes. If any
colour develops in the chloroform layer continue the titration. Each ml of 0.05 M potassium
iodate is equivalent to 0.0166 mg of KI.
Storage –Store in well-closed containers.

226
Potassium Iodide, M –Dissolve 166.00 g of potassium iodide in sufficient water to produce 1000
ml.
Potassium Iodide and Starch Solution –Dissolve 10 g of potassium iodide in sufficient water to
produce 95 ml and add 5 ml of starch solution.
Potassium Iodide and Starch solution must be recently prepared.
Potassium Iodide Solution –A 10 per cent w/v solution of potassium iodide in water.

Potassium Iodobismuthate Solution –Dissolve 100 g of tartaric acid in 400 ml of water and 8.5 g
of bismuth oxynitrate. Shake during one hour, add 200 ml of a 40 per cent w/v
Potassium Iodobismuthate Solution, Dilute –Dissolve 100 g of tartaric acid in 500 ml of water and
add 50 ml of potassium iodobismuthate solution.
Potassium Mercuric-Iodide Solution –Mayer’s Reagent.
Add 1.36 g of mercuric chloride dissolved in 60 ml of water to a solution of 5 g of potassium
iodide in 20 ml of water, mix and add sufficient water to produce 100 ml.
Potassium Mercuri-Iodide Solution, Alkaline (Nessler’s Reagent)
To 3.5 g of potassium iodide add 1.25 g of mercuric chloride dissolved in 80 ml of water, add a
cold saturated solution of mercuric chloride in water, with constant stirring until a slight red
precipitate remains. Dissolve 12 g of sodium hydroxide in the solution, add a little more of the
cold saturated solution of mercuric chloride and sufficient water to produce 100 ml. Allow to
stand and decant the clear liquid.
Purified Water – H2O = 18.02.
Description – Clear, colourless liquid, odourless, tasteless.
Purified water is prepareed from potable water by distillation, ion-exchange treatment, reverse
osmosis or any other suitable process. It contains no added substances.
Acidity or alkalinity – To 10 ml, freshly boiled and cooled in a borosilicate glass flask, add
0.05 ml of methyl red solution; the resulting solution is not red. To 10 ml add 0.1 ml of
bromothymol blue solution; the resulting solution is not blue.
Carbon dioxide – To 25 ml add 25 ml of calcium hydroxide solution, no turbidity is produced.
Chloride – To 10 ml add 1 ml of dilute nitric acid and 0.2 ml of silver nitrate solution; no
opalescence is produced, Appendix 2.3.2.
Sulphate – To 10 ml add 0.1 ml of dilute hydrochloric acid and 0.1 ml of barium chloride,
Appendix 2.3.6.

227
 Solution : the solution remains clear for an hour.
Nitrates and Nitrites –To 50 ml add 18 ml of acetic acid and 2 ml of naphthylamine-sulphanilic
acid reagent. Add 0.12 g of zinc reducing mixture and shake several times. No pink colour
develops within fifteen minutes.
Ammonium – To 20 ml add 1 ml of alkaline potassium mercuric-iodide solution and after five
minutes view in a Nessler cylinder placed on a white tile; the colour is not more intense than
that given on adding 1 ml of alkaline potassium mercuric-iodide solution to a solution
containing 2.5 ml of dilute ammonium chloride solution (Nessler’s) 7.5 ml of the liquid being
examined.
Calcium –To 10 ml add 0.2 ml of dilute ammonia solution and 0.2 ml of ammonium oxalate
solution; the solution remains clear for an hour.
Heavy metals –Adjust the pH of 40 ml to between 3.0 and 4.0 with dilute acetic acid, add 10 ml
of freshly prepared hydrogen sulphide solution and allow to stand for ten minutes; the colour of
the solution is not more than that of a mixture of 50 ml of the liquid being examined and the
same amount of dilute acetic acid added to the sample, Appendix 2.3.3.
Oxidisable matter –To 100 ml add 10 ml of dilute sulphuric acid and 0.1 ml of 0.1 N potassium
permanganate and boil for five minutes. The solution remains faintly pink.
Total Solids –Not more than 0.001 per cent w/v determined on 100 ml by evaporating on a
water bath and drying in an oven at 1050 for one hour.
Storage –Store in tightly closed containers.

Sodium Bicarbonate – NaHCO3 =84.01

Description –White, crystalline powder or small, opaque, monoclinic crystals; odourless; taste,
saline.
Solubility –Freely soluble in water; practically insoluble in alcohol.
Carbonate –pH of a freshly prepared 5.0 per cent w/v solution in carbon dioxide-free water, not
more than 8.6.
Aluminium, calcium and insoluble matter –Boil 10 g with 50 ml of water and 20 ml of dilute
ammonia solution, filter, and wash the residue with water; the residue, after ignition to constant
weight, not more than 1 mg.
Arsenic –Not more than 2 parts per million, Appendix 2.3.1.
Iron –Dissolve 2.5 g in 20 ml of water and 4 ml of iron-free hydrochloric acid, and dilute to 40
ml with water; the solution complies with the limit test for iron, Appendix 2.3.4.

228
 Heavy metals –Not more than 5 parts per million, determined by Method A on a solution
prepared in the following manner:
Mix 4.0 g with 5 ml of water and 10 ml of dilute hydrochloric acid, heat to boiling, and
maintain the temperature for one minute. Add one drop of phenolphthalein solution and
sufficient ammonia solution drop wise to give the solution a faint pink colour. Cool and dilute
to 25 ml with water, Appendix 2.3.3.
Chlorides –Dissolve 1.0 g in water with the addition of 2 ml of nitric acid; the solution
complies with the limit test for chlorides, Appendix 2.3.2.
Sulphates –Dissolve 2 g in water with the addition of 2 ml of hydrochloric acid; the solution
complies with the limit test for sulphates, Appendix 2.3.6.
Ammonium compounds –1 g warmed with 10 ml of sodium hydroxide solution does not evolve
ammonia.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 1 g, dissolve in 20 ml of water, and titrate with 0.5 N sulphuric
acid using methyl orange solutions as indicator. Each ml of 0.5 N sulphuric acid is equivalent to
0.042 g of NaHCO3.
Storage –Store in well-closed containers.

Sodium Bicarbonate Solution –A 5 per cnet w/v solution of sodium bicarbonate in water.

Sodium Carbonate – Na2CO3. 10H2O =286.2.

Analytical reagent grade
Sodium Chloride – NaCl = 58.44
Analytical reagent grade
Sodium Hydroxide –NaOH = 40.00
Description –White sticks, pellets, fused masses, or scales; dry, hard brittle and showing a
crystalline fracture, very deliquescent; strongly alkaline and corrosive.
Solubility –Freely soluble in water and in alcohol.
Aluminium, iron and matter insoluble in hydrochloric acid –Boil 5 g with 50 ml of dilute
hydrochloric acid, cool, make alkaline with dilute ammonia solution, boil, filter, and wash with
a 2.5 per cent w/v solution of ammonium nitrate; the insoluble residue after ignition to constant
weight weighs not more than 5 mg.
Arsenic –Not more than 4 parts per million, Appendix 2.3.1.

229
 Heavy metals –Not more than 30 parts per million, determined by Method A, Appendix 2.3.3.
in a solution prepared by dissolving 0.67 g in 5 ml of water and 7 ml of 3 N hydrochloric acid.
Heat to boiling, cool and dilute to 25 ml with water.
Potassium –Acidify 5 ml of a 5 per cent w/v solution with acetic acid and add 3 drops of
sodium cobaltnitrite solution; no preciptitate is formed.
Chloride – 0.5 g dissolved in water with the addition of 1.8 ml of nitric acid, complies with the
limit test for chlorides, Appendix 2.3.2.
Sulphates –1 g dissolved in water with the addition of 3.5 ml of hydrochloric acid complies
with the limit test for sulphates, Appendix 2.3.6.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 1.5 g and dissolve in about 40 ml of carbon dioxide-free water.
Cool and titrate with N sulphuric acid using phenolphthalein solution as indicator. When the
pink colour of the solution is discharged, record the volume of acid solution required, add
methyl orange solution and continue the titration until a persistent pink colour is produced.
Each ml of N sulphuric acid is equivalent to 0.040 g of total alkali calculated as NaOH and each
ml of acid consumed in the titration with methyl orange is equivalent to 0.106 g of Na2CO3.
Storage –Store in tightly closed containers.

Sodium Hydroxide, xN – Solutions of any normality, xN may be prepared by dissolving 40 x g of

sodium hydroxide in water and diluting to 1000 ml.
Sodium Hydroxide Solution – A 20.0 per cent w/v solution of sodium hydroxide in water.

Sodium Hydroxide Solution, Dilute –

A 5.0 per cent w/v solution of sodium hydroxide in water.
Sodium Potassium Tartrate –Rochelle Salt [Link](OH). CH(OH), COOK. 4H2O = 282.17
Contains not less than 99.0 per cent and not more than the equivalent of 104.0 per cent of
C4H4O6KNa. 4H2O.
Description –Colourless crystals or a white, crystalline powder; odourless; taste saline and
cooling. It effloresces slightly in warm, dry air, the crystals are often coated with a white
powder.
Solubility –Soluble in water; practically insoluble in alcohol.
Acidity or Alkalinity –Dissolve 1 g in 10 ml of recently boiled and cooled water, the solution
requires for neutralisation not more than 0.1 ml of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide or of 0.1 N
hydrochloric acid, using phenolphthalein solution as indicator.
Iron –0.5 g complies with the limit test for iron, Appendix 2.3.4.

230
 Chloride –0.5 g complies with the limit test for chlorides, Appendix 2.3.2.
Sulphate –0.5 g complies with the limit test for sulphate, Appendix 2.3.6.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 2 g and heat until carbonised, cool, and boil the residue with 50
ml of water and 50 ml of 0.5 N sulphuric acid; filter, and wash the filter with water; titrate the
excess of acid in the filtrate and washings with 0.5 N sodium hydroxide, using methyl orange
solution as indicator. Each ml of 0.5 N sulphuric acid is equivalent to 0.07056 g of C4H4O6KNa.
4H2O.
Sodium Thiosulphate – Na2S2O3. 5H2O =248.17.
Description – Large colourless crystals or coarse, crystalline powder; odourless; taste, saline,
deliquescent in moist air and effloresces in dry air at temperature above 330.
Solubility – Very soluble in water; insoluble in alcohol.
pH –Between 6.0 and 8.4, determined in a 10 per cent w/v solution.
Arsenic –Not more than 2 parts per million, Appendix 2.3.1.
Heavy metals –Not more than 20 parts per million, determined by Method A, Appendix 2.3.3.
in a solution prepared in the following manner : Dissolve 1 g in 10 ml of water, slowly add 5 ml
of dilute hydrochloric acid and evaporate the mixture to dryness on a water-bath. Gently boil
the residue with 15 ml of water for two minutes, and filter. Heat the filtrate to boiling, and add
sufficient bromine solution to the hot filtrate to produce a clear solution and add a slight excess
of bromine solution. Boil the solution to expel the bromine completely, cool to room
temperature, then add a drop of phenolphthalein solution and sodium hydroxide solution until a
slight pink colour is produced. Add 2 ml of dilute acetic acid and dilute with water to 25 ml.
Calcium –Dissolve 1 g in 20 ml of water, and add a few ml of ammonium oxalate solution; no
turbidity is produced.
Chloride –Dissolve 0.25 g in 15 ml of 2N nitric acid and boil gently for three to four minutes,
cool and filter; the filtrate complies with the limit test for chlorides, Appendix 2.3.2.
Sulphate and Sulphite –Dissolve 0.25 g in 10 ml of water, to 3 ml of this solution add 2 ml of
iodine solution, and gradually add more iodine solution, dropwise until a very faint-persistant
yellow colour is procduced; the resulting solution complies with the limit test for sulphates,
Appendix 2.3.7.
Sulphide –Dissolve 1 g in 10 ml of water and 10.00 ml of a freshly prepared 5 per cent w/v
solution of sodium nitroprusside; the solution does not become violet.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 0.8 g and dissolve in 30 ml of water. Titrate with 0.1 N iodine,
using 3 ml of starch solution as indicator as the end-point is approached. Each ml of 0.1 iodine
is equivalent to 0.02482 g of Na2S2O3.5H2O.
Storage –Store in tightly-closed containers.

231
Sodium Thiosulphate 0.1 N – Na2S2O3.5H2O. = 248.17, 24.82 g in 1000 ml.
Dissolve about 26 g of sodium thiosulphate and 0.2 g of sodium carbonate in carbon dioxide-
free water and dilute to 1000 ml with the same solvent. Standardise the solution as follows :
Dissolve 0.300 g of potassium bromate in sufficient water to produce 250 ml. To 50 ml of this
solution, add 2 g of potassium iodide and 3 ml of 2 N hydrochloric acid and titrate with the
sodium-thiosulphate solution using starch solution, added towards the end of the titration, as
indicator until the blue colour is discharged. Each 0.002784 g of potassium bromate is
equivalent to 1 ml of 0.1N sodium thiosulphate. Note: –Re-standardise 0.1 N sodium
thiosulphate frequently.
Stannous Chloride – SnCl2. 2H2O =225.63.
Contains not less than 97.0 per cent of SnCl2. 2H2O.
Description –Colourless crystals.
Solubility –Soluble in dilute hydrochloric acid.
Arsenic- Dissolve 5.0 g in 10 ml of hydrochloric acid, heat to boiling and allow to stand for one
hour; the solution shows no darkening when compared with a freshly prepared solution of 5.0 g
in 10 ml of hydrochloric acid.
Sulphate –5.0 g with the addition of 2 ml of dilute hydrochloric acid, complies with the limit
test for sulphates, Appendix 2.3.7.
Assay –Weigh accurately about 1.0 g and dissolve in 30 ml of hydrochloric acid in a stoppered
flask. Add 20 ml of water and 5 ml of chloroform and titrate rapidly with 0.05 M potassium
iodate until the chloroform layer is colourless. Each ml of 0.05 M potassium iodate is
equivalent to 0.02256 g of SnCl2. 2H2O.
Stannous Chloride Solution – May be prepared by either of the two methods given below :
Dissolve 330 g of stannous chloride in 100 ml of hydrochloric acid and add sufficient water to
produce 1000 ml.
Dilute 60 ml of hydrochloric acid with 20 ml of water, add 20 g of tin and heat gently until gas
ceases to be evolved; add sufficient water to produce 100 ml, allowing the undissolved tin to
remain in the solution.
Starch Soluble – Starch, which has been treated with hydrochloric acid until after being washed, it
forms an almost clear liquid solution in hot water.
Description –Fine, white powder.
Solubility –Soluble in hot water, usually forming a slightly turbid solution.

232
 Acidity or Alkalinity –Shake 2 g with 20 ml of water for three minutes and filter; the filtrate is
not alkaline or more than fainthy acid to litmus paper.
Sensitivity –Mix 1 g with a little cold water and add 200 ml boiling water. Add 5 ml of this
solution to 100 ml of water and add 0.05 ml of 0.1 N iodine. The deep blue colour is discharged
by 0.05 ml of 0.1 N sodium thiosulphate.
Ash – Not more than 0.3 per cent, Appendix 2.3.

Starch Solution –Triturate 0.5 g of soluble starch, with 5 ml of water, and add this, with constant
stirring, to sufficient water to produce about 100 ml. Boil for a few minutes, cool, and filter.
Solution of starch must be recently prepared.
Sulphuric Acid – H2SO4 = 98.08.
When no molarity is indicated use analytical reagent grade of commerce containing about 98
per cent w/w of sulphuric acid. An oily, corrosive liquid weighing about 1.84 g per ml and
about 18 M in strength.
When solutions of molarity xM are required, they should be prepared by carefully adding 54 ml
of sulphuric acid to an equal volume of water and diluting with water to 1000 ml.
Solutions of sulphuric acid contain about 10 per cent w/v of H2SO4 per g mol.
Sulphuric Acid, Dilute –Contains approximately 10 per cent w/w of H2SO4.
Dilute 57 ml of sulphuric acid to 1000 ml with water.
Sulphuric Acid, Chlorine-free –Sulphuric acid which complies with the following additional test:
Chloride –Mix 2 ml with 50 ml of water and add 1 ml of solution of silver nitrate, no
opalescence is produced.
Sulphuric Acid, Nitrogen-free-Sulphuric acid which contains not less than 98.0 per cent w/w of
H2SO4 and complies with the following additional test :
Nitrate –Mix 45 ml with 5 ml of water, cool and add 8 mg of diphenyl benezidine; the solution
is colourless or not more than very pale blue.
Sulphuric acid, methanolic- 10 per cent v/v solution of Sulphuric acid in ice cooled methanol
Tartaric Acid – (CHOH. COOH)2 =150.1
Analytical reagent grade
Thioglycollic Acid – Mercapto acetic acid, – HS. CH2COOH =92.11.
Contains not less than 89.0 per cent w/w of C2H4O2S, as determined by both parts of the Assay
described below :

233
 Description –Colourless or nearly colourless liquid; odour strong and upleasant.
Iron –Mix 0.1 ml with 50 ml of water and render alkaline with strong ammonia solution; no
pink colour is produced.
Assay – Weigh accurately about 0.4 g and dissolve in 20 ml of water and titrate with 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide using cresol red solution as indicator. Each ml of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide is
equivalent to 0.009212 g of C2H4O2S.
To the above neutralised solution and 2 g of sodium bicarbonate and titrate with 0.1 N iodine.
Each ml of 0.1 N iodine is equivalent to 0.009212 g of C2H4O2S.
Toluene :-Methyl benzene,C6H5.CH3 =102.14.
Analytical grade reagent of commerce.
Clear, colourless liquid, odour, characteristic; bp about 1100, wt per ml, about 0.870 g.
Water –See purified water.

Water, Ammonia-free –Water, which has been boiled vigorously for a few minutes and protected
from the atomosphere during cooling and storage.
Xylenol Orange – [3H-2,1-Benzoxathiol–3-ylidene bis – (6-hydroxy-5-methyl-m-phenylene)
methylenenitrilo] tetra acetic acid SS-dioxide or its tetra sodium salt.
Gives a reddish-purple colour with mercury, lead, zinc and contain other metal ions in acid
solution. When metal ions are absent, for example, in the presence of an excess of disodium
ethylenediamine tetraacetate, this solution is yellow.
Xylenol Orange Solution –Dissolve 0.1 g of xylenol orange with 100 ml of water and filter, if
necessary.
Zinc, Acetate – analytical grade reagent of commerce

234
 APPENDIX - 5
ASSAYS AND CHEMICAL TESTS
5.1. Estimation of Sugars
The method of Lane and Eyonon by reduction of Fehling’s solution is the most generally applied
volumetric method, the use of methylene blue as an internal indicator increasing the accuracy of the
process. If strict attention be given to the details of the procedure and Table-16 are used to calculate
the results, a high degree of accuracy can be obtained.
Prepare a solution of the sugar of such concentration that more than 15 ml and less than 50 ml. will be
required to reduce all the copper in 10 ml. or 25 ml. of Fehling’s solution (0.1 to 0.8 g per 100 ml of
dextrose and 0.13 to 1.1 g per 100 ml. of lactose). For preliminary titration, measure accurately 10 ml.
or 25 ml. of Fehling’s solution into a conical flask of about 300 ml. capacity. From a burette add 15
ml. of the sugar solution and heat to boiling over asbestos covered wire gauze. Continue adding the
sugar solution in fairly large portions at fifteen second intervals, until from the colour of the mixture,
the copper appears to be nearly reduced; then boil for a minute or two, add 3 to 5 drops of 1 percent
methylene blue solution and continue the titration until the blue colour is discharged. Repeat the
titration, adding before heating, almost the full amount of sugar solution required to reduce all the
copper. After boiling has commenced maintain a moderate degree of ebullition for two minutes and
without removing the flame, add 3 to 5 drops of indicator and continue the titration so that it is just
complete in a total boiling time of exactly three minutes. The end point is clearly indicated by the
disappearance of the blue colour, the solution becoming orange. The flask must not be removed from
the gauze at any stage of the [Link] proportion of the various sugars, equivalent to 10 ml of
Fehling’s solution are given in the Table-16.
Fehling’s solution No. 1 contains 34.64 g of CuSO4, 5H2O and 0.5 ml of H2 SO4 in water to 500 ml.
No. 2 contains 176 g. of sodium potassium tartrate and 77 g of sodium hydroxide in water to 500 ml.
Mix equal volumes of No. 1 and No. 2 solutions immediately before use.
Clarifying agents may be required for dark or turbid solutions, the general reagents being a slight
excess of basic or neutral lead acetate or alumina cream, added before adjusting the volume . Alumina
cream is prepared by adding a slight excess of ammonia to a saturated solution of alum and washing
the precipitate by decantation until almost free from sulphates. Special reagents are used for definite
processes and should always be employed where directed. Excess of lead may be removed by
addition of anhydrous sodium carbonate to the filtered solution.

235
 Table No. 16
Total reducing sugar required for complete reduction of 10 ml Soxhlet soln to be used in connection with Lane-Eynon
general volumetric method
Solution containing besides invert sugar:-
1 g sucrose per 5 g sucrose per 10 g sucrose per 100 25 g sucrose per 100
no sucrose ml
100 ml 100 ml ml
Invert sugar

Invert sugar

Invert sugar

Invert sugar

Invert sugar
ml of sugar

mg invert

mg invert

mg invert

mg invert

mg invert
sugar per

sugar per

sugar per

sugar per

sugar per
required
solution

100 ml

100 ml

100 ml

100 ml

100 ml
factor

factor

factor

factor

factor
15 50.5 336 49.9 333 47.6 317 46.1 307 43.4 289
16 50.6 316 50.0 312 47.6 297 46.1 288 43.4 271
17 50.7 298 50.1 295 47.6 280 46.1 271 43.4 255
18 50.8 282 50.1 278 47.6 264 46.1 256 43.3 240
19 50.8 267 50.2 264 47.6 250 46.1 243 43.3 227
20 50.9 254.5 50.2 251.0 47.6 238.0 46.1 230.5 43.2 216
21 51.0 542.9 50.2 239.0 47.6 226.7 46.1 219.5 43.2 206
22 51.0 231.8 50.3 228.2 47.6 216.4 46.1 209.5 43.1 196
23 51.1 222.2 50.3 218.7 47.6 207.0 46.1 200.4 43.1 187
24 51.2 213.3 50.3 209.8 47.6 198.3 46.1 192.1 42.9 179
25 51.2 204.8 50.4 201.6 47.6 190.4 46.0 184.0 42.8 171
26 51.3 197.4 50.4 193.8 47.6 183.1 46.0 176.9 42.8 164
27 51.4 190.4 50.4 186.7 47.6 176.4 46.0 170.4 42.7 158
28 51.4 183.7 50.5 180.2 47.7 170.3 46.0 164.3 42.7 152
29 51.5 177.6 50.5 174.1 47.7 164.5 46.0 158.6 42.6 147
30 51.5 171.7 50.5 168.3 47.7 159.0 46.0 153.3 42.5 142
31 51.6 166.3 50.6 163.1 47.7 153.9 45.9 148.1 45.5 137
32 51.6 161.2 50.6 158.1 47.7 149.1 45.9 143.4 42.4 132
33 51.7 156.6 50.6 153.3 47.7 144.5 45.9 139.1 42.3 128
34 51.7 152.2 50.6 148.9 47.7 140.3 45.8 134.9 42.2 124
35 51.8 147.9 50.7 144.7 47.7 136.2 45.8 130.8 42.2 121
36 51.8 143.9 50.7 140.7 47.7 132.5 45.8 127.1 42.1 117
37 51.9 140.2 50.7 137.0 47.7 128.9 45.7 123.5 42.0 114
38 51.9 136.6 50.7 133.5 47.7 125.5 45.7 120.3 42.0 111
39 52.0 133.3 50.8 130.5 47.7 122.3 45.7 117.1 41.9 107
40 52.0 130.1 50.8 127.0 47.7 119.2 45.6 114.1 41.8 104
41 52.1 127.1 50.8 123.0 47.7 116.3 45.6 111.2 41.8 102
42 52.1 124.2 50.8 121.0 47.7 113.5 45.6 108.5 41.7 99
43 52.2 121.4 50.8 118.2 47.7 110.9 45.5 105.8 41.6 97
44 52.2 118.7 50.9 115.6 47.7 108.4 45.5 103.4 41.5 94
45 52.3 116.1 50.9 113.1 47.7 106.0 45.4 101.0 41.4 92
46 52.3 113.7 50.9 110.6 47.7 103.7 45.4 98.7 41.4 90
47 52.4 111.4 50.9 108.2 47.7 101.5 45.3 96.4 41.3 88
48 52.4 109.2 50.9 106.0 47.7 99.4 45.3 94.3 41.2 86
49 52.5 107.1 51.0 104.0 47.7 97.4 45.2 92.3 41.4 84
50 52.5 105.1 51.0 102.0 47.7 95.4 45.2 90.4 41.0 82

236
5.2. Determination of Aluminum:
Solutions:
10 per cent sodium hydroxide solution – Dissolve 10 g sodium hydroxide in 100 ml purified water.
EDTA solution 0.05 M – Dissolve 18.6120 g of sodium salt of EDTA in purified water and make up
to 1000 ml.
Zinc acetate solution 0.05M:- Dissolve 10.9690 g of zinc acetate in 50 ml purified water and few
drops of glacial acetic acid and dilute to 1000 ml.
Acetate buffer 5.5 pH – Dissolve 21.5 g of sodium acetate (AR) in 300 ml purified water containing 2
ml glacial acetic acid and dilute to 1000 ml
Xylenol orange indicator –Dissolve 0.2 g of xylenol orange indicator in 100 ml purified water with 2
ml acetic acid.
Procedure:
Take suitable aliquot from the stock solution in 250 ml beaker. Take 50 ml of 10 per cent sodium
hydroxide solution in another beaker. Neutralize the aliquot with sodium hydroxide solution. Transfer
the 10 per cent sodium hydroxide solution to aliquot with constant stirring. Add a pinch of sodium
carbonate into the solution. Boil the content on burner. Cool and filter through Whatman 40 No. filter
paper with pulp in 600 ml beaker. Wash the precipitate with hot water 6-8 times. Acidify the filtrate
with dil. hydrochloric acid and adjust pH 5.5. Add, in excess normally 25 ml 0.05M EDTA solution.
Add 25 ml acetate buffer solution. Boil the solution; cool and again adjust pH 5 – 5.5. Add 5-6 drops
of xylenol orange indicator. The colour changes from golden yellow to orange red at the end point.
Take 25 m l0.05 M EDTA solution and run a blank. Each of 1M EDTA is equivalent to 0.05098 g of
Al2O3.

5.3. Determination of Borax:

Powder 5-6 g of drug and incinerated at 4500 for 3 hours to get it ash. Dissolve the ash in 20 ml. of
purified water and left for 15 minutes, filter, wash the residue with 80 ml of purified water for 4-5
washings. If necessary, shake the contents and titrate with 0.5N hydrochloric acid using solution of
methyl orange as an indicator. Each ml of 0.5N hydrochloric acid is equivalent to 0.09536 g of Na2
B4O7.10H2O.

5.4. Determination of Calcium:

Solutions:
20 per cent Potassium hydroxide solution – Dissolve 200 g potassium hydroxide in purified water
and make up to 1000 ml.

237
Ammonia buffer solutions 9.5 pH – Dissolve 67.5 g ammonium chloride in 300 ml purified water,
add 570 ml ammonia solution and dilute to 1000 ml.
EDTA (Ethylene Diethyl Tetra Acetic acid) solution 0.05 M – Dissolve 18.6120 g of solution salt of
EDTA and in water and make up to 1000 ml.
Triethanolamine 20per cent Solution – 200 ml of triethanolamine, adds 800 ml water and make up to
1000 ml.
Eriochrome Black T indicator 0.1per cent solution – Dissolve 0.10 g indicator in 100 ml of Methanol.
Patterns & Reeders indicators 0.1per cent solution – Dissolve 0.01g indicator in 100 ml of Methanol.
Procedure:
Take one part of filtrate reserved from Iron (Fe) estimation. Add 5 ml Triethanolamine 20 per cent
solution. Add a pinch of Hydroxylamine hydrochloride. Add 25-30 ml potassium hydroxide 20 per
cent solution. Add 4-5 drops of Patterns and Reeders indicator, which imparts rose red colour. Titrate
the solution against standard EDTA solution. The colour changes from rose red to Prussian blue mark
end point.
Each ml of 1M EDTA solution is equivalent to 0.04008 g Calcium.

5.5. Determination of Copper:

Solutions:
Standard 0.1 N sodium thiosulphate solutions
Potassium iodide
Starch 1per cent solution - Dissolve 1 g in water, boil and make up 100ml.
Procedure:
Take suitable aliquot from the stock solution in a beaker. Add approx. 1.0 g sodium fluoride. Add
ammonia solution and precipitate solution. Add acetic acid to dissolve the precipitate. Boil and cool
in water bath. Add approx 1.0 g potassium iodide. Titrate the liberated iodine against 0.1 N sodium
thoisulphate (hypo) solutions by adding starch solution as indicator. The liberated iodine colour
blackish brown changes to white at the end point. Calculate copper value against 1 ml of hypo
solution titrating against standard 1000 ppm copper solution.
Each ml of 1N Na2S2O3 solution is equivalent to 0.06357 g of Copper

5.6. Determination of Iron :

Preparation of sample solution:
Ignite a suitable quantity of the sample (in the presence of organic matter) in a crucible in a muffle
furnace at 500-5500 until the residue is free from organic matter. Moisten with 5-10 ml of

238
hydrochloric acid, boil for two min, add 30 ml of water, heat on the water bath for few min, filter and
wash thoroughly the residue with water and make up to volume in a volumentric flask.
Solutions:
Stannous chloride solution – Dissolve 5 g stannous chloride (A.R) in 25 ml Conc. hydrochloric acid
and dilute to 100 ml (5 per cent solution).
Mercuric chloride – saturated solution in water.
Sulphuric acid + ortho phosphoric acid mixture – take 60 ml water, add 15 ml conc. sulphuric acid
and 15 ml H3PO4 cool and dilute to 1000ml.
Diphenylamine barium sulphonate – Dissolve 0.25 g in 100 ml water.
0.1 N Standard potassium dichromate solution. Dissolve 4.9035 g AR grade in water and dilute to
1000 ml.
Procedure:
Take /withdraw a suitable aliquot from the stock solution in 250 ml in duplicate. Dilute to about 100
ml with distilled water. Add 1-2 drops of methyl red indicator. Add 1-2 g ammonium chloride. Add
dil. Ammonium solution till brown precipitate appears. Boil the solution with ppt. for 4-5 minutes.
Cool the content and filter through Whatman 41 no. filter paper. Wash the residue with hot water 4-6
times. Dissolve the residue in dil. HCl in 250 ml beaker. Wash with hot water and make the volume
to 100 ml approx. Boil the solution on burner. Reduce the Fe3+ to Fe2+ by adding stannous chloride
solution drop wise till solution becomes colourless.
Add 1-2 drops of stannous chloride solution in excess. Cool the content in water. Add 10-15 ml 10
percent solution of mercuric chloride. Add 25 ml acid mixture. Add 2-3 drops of diphenylamine
barium sulphonate indicator. Add distilled water, if required. Titrate against standard potassium
dichromate solution. Appearance of violet colour show end point.
Each ml of 1N K2Cr2O7 solution is equivalent to 0.05585 g Iron
Each ml of 1N K2Cr2O7 solution is equivalent to 0.7985 g Fe2O3

5.7. Determination of Magnesium:

Take another part of filtrate reserved from Fe estimation. Add 5 ml triethanolamine 20 per cent
solution. Add a pinch of hydroxylamine hydrochloride. Add 25-30 ml ammonia buffer 9.5 pH. Add
4-5 drops of eriochrome black T indicator. The colour changes from rose red to blue marks the end
point.
Each ml of 1M EDTA solution is equivalent to 0.0409 g of MgO.

239
5.8. Determination of Mercury:
Powder 0.5 g drug and treat with 7 ml of conc. nitric acid and 15 ml of conc. sulphuric acid in a
kjeldahl flask; heat under reflux gently at first then strongly for 30 minutes. Cool and add 50 ml conc.
nitric acid boil so as to remove the brown fumes. Continue the addition of nitric acid and boiling until
the liquid is colourless; cool, wash the condenser with 100 ml of water, remove the flask and add 1.0
per cent potassium permangnate solution drop wise until pink colour persists. Decolourize it by
adding 6.0 per cent hydrogen peroxide drop wise to remove excess of potassium permangnate
followed by 3.0 ml of conc. nitric acid and titrate with 0.1N ammonium thiocyanate solutions using
ferric alum as indicator.
Each ml. of 0.1N NH4SCN solution is equivalent to 0.01003 g Mercury.

5.9. Determination of Silica (SiO2):

Weigh 0.5 g (in case of high silica) or 1.0 g (low silica) finely powdered and dried sample in a
platinum crucible (W1). Add 4-5 g anhydrous sodium carbonate into the crucible. Mix thoroughly and
cover the crucible with lid, if necessary. Place the crucible in muffle furnace. Allow the temperature
to rise gradually to reach 900-9500 and keep on this temp. for about ½ hour to complete the fusion.
Take out the crucible and allow cool at room temperature. Extract the cooled mass in 25-30 ml dil
hydrochloric acid in 250 ml beaker. Heat on hot plate/burner to dissolve the contents. Wash the
crucible with distilled water. Keep the beaker on water bath and allow dry the mass. Dehydrate back
and powder the mass. Take out the beaker and allow cooling at room temperature. Add 25-30 ml
hydrochloric acid dilute to 100 ml distilled water. Boil the content and allow cool. Filter through
Whatman no 40. filter paper. Wash the residue with hot water 6-8 times. Place the residue along with
filter paper in platinum crucible. Ignite at 900-9500 for 2-3 min. Allow to cool and weigh as SiO2.

5.10. Estimation of Sodium and Potassium by Flame Photometer:

Preparation of Standard solutions
Weigh 2.542 g of AR sodium chloride and dissolve in purified water and make upto 1000 ml in a
volumetric flask. Dilute 1 ml of the stock solution to 100 ml. This gives standard of 1mg of sodium
per 100 ml (10 ppm). Prepare 20, 30, 40 and 50 ppm standard solution.
Weigh 1.9115g of AR potassium chloride and dissolve in purified water and make up to 1000 ml in a
volumetric flask. Dilute 1ml of the stock solution to 100ml. This gives standard of 1mg of sodium per
100 ml (10 ppm). Prepare 20, 30, 40 and 50 ppm standard solution.
Preparation of Sample solution
Weigh 10 g of sample in a preweighed silica dish and heat in a muffle furnace for 1hr at 600º. Cool
and dissolve the ash in purified water and make up to 100ml in a volumetric flask.

240
Switch on the instrument first and then the pump. Keep distilled water for aspiration and allow it to
stand for 15 min (warming time). Open the glass cylinder and ignite the flame. Adjust the instrument
to zero.
Introduce the maximum concentration solution and adjust it to 100. Again introduce the purified
water so that instrument shows zero. Then introduce the standard solution in ascending concentration.
Note down the reading each time. Introduce the purified water for aspiration in between the standard
solutions. Introduce the sample solution and if it is within the range take the reading. If it exceeds
limit 100 then dilute the solution till the reading is within the range. Plot the curve with concentration
in ppm against reading obtained. Find out the concentration of the sample solution. Take two or three
readings and find out the average. Find out the concentration of sodium and potassium.

5.11. Determination of Sodium Chloride:

Dissolve about 2-3 g accurately weighed drug in 25 ml of purified water, leave for 30 minutes and
filter. Wash the filter paper completely with purified water and the filtrate is made 100 ml in
volumetric flask, make the solution homogeneous, titrate 25 ml of this solution with 0.1 N silver
nitrate solution using potassium chromate as indicator. The end point shows the light brick red colour.
Each ml. of 0.1 N Ag NO3 solution is equivalent to 0.005845 g of NaCl.

5.12. Determination of Sulphur:

Solution:
Carbon tetrachloride saturated with Bromine
Barium chloride – 10 per cent solution in water.
Procedure:
Take 0.5 – 1 g powdered sample in 250 ml beaker. Add 10 ml carbon tetrachloride saturated with
bromine. Keep in cold condition in fume chamber over night. Add 10 – 15 ml conc. nitric acid.
Digest on water bath. Add 10 ml conc. hydrochloric acid, digest it to expel nitrate fumes till syrupy
mass. Cool and extract with hydrochloric acid, make volume to 100 ml. Boil and filter through
Whatman No 40. filter paper. Wash the residue with hot water. Filter through Whatman 41 No. paper
in 600 ml beaker. Acidify the filtrate with hydrochloric acid. Add 20 ml of 10 per cent Barium
chloride solution. Stir the solution and digest on burner. Allow to settle BaSO4 precipitate over night.
Filter the precipitate through Whatman No. 42 filter paper. Wash the precipitate with water. Ignite the
precipitate in muffle furnace in pre weighed platinum crucible up to 8500. Allow to cool and weigh.
Each g of weight of precipitate is equivalent to 0.13734 g of Sulphur.

241
5.13. Qualitative Reactions :
5.13.1 Sodium
5.13.1.a. Sodium compounds, moistened with hydrochloric acid and introduced on a platinum
wire into the flame of a Bunsen burner, give a yellow colour to the flame.
5.13.1.b. Solutions of sodium salts yield, with solution of uranyl zinc acetate, a yellow
crystalline precipitate.

5.13.2. Potassium
5.13.2.a. Potassium compounds moistened with hydrochloric acid and introduced on platinum
wire into the flame of a Bunsen burner, give a violde colour to the flame.
5.13.2.b. Moderately strong solutions of potassium salts, which have been previously ignited to
remove ammonium salts, give a white, crystalline precipitate with perchloric acid.
5.13.2.c. Solutions of potassium salts, which have been previously ignited to free them from
ammonium salts and from which iodine has been removed, give a yellow precipitate
with solution os sodium cobaltinitrte and acetic acid.

5.13.3. Magnesium
5.13.3.a. Solutions of magnesium salts yield a white precipitate with solution of ammonium
carbonate, especially on boiling, but yield no precipitate in the presence of solution of
ammonium chloride.
5.13.3.b. Solutions of magnesium salts yield a white crystalline precipitate with solution of
sodium phosphate in the presence of ammonium salts and dilute ammonia solution.
5.13.3.c. Solutions of magnesium salts yield with solution of sodium hydroxide a white
precipitate insoluble in excess of the reagent, but soluble in solution of ammonium
chloride.
5.13.3.d. Solutions of magnesium salts in 1N hydrochloric acid, yield blue precipitate with
solutions of 1drop of magneson II reagent and 3 ml 1N sodium hydroxide solution.

5.13.4. Carbonates and Bicarbonates

5.13.4.a. Carbonates and bicarbonates effervesce with dilute acids, liberating carbon doxide;
the gas is colourless and produces a wihte precipitate in solution of calcium
hydroxide.
5.13.4.b. Solutions of carbonates produce a brownish-red precipitate with solution of mercuric
chloride; Solutions of bicarbonates produce a white precipitate.

242
5.13.4.c. Solutions of carbonates yield, with solution of silver nitrate, a with precipitate which
becomes yellow on the addition of an excess of the reagent and brown on boiling the
mixture. The precipitate is soluble in dilute ammonia solution and in dilute nitric acid.
5.13.4.d. Solutions of carbonates produce, at room temperature, a white precipitate with
solution of magnesium sulphate. Solutions of bicarbonates yield no precipitate with
the reagent at room temperature, but on boiling the mixture a white precipitate is
formed.
5.13.4.e. Solutions of bicarbonates, on boiling, liberate carbon dioxide which produces a white
precipitate in solution of calcium hydroxide.

5.13.5. Sulphates
5.13.5.a. Solutions of sulphates yield, with solution of barium chloride, a white precipitate
insoluble in hydrochloric acid.
5.13.5.b. Solutions of sulphates yield, with solution of lead acetate, a white precipitate soluble
in solution of ammonium acetate and in solution of sodium hydroxide.

5.13.6. Chlorides
5.13.6.a. Chlorides, heated with manganese dioxide and sulphuric acid, yield chlorine,
recognisable by its odour and by giving a blue colour with potassium iodide and
solution of starch.
5.13.6.b. Solutions of chlorides yield, on acidification with dilute nitric acid, a curdy white
precipitate with few drops of 5 per cent w/v silver nitrate solution.

5.13.7. Calcium
Solutions of calcium salts yield, with solution of ammonium carbonate, a white precipitate which
after boiling and cooling the mixture, is insoluble in solution of ammonium chloride.

5.13.8. Sulphides
Solutions of sulphides yield, with solution of 5 per cent w/v silver nitrate solution, a black precipitate.
Dissolve 1 g of sample in 10 ml of deionised water and filter. Add 4 ml of 5 per cent w/v silver nitrate
solution to the filtrate. A black precipitate appears.

5.13.9. Test for Mercury :

Weight about 0.1 g of the formulation, dissolve in hydrochloric acid and filter. Pass hydrogen
sulphide gas to the filtrate, a precipitate appears. Filter the solution and wash the precipitate with
water and redissolve in dilute hydrochloric acid/nitric acid. The presence of Mercury is indicated by
appearance of violet colour when added to dithizone solution.

243
5.13.10. Test for Boron :
Dissolve 0.1 g of formulation in 10 ml of water and filter. Add 1 ml. of carminic acid (0.5 percent in
concentrate sulphuric acid) to 1 ml. of filtrate. Blue colour indicates the presence of Boron.

5.13.11. Test for Sulphur:

Extract 1.0 g of the sample with 10 ml of carbon disulphide. Filter the carbon disulphide solution and
evaporate the solvent. To the residue add 10 ml of 10 % alcoholic potash and boil until the sulphur is
dissolved. Dilute with water, oxidize by adding hydrogen peroxide solution (~6 per cent w/v of H2O2)
in excess and heat on a water bath for 30 min. Acidify with hydrochloric acid, filter and to the filtrate
add barium chloride solution (10 % w/v in water). A White precipitate indicates the presence of
sulphur.

5.13.12. Test for anthraquinones :

Add 0.5 g of formulation in 50 ml of water, boil until nearly dissolved & cool the solution. Add 0.5 g
of Kieslguhr and filter. Apply following test to the filterate.

5.13.13. Test for Hi´gu:

Boil 0.2 g of formulation with 2 ml hydrochloric acid for about 1 minute, cool, dilute with an equal
volume of water and filter into 3 ml of dilute solution of Ammonia, if fluorescence is produced.
Heat 5 ml of filtrate with 0.2 g of borax, add few drops of this solution to a test tube nearly filled with
water a light green fluoresces produced.

244
 APPENDIX-6
AYURVEDIC DEFINITIONS AND METHODS
[Link]¡ Paribh¡À¡:
6.1.1. Kalka:
Kalka is the fine paste of macerated fresh plant material.
(Paribh¡À¡ Prabandha)

6.1.2. Kv¡tha / KaÀ¡ya:

Kv¡tha or KaÀ¡ya is the filtered liquid obtained by boiling coarse powder of drug(s) in proportion of
4, 8 or 16 [M¤du Dravya - 4, Madhyama Dravya - 8 and Ka¶hina Dravya - 16 respectively] times of
water and reduced to one-fourth.
(á¡r´gadhara saÆhit¡ - II - 9/3)

6.1.3. C£r¸a:
The fine sieved powder of well dried drug(s) is called C£r¸a.
(á¡r´gadhara saÆhit¡ - II - 6/1)

6.1.4. Pu¶ap¡ka Svarasa:

It is a kind of procedure, where juice of fresh green herb will be obtained by the process of Pu¶ap¡ka.
Bundle the Kalka of green plant material in leaves of K¡¿mar¢, Va¶a, Jamb£ etc., and cover with clay
in layers of about 2 cm thickness. Dry and place amidst fire till becomes reddish. Open the bundle
and strain the juice from Kalka through a muslin cloth.
(á¡r´gadhara saÆhit¡ - II - 1/21-23)

6.1.5. Svarasa:
The liquid part of fresh macerated plant material obtained by pressing through a fresh, muslin cloth is
called as Svarasa.
(á¡r´gadhara saÆhit¡ - II - 1/2)

6.1.6. Hima KaÀ¡ya:

Hima KaÀ¡ya is the extractive obtained by straining of 48 g [1 part] of powdered drug(s) soaked in
288 ml [6 parts] of water overnight.
(á¡r´gadhara saÆhit¡ - II - 4/1)

245
6.1.7. Ph¡¸¶a
Ph¡¸¶a is the extractive obtained by pouring four times of boiling water on the powdered drug(s) and
strained when cooled.
(Paribh¡À¡prad¢pa 2/26)

6.2. S¡m¡nya paribh¡À¡:

6.2.1. Kajjal¢:
Kajjal¢ is the fine black colored powder obtained by triturating Gandhaka (Sulphur) and P¡rada
(Mercury) without adding any liquid.
(Rasatara´gi¸¢ - 2/27)

6.2.2. K¡µjika:
Sour liquid prepared with of rice grain etc. is called as K¡µjika. Take ÀaÀ¶ika ¿¡li in an earthen vessel,
add five parts of water and boil. Shift the preparation into another earthen vessel, add three parts of
water and seal the mouth of the vessel tightly. Place the vessel aside for a period of two to three
weeks at regulated temperature during which the liquid becomes sour.
(Paribh¡À¡ Prabandha)

6.2.3. KÀ¡ra Preparation:

Cut the drug into small pieces, wash, clean and dry well.
Put few pieces in an earthen pot or iron vessel and ignite. As they burn, add more and more pieces till
all the pieces burn completely and reduce to ash. Allow the ash to cool.
Add water to the ash in the ratio of 6: 1, mix well and allow to stand overnight.
Next day decant the supernatant liquid, strain repeatedly through muslin cloth till a clear filtrate is
obtained.
Take the filtrate in a stainless steel vessel and heat it over moderate flame to evaporate the water to
obtain a solid salty white residue (KÀ¡ra), at the bottom of the vessel. Allow to cool completely.
Store it in amber coloured glass containers and pack them air-tight to protect from light and moisture.

6.2.4. C£r¸odaka:
1 C£r¸a (Lime powder) 250 mg
2 Water 60 ml
Take 250 mg of lime powder in a stainless steel vessel, add 60 ml of water and keep aside for 9 h.
Decant the supernatant layers through a filter [Link] filtrate is known as C£r¸odaka.
(Rasatara´gi¸¢ – 11)

6.2.5. Mastu Preparation:

Tie Godadhi in a muslin cloth and allow the liquid part of it to get separated to obtain the Mastu.

246
6.2.6. PrakÀepa:
Fine powder form of the drug(s), which is added to a kalpa such as Leha, Āsava AriÀ¶a etc. before
administration is known as PrakÀepa.

6.2.7. Bh¡van¡:
Bh¡van¡ is the process by which powders of drugs are levigated to a soft mass with specified liquids
and allowed to dry.
(Rasatara´gi¸¢ - 2/49)

6.2.8. áodhana:
áodhana is the process which removes the impurities to some extent and helps in increasing the
therapeutic values of the drugs.
[Link]. Godant¢ áodhana:
1 Godant¢ 1 part
2 Nimbu Svarasa Fr. QS
or
3 Dro¸apuÀp¢ Svarasa Pl. QS
Bundle small pieces of Godant¢ in a cloth, suspend in Nimbu or Dro¸apuÀp¢ svarasa in a Dol¡yantra,
and boil for 3 h
(Rasatara´gi¸¢ - 11/239)
[Link]. Gairika áodhana:

1 Gairika 1 part
2 Godugdha QS
Fine powder of Gairika is to be levigated with Cow's milk.
(Rasaratnasamuccaya - 3/49)
or
1 Gairika 1 part
2 Gogh¤ta QS
Fry the fine powder of Gairika in little amount of Gh¤ta.
(Ëyurveda prak¡¿a - 2/272)

247
[Link]. Gandhaka áodhana:
1 Gandhaka 1 part
2 Godugdha QS
or
3 Bh¤´gar¡ja Svarasa Pl. QS
Melt small pieces of Gandhaka in an iron pan smeared with Gh¤ta and pour in to a pot containing
Godugdha or Bh¤´gar¡ja svarasa. Collect after cooling. Repeat the process for seven times. At the
end of the seventh process, wash and dry the material.
(Ras¡m¤tam - 2/3)
[Link]. Guggulu áodhana:
Remove manually the big pieces of sandstone, glass, wood etc. if any from the Guggulu. Cut Guggulu
into small pieces, bundle in a cloth and immerse in Dol¡yantra containing any one of the following
liquids.
Gom£tra
Godugdha
Triphal¡ kaÀ¡ya
V¡s¡ kaÀ¡ya / svarasa or
Nirgu¸·¢ svarasa with Haridr¡ c£r¸a
Boil till the whole amount of Guggulu passes into the liquid through the cloth. Discard the residue
present in the bundle if any.
Filter the liquid through muslin cloth and heat the mixture till a semi solid mass is obtained.
Dry in sun and store until further use.
[Link]. Ùa´ka¸a áodhana:
Take small pieces of Ùa´ka¸a in an iron pan, fry till complete dehydration.
(Ëyurveda prak¡¿a - 2/244)

[Link]. Tuttha áodhana:

1 Tuttha 1 part
2 Raktacandana kv¡tha Ht. Wd. QS
3 MaµjiÀ¶h¡ kv¡tha Rt. QS
4 Triphal¡ kv¡tha P. QS
Prepare fine powder of Tuttha and levigate with the individual liquid medias number (ii) to (iv)
mentioned above seven times each.
(Ras¡m¤tam - 3/74)

248
[Link]. Bhall¡taka áodhana:
1 Bhall¡taka Fr. 1 part
2 Gom£tra QS
3 Godugdha QS
4 IÀ¶ik¡ c£r¸a QS
5 Water QS
Method of Preparation:-Take Bhall¡taka, remove the attached thalamus and soak in Gom£tra for 7
days. Replace Gom£tra every 24 h with fresh Gom£tra. After 7 days, rinse the Bhall¡taka twice with
water, to wash off the Gom£tra. Soak Bhall¡taka in Godugdha for 7 days, replacing Godugdha every
24 h with fresh Godugdha. After 7 days, rinse the Bhall¡taka 2 or 3 times with water to wash off the
Godugdha. Put the Bhall¡taka in a thick jute bag containing coarse brick powder and rub carefully,
with a view to reduce the oil content in Bhall¡taka. Wash the processed seeds with water and dry.
(Ras¡m¤tam- Pari¿iÀ¶a)
[Link]. ManaÅ¿il¡ áodhana:
1 ManaÅ¿il¡ 1 part
2 Agastya patra svarasa Lf. QS
or
3 ᤴgavera (Ërdraka) Svarasa Rz. QS
Prepare fine powder of ManaÅ¿il¡ and levigate with any one of the above specified liquid media for
seven times.
(Rasaratnasamuccaya - 3/93)
[Link]. Vatsan¡bha áodhana:

1 ViÀa (Vatsan¡bha) Rt. Tr. 1 part

2 Gom£tra QS
Take small pieces of Vatsan¡bha, bundle in muslin cloth, and soak in Gom£tra for three days,
replacing the later every day. Wash the processed material and dry.
(Ras¡m¤tam- Pari¿iÀ¶a)
[Link]. Karav¢ra áodhana:
1 Karav¢raka (Karav¢ra) Rt. 1 part
2 Godugdha QS
Take small pieces of Karav¢ra, bundle in muslin cloth, and perform Svedana in Dol¡yantra with
Godugdha for 2 h. Wash the processed material and dry.
(á¡r´gadhara SaÆhit¡, Madhyamakha¸·a Adhy¡ya 12:300)

249
[Link]. Citraka áodhana:
1 Rakta Citraka (Citraka) Rt. 1 part
2 C£r¸odaka QS
Take small pieces of Karav¢ra, soak in C£r¸odaka. Wash the processed material and dry.
(Rasatara´gi¸¢ 24:575)
[Link]. L¡´gal¢ áodhana:
1 L¡´gal¢ Rt. 1 part
2 Gom£tra QS
Take small pieces of Karav¢ra, soak in Gom£tra for 24 h. Wash the processed material and dry.
(Ëyurvedaprak¡¿a 6)
[Link]. áil¡jatu áodhana:
1 áil¡jatu 2 parts
2 Hot water 4 parts
3 Triphal¡ Kv¡tha P. 1 part
Take powder of áil¡jatu, add specified amounts of hot water and Triphal¡ Kv¡tha so as to disengage
the soluble matter. Allow to settle down and decant the supernatant layers.
Repeat the process till a clear liquid is obtained.
Concentrate the decanted material to thick paste over moderate heat.
Dry in sun rays and preserve for further purpose.
(Rasatara´gi¸¢ 22/69-78)
[Link]. Harit¡la áodhana:
1 Harit¡la 1 part
2 K£Àm¡¸·a Toya or Fr. QS
3 Tila KÀ¡ra Jala or Pl. QS
4 C£r¸odaka QS
Take small pieces of Harat¡la, bundle in clean muslin cloth, suspend in a Dol¡yantra containing any
one of the above liquid media. Boil for three hours, dry in sun rays and preserve for further purpose.
(Rasaratnasamuccaya - 3/70)
[Link]. Hi´gu áodhana:
1 R¡ma¶ha (Hi´gu) Exd. 1 part
2 Ëjya (Gogh¤ta) QS
Prepare fine powder of Hi´gu and fry it in sufficient amounts of Gogh¤ta, till it becomes crisp.
(Rasatara´gi¸¢, 24/578)

250
[Link]. Vijay¡ áodhana:
1 Vijay¡ Lf. 1 part
2 Jala QS
Put Vijay¡ in a muslin cloth bag and wash in water till free from terbdity and dry.
(Ras¡m¤tam, Pari¿iÀ¶a 8/147)
[Link]. K¡¿¢¿a áodhana:
1 K¡¿¢¿a 1 part
2 Bh¤´ga n¢ra (Bh¤´gar¡ja) Pl. QS
Bh¡van¡ is given with Bh¤´gar¡ja rasa, 3 times.
(Ras¡m¤tam, Adhy¡ya 3/158)
[Link]. Sauv¢r¡µjana áodhana:

1 Sauv¢r¡µjana API Lead sulphide 1 part

2 Bh¤´gar¡jadrava (Bh¤´gar¡ja) Eclipta alba Pl. juice QS
Method
Powder Sauv¢r¡µjana and give Bh¡van¡ with Bh¤´gar¡ja svarasa for 7 days.
(Rasaratnasamuccaya, Adhy¡ya 3; 107)

[Link]. Naras¡ra áodhana:

1 Naras¡ra Sal ammoniac 1 part
2 Jala Potable water 3 parts
Method
Add 3 times Jala to Naras¡ra, make a solution and filter. Boil the solution till water is evaporated.
(Rasatara´gi¸¢, Tara´ga 14; 3-4.)
[Link]. P¡rada S¡m¡nya áodhana:
1 P¡rada (Mercury) 2 parts
2 Sudh¡raja (Lime powder) 2 parts
3 Rasona (La¿una) Bl. 2 parts
4 Saindhava Lava¸a (Rock salt) 1 part
Take equal parts of P¡rada and Sudh¡raja, triturate for three days, and filter carefully through a clean
cloth.
Add dehusked Rasona and Saindhava lava¸a to the P¡rada, triturate till the paste of Rasona becomes
black. Wash with warm water and separate the P¡rada with caution.
(Rasatara´gi¸¢ - 5/ 27-30)

251
[Link]. AÀ¶asaÆsk¡ra of P¡rada
AÀ¶asaÆsk¡ra of P¡rada have been prescribed in Ayurvedic classics for purification and to increase
the therapeutic activities.
[Link].a. Svedana:
(Rasah¤dayatantra - 2/3)
1 P¡rada (Mercury) 1 part
2 Ësur¢ (R¡jik¡) Sd. 1/16th part
3 Pa¶u (Saindhava Lava¸a) 1/16th part
4 áu¸¶h¢ Rz. 1/16th part
5 Marica Fr. 1/16th part
6 Pippal¢ Fr 1/16th part
7 Citraka Rt. 1/16th part
8 Ërdraka Rz. 1/16th part
9 M£laka Rt. Tr. 1/16th part
10 K¡µjika QS
Method:
Take the ingredients numbered 2 to 9 in to wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to
prepare kalka (homogeneous blend). Take leaf of Bh£rja (Betula utilis) or Kadal¢ (Musa
paradisiacal), place it over four folded cloth, smear with the prepared Kalka, and gently place P¡rada
over it. Place the remaining part of Kalka if any, over the P¡rada. Suspend the po¶¶al¢ in a Dol¡yantra
containing K¡µjika. Boil for three days. Remove P¡rada and Kalka, wash carefully with warm water
and collect P¡rada.
[Link].b Mardana:
(Rasah¤dayatantra - 2/4)
1 P¡rada (Mercury) 1 part
2 Gu·a 1/16th part
3 Dagdhor¸¡ 1/16th part
4 Lava¸a (Saindhava Lava¸a) 1/16th part
5 Mandira dh£ma 1/16th part
6 IÀ¶ik¡ c£r´a 1/16th part
7 Ësur¢ (R¡jik¡) Sd. 1/16th part
8 K¡µjika QS
Method:
Take the ingredients numbered 1 to 7 in Khalvayantra, add with required amounts of K¡µjika and
levigate for three days. Remove P¡rada and Kalka, wash carefully with warm water and collect
P¡rada.

252
[Link].c. M£rcchana:
(Rasah¤dayatantra - 2/6)
1 P¡rada (Mercury) 1 part
2 G¤hakany¡ (Kum¡r¢) Lf. 1/16th part
3 Har¢tak¢ P. 1/16th part
4 Bibh¢taka P. 1/16th part
5 Ëmalak¢ P. 1/16th part
6 Citraka Rt. 1/16th part
Method:
Take the ingredients numbered 3 to 6, dry, powder and pass through 180 µm IS Sieve. Add
ingredient number 2 and grind with sufficient quantity of water to prepare Kalka. Add P¡rada to the
Kalka and triturate for three days.
[Link].d. Utth¡pana:
(Rasah¤dayatantra - 2/7)

1 P¡rada (Mercury) 1 part

2 K¡µjika QS
Method:
Collect the P¡rada at the end of M£rcchana process and subject it to Utth¡pana, and wash with
K¡µjika and collect the P¡rada carefully.
[Link].e. P¡tana:
The process of P¡tana is again of three types, viz. Írdhvap¡tana, AdhaÅp¡tana and Tiryakp¡tana.
Ūrdhvapātana:
(Ëyurveda prak¡¿a - 1/68-71)
1 P¡rada (Mercury) 3 parts
2 Ravi (T¡mra) 1 part
3 Jamb¢ra svarasa (Nimbu) Fr. juice QS
Method:
Take P¡rada and T¡mra in the specified ratio and levigate with Jamb¢ra svarasa to prepare thick
paste. Apply the paste over the lower pot of Úamaru yantra and apply heat for 12 h. Collect the
P¡rada settled at the upper pot gently.

253
AdhaÅp¡tana:
(Ëyurveda prak¡¿a - 1/75-77)
1 P¡rada (Mercury) 1 part
2 Har¢tak¢ P. 1/16th part
3 Bibh¢taka P. 1/16th part
4 Ëmalak¢ P. 1/16th part
5 áigru St. Bk. 1/16th part
6 Citraka Rt. 1/16th part
7 Saindhava Lava¸a 1/16th part
8 Ësur¢ (R¡jik¡) Sd. 1/16th part
9 Nimbu rasa QS
Method:
Take the ingredients numbered 2 to 6, dry, powder and pass through 180 µm I. S. sieve. Add the
powders to P¡rada and levigate by adding ingredients numbered 7 to 9 to prepare fine paste. Apply
the paste in the AdhaÅp¡tana yantra, subject to heat and collect P¡rada.
Tiryakp¡tana:
(Ëyurveda prak¡¿a - 1/79-81)
1 P¡rada (Mercury) 3 parts
2 Ravi (T¡mra) 1 part
3 Jamb¢ra svarasa (Nimbu) QS
Method:
Take P¡rada obtained at the end of AdhaÅp¡tana process, add with T¡mra and levigate with Jamb¢ra
svarasa to prepare thick paste. Apply the paste in the Tiryakp¡tana yantra, subject to heat and collect
P¡rada.
[Link].f. Rodhana / Bodhana:
(Rasendrac£·¡ma¸i - 4/88)
1 P¡rada (Mercury) 3 parts
2 Saindhava Lava¸a jala QS
Method:
Place the P¡rada in a pot containing Saindhava lava¸a jala and seal the mouth of the pot tightly. Place
the pot undisturbed for three days. Decant the water on the fourth day to collect the P¡rada.
[Link].g. Niy¡mana:
(Rasah¤dayatantra - 2/10)
1 P¡rada (Mercury) 1 part
2 Pha¸i (N¡gavall¢) Lf. 1/16th part

254
 3 La¿una Bl. 1/16th part
4 Ambuj¡ 1/16th part
5 Karko¶¢ 1/16th part
6 M¡rkava (Bh¤´gar¡ja) Pl. 1/16th part
7 Ciµcik¡ (Ciµc¡) Lf. 1/16th part
8 K¡µj¢ QS
Method:
Prepare Kalka of the ingredients numbered 2to 7, add with P¡rada and prepare a po¶¶al¢. Suspend the
po¶¶al¢ in a Dol¡yantra containing K¡µjika and boil. Remove P¡rada and Kalka, wash carefully with
warm water and collect P¡rada.
[Link]. h. D¢pana / Sand¢pana:
(Rasah¤dayatantra - 2/11)
1 P¡rada (Mercury) 1 part
2 Bh£ (Spha¶ik¡) 1/16th part
3 Khaga (K¡¿¢¿a) 1/16th part
4 Ùa´ka¸a 1/16th part
5 Marica Fr. 1/16th part
6 Lava¸a (Saindhava Lava¸a) 1/16th part
7 Ësur¢ (R¡jik¡) Sd. 1/16th part
8 áigru Sd. 1/16th part
9 K¡µjika QS
Method:
Prepare Kalka of the ingredients numbered 2 to 8, add with P¡rada and prepare a po¶¶al¢. Suspend the
po¶¶al¢ in a Dol¡yantra containing K¡µjka and boil for three days. Remove P¡rada and kalka, wash
carefully with warm water and collect P¡rada.

6.2.9. M£rchan¡:
M£rcchana is the process which removes Ëma doÀa of Taila / Gh¤ta and provides good color and
fragrance. M£rcchana process is to be followed before any Sneha preparation.
[Link]. M£rcchan¡ of Era¸·a Taila:
(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, Jvar¡dhik¡ra)
Ingredients:
1 MaµjiÀ¶h¡ API Rubia cordifolia P. 12 g
2 Must¡ API Cyperus rotundus Rz. 12 g
3 Dh¡nyaka API Coriandrum sativum Sd. 12 g

255
4 Ëmalak¢ API Emblica officinalis P. 12 g
5 Har¢tak¢ API Terminalia chebula P. 12 g
6 Bibh¢taka API Terminalia belerica P. 12 g
7 Agnimantha API Clerodendron phlomidis∗ Rt. 12 g
8 Hr¢vera API Coleus vettiveroides Rt. 12 g
9 Kharj£ra API Phoenix sylvestris Fr. 12 g
10 Va¶a API Ficus religiosa Lf. Bud. 12 g
11 Haridr¡ API Curcuma longa Rz. 12 g
12 D¡ruharidr¡ API Berberis aristata St. 12 g.
13 Nalik¡ (Tvak API) Cinnamomum tamala St. Bk. 12 g.
14 áu¸¶h¢ API Zingiber officinale 12 g.
15 Ketak¢ API Pandanus odoratissimus Rt. 12 g.
16 Dadhi (API) Curd 1.536 l
17 K¡µjika API 1.536 l
18 Era¸·a taila (API) Castor oil Oil 768 ml
Method of preparation:
Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 15 of the formulation composition powder separately
and pass through 180 µm I. S. sieve (Kalka dravyas).
Transfer the powdered ingredients to wet grinder, grind with sufficient quantity of water to prepare
Kalka (homogeneous blend).
Take Era¸·a taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat it mildly.
Add increments of Kalka. Stir thoroughly while adding Dadhi and K¡µjika.
Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the first
hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
Start the heating next day and observe the boiling mixture for appearance of froth (phenodgama) and
constantly check the Kalka for formation of varti (madhyama p¡ka lakÀa¸a).
Expose the varti and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture. Stop heating when the Kalka forms a varti and the froth subsides. Filter while hot (about
800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
Pack it in tightly closed glass containers to protect from light and moisture.

∗
Official substitute

256
[Link]. M£rcchan¡ of Gh¤ta:
(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, Jvar¡dhik¡ra)
Ingredients:
1 Pathy¡ (Har¢tak¢ API) Terminalia chebula P. 48 g
2 Dh¡tr¢ (Ëmalak¢ API) Emblica officinalis P. 48 g
3 Bibh¢ta (Bibh¢taka API) Terminalia belerica P. 48 g
4 Jaladhara (Must¡ API) Cyperus rotundus Rz. 48 g
5 Rajan¢ (Haridr¡ API) Curcuma longa Rz. 48 g
6 M¡tulu´ga API - drava Citrus medica Fr. 48 g
7 Gh¤ta (Gogh¤ta API) Clarified butter of cow’s milk 768 g
8 Jala API Water 3.072 l
Method of Preparation:
Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 5 of the formulation composition powder separately
and pass through 180 µm I. S. sieve (Kalka dravyas).
Wash, clean the M¡tulu´ga and separate the juicy flesh from its rind. Grind and filter through muslin
cloth to obtain Svarasa.
Transfer the Kalka dravyas to the wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to prepare
homogeneous blend.
Take Gh¤ta in a stainless steel vessel and heat mildly.
Add increments of Kalka. Stir thoroughly while adding Svarasa and water.
Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the first
hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
Start the heating next day and observe the boiling mixture for subsidence of froth (phena¿¡nti) and
constantly check the Kalka for formation of varti (madhyama p¡ka lakÀa¸a).
Expose the varti and Gh¤ta to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture. Stop heating when the Kalka forms a varti and the froth subsides. Filter while hot (about
800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
Pack it in tightly closed glass containers to protect from light and moisture.
Description:
A yellow-coloured, soft, low melting medicated fat, unctuous to touch with odour and taste of
Haridr¡
Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.439, Appendix 3.1
Weight per ml at 400: 0.967, Appendix 3.2
Saponification value: 229, Appendix 3.10
Iodine value: 100, Appendix 3.11

257
Acid value: Not more than 0.33, Appendix 3.12
Peroxide value: Not more than 1.35, Appendix 3.13
Congealing point: 280 to 180 , Appendix 3.4.2
[Link]. M£rcchana of SarÀapa Taila:
(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, Jvar¡dhik¡ra)
Ingredients:
1 VayaÅsth¡ (Har¢tak¢ API) Terminalia chebula P. 12 g
2 Rajan¢ (Haridr¡ API) Curcuma longa Rz. 12 g
3 Musta (Must¡ API) Cyperus rotundus Rz. 12 g
4 Bilva API Aegle marmelos Fr. Pp. 12 g
5 D¡·ima API Punica granatum Dr. Sd. 12 g
6 Ke¿ara (N¡gake¿ara API) Mesua ferrea Stmn. 12 g
7 K¤¿¸¡j¢raka API Carum carvi Fr. 12 g
8 Hr¢vera API Coleus vettiveroides Rt. 12 g
9 Nalik¡ (Tvak API) Cinnamomum tamala St. Bk. 12 g
10 Bibh¢taka API Terminalia belerica P. 12 g
11 Aru¸¡ (MaµjiÀ¶h¡ API) Rubia cordifolia Rt. 96 g
12 Toya (Jala API) Water 3.072 l
13 Ka¶utaila (SarÀapa Taila (API)) Mustard oil 768 ml
Method of Preparation:
Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 10 of the formulation composition powder separately
and pass through 180 µm I. S. sieve (Kalka dravyas).
Transfer the Kalka dravyas to the wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to prepare
homogeneous blend.
Take SarÀapa taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat mildly.
Add increments of Kalka. Stir thoroughly while adding water.
Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the first
hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
Start the heating next day and observe the boiling mixture for appearance of froth (phenodgama) and
constantly check the Kalka for formation of varti (madhyama p¡ka lakÀa¸a).
Expose the varti and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture. Stop heating when the Kalka forms a varti and the froth subsides. Filter while hot (about
800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
Pack it in tightly closed glass containers to protect from light and moisture.

258
Physico-chemical parameters:
Refractive index at 400: 1.471, Appendix 3.1
Saponification value: 159, Appendix 3.10
Iodine value: 70, Appendix 3.11
Acid value: Not more than 0.40, Appendix 3.12
Peroxide value: Not more than 3.5, Appendix 3.13
[Link]. M£rcchana of Tila Taila:
(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, Jvar¡dhik¡ra)
Ingredients:
1 MaµjiÀ¶h¡ API Rubia cordifolia Rt. 96 g
2 Har¢tak¢ API Terminalia chebula P. 24 g
3 Bibh¢taka API Terminalia belerica P. 24 g
4 Ëmalak¢ API Emblica officinalis P. 24 g
5 Hr¢vera API Coleus vettiveroides Rt. 24 g
6 Haridr¡ API Curcuma longa Rz. 24 g
7 Jaladhara (Must¡ API) Cyperus rotundus Rz. 24 g
8 Lodhra API Symplocos racemosa St. Bk. 24 g
9 S£c¢puÀpa (Ketak¢ API) Pandanus odoratissimus Rt. 24 g
10 Va¶¡´kura (Nyagrodha API) Ficus bengalensis Lf. Bd. 24 g
11 Nalik¡ (Tvak API) Cinnamomum tamala St. Bk. 24 g
12 Taila (Tila tailaAPI) Sesame oil 1.536 l
13 Jala API Water 6.144 l
Method of preparation:
Take all ingredients of pharmacopoeial quality.
Wash, clean, dry the ingredients numbered 1 to 11 of the formulation composition powder separately
and pass through 180 µm I. S. sieve (Kalka dravyas).
Transfer the Kalka dravyas to the wet grinder and grind with sufficient quantity of water to prepare
homogeneous blend.
Take SarÀapa taila in a stainless steel vessel and heat mildly.
Add increments of Kalka. Stir thoroughly while adding water.
Heat for 3 h with constant stirring maintaining the temperature between 500 and 900 during the first
hour of heating. Stop heating and allow to stand overnight.
Start the heating next day and observe the boiling mixture for appearance of froth (phenodgama) and
constantly check the Kalka for formation of varti (madhyama p¡ka lakÀa¸a).
Expose the varti and oil to flame and confirm the absence of crackling sound indicating absence of
moisture. Stop heating when the Kalka forms a varti and the froth subsides. Filter while hot (about
800) through a muslin cloth and allow to cool.
Pack it in tightly closed glass containers to protect from light and moisture.

259
6.3. Yantra Paribh¡À¡:
6.3.1. Khalva yantra:
Khalva yantra is an instrument made up of good quality of stone in different sizes and shapes, useful
for trituration and levigation processes. It resembles with mortar and pestle.
(Rasatara´gi¸¢ - 4/53)

6.3.2. Tiryak p¡tana yantra:

Tiryak p¡tana yantra is an instrument prepared for distillation of P¡rada with the delivery tank weld
approximately at an angle of 450.
(Ëurveda prak¡¿a - 1/79)

6.3.3. Úamaru yantra:

Úamaruyantra is a contravenes of shape resembling Úamaru for sublimation prepared by sealing two
pots with their mouths one telescoping the other sealing joint securely.
(Rasatara´gi¸¢ - 4/41)

6.3.4. Dol¡yantra:
Dol¡yantra consists of a pot half filled with specified liquid with a horizontal rod placed on the rim
from which the bundle of material to be treated will be immersed and heated.
(Rasaratnasamuccaya - 9/3-4)

260
 APPENDIX – 7
WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
7.1. Metric Equivalents of Classical Weights and Measures

The following table of metric equivalents of weights II. LINEAR MEASURES

and measures, linear measures and measurement of
Classical Unit Inches Metric Equivalent
time used in the Ayurvedic classics have been approved
by the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia committee in Yavodara 1/8 of 3/4" 0.24 cm
consultation with Indian Standards Institution. A´gula 3/4" 1.95 cm
I. WEIGHTS AND MEASURES Vitasti 9" 22.86 cm
Classical Unit Metric Aratni 10 1/2" 41.91 cm
Equivalent Hasta 18" 45.72 cm
1 Ratt¢ or Guµj¡ = 125 mg N¤pahasta 22" 55.88 cm
8 Ratt¢ or Guµj¡ = 1 M¡Àa =1g (R¡jahasta)
12 MaÀas = 1 KarÀa (Tol¡) = 12 g Vy¡ma 72" 182.88 cm
2 KarÀas = 1 áukti = 24 g III. MEASUREMENT OF TIME
2 áukti = 1 Palam = 48 g
2 Palas = 1 Pras¤ti = 96 g Unit Equivalent (in
2 Pras¤tis = 1 Ku·ava = 192 g hours, minutes &
2 Ku·avas = 1 M¡nik¡ = 384 g seconds)
2 M¡nik¡s = 1 Prastha = 768 g 2 KÀa¸as = 1 Lava
4 Prasthas = 1 Ë·haka = 3 kg 72 g 2 Lavas = 1 NimeÀa
4 Ë·hakas = 1 Dro¸a = 12 kg 288 g 3 NimeÀas = 1 K¡À¶h¡ = 4.66 seconds
2 Dro¸as = 1 á£rpa = 24 kg 576 g 1 Gha¶¢s = 24 minutes
2 á£rpas =1 Dro¸¢ (V¡h¢) = 49 kg 152 g 30 K¡À¶h¡s = 1 Kal¡ = 2 minutes
4 Dro¸¢s = 1 Kh¡r¢ = 196 kg 608 g 20 seconds
100 Palas = 1 Tul¡ = 4 kg 800 g 20 Kal¡s + 3 = 1 Muh£rta = 48 minutes
20 Tul¡s = 1 Bh¡ra = 96 kg K¡À¶h¡s
In case of liquids, the metric equivalents would be the 30 Muh£rtas = 1 Ahor¡tra = 24 hours
corresponding litre and milliliter. 15 Ahor¡tras = 1 PakÀa = 15 days
2 PakÀas = 1 M¡sa = 30 days/1 month
2 M¡sas = 1 Îtu = 60 days/ Two
Months
3 Îtus = 1 Ayana = 6 Months
2 Ayanas = 1 SaÆvatsara = 12 months/1
Year
5 SaÆvatsara = 1Yuga = 5 Years
1 Ahor¡tra of = 1 Year
Devas
1 Ahor¡tra of = 1 Month
Pitaras

261
7.2. Metric System
Measure of Mass (Weights)
1 Kilogram (Kg) – is the mass of the International Prototype Kilogram.
1 Gramme (g) – the 1000th part of 1 Kilogram
1Milligram (mg) – the 1000th part of 1 gramme
1 Microgram (µg) – the 1000th part of 1 milligram

Measures of capacity (Volumes)

1 Litre (1) is the volume occupied at its temperature of maximum density by a quantity of
water having a mass of 1 Kilogram.
1 Millilitre (ml) is the 1000th part of 1 litre.
The accepted relation between the litre and the cubic centimetre is 1 litre – 1000.027 cubic
centimeters.
Relation of capacity of Weight (Metric)
One litre of water at 200 weighs 997.18 grams when weighed in air of density 0.0012 gram per
millilitre against brass weights of density 84 grams per millilitre.
Measures of Length
1 Metre (m) is the length of the International Prototype Metre at 0.
1 Centimetre (cm) – the 100th part of 1 metre
1 Millimetre (mm) – the 1000th part of 1 metre
1 Micron (µ) – the 1000th part of 1 millimetre
1 Milliimicron (mµ) – the 1000th part of micron

262
 APPENDIX - 8

CLASSICAL AYURVEDIC REFERENCES

JAÙËMËêSYARKA (VÉ]õɨÉÉƺªÉEÇò) (AFI, Part-I; 2:3)

(Arkaprak¡¿a, áataka 4 : 22 1/2)
ºÉÖMÉxvÉ´ÉÒ®úhÉÆ ¤ÉɱÉÉ VÉ]õɨÉÉƺÉÒ ¨ÉÖ®úÉPÉxÉ: *
ºÉ]õÒEòSÉÚÇ®úBEòÉRÂóMÉÒ ºÉÖMÉxvÉÉä%ªÉÆ MÉÖhÉÉäkɨÉ: **22**
Ê´ÉÊvÉÊxɹEòÉʺÉiÉÉä ªÉÉä%EòÉæ ¯ûSªÉ: {ÉÉSÉxÉnùÒ{ÉxÉ: *
(+EÇò|ÉEòɶÉ, ¶ÉiÉEò 4; 221/2)

YAVËNYARKA (ªÉ´ÉÉxªÉEÇò) (AFI, Part-II; 2:2)

(Arkaprak¡¿a, ¿ataka : 3:7)
ªÉ´ÉÉxªÉÉ: {ÉÉSÉxÉÉä ¯ûSªÉÉä nùÒ{ÉxÉκjÉEò¶ÉڱɾþiÉÂ**
+VɨÉÉänùÉänÂù¦É´ÉÉä ´ÉÉiÉEò¡ò½þÉ ¤ÉκiɶÉÉävÉxÉ:**7**
(+EÇò|ÉEòɶÉ, ¶ÉiÉEò 3; 7)

HARIDRË KHAÛÚA (½þÊ®úpùÉ JÉhb) (AFI, Part-I; 3:31)

(BhiÀajyaratn¡val¢, á¢tapittodardako¶h¡dhik¡ra : 12-16)
½þÊ®úpùɪÉÉ: {ɱÉÉxªÉ¹]õÉè ¹É]Âõ{ɱÉÆ ½þʴɹɺiÉlÉÉ *
IÉÒ®úÉføEäòxÉ ºÉƪÉÖHÆò JÉhb÷ºªÉÉrÇù¶ÉiÉÆ iÉlÉÉ **12**
{ÉSÉäx¨ÉÞuùÎMxÉxÉÉ ´ÉètÉä ¦ÉÉVÉxÉä ¨ÉÞh¨ÉªÉä oùfäø *
ÊjÉEò]Öõ¶SÉ ÊjÉVÉÉiÉ\SÉ EÞòʨÉPxÉÆ ÊjÉ´ÉÞiÉÉ iÉlÉÉ **13**
ÊjÉ¡ò±ÉÉ Eäò¶É®Æú ¨ÉÖºiÉÆ ±ÉÉè½Æþ |ÉÊiÉ {ɱÉÆ {ɱɨÉ *
ºÉ\SÉÚhªÉÇ |ÉÊIÉ{ÉäkÉjÉ iÉÉä±ÉEòÉrÇùxiÉÖ ¦ÉIɪÉäiÉ **14**
EòhbÚ÷ʴɺ¡òÉä]õnùpÚùhÉÉÆ xÉɶÉxÉÆ {É®ú¨ÉÉè¹ÉvɨÉÂ*
|ÉiÉ{iÉEòÉ\SÉxÉɦÉɺÉÉä näù½þÉä ¦É´ÉÊiÉ xÉÉxªÉlÉÉ**15**
¶ÉÒiÉÊ{ÉkÉÉänùqÇùEòÉä`öÉxÉ ºÉ{iÉɽþÉnäù´É xÉɶɪÉäiÉÂ*

263
 ½þÊ®úpùÉxÉɨÉiÉ: JÉhb÷: EòhbÚ÷xÉÉÆ {É®ú¨ÉÉè¹ÉvɨÉÂ**16**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, ¶ÉÒiÉÊ{ÉkÉÉänùnÇùEòÉä`öÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú; 12-16)

NËRIKELA KHAÛÚA (xÉÉÊ®úEäò±É JÉhb) (AFI, Part-I; 3:16)

(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, áularog¡dhik¡ra : 168-169)
EÖòb÷´ÉʨÉiÉʨɽþ ºªÉÉzÉÉÊ®úEäò±ÉÆ ºÉÖÊ{ɹ]Æõ {ɱÉ{ÉÊ®úʨÉiɺÉÌ{É: {ÉÉÊSÉiÉÆ JÉhb÷iÉÖ±ªÉ¨É *
ÊxÉVÉ{ɪÉ漃 iÉnäùiÉiÉ |ɺlɨÉÉjÉä Ê´É{ÉC´ÉÆ MÉÖb÷´ÉnùlÉ ºÉÖ¶ÉÒiÉä ¶ÉÉhɦÉÉMÉÉxÉ ÊIÉ{ÉäSSÉ **168**
vÉxªÉÉEòÊ{É{{ÉʱÉ{ɪÉÉänùiÉÖMÉÉÊuùVÉÒ®úÉxÉ ¶ÉÉhÉÆ ÊjÉVÉÉiÉʨɦÉEäò¶É®ú´ÉÊuùSÉÚhªÉÇ*
½þxiªÉ¨±ÉÊ{ÉkɨɯûËSÉ IÉiɨɻÉÊ{ÉkÉÆ ¶ÉÚ±ÉÆ ´É謃 ºÉEò±É{ÉÉè¯û¹ÉEòÉÊ®ú ½þÉÊ®ú**169**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, ¶ÉڱɮúÉäMÉÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú; 168-169)

CITRAKËDI CÍRÛA (ÊSÉjÉEòÉÊnù SÉÚhÉÇ) (AFI, Part-I; 7:11)

(á¡r´gadharasaÆhit¡, Madhyamakha¸·a, Adhy¡ya 6 : 108-110)
ÊSÉjÉEÆò xÉÉMÉ®Æú ʽþRÂóMÉÖ Ê{É{{ɱÉÒ Ê{É{{ɱÉÒVÉ]õÉ *
SÉ´ªÉÉVɨÉÉänùÉ ¨ÉÊ®úSÉÆ |ÉiªÉäEÆò Eò¹ÉǺÉΨ¨ÉiɨÉ **108**
º´ÉÌVÉEòÉ SÉ ªÉ´ÉIÉÉ®ú: ʺÉxvÉÖ: ºÉÉè´ÉSÉDZÉÆ Ê´Éb÷¨É *
ºÉɨÉÖpùEÆò ®úÉä¨ÉEÆò SÉ EòÉä±É¨ÉÉjÉÉÊhÉ EòÉ®úªÉäiÉ **109**
BEòÒEÞòiªÉÉÊJɱÉÆ SÉÚhÉÈ ¦ÉɴɪÉäx¨ÉÉiÉÖ±ÉÖRÂóMÉVÉè: *
®úºÉènùÉÇÊb÷¨ÉVÉè´ÉÉÇÊ{É ¶ÉÉä¹ÉªÉänùÉiÉ{ÉäxÉ SÉ **110**
BiÉSSÉÚhÉÈ VɪÉänÂù MÉÖ±¨ÉÆ OɽþhÉÒ¨ÉɨÉVÉÉÆ ¯ûVɨÉÂ*
+ÏMxÉ SÉ EÖò¯ûiÉä nùÒ{iÉÆ ¯ûÊSÉEÞòiÉ Eò¡òxÉɶÉxɨÉÂ**111**
(¶ÉÉRÂóMÉÇvÉ®úºÉÆʽþiÉÉ, ¨ÉvªÉ¨ÉJÉhb÷, +vªÉÉªÉ 6; 108-110)

SAPTË×GA GUGGULU (ºÉ{iÉÉRÂóMÉ MÉÖMMÉÖ±ÉÖ) (AFI, Part-III; 5:3)

(Cakradatta, Bhagandaracikits¡prakara¸a; 15)
MÉÖMMÉÖ±ÉÖκjÉ¡ò±ÉÉ´ªÉÉä¹Éè: ºÉ¨ÉÉƶÉè®úÉVªÉªÉÉäÊVÉiÉ: *
xÉÉb÷ÒnÖù¹]õµÉhɶÉڱɦÉMÉxnù®úÊ´ÉxÉɶÉxÉ: **
(SÉGònùkÉ, ¦ÉMÉxnù®úÊSÉÊEòiºÉÉ|ÉEò®úhÉ; 15)

264
 VARËDI GUGGULU (´É®úÉÊnù MÉÖMMÉÖ±ÉÖ) (AFI, Part-III; 5:1)
(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, UpadaÆ¿ar°gacikits¡prakara¸a; 65)
´É®úÉÊxɨ¤ÉÉVÉÖÇxÉÉ·ÉilÉJÉÊnù®úɺÉxÉ´ÉɺÉEèò: *
SÉÚÌhÉiÉèMÉÖÇMMÉÖ±ÉֺɨÉè´ÉÇ]õEòÉ +IɺÉΨ¨ÉiÉÉ: *
={ÉnÆù¶ÉÉxɺÉÞMnùÉä¹ÉÉxÉ iÉlÉÉ nÖù¹]õµÉhÉÉxÉÊ{É**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, ={ÉnÆù¶É®úÉäMÉÊSÉÊEòiºÉÉ|ÉEò®úhÉ; 65)

VIÚA×GËDI GUGGULU (Ê´Éb÷RÂóMÉÉÊnù MÉÖMMÉÖ±ÉÖ) (AFI, Part-III; 5:2)

(Y°garatn¡kara, Vra¸a¿°dhanar°pa¸avidhi; 1)
Ê´Éb÷RÂóMÉÊjÉ¡ò±ÉÉ´ªÉÉä¹ÉSÉÚhÉÈ MÉÖMMÉÖ±ÉÖxÉÉ ºÉ¨É¨ÉÂ*
ºÉÌ{ɹÉÉ ´É]õEòÉxÉ EÖòªÉÉÇiÉ JÉÉnäùuùÉ Ê½þiɦÉÉäVÉxÉ:*
nÖù¹]õµÉhÉÉ{ÉSÉÒ¨Éä½þEÖò¹`öxÉÉb÷ÒʴɶÉÉävÉxɨÉÂ*
(ªÉÉäMÉ®úixÉÉEò®ú, µÉhɶÉÉävÉxÉ®úÉä{ÉhÉÊ´ÉÊvÉ; 1)

SUKUMËRA GHÎTA (ºÉÖEÖò¨ÉÉ®ú PÉÞiÉ) (AFI, Part-I; 6:44)

(Sahasrayoga, Gh¤taprakara¸a: 4)
{ÉSÉäiÉ {ÉÖxÉxÉÇ´ÉiÉÖ±ÉÉÆ iÉlÉÉ nù¶É{ɱÉÉ: {ÉÞlÉEÂò *
nù¶É¨ÉÚ±É{ɪɺªÉÉ·ÉMÉxvÉè®úhb÷¶ÉiÉÉ´É®úÒ: **
Êuùnù¦ÉǶɮúEòɶÉäIÉÖ¨ÉÚ±É{ÉÉä]õMɱÉÉÎx´ÉiÉÉ: *
´É½äþ%{Éɨɹ]õ¦ÉÉMɺlÉä iÉjÉ ËjɶÉi{ɱÉÉnÂù MÉÖb÷ÉiÉ **
|ɺlɨÉä®úhb÷iÉè±ÉºªÉ uùÉè PÉÞiÉÉi{ɪɺɺiÉlÉÉ *
+É´É{ÉäÎnÂùuù{ɱÉÉƶÉɶSÉ EÞò¹hÉÉiÉx¨ÉڱɺÉèxvɴɨÉ **
ªÉ¹]õÒ¨ÉvÉÖEò¨ÉÞuùÒEòɪɴÉÉxÉÒxÉÉMÉ®úÉÊhÉ SÉ *
iÉÎiºÉrÆù ºÉÖEÖò¨ÉÉ®úÉJªÉÆ ºÉÖEÖò¨ÉÉ®Æú ®úºÉɪÉxɨÉ **
´ÉÉiÉÉiÉ{ÉÉv´É¦ÉɹªÉºjÉÒ{ÉÊ®ú½þɪÉ湴ɪÉxjÉhɨÉÂ*
|ɪÉÉäVªÉÆ ºÉÖEÖò¨ÉÉ®úÉhÉɨÉÒ·É®úÉhÉÉÆ ºÉÖJÉÉi¨ÉxÉɨÉÂ**
xÉÞhÉÉÆ ºjÉÒ´ÉÞxnù¦ÉiÉßÇhÉɨɱÉI¨ÉÒEòʱÉxÉɶÉxɨÉÂ*
ºÉ´ÉÇEòɱÉÉä{ɪÉÉäMÉäxÉ EòÉÎxiɱÉÉ´ÉhªÉ{ÉÖι]õnù¨ÉÂ**

265
 ´Év¨ÉÇÊ´ÉpùÊvÉMÉÖ±¨ÉɶÉÉæªÉÉäÊxɶÉÚ±ÉÉÊxɱÉÉÌiɹÉÖ*
¶ÉÉä¡òÉänù®úJÉÖb÷{±ÉÒ½þÊ´ÉÎbÂ÷´É¤ÉxvÉä¹ÉÖ SÉÉäkɨɨÉÂ**
(ºÉ½þ»ÉªÉÉäMÉ, PÉÞiÉ|ÉEò®úhÉ; 4)

AÛU TAILA (+hÉÖ iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:1)

(AÀ¶¡´gah¤daya, S£trasth¡na, Adhy¡ya 20: 37-38)
VÉÒ´ÉxiÉÒVɱÉnäù´ÉnùɯûVɱÉnùi´ÉCºÉä´ªÉMÉÉä{ÉÒʽþ¨ÉÆ
nùÉ´ÉÔi´ÉRÂó¨ÉvÉÖEò{±É´ÉÉMÉÖ¯û´É®úÒ{ÉÖhbÅ÷ɼ´Éʤɱ´ÉÉäi{ɱɨÉ *
vÉÉ´ÉxªÉÉè ºÉÖ®úʦÉ: κlÉ®äú EÞòʨɽþ®Æú {ÉjÉÆ jÉÖË]õ ®äúhÉÖEòÉÆ
ÊEò\VɱEÆò Eò¨É±Éɼ´ÉªÉÆ ¶ÉiÉMÉÖhÉä Ênù´ªÉä%¨¦É漃 C´ÉÉlɪÉäiÉ **37**
iÉè±ÉÉpùºÉÆ nù¶ÉMÉÖhÉÆ {ÉÊ®ú¶Éä¹ªÉ iÉäxÉ iÉè±ÉÆ {ÉSÉäSSÉ ºÉʱɱÉäxÉ nù¶Éè´É ´ÉÉ®úÉxÉ *
{ÉÉEäò ÊIÉ{ÉäSSÉ nù¶É¨Éä ºÉ¨É¨ÉÉVÉnÖùMvÉÆ xɺªÉÆ ¨É½þÉMÉÖhɨÉÖ¶ÉxiªÉhÉÖiÉè±É¨ÉäiÉiÉ **38**
(+¹]õÉRÂóMɾþnùªÉ, ºÉÚjɺlÉÉxÉ, +vªÉÉªÉ 20; 37-38)

APËMËRGA KâËRA TAILA (+{ÉɨÉÉMÉÇIÉÉ® iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-II; 8:1)

(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, Kar¸arog¡dhik¡ra: 26)
¨ÉÉMÉÇIÉÉ®úVɱÉäxÉ SÉ iÉiEÞòiÉEò±EäòxÉ ºÉÉÊvÉiÉÆ iÉè±É¨ÉÂ*
+{ɽþ®úÊiÉ EòhÉÇxÉÉnÆù ¤ÉÉÊvɪÉÇ\SÉÉÊ{É {ÉÚ®úhÉiÉ:**26**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, EòhÉÇ®úÉäMÉÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú : 26)

ARIMEDËDI TAILA (+Ê®ú¨ÉänùÉÊnù iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:2)

(AÀ¶¡´gah¤daya, Uttarasth¡na, Adhy¡ya 22: 90 - 96)
JÉÊnù®úºÉÉ®úÉnÂù uäù iÉÖ±Éä {ÉSÉäuù±EòÉkÉÖ±ÉÉÆ SÉÉÊ®ú¨ÉänùºÉ: *
PÉ]õSÉiÉÖ¹Eäò {ÉÉnù¶Éä¹Éä%κ¨ÉxÉ {ÉÚiÉä {ÉÖxÉ: C´ÉlÉxÉÉnÂù PÉxÉä **90**
+ÉÊIÉEÆò ÊIÉ{ÉäiºÉÖºÉÚI¨ÉÆ ®úVÉ: ºÉä´ªÉɨ¤ÉÖ{ÉkÉRÂóMÉMÉèÊ®úEò¨É *
SÉxnùxÉuùªÉ®úÉäwÉ{ÉÖhbÅ÷ɼ´ÉªÉ¹]õ¬É¼´É±ÉÉIÉÉ\VÉxÉuùªÉ¨É **91**
vÉÉiÉEòÒEò]Âõ¡ò±ÉÊuùÊxɶÉÉÊjÉ¡ò±ÉÉSÉiÉÖVÉÉÇiÉVÉÉäRÂóMÉEò¨É *
¨ÉÖºiɨÉÎ\Vɹ`öÉxªÉOÉÉävÉ|É®úÉä½þ¨ÉÉƺÉҪɴÉɺÉEò¨É **92**

266
 {ÉnÂù¨ÉEèò±ÉäªÉºÉ¨ÉRÂóMÉɶSÉ ¶ÉÒiÉä iÉϺ¨ÉºiÉlÉÉ {ÉÉʱÉEòÉÆ {ÉÞlÉEÂò *
VÉÉÊiÉ{ÉÊjÉEòÉÆ ºÉVÉÉiÉÒ¡ò±ÉÉÆ ºÉ½þ±É´ÉRÂóMÉEòRÂóEòÉäʱÉEòɨÉ **93**
º¡òÊ]õEò¶É֧ɺÉÖ®úʦÉEò{ÉÚÇ®úEÖòb÷´ÉÆ SÉ iÉjÉÉ´É{ÉäkÉiÉ: *
EòÉ®úªÉänÂù MÉÖÊ]õEòÉ: ºÉnùÉ SÉèiÉÉ vÉɪÉÉÇ ¨ÉÖJÉä iÉnÂù MÉnùÉ{ɽþÉ:**94**
C´ÉÉlÉÉè¹ÉvÉ´ªÉiªÉªÉªÉÉäVÉxÉäxÉ iÉè±ÉÆ {ÉSÉäiEò±{ÉxɪÉÉ%xɪÉè´É*
ºÉ´ÉÉǺªÉ®úÉäMÉÉärÞùiɪÉä iÉnùɽÖþnÇùxiÉκlÉ®úi´Éä Îi´Énù¨Éä´É ¨ÉÖJªÉ¨É **95**
JÉÊnù®äúhÉèiÉÉ MÉÖÊ]õEòɺiÉè±ÉʨÉnÆù SÉÉÊ®ú¨ÉänùºÉÉ |ÉÊlÉiɨÉ *
+xÉÖ¶ÉұɪÉxÉ |ÉÊiÉÊnùxÉÆ º´ÉºlÉÉä%Ê{É oùføÊuùVÉÉä ¦É´ÉÊiÉ**96**
(+¹]õÉRÂóMɾþnùªÉ, =kÉ®úºlÉÉxÉ, +vªÉÉªÉ 22; 90-96)

ASANABILVËDI TAILA (+ºÉxÉʤɱ´ÉÉÊnù iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:3)

(Sahasrayoga, Tailaprakara¸a: 45)
+ºÉxÉʤɱ´É¤É±ÉɨÉÞiÉ{ÉÉÊSÉiÉä ¨ÉvÉÖEòxÉÉMÉ®úEòÊjÉ¡ò±ÉÉÎx´ÉiÉä *
{ɪÉ漃 iÉè±ÉʨÉnÆù {ɪɺÉÉ {ÉSÉäzɪÉxÉEòhÉÇʶɮúÉäʽþiɨÉÖkɨɨÉ **
(ºÉ½þ»ÉªÉÉäMÉ, iÉè±É|ÉEò®úhÉ, 45)

BALË TAILA (¤É±ÉÉ iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:33)

(AÀ¶¡´gah¤daya, Cikits¡sth¡na, Adhy¡ya 21 : 72-80)
¤É±ÉɶÉiÉÆ ÊUôzɯû½þÉ{ÉÉnÆù ®úɺxÉÉ%¹]õ¦ÉÉÊMÉEò¨É **72**
VɱÉÉføEò¶ÉiÉä {ÉCi´ÉÉ ¶ÉiɦÉÉMÉκlÉiÉä ®úºÉä*
nùÊvɨÉκi´ÉIÉÖÊxɪÉÉǺɶÉÖHèòºiÉè±ÉÉføEÆò ºÉ¨Éè: **73**
{ÉSÉäiºÉÉVÉ{ɪÉÉä%vÉÉȶÉè: Eò±Eèò®äúʦÉ: {ɱÉÉäÎx¨ÉiÉè: *
¶É`öҺɮú±ÉnùÉ´Éæ±ÉɨÉÎ\Vɹ`öÉMÉÖ¯ûSÉxnùxÉè: **74**
{ÉnÂù¨ÉEòÉÊiɤɱÉɨÉÖºiÉɶÉÚ{ÉÇ{ÉhÉÔ½þ®äúhÉÖʦÉ: *
ªÉ¹]õ¬É¼´ÉºÉÖ®úºÉ´ªÉÉQÉxÉJɹÉǦÉEòVÉÒ´ÉEèò: **75**
{ɱÉɶɮúºÉEòºiÉÚ®úÒxÉÒʱÉEòÉVÉÉÊiÉEòÉä¶ÉEèò: *
º{ÉÞCEòÉEÖòRÂóEÖò¨É¶Éè±ÉäªÉVÉÉÊiÉEòÉEò]Âõ¡ò±Éɨ¤ÉÖʦÉ: **76**
i´ÉCEÖòxnù¯ûEòEò{ÉÚÇ®úiÉÖ¯û¹Eò¸ÉÒÊxÉ´ÉɺÉEèò: *
±É´ÉRÂóMÉxÉJÉEòRÂóEòÉä±ÉEÖò¹`ö¨ÉÉƺÉÒÊ|ɪÉRÂóMÉÖʦÉ: **77**

267
 ºlÉÉèhÉäªÉiÉMÉ®úvªÉɨɴÉSÉɨÉnùxÉEò{±É´Éè: *
ºÉxÉÉMÉEäòºÉ®èú: ʺÉräù nùtÉSSÉÉ%jÉÉ´ÉiÉÉÊ®úiÉä **78**
{ÉjÉEò±EÆò iÉiÉ: {ÉÚiÉÆ Ê´ÉÊvÉxÉÉ iÉi|ɪÉÉäÊVÉiɨÉ *
EòɺɷÉɺÉV´É®úSUôÌnù¨ÉÚSUôÉÇMÉÖ±¨ÉIÉiÉIɪÉÉxÉÂ**79**
{±ÉÒ½þ¶ÉÉä¹É¨É{ɺ¨ÉÉ®ú¨É±ÉI¨ÉÓ SÉ |ÉhÉɶɪÉäiÉÂ*
¤É±ÉÉiÉè±ÉʨÉnÆù ¸Éä¹`Æö ´ÉÉiÉ´ªÉÉÊvÉÊ´ÉxÉɶÉxɨÉÂ**80**
(+¹]õÉRÂóMɾþnùªÉ, ÊSÉÊEòiºÉɺlÉÉxÉ, +vªÉÉªÉ 21; 72-80)

BALËHAÙHËDI TAILA (¤É±Éɽþ`öÉÊnù iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:37)

(Sahasrayoga, Tailaprakara¸a : 54)
¤É±Éɽþ`öɨÉÞiÉɨÉÖnÂùMɨÉɹÉC´ÉÉlÉä ÊiɱÉÉänÂù¦É´É¨É *
{ÉC´ÉÆ Ê¶É®úÉä¯ûVÉÆ ½þÎxiÉ SÉxnùxÉɨɪɪÉι]õʦÉ: **
(ºÉ½þ»ÉªÉÉäMÉ, iÉè±É|ÉEò®úhÉ; 54)

BHÎ×GARËJA TAILA (¦ÉÞRÂóMÉ®úÉVÉ iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:42)

(BhaiÀajyaran¡val¢, KÀudrarog¡dhik¡ra: 91-96)
+xÉÚ{Énäù¶ÉºÉ¨¦ÉÚiÉÆ MÉÞ½þÒi´ÉÉ ¨ÉÉEÇò´ÉÆ ¶É֦ɨÉ *
ºÉÖvÉÉèiÉÆ VÉVÉÇ®úÒEÞòiªÉ º´É®úºÉÆ iɺªÉ SÉɽþ®äúiÉ **91**
SÉiÉÖMÉÖÇhÉäxÉ iÉäxÉè´É iÉè±É|ɺlÉÆ Ê´É{ÉÉSɪÉäiÉ *
IÉÒ®úÊ{ɹ]èõÊ®ú¨ÉèpÇù´ªÉè: ºÉƪÉÉäVªÉ ¨ÉÊiɨÉÉxÉ ʦɹÉEÂò **92**
¨ÉÎ\Vɹ`öÉ {ÉnÂù¨ÉEÆò ±ÉÉäwÉÆ SÉxnùxÉÆ MÉèÊ®úEÆò ¤É±ÉÉ *
®úVÉxªÉÉè Eäò¶É®ú\SÉè´É Ê|ɪÉRÂóMÉÖ ¨ÉvÉÖªÉι]õEòÉ **93**
|É{ÉÉèhb÷®úÒEÆò MÉÉä{ÉÒ SÉ {ÉʱÉEòÉxªÉjÉ nùÉ{ɪÉäiÉ *
ºÉ¨ªÉEÂò {ÉC´ÉÆ iÉiÉÉä xÉÒi´ÉÉ ¶ÉÖ¦Éä ¦ÉÉhbä÷ ÊxÉvÉÉ{ɪÉäiÉÂ**94**
Eäò¶É{ÉÉiÉä ʶɮúÉänÖù¹]äõ ¨ÉxªÉɺiɨ¦Éä MɱÉOɽäþ*
ʶɮú:EòhÉÉÇÊIÉ®úÉäMÉä¹ÉÖ xɺªÉä%¦ªÉRÂóMÉä SÉ ªÉÉäVɪÉäiÉÂ**95**
EÖòÎ\SÉiÉÉOÉÉxÉÊiÉκxÉMvÉÉxÉ EòSÉÉxÉ EÖòªÉÉÇnÂù ¤É½ÚÆþºiÉlÉÉ*
JÉÉʱÉiªÉʨÉxpù±ÉÖ{iÉ\SÉ iÉè±É¨ÉäiÉnÂù ´ªÉ{ÉÉä½þÊiÉ**86**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, IÉÖpù®úÉäMÉÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú; 91-96)

268
BÎHAT SAINDHAVËDYA TAILA (¤ÉÞ½þiÉ ºÉèxvÉ´ÉÉt iÉè±É)
(AFI, Part-I; 8:40)
(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, Amav¡t¡dhik¡ra : 157-162.)
ºÉèxvÉ´ÉÆ ¸ÉäªÉºÉÒ ®úɺxÉÉ ¶ÉiÉ{ÉÖ¹{ÉÉ ªÉ¨ÉÉÊxÉEòÉ *
ºÉÌVÉEòÉ ¨ÉÊ®úSÉÆ EÖò¹`Æö ¶ÉÖh`öÒ ºÉÉè´ÉSÉDZÉÆ Ê´Éb÷¨É **157**
´ÉSÉÉVɨÉÉänùÉ ¨ÉvÉÖEÆò VÉÒ®úEÆò {ÉÉè¹Eò®Æú EòhÉÉ *
BiÉÉxªÉrÇù{ɱÉÉƶÉÉÊxÉ ¶±ÉIhÉÊ{ɹ]õÉÊxÉ EòÉ®úªÉäiÉ **158**
|ɺlɨÉä®úhb÷iÉè±ÉºªÉ |ɺlÉɨ¤ÉÖ ¶ÉiÉ{ÉÖ¹{ÉVɨÉ *
EòÉÎ\VÉEÆò ÊuùMÉÖhÉÆ nùk´ÉÉ iÉlÉÉ ¨ÉºiÉÖ: ¶ÉxÉè: {ÉSÉäiÉ **159**
ʺÉrù¨ÉäiÉi|ɪÉÉäHò´ªÉ¨ÉɨɴÉÉiɽþ®Æú {É®ú¨ÉÂ*
{ÉÉxÉɦªÉ\VÉxɴɺiÉÉè SÉ EÖò¯ûiÉä%ÎMxɤɱÉÆ ¶É֦ɨÉÂ**160**
´ÉÉiÉÉkÉÇ®úIÉhÉä ¶ÉºiÉÆ Eò]õÒVÉÉxÉÚ¯ûºÉÎxvÉVÉä*
¶ÉÚ±Éä ¾þi{ÉÉ·ÉÇ{ÉÞ¹`äö¹ÉÖ EÞòSUÅôɶ¨ÉÊ®úÊxÉ{ÉÒÊb÷iÉä**161**
¤ÉÉÁɪÉɨÉÉÌnùiÉÉxÉɽäþ +xjÉ´ÉÞÊrùÊxÉ{ÉÒÊb÷iÉä*
+xªÉÉƶSÉÉÊxɱÉVÉÉxÉ ®úÉäMÉÉxÉ xÉɶɪÉiªÉɶÉÖ näùʽþxÉɨÉÂ**162**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, +ɨɴÉÉiÉÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú; 157-162)

CITRAKËDI TAILA (ÊSÉjÉEòÉÊnù iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:16)

(Su¿rutasaÆhit¡, Bhagandara Cikits¡ : 50-50 1/2)
ÊSÉjÉEòÉEòÉê ÊjÉ´ÉÞi{ÉÉ`äö ¨É±É{ÉÚÆ ½þªÉ¨ÉÉ®úEò¨É *
ºÉÖvÉÉÆ ´ÉSÉÉÆ ±ÉÉRÂóMɱÉEòÓ ºÉ{iÉ{ÉhÉÈ ºÉÖ´ÉÌSÉEòɨÉ **50**
VªÉÉäÊiɹ¨ÉiÉÓ SÉ ºÉ¨¦ÉÞiªÉ iÉè±ÉÆ vÉÒ®úÉä Ê´É{ÉÉSɪÉäiÉ *
(ºÉÖ¸ÉÖiɺÉÆʽþiÉÉ, ÊSÉÊEòiºÉɺlÉÉxÉ, +vªÉÉªÉ 8; 50-501/2)

269
 HI×GVËDI TAILA (ʽþRÂóM´ÉÉÊnù iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-II; 8:18)
(Cakradatta, Kar¸arogacikits¡: 16)
ʽþRÂóMÉÖiÉÖ¨¤ÉÖ¯û¶ÉÖh`öÒʦÉ& ºÉÉvªÉÆ iÉè±ÉxiÉÖ ºÉɹÉÇ{ɨÉÂ*
EòhÉǶÉÚ±Éä |ÉvÉÉxÉxiÉÖ {ÉÚ®úhÉÆ Ê½þiɨÉÖSªÉiÉä**16**
(SÉGònùkÉ EòhÉÇ®úÉäMÉÊSÉÊEòiºÉÉ, 16)

JYOTIâMATÌ TAILA (VªÉÉäÊiɹ¨ÉiÉÒ iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:18)

(Yogaratn¡kara, KuÀ¶hacikits¡: Page 696)
¨ÉªÉÚ®úEòIÉÉ®úVɱÉä ºÉ{iÉEÞòi´É: {ÉÊ®ú¶ÉÞiɨÉ *
ʺÉrÆù VªÉÉäÊiɹ¨ÉiÉÒiÉè±É¨É¦ªÉRÂóMÉÉÎSUÂô´ÉjÉxÉɶÉxɨÉ **
(ªÉÉäMÉ®úixÉÉEò®ú, EÖò¹`öÊ·ÉjÉÊSÉÊEòiºÉÉ; 696)

KANAKA TAILA (EòxÉE iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:4)

(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, KÀudrarog¡dhik¡ra: 59 - 60)
¨ÉvÉÖEòºªÉ Eò¹ÉɪÉähÉ iÉè±ÉºªÉ EÖòb÷´ÉÆ {ÉSÉäiÉ *
Eò±Eèò: Ê|ɪÉRÂóMÉÖ¨ÉÎ\Vɹ`öÉSÉxnùxÉÉäi{ɱÉEäò¶É®èú: **59**
EòxÉEÆò xÉÉ¨É iÉkÉè±ÉÆ ¨ÉÖJÉEòÉÎxiÉEò®Æú {É®ú¨ÉÂ*
+¦ÉÒ¯ûxÉÒʱÉEòÉ´ªÉRÂóMɶÉÉävÉxÉÆ {É®ú¨ÉÉÐSSÉiɨÉÂ**60**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, IÉÖpù®úÉäMÉÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú; 59-60)

MAHË NËRËYAÛA TAILA (¨É½þÉxÉÉ®úɪÉhÉ iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:45)

(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, Vatavy¡dhyadhik¡ra : 151-162.)
ʤɱ´ÉÉ·ÉMÉxvÉɤÉÞ½þiÉÒ·ÉnÆù¹]ÅõɶªÉÉäxÉÉEò´ÉÉ]õ¬É±ÉEò{ÉÉÊ®ú¦Épù¨É *
IÉÖpùÉEòÊ`ö±±ÉÉÎMxɤɱÉÉÎMxɨÉxlÉÆ ¨ÉÚ±ÉÉÊxÉ SÉè¹ÉÉÆ ºÉ®úhÉÒªÉÖiÉÉxÉɨÉ **151**
¨ÉÚ±ÉÆ Ê´ÉnùvªÉÉnùlÉ {ÉÉ]õ±ÉÒxÉÉÆ |ɺlÉÆ ºÉ{ÉÉnÆù Ê´ÉÊvÉxÉÉärÞùiÉÉxÉɨÉ *
pùÉähÉè®ú{Éɨɹ]õʦɮäú´É {ÉCi´ÉÉ {ÉÉnùɴɶÉä¹ÉähÉ ®úºÉäxÉ iÉäxÉ **152**
iÉè±ÉÉføEòɦªÉÉÆ ºÉ¨É¨Éä´É nÖùMvɨÉÉVÉÆ ÊxÉnùvªÉÉnùlÉ´ÉÉÊ{É MÉ´ªÉ¨É *

270
 BEòjÉ ºÉ¨ªÉÎM´É{ÉSÉäiºÉÖ¤ÉÖÊrùnÇùtÉpùºÉ\SÉè´É ¶ÉiÉÉ´É®úÒhÉɨÉ **153**
iÉè±ÉäxÉ iÉÖ±ªÉÆ {ÉÖxÉ®äú´É iÉjÉ ®úɺxÉÉ·ÉMÉxvÉÉʨÉʹÉnùɯûEÖò¹`ö¨É *
{ÉhÉÔSÉiÉÖ¹EòÉMɯûEäò¶É®úÉÊhÉ ÊºÉxvÉÚilɨÉÉƺÉÒ®úVÉxÉÒuùªÉ\SÉ **154**
¶Éè±ÉäªÉEÆò SÉxnùxÉ{ÉÖ¹Eò®úÉÊhÉ B±Éɻɪɹ]õÒiÉMÉ®úɤnù{ÉjɨÉ *
¦ÉÞRÂóMÉɹ]õ´ÉMÉÉǨ¤ÉÖ´ÉSÉÉ{ɱÉɶÉÆ ºlÉÉèhÉäªÉ´ÉÞ¶SÉÒ®úEòSÉÉä®úEòÉJªÉ¨É **155**
BiÉè: ºÉ¨ÉºiÉèÌuù{ɱÉ|ɨÉÉhÉè®úɱÉÉäb÷¬ ºÉ´ÉÈ Ê´ÉÊvÉxÉÉ Ê´É{ÉC´É¨É *
Eò{ÉÚÇ®úEòɶ¨ÉÒ®ú¨ÉÞMÉÉhb÷VÉÉxÉÉÆ SÉÚhÉÔEÞòiÉÉxÉÉÆ ÊjÉ{ɱÉ|ɨÉÉhɨÉ **156**
|ɺ´ÉänùnùÉèMÉÇxvªÉÊxÉ´ÉÉ®úhÉÉªÉ nùtÉiÉ ºÉÖMÉxvÉÉªÉ ´ÉnùÎxiÉ EäòÊSÉiÉÂ*
xÉÉ®úɪÉhÉÆ xÉÉ¨É ¨É½þSSÉ iÉè±ÉÆ ºÉ´ÉÇ|ÉEòÉ®èúÌ´ÉÊvÉ´Éi|ɪÉÉäVªÉ¨É **157**
+É·Éä´É {ÉÖƺÉÉÆ {É´ÉxÉÉÌnùiÉÉxÉɨÉäEòÉRÂóMɽþÒxÉÉÌnùiÉ´Éä{ÉxÉÉxÉɨÉÂ*
ªÉä {ÉRÂóMÉ´É: {ÉÒ`öʴɺÉÌ{ÉhɶSÉ ¤ÉÉÊvɪÉǶÉÖGòIɪÉ{ÉÒÊb÷iÉɶSÉ**158**
¨ÉxªÉɽþxÉÖºiɨ¦ÉʶɮúÉä¯ûVÉÉiÉÉÇ ¨ÉÖHòɨɪÉɺiÉä ¤É±É´ÉhÉǪÉÖHòÉ:*
ºÉƺÉä´ªÉ iÉè±ÉÆ ºÉ½þºÉÉ ¦É´ÉÎxiÉ ´ÉxvªÉÉ SÉ xÉÉ®úÒ ±É¦ÉiÉä SÉ {ÉÖjɨÉÂ**159**
´ÉÒ®úÉä{ɨÉÆ ºÉ´ÉÇMÉÖhÉÉä{É{ÉzÉÆ ºÉÖ¨ÉävɺÉÆ ¸ÉÒÊ´ÉxɪÉÉÎx´ÉiÉ\SÉ*
¶ÉÉJÉÉʸÉiÉä EòÉä¹`öMÉiÉä SÉ ´ÉÉiÉä ´ÉÞrùÉè Ê´ÉvÉäªÉÆ {É´ÉxÉÉÌnùiÉÉxÉɨÉÂ**160**
ÊVɼ´ÉÉÊxɱÉä nùxiÉMÉiÉä SÉ ¶ÉÚ±Éä =x¨ÉÉnùEòÉè¤VªÉV´É®úEò̹ÉiÉÉxÉɨÉÂ*
|ÉÉ{xÉÉäÊiÉ ±ÉI¨ÉÓ |ɨÉnùÉÊ|ɪÉi´ÉÆ ´É{ÉÖ:|ÉEò¹ÉÈ Ê´ÉVɪÉ\SÉ ÊxÉiªÉ¨ÉÂ**161**
iÉè±ÉÉä{ɺÉä´ÉÒ VÉ®úªÉÉʦɨÉÖHòÉä VÉÒ´ÉäÎSSÉ®úÉSSÉÉÊ{É ¦É´ÉänÂù ªÉÖ´Éä´É*
näù´ÉɺÉÖ®äú ªÉÖrù{É®äú ºÉ¨ÉÒIªÉ ºxÉɪ´ÉκlɦÉMxÉÉxɺÉÖ®èú: ºÉÖ®úÉƶSÉ*
xÉÉ®úɪÉhÉäxÉÉÊ{É ºÉÖ¤ÉÞƽþhÉÉlÉÈ º´ÉxÉɨÉiÉè±ÉÆ Ê´ÉʽþiÉ\SÉ iÉä¹ÉɨÉÂ**162**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, ´ÉÉiÉ´ªÉÉvªÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú; 151-162)

NËLPËMARËDI TAILA (xÉɱ{ÉɨɮÉÊnù iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:24)

(Sahasrayoga, Tailaprakara¸a, 26)
xÉɱ{ÉɨɮÆú ÊjÉ¡ò±ÉSÉxnùxɺÉä´ªÉEÖò¹`ö-
SÉÉä´Éβ³ý SÉÉä®ú¨ÉÊEò±ÉäÊzÉ´É Eò±Eò¨ÉÉÎCEò*
{Éè¨É\\ɳÂý {É{ÉÇ]õ®úºÉä {ÉÊ®ú{ÉC´É¨ÉähhÉ
iÉäÎCEò±É Eäò]ÖÆõ SÉÉäÊ®úÊSÉ®úRÂóRÖó ʴɺÉ{ÉÇEÖò¹`ö¨É **
(ºÉ½þ»ÉªÉÉäMÉ, iÉè±É|ÉEò®úhÉ; 26)

271
NÌLÌBHÎ×GËDI TAILA (xÉÒ±ÉÒ¦ÉÞRÂóMÉÉÊnù iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:26)
(Sahasrayoga; Tailaprakara¸a: 38)
xÉÒ±ÉÒ¦ÉÞRÂóMÉ®úºÉ¶ÉiÉGòiÉÖ±ÉiÉÉvÉÉjÉÒ¡ò±ÉÉxÉÉÆ ®úºÉä
IÉÒ®èú®úÉVÉEòxÉÉʱÉEäò®ú¨Éʽþ¹ÉÒvÉäxÉÚnÂù¦É´É躺ÉÉÊvÉiɨÉ *
iÉè±ÉÆ iÉi{ɪɺÉè´É Ê{ɹ]õ±ÉÖʱÉiÉèªÉǹ]õ¬É¼´ÉMÉÖ\VÉÉ\VÉxÉè:
Eäò¶ÉÉxÉ ºÉ\VÉxɪÉäkɱÉä%Ê{É Eò®úªÉÉä®úɺiÉɨÉEäò¶ÉÆ Ê¶É®ú:**
(ºÉ½þ»ÉªÉÉäMÉ, iÉè±É|ÉEò®úhÉ; 38)

PRABHAØJANA VIMARDANA TAILA(|ɦÉ\VÉxÉʴɨÉnÇùxÉ iÉè±É)

(AFI, Part-I; 8:30)
(Sahasrayoga, Tailaprakara¸a : 5)
¤É±ÉɶÉiÉÉ´É®úÒʶÉOÉִɯûhÉÉEÇòEò®ú\VÉEòÉ: *
B®úhbÆ÷ SÉÉÊ{É EòÉä®úh]õÉä ´ÉÉÊVÉMÉxvÉÉ |ɺÉÉÊ®úhÉÒ **
{É\SɨÉÚ±ÉÆ ´ÉÊ®ú¹`Æö SÉ iÉ躺ɴÉê: C´ÉÊlÉiÉä VɱÉä *
{ÉÉnùɴɶÉäʹÉiÉä nùtÉkÉè±ÉºªÉÉrùÉÇføEÆò ʦɹÉEÂò **
IÉÒ®Æú iÉÊuùMÉÖhÉÆ nùtÉkÉiºÉ¨Éä nùÊvÉEòÉÎ\VÉEäò *
iÉMÉ®úɨɮúEòɹ`èö±ÉɶÉÖh`öҺɹÉÇ{ÉSÉÉä®úEòÉ: **
¶ÉiÉɼ´ÉÉEÖò¹`öʺÉxvÉÚilÉ®úɺxÉÉEòɱÉÉxÉÖºÉÉÊ®úEòÉ: *
´ÉSÉÉ ºÉÊSÉjÉEÆò ¨ÉÉƺÉÒ ºÉ®ú±ÉÆ Eò]Öõ®úÉäʽþhÉÒ **
|ÉiªÉäEÆò EòÉ̹ÉEòÉäx¨ÉÉxÉÆ |ÉiÉÒ´ÉÉ{ÉÉªÉ ªÉÉäVɪÉäiÉÂ*
ºÉ´Éê®äúʦɺiÉÖ ¨ÉÞuùÎMxÉʺÉrÆù ÊiɱÉVɨÉÉnù®úÉiÉ **
{ÉÉxÉɦªÉ\VÉxÉxɺªÉä¹ÉÖ Ê´ÉvÉäªÉÆ ´ÉκiÉEò¨ÉÇÊhÉ*
+¶ÉÒËiÉ ´ÉÉiÉVÉÉxÉ ®úÉäMÉÉx½þxªÉÉnùɶÉÖ ºÉÖnùɯûhÉÉxÉÂ**
´ÉÉiÉMÉÖ±¨ÉÉÌnùiÉÆ ´ÉÞÊrù¨ÉÉxjÉVÉÆ ´ÉÉiÉÊ´ÉpùÊvɨÉÂ*
¨ÉÚføMɦÉÈ iÉlÉÉ ¶ÉÚ±ÉÉÎx´ÉÊ´ÉvÉÉƶSÉ Ê´ÉxÉɶɪÉäiÉÂ*
BiÉkÉè±ÉÆ ¨É½þÉ´ÉÒªÉǨÉÉjÉäªÉ|ɨÉÖJÉè: {ÉÖ®úÉ*
ÊxĘ́ÉiÉÆ xÉɨÉiɶSÉÉÊ{É |ɦÉ\VÉxÉʴɨÉnÇùxɨÉÂ**
(ºÉ½þ»ÉªÉÉäMÉ, iÉè±É|ÉEò®úhÉ; 5)

272
PRASËRIÛÌ TAILA (|ɺÉÉÊ®úhÉÒ iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:32)
(á¡r´gadharasaÆhit¡, Madhyamakha¸·a, Adhy¡ya 9: 119-123 1/2.)
|ɺÉÉ®úhÉÒ{ɱɶÉiÉÆ VɱÉpùÉähÉäxÉ {ÉÉSɪÉäiÉÂ*
{ÉÉnùʶɹ]õ: ¶ÉÞiÉÉä OÉÉÁºiÉè±ÉÆ nùÊvÉ SÉ iÉiºÉ¨É¨É **119**
EòÉÎ\VÉEÆò SÉ ºÉ¨ÉÆ iÉè±ÉÉiÉ IÉÒ®Æú iÉè±ÉÉSSÉiÉÖMÉÖÇhɨÉÂ*
iÉè±ÉÉiÉ iÉlÉɹ]õ¨ÉÉƶÉäxÉ ºÉ´ÉÇEò±EòÉÊxÉ ªÉÉäVɪÉäiÉ **120**
¨ÉvÉÖEÆò Ê{É{{ɱÉÒ¨ÉÚ±ÉÆ ÊSÉjÉEò: ºÉèxvÉ´ÉÆ ´ÉSÉÉ*
|ɺÉÉÊ®úhÉÒ näù´Énùɯû ®úɺxÉÉ SÉ MÉVÉÊ{É{{ɱÉÒ **121**
¦É±±ÉÉiÉ: ¶ÉiÉ{ÉÖ¹{ÉÉ SÉ ¨ÉÉƺÉÒ SÉèʦÉÌ´É{ÉÉSɪÉäiÉÂ*
BiÉiÉ iÉè±É´É®Æú {ÉC´ÉÆ ´ÉÉiɶ±É乨ÉɨɪÉÉ\VɪÉäiÉÂ**122**
EòÉè¤VªÉÆ {ÉRÂóMÉÖi´ÉJÉ\VÉi´Éä MÉÞwɺÉÒ¨ÉÌnùiÉÆ iÉlÉÉ*
½þxÉÖ{ÉÞ¹`öʶɮúÉäOÉÒ´ÉÉEòÊ]õºiɨ¦ÉÉxÉ ʴÉxÉɶɪÉäiÉÂ**123**
+xªÉÉƶSÉ Ê´É¹É¨ÉÉxÉ ´ÉÉiÉÉxÉ ºÉ´ÉÉÇxÉɶÉÖ ´ªÉ{ÉÉä½þÊiÉ*
(¶ÉÉRÂóMÉÇvÉ®úºÉÆʽþiÉÉ, ¨ÉvªÉ¨ÉJÉhb÷, +vªÉÉªÉ 9; 119-123 1/2)

TUVARAKA TAILA (iÉÖ´É®úEò iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:20)

(Su¿rutasaÆhit¡, Cikits¡sth¡na, Adhy¡ya 13: 20-23, 29)
´ÉÞIÉɺiÉÖ´É®úEòÉ ªÉä ºªÉÖ: {ÉζSɨÉÉhÉǴɦÉÚʨɹÉÖ **20**
´ÉÒSÉÒiÉ®RÂóúMÉÊ´ÉIÉä{ɨÉɯûiÉÉärÚùiÉ{ɱ±É´ÉÉ: *
iÉä¹ÉÉÆ ¡ò±ÉÉÊxÉ MÉÞ¼hÉÒªÉÉiÉ ºÉÖ{ÉC´ÉÉxªÉ¨¤ÉÖnùÉMɨÉä **21**
¨ÉVVÉÉÆ iÉ䦪ÉÉä%Ê{É ºÉƾiªÉ ¶ÉÉä¹ÉʪÉi´ÉÉ Ê´ÉSÉÚhªÉÇ SÉ *
ÊiɱɴÉiÉ {ÉÒb÷ªÉänÂù pùÉähªÉÉÆ »ÉɴɪÉäuùÉ EÖòºÉÖ¨¦É´ÉiÉ **22**
iÉkÉè±ÉÆ ºÉƾiÉÆ ¦ÉÚªÉ: {ÉSÉänùÉiÉÉäªÉºÉÆIɪÉÉiÉ *
+´ÉiÉɪÉÇ Eò®úÒ¹Éä SÉ {ÉIɨÉÉjÉÆ ÊxÉvÉÉ{ɪÉäiÉ **23**
iÉnäù´É JÉÊnù®úC´ÉÉlÉä ÊjÉMÉÖhÉä ºÉÉvÉÖ ºÉÉÊvÉiɨÉ **29**
(ºÉÖ¸ÉÖiɺÉÆʽþiÉÉ, ÊSÉÊEòiºÉɺlÉÉxÉ, +vªÉÉªÉ 13; 20-23,29)

273
YAâÙIMADHUKA TAILA (ªÉ¹]õÒ¨ÉvÉÖEò iÉè±É) (AFI, Part-I; 8:47)
(á¡r´gadharasaÆhit¡, Madhyamakha¸·a, Adhy¡ya 9: 155 1/2)
ªÉ¹]õÒ¨ÉvÉÖEòIÉÒ®úɦªÉÉÆ xÉ´ÉvÉÉjÉÒ¡ò±Éè: ¶ÉÞiɨÉ **155**
iÉè±ÉÆ xɺªÉEÞòiÉÆ EÖòªÉÉÇiÉ Eäò¶ÉÉ\¶¨É¸ÉÚÊhÉ ºÉRÂóPɶÉ:*
(¶ÉÉRÂóMÉÇvÉ®úºÉÆʽþiÉÉ, ¨ÉvªÉ¨ÉJÉhb÷, +vªÉÉªÉ 9; 155 1/2)

ARKA VAÙÌ (+EÇ ´É]Ò) (AFI, Part-II; 10:2)

(SiddhabheÀajama¸iÆ¡l¡; Agnim¡ndy¡dicikits¡; 254)
ºÉÉè´ÉSÉDZÉÆ ºÉÉnù®ú¨ÉEÇò{ÉÖ¹{ÉÆ ¨ÉÊ®úSɨÉäEòjÉ ºÉ¨ÉÆ Ê´É¨ÉtÇ*
MÉÖ\VÉÉ|ɨÉÉhÉÉ MÉÖÊ]õEòÉ Ê´ÉvÉäªÉÉ: Eò¹ÉÇÎxiÉ EòɶªÉÈ Gò¨É¶É: EÞò¶ÉÉxÉÉä:** 254**

CITRAKËDI GUÙIKË (ÊSÉjÉEòÉÊnù MÉÖÊ]õEòÉ) (AFI, Part-I; 12:11)

(CarakasaÆhit¡, Cikits¡sth¡na, Adhy¡ya 15: 96-97)
ÊSÉjÉEÆò Ê{É{{ɱÉÒ¨ÉÚ±ÉÆ uùÉè IÉÉ®úÉè ±É´ÉhÉÉÊxÉ SÉ *
´ªÉÉä¹ÉÆ Ê½þRÂóM´ÉVɨÉÉänùÉÆ SÉ SÉ´ªÉÆ SÉèEòjÉ SÉÚhÉǪÉäiÉ **96**
MÉÖÊ]õEòÉ ¨ÉÉiÉÖ±ÉÖRÂóMɺªÉ nùÉÊb÷¨ÉºªÉ ®úºÉäxÉ ´ÉÉ*
EÞòiÉÉ Ê´É{ÉÉSɪÉiªÉɨÉÆ nùÒ{ɪÉiªÉɶÉÖ SÉÉxɱɨÉÂ**97**
(SÉ®úEòºÉÆʽþiÉÉ, ÊSÉÊEòiºÉɺlÉÉxÉ, +vªÉÉªÉ 15; 96-97)

ELËDI GUÙIKË (B±ÉÉÊnù MÉÖÊ]õEòÉ) (AFI, Part-I; 12:3)

(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, Raktapitt¡dhik¡ra: 32-35)
B±ÉÉ{ÉjÉi´ÉSÉÉä%rùÉÇIÉÉ: Ê{É{{ɱªÉrÇù{ɱÉÆ iÉlÉÉ *
ʺÉiÉɨÉvÉÖEòJÉVÉÚÇ®ú¨ÉÞuùÒEòɶSÉ {ɱÉÉäÎx¨ÉiÉÉ: **32**
ºÉ\SÉÚhªÉÇ ¨ÉvÉÖxÉÉ ªÉÖHòÉ MÉÖÊ]õEòÉ: EòÉ®úªÉäÎnÂù¦É¹ÉEÂò *
iÉÉä±ÉEòÉrùÉÈ iÉiɶSÉèEòÉÆ ¦ÉIɪÉäzÉÉ ÊnùxÉä ÊnùxÉä **33**
·ÉɺÉÆ EòɺÉÆ V´É®Æú ʽþCEòÉÆ UôÍnù ¨ÉÚSUôÉÈ ¨ÉnÆù §É¨É¨ÉÂ*
®úHòÊxɹ`öÒ´ÉxÉÆ iÉÞ¹hÉÉÆ {ÉÉ·ÉǶÉڱɨɮúÉäSÉEò¨ÉÂ**34**

274
 ¶ÉÉä¹É{±ÉÒ½þÉfø¬´ÉÉiÉÉƶSÉ º´É®ú¦ÉänÆù IÉiÉIɪɨÉÂ*
MÉÖÊ]õEòÉ iÉ{ÉÇhÉÒ ´ÉÞ¹ªÉÉ ®úHòÊ{ÉkÉÆ Ê´ÉxÉɶɪÉäiÉÂ**35**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, ®úHòÊ{ÉkÉÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú; 32-35)

LAáUNËDI VAÙÌ (±É¶ÉÖxÉÉÊnù ´É]õÒ) (AFI, Part-I; 12:27)

(Vaidyaj¢vanam, KÀayarog¡dicikits¡: 13)
±É¶ÉÖxÉVÉÒ®úEòºÉèxvÉ´ÉMÉxvÉE ÊjÉEò]Öõ®úɨÉ`öSÉÚhÉÇʨÉnÆù ºÉ¨É¨É *
ºÉ{ÉÊnù Êxɨ¤ÉÖ®úºÉäxÉ Ê´É¹ÉÚÊSÉEòÉÆ ½þ®úÊiÉ ¦ÉÉä ú®ÊiɦÉÉäMÉÊ´ÉSÉIÉhÉä **13**
(´ÉètVÉÒ´ÉxɨÉÂ, IɪɮúÉäMÉÉÊnùÊSÉÊEòiºÉÉ; 13)

LAVA×GËDI VAÙÌ (±É´ÉRÂóMÉÉÊnù ´É]õÒ) (AFI, Part-I; 12:26)

(Vaidyaj¢vanam, K¡sa¿v¡sacikits¡: 7)
iÉÖ±ªÉÉ ±É´ÉRÂóMɨÉÊ®úSÉÉIÉ¡ò±Éi´ÉSÉ: ºªÉÖ:*
ºÉ´Éê: ºÉ¨ÉÉä ÊxÉMÉÊnùiÉ: JÉÊnù®úºªÉ ºÉÉ®ú: **
¤É¤¤ÉڱɴÉÞIÉVÉEò¹ÉɪɪÉÖiÉ\SÉ SÉÚhÉǨÉ *
EòɺÉÉÊzɽþÎxiÉ MÉÖÊ]õEòÉ PÉÊ]õEòÉ%¹]õEòÉxiÉä **7**
(´ÉètVÉÒ´ÉxɨÉÂ, EòɺɷÉɺÉÊSÉÊEòiºÉÉ, 7)

PLÌHËRI VAÙIKË ({±ÉÒ½þÉÊ®ú ´ÉÊ]õEòÉ) (AFI, Part-I; 12:17)

(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, Pl¢h¡yak¤drog¡dhik¡ra: 59)
ºÉ½þɺÉÉ®úɧÉEòɺÉҺɱɶÉÖxÉÉÊxÉ ºÉ¨ÉÉÊxÉ SÉ *
pùÉähÉ{ÉÖ¹{ÉÒ®úºÉäxÉè´É ¨ÉnÇùªÉäi|ɽþ®újɪɨÉ **59**
´É±±ÉuùªÉÆ |ÉnùÉiÉ´ªÉÆ |ÉnùÉä¹Éä ºÉʱɱÉÆ ÁxÉÖ*
{±ÉÒ½þÉxÉÆ ªÉEÞòiÉÆ MÉÖ±¨É¨ÉÎMxɨÉÉxtÆ ºÉ¶ÉÉälÉEò¨ÉÂ**60**
EòɺÉÆ ·ÉɺÉÆ iÉÞ¹ÉÉÆ Eò¨{ÉÆ nùɽÆþ ¶ÉÒiÉÆ ´É謃 §É¨É¨ÉÂ*
{±ÉÒ½þÉÊ®ú´ÉÊ]õEòÉ Áä¹ÉÉ xÉɶɪÉäzÉÉjÉ ºÉƶɪÉ:**61**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, {±ÉÒ½þªÉEÞòpùÉäMÉÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú; 59-61)

275
 PRABHËKARA VAÙÌ (|ɦÉÉEò®ú ´É]õÒ) (AFI, Part-I; 12:15)
(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, H¤drog¡dhik¡ra : 67)
¨ÉÉÊIÉEÆò ±ÉÉä½þ¨É§É\SÉ iÉÖMÉÉIÉÒ®úÒ Ê¶É±ÉÉVÉiÉÖ *
ÊIÉ{i´ÉÉ Jɱ±ÉÉänù®äú {ɶSÉÉnÂù ¦ÉɴɪÉäiÉ {ÉÉlÉÇ´ÉÉÊ®úhÉÉ **66**
MÉÖ\VÉÉuùªÉʨÉiÉÉÆ EÖòªÉÉÇnÂù ´É]õÓ UôɪÉÉʴɶÉÉäʹÉiÉɨÉÂ*
|ɦÉÉEò®ú´É]õÒ ºÉäªÉÆ ¾þpùÉäMÉÉxÉ ÊxÉÊJɱÉÉxÉ VɪÉäiÉÂ**67**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, ¾þpùÉäMÉÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú; 66-67)

RAJAéPRAVARTINÌ VAÙÌ(®úVÉ:|É´ÉÎiÉÇxÉÒ ´É]õÒ)(AFI, Part-I; 12:25)

(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, (Str¢rog¡dhik¡ra) : 233-235)
EòxªÉɺÉÉ®Æú SÉ EòɺÉÒºÉÆ ®úɨÉ`Æö ]õRÂóEòhÉÆ iÉlÉÉ *
ºÉ¨ÉÉnùÉªÉ ºÉ¨ÉÆ ºÉ´ÉÈ {Éä¹ÉªÉäiEòxªÉEòÉpù´Éè: **233**
ÊxɨÉÉÇ{ɪÉäÎnÂù¦É¹ÉM´ÉªÉÉæ ®úÊHòuùªÉʨÉiÉÉ ´É]õÒ:*
¶ÉÒʱÉiÉäªÉÆ iÉÖ ´ÉÊ]õEòÉ Ê´ÉÊxɽþÎxiÉ ºÉÖnùɯûhÉɨÉÂ**234**
®úVÉÉä®úÉävÉ´ªÉlÉÉÆ Eò¹]õ®úVÉ:»ÉÉ´É´ªÉlÉÉÆ iÉlÉÉ*
®úVÉ:|É´ÉÌkÉxÉÒ Áä¹ÉÉ xÉÒ±ÉEòh`äöxÉ ¦ÉÉʹÉiÉÉ**235**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, ºjÉÒ®úÉäMÉÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú; 233-235)

SAØJÌVANÌ VAÙÌ (ºÉ\VÉÒ´ÉxÉÒ ´É]õÒ) (AFI, Part-I; 12:35)

(áar´gadharasaÆhit¡, Madhyamakha¸·a. Adhy¡ya 7: 18-21)
Ê´Éb÷RÂóMÉÆ xÉÉMÉ®Æú EÞò¹hÉÉ {ÉlªÉɨɱÉʤɦÉÒiÉEò¨É **18**
´ÉSÉÉ MÉÖbÚ÷SÉÒ ¦É±±ÉÉiÉÆ ºÉʴɹÉÆ SÉÉjÉ ªÉÉäVɪÉäiÉ *
BiÉÉÊxÉ ºÉ¨É¦ÉÉMÉÉÊxÉ MÉÉä¨ÉÚjÉähÉè´É {Éä¹ÉªÉäiÉ **19**
MÉÖ\VÉɦÉÉ MÉÖÊ]õEòÉ EòɪÉÉÇ nùtÉnùÉpÇùEòVÉè ®úºÉè:*
BEòɨÉVÉÒhÉÇMÉÖ±¨Éä¹ÉÖ uäù ʴɹÉÚSªÉÉÆ |ÉnùÉ{ɪÉäiÉÂ**20**
ÊiɻɶSÉ ºÉ{ÉÇnù¹]äõ iÉÖ SÉiÉ»É: ºÉÉÊzÉ{ÉÉiÉEäò*
´É]õÒ ºÉ\VÉÒ´ÉxÉÒ xÉɨxÉÉ ºÉ\VÉҴɪÉÊiÉ ¨ÉÉxɴɨÉÂ**21**
(¶ÉÉRÂóMÉÇvÉ®úºÉÆʽþiÉÉ, ¨ÉvªÉ¨ÉJÉhb÷, +vªÉÉªÉ 7; 18-21)

276
 áA×KHA VAÙÌ (¶ÉRÂóJÉ ´É]õÒ) (AFI, Part-I; 12:32)
(BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, Agnim¡ndy¡dhik¡ra : 182-183)
ÊSÉ\SÉÉIÉÉ®ú{ɱÉÆ {É]ÖõµÉVÉ{ɱÉÆ Êxɨ¤ÉÚ®úºÉä EòαEòiɨÉ *
iÉκ¨ÉxÉ ¶ÉRÂóJÉ{ɱÉÆ |ÉiÉ{iɨɺÉEÞòiÉ ºÉƺlÉÉ{ªÉ ¶ÉÒhÉÉÇ´ÉÊvÉ **182**
ʽþRÂóMÉÖ´ªÉÉä¹É{ɱÉÆ ®úºÉɨÉÞiɴɱÉÒ ÊxÉÊIÉ{ªÉ ÊxɹEòÉÆʶÉEòÉ: *
¤ÉnÂùv´ÉÉ ¶ÉRÂóJÉ´É]õÒ IɪÉOɽþÊhÉEòɯûC{ÉÊHò¶ÉÚ±ÉÉÊnù¹ÉÖ**183**
(¦Éè¹ÉVªÉ®úixÉɴɱÉÒ, +ÎMxɨÉÉxtÉÊnù®úÉäMÉÉÊvÉEòÉ®ú; 182-183)

PUNARNAVËDI MAÛÚÍRA ({ÉÖxÉxÉÇ´ÉÉ ¨ÉhbÚ÷®) (AFI, Part-I; 19:1)

(CarakasaÆhit¡, Cikits¡sth¡na, Adhy¡ya 16: 93-95)
{ÉÖxÉxÉÇ´ÉÉ ÊjÉ´ÉÞnÂù ´ªÉÉä¹ÉÆ Ê´Éb÷RÂóMÉÆ nùɯû ÊSÉjÉEò¨É **93**
EÖò¹`Æö ½þÊ®úpäù ÊjÉ¡ò±ÉÉ nùxiÉÒ SÉ´ªÉÆ EòʱÉRÂóMÉEòÉ: *
Ê{É{{ɱÉÒ Ê{É{{ɱÉÒ¨ÉÚ±ÉÆ ¨ÉÖºiÉÆ SÉäÊiÉ {ɱÉÉäÎx¨ÉiɨÉ **94**
¨ÉhbÚ÷®Æú ÊuùMÉÖhÉÆ SÉÚhÉÉÇnÂù MÉÉä¨ÉÚjÉä nÂù´ªÉÉføEäò {ÉSÉäiÉ *
EòÉä±É´ÉnÂù MÉÖÊ]õEòÉ: EÞòi´ÉÉ iÉGäòhÉɱÉÉäb÷¬ xÉÉ Ê{ɤÉäiÉ **95**
iÉÉ: {ÉÉhbÖ÷®úÉäMÉÉxÉ {±ÉÒ½þÉxɨɶÉÉÈÊºÉ Ê´É¹É¨ÉV´É®ú¨ÉÂ*
·ÉªÉlÉÖÆ OɽþhÉÒnùÉä¹ÉÆ ½þxªÉÖ: EÖò¹`Æö ÊGò¨ÉÓºiÉlÉÉ**96**
(SÉ®úEòºÉÆʽþiÉÉ, ÊSÉÊEòiºÉɺlÉÉxÉ, +vªÉÉªÉ 16, 93-96)

277
 APPENDIX - 9

LIST OF SINGLE DRUGS USED IN FORMULATIONS

9.1 List of Single Drugs of Animal Origin mentioned in Formulation compositon with
equivalent English Names:

Official Name English Equivalent Ref. to A.P.I. Pt. I

(Vol. No.)
Aj¡dugdha Goat milk
Godadhi Curd from cow milk
Godugdha Cow milk
Gogh¤ta Clarified butter from cow milk Vol-VI
Gom£tra Cow urine
L¡kÀ¡ Secretion of Lac insect (Lacca laccifera)
Madhu Honey Vol-VI
Madh£cchiÀ¶a Bees wax
Mahiˢdugdha Buffalo milk
áa´kha bhasma Calcined Conch

278
9.2 List of Single Drugs of Mineral and Metal Origin mentioned in Formulation
composition with equivalent Scientific Names:

Official Name Scientific Equivalent Ref. to A.P.I. Pt. I

(Vol. No.)
Abhraka Bhasma
Audbhida Lava¸a
Gairika Red ochre Vol-VII
Gandhaka Sulphur Vol-VII
K¡¿¢¿a Green vitreol Vol-VII
Lauha Vol-VII
Ma¸·£ra Iron slag Vol-VII
Naras¡ra Sal ammoniac Vol-VII
P¡rada Mercury
Romaka Lava¸a
Saindhava Lava¸a Rock salt
Sauvarcala Lava¸a Black salt
Sauv¢r¡µjana Lead sulphide Vol-VII
S¡mudra Lava¸a Sea salt Vol-VII
Svarj¢kÀ¡ra Crude alkaline earth Vol-VII
Svar¸am¡kÀika Chalcopyrite Vol-VII
áil¡jatu
Ta´ka¸a Borax Vol-VII
Vi·a Lava¸a

279
9.3 List of Single Drugs of Plant origin, mentioned in Formulation composition with
Botanical Nomenclature:

Official Name Botanical name Ref. to A.P.I.

Pt. I (Vol. No.)
Agaru Aquilaria agallocha Roxb. Vol. IV
Agnimantha Clerodendrum phlomidis L.f. (= C. multiflorum (Burm.f.) Vol. III
O. Kuntze.)
Ajamod¡ Apium leptophyllum (Pers.) F.V.M. ex Benth. Vol. I
Ap¡m¡rga Achyranthes aspera L. Vol. II, III
Arimeda Acacia leucophloea Willd. Vol. II
Arjuna Terminalia arjuna (Roxb.) W. & A. Vol. II
Arka Calotropis procera (Ait.) R. Br. Vol. I, III
Asana Pterocarpus marsupium Roxb. Vol. I, III
A¿vagandh¡ Withania somnifera (L.) Dunal Vol. I
A¿vattha Ficus religiosa L. Vol. I
Atibal¡ Abutilon indicum (L.) Sweet Vol. I
Ëmalak¢ Emblica officinalis Gaertn. (= Phyllanthus emblica L.) Vol. I
Babb£la Acacia nilotica (L.) Willd. ex Del. ssp. indica (Benth.) Vol. I
Brenan (=A. arabica Willd.)
Bal¡ Sida cordifolia L.
Bh¤´gar¡ja Eclipta alba (L.) Hassk. Vol. II
Bhall¡taka Semecarpus anacardium L.f Vol. II
Bibh¢taka Terminalia belerica (Gaertn.) Roxb. Vol. I
Bilva Aegle marmelos (L.) Corr. Vol. I, III, IV
Br¡hm¢ Bacopa monnieri (L.) Wettst. Vol. II
B¤hat¢ Solanum indicum L. Vol. II
Cavya Piper chaba Hunter Vol. II
Ciµc¡ Tamarindus indica L. Vol. IV
Citraka Plumbago zeylanica L. Vol. I
Coraka Angelica glauca Edgew. Vol. V

280
Official Name Botanical name Ref. to A.P.I.
Pt. I (Vol. No.)
Coram Kaempferia galanga L.
Darbha Imperata cylindrica (L.) Beauv. Vol. V
D¡ruharidr¡ Berberis aristata DC. Vol. II, VI
Devad¡ru Cedrus deodara (Roxb. ex D. Don) G. Don Vol. IV
Dh¡nyaka Coriandrum sativum L. Vol. I
Dh¡tak¢ Woodfordia fruticosa (L.) Kurz Vol. I
Dr¡kÀ¡ Vitis vinifera L. Vol. III
Dro¸apuÀp¢ Leucas cephalotus (Roth) Spreng. Vol. II
Elav¡luka Prunus avium L.f. Vol. VI, V
Era¸·a Ricinus communis L. Vol. I, III
Gajapippal¢ Scindapsus officinalis (Roxb.) Schott. Vol. II
Gambh¡r¢ Gmelina arborea Roxb. Vol. I, II, III, IV
GokÀura Tribulus terrestris L. Vol. I, VI
Gu·£c¢ Tinospora cordifolia (Willd.) Miers. ex Hook.f. & Thoms. Vol. I
Guggulu Commiphora wightii (Arn.) Bhand. Vol. I
Gul¡ba Rosa damascena Mill.
Guµj¡ Abrus precatorius L. Vol. I, Vol. II
Har¢tak¢ Terminalia chebula (Gaertn.) Retz. Vol. I
Haridr¡ Curcuma longa L. Vol. I
Hi´gu Ferula foetida Regel. (= F. assa-foetida L.) Vol. I
Hr¢vera Coleus vettiveroides K.C. Jacob
IkÀu Saccharum officinarum L. Vol. IV
Ja¶¡maÆs¢ Nardostachys jatamansi (D. Don) DC. Vol. I
J¡t¢phal¡ Myristica fragrans Houtt. Vol. I
J¢vaka Malaxis acuminata D. Don Vol. V
J¢vant¢ Leptadenia reticulata (Retz.) W.& A. Vol. VI
JyotiÀmat¢ Celastrus paniculatus Willd. Vol. II

281
Official Name Botanical name Ref. to A.P.I.
Pt. I (Vol. No.)
Kamala Nelumbo nucifera Gaertn. Vol. II, III
Ka´kola Piper cubeba L. f. Vol. I
Ka¸¶ak¡r¢ Solanum surratense Burm.f. Vol. I
Karaµja Pongamia pinnata (L.) Merr. (= Derris indica (Lam.) Vol. I, II
Bennet)
Karav¢ra Nerium indicum Mill. Vol. I, Vol. III
Karp£ra Cinnamomum camphora (L.) Nees & Eberm. Vol. VI
Ka¶phala Myrica esculenta Buch.- Ham. ex D. Don Vol. III
Ka¶uk¡ Picrorhiza kurroa Royle ex Benth. Vol. II
K¡¿a Saccharum spontaneum L. Vol. III
K¡kam¡c¢ Solanum nigrum L. Vol. II
K¡katikt¡ Cardiospermum halicacabum L. Vol. V
K¡kol¢ Lilium polyphyllum D. Don Vol. III
Kejopu¶¢ Melaleuca leucadendron L.
Khadira Acacia catechu (L.f.) Willd. Vol. I
Kharj£ra Phoenix sylvestris Roxb. Vol. IV
K¤À¸a j¢raka Carum carvi L. Vol. I
KÀ¢rak¡kol¢ Fritillaria roylei Hook. Vol. V
Kulaµjana Alpinia galanga Willd. Vol. V
Kum¡r¢ Aloe barbadensis Mill. (= A. vera (L.) Burm.f.) Vol. I
Kunduru Boswellia serrata Roxb. ex Coleb. Vol. IV
Ku´kuma Crocus sativus L. Vol. IV
Ku¿a Desmostachya bipinnata Stapf Vol. III
Ku˦ha Saussurea lappa (Decne) Sch.-Bip. Vol. I
Lajj¡lu Mimosa pudica L. Vol. II
La¿una Allium sativum L. Vol. III
Lava´ga Syzygium aromaticum (L.) Merr. & Perr. Vol. I
L¡´gal¢ Gloriosa superba L. Vol. III

282
Official Name Botanical name Ref. to A.P.I.
Pt. I (Vol. No.)
Lodhra Symplocos racemosa Wall. ex DC. Vol. I
Madana Xeromphis spinosa (Thunb.) Keay Vol. I
Madhusnuh¢ Smilax china L. Vol. V
Madh£ka Madhuca indica J.F. Gmel. (= M. butyracea (Roxb.) Vol. II
Macbride)
Mah¡med¡/ Med¡ Polygonatum cirrhifolium (Wall.) Royle Vol. V
MaµjiÀ¶h¡ Rubia cordifolia L. Vol. III
Marica Piper nigrum L. Vol. III
M¡Àapar¸¢ Teramnus labialis Spreng. Vol. III
M¡tulu´ga Citrus aurantifolia (Christm.) Swingle
Meth¢ Trigonella foenum-graecum L. Vol. II
Mi¿rey¡ Foeniculum vulgare Mill. Vol. I
Mudga Phaseolus radiatus L. (= P. vulgaris L.) Vol. III
Mudgapar¸¢ Vigna trilobata (L.) Verde. Vol. IV
Mu¸·¢tik¡ Sphaeranthus indicus L. Vol. III, IV
Must¡ Cyperus rotundus L. Vol. III
N¡gake¿ara Mesua ferrea L. Vol. II
N¡rikela Cocos nucifera L. Vol. III
Nimba Azadirachta indica (L.) A. Juss. Vol. II, V
Nimbu Citrus limon (L.) Burm.f. Vol. IV
N¢l¢ Indigofera tinctoria L. Vol. II, III
Nyagrodhaja¶¡ Ficus bengalensis L. Vol. I, IV
Padmaka Prunus cerasoides D. Don Vol. III
Pal¡¿a Butea monosperma (Lam.) Taub. Vol. II, IV, V
Parpa¶a Fumaria parviflora Lam. (= F. vaillantii Loisel) Vol. IV
Patta´ga Caesalpinia sappan L. Vol. IV
P¡ribhadra Erythrina indica Lam. (= E. superba Roxb.) Vol. II

283
Official Name Botanical name Ref. to A.P.I.
Pt. I (Vol. No.)
P¡¶al¡ Stereospermum suaveolens (Roxb.) DC. (= S. chelonoides Vol. III
(L.f.) DC.)
P¡¶h¡ Cissampelos pareira L. Vol. I
Phalgu Ficus hispida L.f. Vol. III
Pippal¢ Piper longum L. Vol. IV
Pippal¢m£la Piper longum L. Vol. II
PlakÀa Ficus lacor Buch.-Ham. (= F. virens Ait.) Vol. II, IV
Po¶agala Typha elephantina Roxb. Vol. V
Pras¡ri¸¢ Paederia foetida L. (= P. scandens (Lour.) Merr.) Vol. II
Priya´gu Callicarpa marcophylla Vahl Vol. II, IV
P¤¿nipar¸¢ Uraria picta Desv. Vol. IV
Pud¢n¡ Mentha viridis L. (= M. spicata L.) Vol. V
PuÀkara Inula racemosa Hook. f. Vol. IV
Rakta Candana Pterocarpus santalinus L.f. Vol. III
Rakta Punarnav¡ Boerhaavia diffusa L. Vol. I, III
R¡sn¡ Pluchea lanceolata (DC.) Clarke Vol. III
Re¸uk¡ Vitex negundo L. – Seed Vol. V
RohiÀa Cymbopogon martinii (Roxb.) Wats. Vol. V
ÎÀabhaka Microstylis muscifera Ridley.
Îddhi / V¤ddhi Habenaria intermedia D. Don Vol. V
Sahacara Barleria prionitis L. Vol. III
Saptapar¸a Alstonia scholaris [Link]. Vol. I
Sarala Pinus roxburghii Sargent. Vol. III
SarÀapa Brassica campestris L. Vol. III
Snuh¢ Euphorbia neriifolia L. Vol. I
Sp¤kk¡ Anisomeles malabarica (L.) [Link]. ex Sims. Vol. VI
Sthau¸eya Taxus baccata L. (= T. officinale Weber ex Wigg.) Vol. III
S£kÀmail¡ Elettaria cardamomum (L.) Maton Vol. I

284
Official Name Botanical name Ref. to A.P.I.
Pt. I (Vol. No.)
áaileya Parmelia perlata (Huds.) Ach. Vol. III
áara Saccharum bengalense Retz. (= S. munja Roxb.) Vol. III
áat¡hv¡ Anethum sowa Roxb. ex Flem. (= A. graveolens L.) Vol. II
áat¡var¢ Asparagus racemosus Willd. Vol. IV
áa¶¢ Hedychium spicatum Ham. ex Smith Vol. I
á¡la Shorea robusta Gaertn. f. Vol. VI
á¡lapar¸¢ Desmodium gangeticum (L.) DC. Vol. III, VI
áigru Moringa oleifera Lam. Vol. II, IV
áu¸¶h¢ Zingiber officinale Rosc. Vol. I
áveta Candana Santalum album L. Vol. III
áveta J¢raka Cuminum cyminum L. Vol. I
áveta Punarnav¡ Boerhaavia verticillata Poir. Vol. V
áveta S¡riv¡ Hemidesmus indicus (L.) [Link]. Vol. I
áyon¡ka Oroxylum indicum (L.) Vent. Vol. III
Tagara Valeriana wallichii DC. (= V. jatamansi Jones) Vol. I
Tailaparna Taila Eucalyptus globulus Labill. Vol. VI
Tumburu Zanthoxylum armatum DC. Vol. IV
Tila Taila Sesamum indicum L. Vol. VI
Triv¤t Operculina turpethum (L.) Silva Manso Vol. III
(=Ipomoea turpethum R. Br.)
Tulas¢ Ocimum sanctum L. Vol. II, IV
TuruÀka Liquidambar orientalis Mill.
Tuvaraka Hydnocarpus pentandra (Buch.-Ham.) Oken Vol. VI
(=Hydnocarpus laurifolia (Dennst.) Sleum.)
Tvak Cinnamomum zeylanicum Blume (= C. verum J.S. Presl) Vol. I, VI
Tvakpatra Cinnamomum tamala (Buch.-Ham.) Nees & Eberm. Vol. I
Udumbara Ficus racemosa L. Vol. I
U¿¢ra Vetiveria zizanioides (L.) Nash Vol. III

285
Official Name Botanical name Ref. to A.P.I.
Pt. I (Vol. No.)
Utpala Nymphaea stellata Willd. Vol. III
Vac¡ Acorus calamus L. Vol. II
Vaƿalocana Bamboo manna
Vanya Ajamod¡ Trachyspermum roxburghianum (DC.) Wolff
Varu¸a Crataeva nurvala Buch.-Ham. Vol. I
Vatsan¡bha Aconitum chasmanthum Holmes ex Stapf Vol. II
V¡s¡ Adhatoda zeylanica Medik. Vol. IV
V¡r¡h¢ Dioscorea bulbifera L. Vol. IV
Vid¡r¢kanda Pueraria tuberosa (Roxb. ex Willd.) DC. Vol. V
Vy¡ghranakha Capparis sepiaria L. Vol. V
YaÀ¶¢ Glycyrrhiza glabra L. Vol. I
YavakÀ¡ra Hordeum vulgare L. – Water soluble ash of Pl. Part II Vol. II
Yav¡n¢ Trachyspermum ammi (L.) Sprague Vol. I
Yav¡saka Alhagi pseudalhagi (Bieb.) Desv. Vol. II

286
 APPENDIX-10

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1. V¡gbha¶a AÀ¶¡´gah¤daya, Ed. By L¡la Chanda Vaidya; Mot¢l¡la

Ban¡ras¢ D¡sa, V¡r¡¸as¢ 1963
2. Up¡dhy¡ya M¡dhava Ëyurveda Prak¡¿a, Ed. By Gular¡ja áarm¡ Mi¿ra
3. Govinda D¡sa BhaiÀajyaratn¡val¢, Red and Ed. Narendra N¡tha Mi¿ra,
Jayadeva Vidy¡la´k¡ra, Haridatta á¡str¢, L¡lachandaj¢
Vaidya, Mot¢l¡la Ban¡ras¢ D¡sa, V¡r¡¸as¢, SaÆvat 2019
4. Bh¡rata BhaiÀajya Ratn¡kara Ed. By Gopin¡tha Gupta,
áivar¡macandra Bha¶¶¡c¡rya, Uµjh¡ Pharmacy, 2nd edition,
1947, Part - III
5. Cakrap¡¸i Datta Cakradatta, Ed. Jagad¢¿vara Pras¡da, Chaukhamba SaÆsk¤ta
Series Office, V¡r¡¸as¢ 1961
6. Y¡davaj¢ Trikamaj¢ Ëc¡rya Ras¡m¤ta, Mot¢l¡la Ban¡ras¢ D¡sa, V¡r¡¸as¢ 1951
7. V¡gbha¶a Rasaratnasamuccaya, Ed. By Dharm¡nanda áarm¡, Mot¢l¡la
Ban¡ras¢ D¡sa, New Delhi 2nd Edition, 1962
8. Sad¡nanda áarm¡ Rasatara´gi¸¢, Ed. By Dharm¡nanda á¡str¢; Mot¢l¡la
Ban¡ras¢ D¡sa, V¡r¡¸as¢ SaÆvat 2016
9. Sahasrayoga
10. á¡r´gadhara Ëc¡rya á¡r´gadhara SaÆhit¡, Red. Ë·hamalla, Ed. By Para¿u R¡ma
á¡str¢, Nir¸aya S¡gara Press, Bombay 2nd Edition 1931
11. Su¿ruta Su¿ruta SaÆhit¡, Ed. By Atri Deva Vidy¡la´k¡ra, Mot¢l¡la
Ban¡ras¢ D¡sa, V¡r¡¸as¢ 3rd Edition 1960
12. IS : 460 (Part-I) – 1985 ‘Indian Standard’ Specification for Test Sieves, Part 1 Wire
Reaffirmed 1998 Cloth Test Sieves (Third Revision); Bureau of Indian
Standards, Sixth Reprint March, 2004.

287
 MONOGRAPHS PUBLISHED IN AYURVEDIC PHARMACOPOEIA OF INDIA
PART – II (FORMULATIONS); VOL. – I

Avaleha: 27. Dh¡try¡di Gh¤ta

1. AÀ¶¡´g¡valeha 28. J¡ty¡di Gh¤ta
2. Bhall¡tak¡di Modaka 29. Kaly¡¸aka Gh¤ta
3. Bilv¡di Leha 30. Paµcagavya Gh¤ta
4. Citraka Har¢tak¢ 31. Paµcatikta Gh¤ta
5. Cyavanapr¡¿a 32. Phala Gh¤ta
6. Kaly¡¸aka Leha 33. S¡rasvata Gh¤ta
7. K£Àm¡¸·aka Ras¡yana 34. Traika¸¶aka Gh¤ta
8. M¤dv¢k¡di Lehya 35. Triphal¡ Gh¤ta
9. P£ga Kha¸·a Guggulu:
10. S£ra¸¡valeha 36. Kai¿ora Guggulu
11. V¡s¡valeha Gutika:
12. Vy¡ghr¢ Har¢tak¢ 37. Maric¡di Gu¶ik¡
C£r¸a: KÀ¡ra / Lava¸a
13. Ëmalaky¡di C£r¸a 38. Ap¡m¡rga KÀ¡ra
14. Avipattikara C£r¸a 39. Arka Lava¸a
15. B¡lac¡turbhadrik¡ C£r¸a 40. Kaly¡¸aka KÀ¡ra
16. El¡di C£r¸a 41. M£laka KÀ¡ra
17. Hi´gvaÀ¶aka C£r¸a 42. Pal¡¿a KÀ¡ra
18. Nav¡yasa C£r¸a 43. Yava KÀ¡ra
19. Nimb¡di C£r¸a Taila:
20. Paµcasama C£r¸a 44. Bal¡gu·£cy¡di Taila
21. PuÀy¡nuga C£r¸a 45. Dh¡nvantara Taila
22. T¡l¢s¡dya C£r¸a 46. Gandharvahasta Taila
23. Vai¿v¡nara C£r¸a 47. Ko¶¶amcukk¡di Taila
Gh¤ta: 48. KÀ¢rabal¡ Taila
24. Br¡hm¢ Gh¤ta 49. Saindhav¡di Taila
25. Da¿am£la Gh¤ta Lepa:
26. Da¿am£laÀa¶palaka Gh¤ta 50. D¡rv¢ Malahara (Gel)

288
MONOGRAPHS PUBLISHED IN AYURVEDIC PHARMACOPOEIA OF INDIA
PART – II (FORMULATIONS); VOL. – II

Ësava and AriÀ¶a C£r¸a:

1. Abhay¡riÀ¶a 29. Bh¡skaralava¸a C£r¸a
2. Am¤t¡riÀ¶a 30. Gom£tra Har¢tak¢
3. Aravind¡sava 31. J¡t¢phal¡dya C£r¸a
4. A¿ok¡riÀ¶a 32. N¡rasiÆha C£r¸a
5. A¿vagandh¡dyariÀ¶a Gh¤ta:
6. Babb£l¡riÀ¶a 33. D¡·im¡di Gh¤ta
7. Bal¡riÀ¶a 34. Induk¡nta Gh¤ta
8. Da¿am£l¡riÀ¶a 35. Mah¡ Triphal¡dya Gh¤ta
9. Dr¡kÀ¡riÀ¶a 36. Tiktaka Gh¤ta
10. Dr¡kÀ¡sava Guggulu:
11. J¢rak¡dyariÀ¶a 37. GokÀur¡di Guggulu
12. Kanak¡sava 38. K¡µcan¡ra Guggulu
13. Khadir¡riÀ¶a 39. L¡kÀ¡ Guggulu
14. Kum¡ry¡sava (B) 40. Paµc¡m¤ta Loha Guggulu
15. Ku¶aj¡riÀ¶a 41. Paµcatikta Guggulu Gh¤ta
16. Loh¡sava 42. Punarnav¡ Guggulu
17. Mustak¡riÀ¶a 43. SaptaviÆ¿atika Guggulu
18. P¡rth¡dy¡riÀ¶a 44. SiÆhan¡da Guggulu
19. Pippaly¡dy¡sava 45. Trayoda¿¡´ga Guggulu
20. Punarnav¡dy¡riÀ¶a 46. Triphal¡ Guggulu
21. Punarnav¡sava 47. V¡t¡ri Guggulu
22. Roh¢tak¡riÀ¶a 48. VyoÀ¡di Guggulu
23. S¡riv¡dy¡sava 49. Yogar¡ja Guggulu
24. U¿¢r¡sava Taila:
Avaleha: 50. áamb£k¡dya Taila
Device:
25. Da¿am£la Har¢tak¢ 51. KÀ¡ras£tra
26. Dr¡kÀ¡valeha
27. El¡dya Modaka
28. Madhusnuh¢ Ras¡yana

289